county of san diego


[PDF]county of san diego - Rackcdn.com000417b6df56f4ae5bbf-f6bd2cfeac0f4625637eac684e9e6a05.r25.cf1.rackcdn.com/...

13 downloads 390 Views 8MB Size

CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING ORACLE PROJECT NO. 1012261 REQUEST FOR BID NO. 6149 BID OPENING DATE: 10/3/13

SPECIAL NOTICES Disabled Veterans Business Enterprise (DVBE): Attention is directed to pages 1-11 through 113 of the contract documents concerning DVBE participation. These pages contain specific requirements for either meeting an established participation requirement of 3% or a Good Faith Effort (GFE). As a general statement, GFE submittals must include required individual solicitations of DVBE firms and appropriate supporting documentation. Addenda and Interpretations: The Owner will not be responsible for any oral interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications, or other pre-bid documents. Every request for such interpretation shall be in writing and forwarded via email to [email protected] and PCO [email protected] and to be given consideration must be received at least ten (10) days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda to the specifications which, if issued, will be posted on the County BuyNet website at http://buynet.sdcounty.ca.gov. It is the responsibility of all prospective bidders to check the County BuyNet website for any updates to contract documents. All addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract Documents. Plan Holders List: All interested parties who would like to be placed on the plan holders list, please submit your information (company name, contact person, general or sub, address, phone and fax) in its entirety to [email protected] and PCO [email protected] on or before the due date for all RFIs. Plan holders list will be posted on BuyNet labeled “plan holders list” as a courtesy and is not a requirement of this solicitation. The County of San Diego makes no representation as to the accuracy or for the completeness of the plan holders list.

COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO DEPARTMENT OF GENERAL SERVICES 5560 OVERLAND AVENUE SAN DIEGO, CA 92123

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

i

TABLE OF CONTENTS FOR SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING ORACLE PROJECT NO. 1012261 REQUEST FOR BID NO. 6149 PART I. BIDDING INFORMATION ....................................................................................... 1-1 Notice to Contractors Inviting Bids ........................................................................................... 1-2 Information for Bidders ............................................................................................................. 1-7 General Information Regarding Compliance with Disabled Veterans Business Enterprise (DVBE) Program……………………………………………………………1-10 PART II. DOCUMENTS TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER .................................................... 2-1 Proposal to the Board .............................................................................................................. 2-2 Bid Schedule ............................................................................................................................ 2-3 Bid Comparison and Award ....................................................................................................... 2-4 Prohibited Contracts ................................................................................................................ 2-4 Drug and Alcohol Policy ........................................................................................................... 2-5 Debarment and Suspension ...................................................................................................... 2-5 Noncollusion Affidavit .............................................................................................................. 2-6 Representations and Certifications ............................................................................................ 2-7 Designation of Subcontractors ................................................................................................. 2-8 Signature Page ...................................................................................................................... 2-10 Bidder's Bond ......................................................................................................................... 2-11 Bidder DVBE Information…………………………………………………………………………….2-12 PART IIA. DOCUMENTS TO BE EXECUTED BY ALL BIDDERS WHO FAIL TO MEET A DVBE GOAL FOR PUBLIC WORK PROJECTS ESTIMATED (BY THE COUNTY) TO BE BETWEEN $500,000 AND $1 MILLION (SHALL BE SUBMITTED BY E-MAIL TO THE PROCUREMENT CONTRACTING OFFICER LISTED AS CONTACT FOR THIS RFB WITHIN TWO (2) BUSINESS DAYS OF THE BID OPENING.)………………………………………………………………………2-13 Documentation of Good Faith Effort – Cover Sheet………………………………………………..2-14 Documentation of Good Faith Effort………………………………………………………………….2-15 PART III. DOCUMENTS TO BE EXECUTED BY THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER .................. 3-1 Contract ................................................................................................................................... 3-2 Corporate Certificate ................................................................................................................ 3-5 Partnership Certificate ............................................................................................................. 3-6 Contractor's Certificate Regarding Worker's Compensation .................................................... 3-7 Performance Bond ................................................................................................................... 3-8 Payment Bond ......................................................................................................................... 3-9 PART IV.

GENERAL CONDITIONS 4-1 Table of Contents……………………………………………………………………...4-2

PART V.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PART VI.

INTENTIONALLY OMITTED

PART VII.

INTENTIONALLY OMITTED

PART VIII.

PROJECT PLANS…………………………………………………………………….8-1

5-1

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

iii

PART I BIDDING INFORMATION

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

1-1

PART 1

NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS INVITING BIDS The County of San Diego, Owner, invites sealed bids for: SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING PROJECT NO. 1012261 RFB NO. 6149 Submit to the County of San Diego, Department of Purchasing and Contracting, Front Desk (where it will be time stamped to indicate time of receipt), 5560 Overland Ave., Suite 270, San Diego, California 921231294 in a sealed envelope or package clearly marked on the exterior with “RFB 6149” and the name and address of the offeror prior to 2:00 PM, Local Time on October 3, 2013. Parking is limited, so be sure to deliver your bids early. Late submission cannot be considered unless there was mishandling on the part of the County of San Diego purchasing staff. Submittals must be received at the Purchasing and Contracting front counter by the identified date and time. If utilizing a courier service or USPS, be advised that all courier service deliveries, including USPS, may be delivered to the County’s central mail room which may result in late submission and rejection of your bid. The Contractor shall possess, at the time of submitting the bid, a California contractor's License, Classification A, General Engineering Contractor or Classification B General Building Contractor. In accordance with Board of Supervisors Policy "B-39a", a Disabled Veterans Business Enterprise (DVBE) the following participation is required: 1. For a public work project that is estimated (by the County) to exceed $1 million requires a minimum DVBE participation of three percent (3%). A good faith effort cannot be accepted in lieu of meeting the 3% requirement. Should the lowest prime contractor not meet the 3% percent requirement, the next lowest responsible and responsive bidder that complies with the DVBE 3% requirement will be awarded the contract. Contractors are required to submit their DVBE participation even if they cannot meet the required DVBE participation of three percent (3%). 2. For a public work project that is estimated (by the County) to be between $500,000 and $1 Million, all bidders are required to make a good faith effort to meet-or-exceed a three percent (3%) DVBE subcontractor participation. The Good Faith Effort shall be documented demonstrating all participation was obtained prior to bid submittal. Contractors are required to submit their Good Faith Effort (GFE) even if they cannot meet the required DVBE participation of three percent (3%). 3. For a public work project that is estimated (by the County) to be less than $500,000, DVBE participation is encouraged, but not required. DVBE participation may be documented on page 212, but is not required at this estimate level. The County’s estimate for this public work project is from $450,000 to $560,000. For clarification purposes, all bidders are required to meet-or-exceed a three percent (3%) DVBE subcontractor participation. Contract shall not exceed 186 working days in duration. Work to be done consists in general of: General Contractor, with either an “A” or “B” license, will complete the construction of a one story (approximately 40’ x 80’ = 3200 SF) pre-engineered metal building and associated site work. All work shall be in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP. Work included but is not limited to site preparation, excavation, earthwork, landscaping, SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

1-2

PART 1

site drainage and stormwater, demolition, general construction, paving and concrete flat work, heating, air conditioning, plumbing, and electrical work. Submittal of construction timeline for Sheriff’s approval will also be required and contractors responsibility. All contractor personnel shall obtain required general service background and security clearance. This project is located in the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center campus at 444 Alta Road, San Diego, CA 92154. Referrence the Architect’s estimate summary of work in Part 5, Section 01 11 00- 1.1,.3. of the Division 1 General Requirements and Part 1 – Procedural Requirements, General Limitations, Section 01 25 00, 1.1 of the Division 1 General Requirements Work will be conducted on a detention complex. Security clearance and County Badging is mandatory for all contractors, workers and sub-contractors. Tools must be inventory at the beginning and end of all work days. Materials, tools and other supplies must be either secured or attended to at all time. Work conducted within the detention facility will likely require sheriff escort and must be coordinated with Project Management and Sheriff Staff. Contract Documents, including Plans, Specifications, and Bid Forms are available to be downloaded, free of charge, from the Department of Purchasing and Contracting Buy-Net website at http://buynet.sdcounty.ca.gov. Full-size plans for this project are not available for purchase. Civil, Structural and Electrical design are included, see section 5 of the bid documents. The following report is available for review at and may be downloaded from the County of San Diego BuyNet website at: http://buynet.sdcounty.ca.gov This report is provided for informational purposes only, and is not part of this Contract: PRELIMINARY GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION PROPOSED DEFENSIVE TACTICS TRAINING ROOM By: CONSTRUCTION TESTING & ENGINEERING, INC. JULY 12, 2013 Firms Associated with Project: The County of San Diego engaged the following Architect-Engineering firm with its subcontractors, or other firms to provide the Plans, Specifications, and Engineers Estimate (PS&E) and other related supporting technical documents or services for this construction procurement. The firms associated with this project are as follows: DOMUSSTUDIO ARCHITECTURE Wayne Holtan, AIA 2150 West Washington, Suite 303, San Diego, CA 92110 619-692-9393 Principal Architect Snipes-Dye Associates Louis Acuna, Jr., 8348 Center Drive, Ste. G La Mesa, CA 91942 619 697-9234 Civil Engineer SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

1-3

PART 1

The firms listed above have been associated with this project and are provided for informational purposes only. This list is not intended to be relied on for purposes of compliance with any conflict of interest rules or applicable laws or regulations affecting this project. The Contractor is solely responsible for due diligence in identifying and avoiding all potential conflicts of interest related to contracting for, and construction of, this project. Disabled Veterans Business Enterprise (DVBE) Participation: The Owner, as a matter of policy, encourages the participation of disabled veteran owned businesses. County DVBE policy requirements shall prevail over the State of California DVBE program requirements. Bid Security in the form of cash, or a certified or cashier's check, or a Bidder's Bond for at least ten percent of the bid amount executed by a corporation duly authorized to issue bonds in the State of California shall accompany the bid. Performance and Payment Bonds: The successful bidder will be required to furnish a Performance Bond for one hundred percent, and a Payment Bond for one hundred percent of the Contract amount. Wage Rates: This project is a "public work" in accordance with Labor Code § 1720, et seq. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all workers employed in the execution of the contract are paid the correct prevailing wage rate of wages. The Owner has obtained from the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations said Director's General Prevailing Wage Determinations for the locality in which the work is to be performed. Said determinations are on file and available for review at the Department of Purchasing and Contracting, 5560 Overland Avenue, Suite 270, San Diego, CA. 92123 and are available from the Department of Industrial Relations at http://www.dir.ca.gov/DLSR/PWD. Not less than these rates shall be paid to all workers employed on the project. Labor Code Compliance: Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Labor Code requiring the payment of prevailing wages on public works, commencing with Section 1720. In accordance with Labor Code, Section 1775, the Contractor shall forfeit an amount, as determined by the Labor Commissioner, for each worker paid less than the applicable prevailing wage rate for the work or craft in which that worker is employed for any work done under Contract by Contractor or by any Subcontractor. Contractor agrees to pay the difference between the prevailing wage rate and amount paid to each worker in accordance with Labor Code, Section 1775 (a)(2)(E). Pursuant to Labor Code, Section 1770, the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations has ascertained the general prevailing rate of per diem wages and a general prevailing rate for legal holiday and overtime work for each craft required for execution of the Contract. In accordance with Labor Code, Section 1773.2, copies of the prevailing rate of per diem wages are on file and can be viewed during normal business hours at County Department of Purchasing and Contracting, 5560 Overland Avenue, Suite 270, San Diego, CA, 92123-1294. Contractor shall post a copy of the applicable prevailing wage rates at the job site. Wage rates set forth are the minimum that may be paid by the Contractor. Nothing herein shall be construed as preventing the Contractor from paying more than the minimum rates set. No extra compensation whatsoever will be allowed by the County due to the inability of the Contractor to hire labor at minimum rates, nor for necessity for payment by the Contractor of subsistence, travel time, overtime, or other added compensations, all of which possibilities are elements to be considered and ascertained to the Contractor’s own satisfaction in preparing its Bid. SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

1-4

PART 1

If it becomes necessary to employ crafts other than those listed in the General Prevailing Wage Rate, the Contractor shall obtain a wage rate determination. The rates thus determined shall be applicable as minimum from the time of initial employment. Contractor shall be responsible for paying the applicable rate. The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall keep and make available accurate payroll record in accordance with Labor Code, Section 1776. The record shall contain the names, addresses, social security numbers, work classifications, straight time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and the actual per diem wages paid to each journeyman, apprentice, worker, or other employee employed by the Contractor and/or Subcontractor in connection with the Work. Payroll records shall be certified and shall be on forms provided by the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement, or shall contain the same information as those forms. A copy of all payrolls shall be submitted weekly to the Engineer in accordance with Section 7-1.101A(3), “Payroll Records” of the Standard Specifications. The Contractor’s and Subcontractor's certified payroll records shall be available for inspection at the principal office of the Contractor, or at the job site should the principal office be located outside of San Diego County. Apprentices: The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall comply with the requirements of Labor Code, Section 1777.5, and any related regulations regarding the employment of registered apprentices. Properly registered apprentices shall be employed in the execution of the Work at the ratios required, but in no case shall the ratio be less than one hour of apprentice work for every five hours of journeyman work. Every apprentice shall be paid the standard wage paid to apprentices under the regulations of the craft or trade at which the apprentice is employed, and shall be employed only at the work of the craft or trade to which the apprentice is registered. The Contractor shall be responsible for compliance to Labor Code, Section 1777.5 for all apprenticeable occupations. More information available at: http://www.dir.ca.gov/DAS/DASApprenticesonPublicWorksSummaryOfRequirements.htm Contractors Licensing Laws: Attention is directed to the Contractor’s License Law, Section 7000 and following of the Business and Professions Code concerning the licensing of contractors. Any bidder or contractor not properly licensed may be subject to the penalties provided and will not be considered for award of this Contract. Contractors are required by law to be licensed and are regulated by the Contractors State License Board. Any questions concerning a contractor may be referred to the Registrar, Contractors State License Board, 9821 Business Park Drive, Sacramento, CA, 95827. Contractors are required to be properly licensed in California on the date bids are submitted (Bus. & Prof. Code, § 7028.15), unless federal funds are involved. If federal funds are involved, the bidder shall be properly licensed in California at the time the contract is awarded (Pub. Contract Code, § 20103.5). In this case, failure of the bidder to obtain proper and adequate licensing for an award of this Contract shall constitute a failure to execute the Contract and shall result in the forfeiture of the security of the bidder. Electrician Certification and Labor Compliance: It is the sole responsibility of the contractor, if applicable, to ensure compliance with CA Labor Code 3099-3099.5 regarding electrician certification requirements. All General Electricians and Fire/Life Safety Technicians in the employ of C-10 contractors must be certified in order to perform electrical work in CA. Information on the electrician certification program may be obtained at the Division of Apprenticeship Standards (DAS) at: http://www.dir.ca.gov/DAS/ElectricalTrade.htm. Each Bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the bidder, bidder's address, the name of the project for which the bid is submitted, and the appropriate State Contractor's License designation held by the bidder. If forwarded by mail, the sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in another envelope addressed to: SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

1-5

PART 1

County of San Diego, Department of Purchasing and Contracting RFB 6149 – SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING ORACLE PROJECT NO. 1012261 5560 Overland Ave., Suite 270 San Diego, CA 92123 It is the responsibility of the bidder to ensure the bid is submitted in proper time. Any bid received at the office designated in the solicitation after the exact time specified for receipt will not be considered and will be returned to the bidder unopened. The Board reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any informality or irregularity in the bids or bidding. Withdrawal of bids shall not be permitted for a period of seventy-five (75) days after the date set for the opening thereof. Monies withheld by the Owner to ensure performance under the Contract may be released in accordance with Public Contract Code Section 22300 and these Contract Documents.

Preliminary Notices and Stop Notices: Preliminary (Public Work) Notices and Stop Notices shall be filed, if applicable, in accordance with California Civil Code Sections 3098, 3111, 3158, 3181, 3183, 3184, 3241 and 3252. For the Department of General Services construction contracts notices shall be delivered to: County of San Diego Department of General Services Facilities Management Division Attn: Oscar Salas, Project Manager 5560 Overland Avenue, Suite 410 San Diego, CA 92123 Air Pollution Compliance: The Contractor shall be in compliance with all federal, state, and local laws and regulations applicable to the Contractor.

JOHN M. PELLEGRINO, Director Department of Purchasing and Contracting

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

1-6

PART 1

INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS The prospective bidder shall prepare the Bid and Bond as provided therein, and failure to do so may be cause for rejection. PREPARATION OF BID FORMS Preparation: The Owner invites Bids, on the forms posted on the Department of Purchasing and Contracting's BuyNet website under "Documents to be Executed by Bidder,” to be submitted on or before the time and place set for the opening of bids in the published "Notice to Contractors Inviting Bids.” Bids not presented on forms so furnished will be disregarded. All downloaded and printed forms must be consistent and conform to the P&C official posted documents. These Contract Documents on the Department of Purchasing and Contracting BuyNet website contain the Bid forms (Part II), together with the Notice to Contractors, Contract and Special Provisions. Part II of these Contract Documents shall be returned in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the bidder, bidder’s address, the name of the project for which the bid is submitted, and the appropriate State Contractor’s License designation held by the bidder. The Bid must be executed in accordance with the instructions contained on the forms provided. If the bidder is an individual or a partner, the signature on the Bid and the Bidder's Bond must be the same as the name of the bidder shown on other parts of these forms, (showing the name as "J. E. Doe" and the signature as "John E. Doe" may be considered as an irregularity). Modifications on the Submitted Bid: Modifications, changes or additions to the Bid may be considered an irregularity. Erasures or corrections in preparing the bids must be initialed by the person(s) signing the Bid. Alternate Bids will not be considered unless called for. Competency of Bidders: No award will be made to a Contractor who, in accordance with Chapter 9, Division 3, Business and Professions Code, is not properly licensed to do the described work and who has not purchased Contract Documents as specified in the "Notice to Contractors Inviting Bids.” Prospective bidders may be required to file with the Owner answers to questions contained in a questionnaire and a financial statement including a complete statement of their financial ability and experience in performing previous public works of a similar nature. DOCUMENTS SUPPLEMENTING THE BID Bid Security: Each bid shall be accompanied by cash, a certified or cashier's check, or a bidder's bond executed by a corporation duly authorized to issue bonds in the State of California. Cash, check or bond shall be in the amount of not less than ten (10) percent of the maximum amount of the bid. Check or bond shall be made payable to the order of the Owner designated in the Notice to Contractors Inviting Bids. Said cash, check or bond shall be given as a guarantee that the bidder will, within the period specified after being requested to do so by the Owner, enter into a contract and provide the required bonds if awarded the work; if the bidder to whom the work has been awarded and to whom the request has been made refuses or fails to enter into said contract and provide the required bonds within the specified time, the cash or check shall be forfeited to the Owner or the principal and surety on the bond shall be liable to the Owner for the principal amount thereof in accordance with its terms. If the lowest responsible bid is not accepted by the Owner within the period specified following the date set for the opening of bids, or for such further period of time as may be agreed upon in writing between the Owner and the bidder concerned, or if the bidder to whom the contract is awarded executes and delivers to the Owner the required Contract Documents, the amount of the cash or certified or cashier's SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

1-7

PART 1

check will be returned to the bidder. Attention is directed to the requirement noted on the contract bonds that the Attorney-in-Fact shall attach a certified copy of the Power of Attorney. Designation of Subcontractor: The Business Name, Address, and the Portion of Work that will be done by each subcontractor are required at the time of bid submittal. The remainder of the information shall be submitted by all bidders within two business days of bid opening by e-mail to the Procurement Contracting Officer listed as contact for this RFB. If no subcontractors are to be designated, enter the word “NONE.” ADDENDA AND INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT Addenda and Interpretations: The Owner will not be responsible for any oral interpretation of the meaning of the plans, specifications, or other pre-bid documents. Every request for such interpretation shall be in writing and forwarded via email to [email protected] and [email protected] and to be given consideration must be received at least ten (10) days prior to the date fixed for the opening of bids. Any and all such interpretations and any supplemental instructions will be in the form of written addenda to the specifications which, if issued, will be posted on the County Buynet website at: http://buynet.sdcounty.ca.gov. It is the responsibility of all prospective bidders to check the County Buynet website for any updates to contract documents. All addenda so issued shall become part of the Contract Documents. Interpretation of Estimated Quantities: An estimate of quantities of work to be done and materials to be furnished under these specifications is given in the Bid, Special Provisions, or shown on the construction plans. It is given only as a basis for comparison of Bids and the award of the contract. The Owner does not expressly or by implication guarantee that the actual quantities involved will correspond exactly therewith. Payment to the Contractor will be made only for the actual quantities of work performed or materials furnished in accordance with the plans and specifications. Rejection of Bids: The Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids and the right to waive technicalities if such waiver is in its best interest and conforms to local laws and ordinances pertaining to the letting of construction contracts. Bids in which the prices are obviously unbalanced may be rejected. AWARD AND EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT The bidder's attention is directed to General Conditions and to Part III of these Contract Documents which contains all the documents the successful bidder shall execute. Notice of Intent: For purposes of clarification regarding Board of Supervisors Policy A-97, “Protest Procedures for Award of Contracts” the posting of the bid abstract is equivalent to the posting of the Notice of Intent (NOI). Award of the Contract: The Bids will be compared on the basis of the Total Bid of all contract bid items, including those bid items listed in additive alternates bid items, if any, in combinations as stipulated in the Bid, which may be selected by the Owner. Product Substitutions: In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 3400, any proposed substitutions shall be submitted after award of the Contract and within first 35 days of Contract Period. The Owner will not consider substitutions submitted after this time period. After award of Contract, the Contractor shall SUBMIT all substitution requests as described in Article 3 of the General Conditions.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

1-8

PART 1

Cancellation of Award: The Owner reserves the right to cancel the award without liability to the bidder, except return of Bid guaranty, at any time before a Contract has been fully executed by all parties and is approved by the Owner. PROTEST PROCEDURES Protest of contract award must be made in writing and shall be filed with the Contracting Officer identified in the Contract Document. Protests must be filed within five (5) business days after a Notice of Intent to award the contract has been posted in a public place in the County’s Contracting Office or County Internet website. Protests must conform to the requirements of Board of Supervisors Policy “A-97 Protest Procedures for Award of Contracts”. The policy is available for review at: http://www.sdcounty.ca.gov/cob/docs/policy/A-97.pdf For purposes of clarification regarding Board of Supervisors Policy “A-97, Protest Procedures for Award of Contracts” the posting of the bid abstract on BuyNet (http://buynet.sdcounty.ca.gov) is equivalent to the posting of the Notice of Intent (NOI) to award. TAX INFORMATION In compliance with California Revenue and Taxation code section 18662, if you are a non-resident of California (out-of-state invoices) who receives California source income, the County will pay California Use Tax directly to the State of California per permit no. SR FH 25-632384. Fifteen (15) business days prior to the first payment, new suppliers or suppliers with expired forms or forms with incorrect information, must submit new forms to the County (forms are available from the Franchise Tax Board websites listed below). Under certain circumstances you may be eligible for reduced or waived nonresident withholding. If you have already received a waiver or a reduced withholding response from the State of California and the response is still valid, submit the response to the County in lieu of the forms. Failure to submit the required forms will result in withholding of payments. Refer to the Franchise Tax Board websites (listed below) for tax forms and information on non-resident withholding, including waivers or reductions. The County will not give you any tax advice. It is recommended you speak with your tax advisor and/or the State of California for guidance. Franchise Tax Board Websites: http://www.ftb.ca.gov http://www.ftb.ca.gov/individuals/Withholding Definitions.shtml http://www.ftb.ca.gov/individuals/wsc/Processing Changes for 2012.shtml http://www.ftb.ca.gov/individuals/wsc/forms and publications.shtml http://www.ftb.ca.gov/individuals/wsc/decision chart.shtml Submit forms to the Auditor & Controller via fax at (858) 694-2060 or mail originals to: County of San Diego, 5530 Overland Avenue, Suite 410, San Diego, CA 92123. The P.O. number or Contract number (if available) and “California Revenue and Taxation Code Section 18662” must appear on fax cover sheet and/or the outside of the mailing envelope.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

1-9

PART 1

GENERAL INFORMATION REGARDING COMPLIANCE WITH DISABLED VETERANS BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DVBE) PROGRAM 1.

Disabled Veterans Business Enterprises will be afforded full opportunity to submit bids in response to this invitation. DVBE firms bidding as prime contractors will automatically meet the stated Disabled Veterans Business Enterprise (DVBE) participation.

2.

Certified DVBE Information is available at the California State Department of General Services (DGS), Procurement Division (PD), Office of Small Business and DVBE Services (OSDS) website: Information can be viewed or downloaded from: http://www.dgs.ca.gov/pd/Programs/OSDS.aspx

1.

Board of Supervisors Policy B-39a Board of Supervisors Policy B-39a states that Disabled Veterans Business Enterprises (DVBEs) will be afforded maximum opportunity to compete for all County contracts; The policy can be downloaded at http://www.sdcounty.ca.gov/cob/docs/policy/B-39a.pdf.

2.

Objectives The following DVBE participation is imposed to recognize the service of disabled veterans to our country.

3.

DVBE Participation for the Project DVBE participation of three percent (3%) of Bid amount is required for a public work project estimated (by the County) to exceed $1million. A good faith effort cannot be accepted in lieu of meeting the 3% requirement. A bidder who fails to meet this requirement shall be declared non-responsive and the next lowest responsible and responsive bidder that complies with this requirement will be awarded the contract. For a public work project that is estimated (by the County) to be between $500,000 and $1million, the prime contractor shall make a good faith effort to meet-or-exceed 3% DVBE subcontractor participation, and the Good Faith Effort shall be documented in accordance with this bid document demonstrating all participation was obtained prior to bid submittal or the bidder may be deemed non-responsive. For a public work project estimated (by the County) to be less than $500,000, DVBE participation is encouraged, but not required. DVBE participation may be documented on page 2-12, but is not required at this estimate level.

4.

DVBE Subcontractor Documentation The bidder shall designate all licensed subcontractors in accordance with the instructions on the form titled DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS contained in Part II of these Contract Documents which is due at time of bid. In addition, the bidder shall include information regarding DVBE prime contractors, subcontractors, and vendors (material suppliers and service providers) on the BIDDER DVBE INFORMATION form (page 2-12) within 2 business days of the Bid opening. "Good Faith Effort Documentation" shall be submitted in accordance with Item 7 below.

5.

Credit Toward the Goal for DVBE Prime Contractors, Subcontractors and Vendors A DVBE prime contractor automatically meets the DVBE participation for a project. If the Prime is not a DVBE, compliance with 3% DVBE participation shall be calculated by taking the aggregate value of all DVBE subcontracts to be used on the project as a percentage of the total value of each such County contract.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

1-10

PART 1

6.

Good Faith Effort Defined a. A bidder who fails to meet the stated DVBE participation requirement for this project shall have made a good faith effort to meet participation prior to the time bids are submitted. b.

In evaluating the good faith effort of a bidder, the Owner shall consider the following criteria: 1)

The bidder solicited certified DVBEs to perform work or provide supplies or services for the project. Good faith effort shall include solicitation of individual certified DVBEs. Record of firms solicited shall be included in the Documentation of Good Faith Effort submittal. Solicitations conducted must be documented in the Documentation of Good Faith Effort. DVBE subcontractors solicited must be licensed for appropriate work on this project, and must be physically located within the County of San Diego, or have indicated they would consider work in San Diego Service Region 11. Good Faith Efforts not adequately documented shall be considered non-responsive.

7.

2)

Where DVBE bids were rejected, the bidder provided the reasons for the rejections. If no bids received from DVBEs, the bidder shall so indicate in the Documentation of Good Faith Effort submittal.

3)

Contact with local DVBE organizations to identify DVBE firms is encouraged but is not a requirement for the Documentation of Good Faith Effort submitted to the Owner.

4)

Due to relatively short project solicitation periods, the Owner does not require advertising in trade and focus publications as a condition of satisfying the good faith effort for the DVBE participation. Advertising alone without direct solicitation of DVBE firms as required in paragraph 1) above does not satisfy the Good Faith Effort.

Good Faith Effort Documentation For public work projects estimated (by the County) to be between $500,000 and $1 million where a DVBE requirement has not been established, all bidders, are required to submit the Documentation of Good Faith Effort (pages 2-13 through 2-16; and supporting documentation), in addition to the BIDDER DVBE INFORMATION form (page 2-12), within 2 business days of the Bid opening. When the stated DVBE participation requirement is met, only the BIDDER DVBE INFORMATION form (page 2-12), contained in these Contract Documents, is required within 2 business days of Bid opening. Bidders are cautioned that even if their BIDDER DVBE INFORMATION form (page 2-12) indicates the stated DVBE participation is met, all bidders should still consider submitting Documentation of Good Faith Effort. Submittal of satisfactory Documentation of Good Faith Effort will protect eligibility for award for those public work projects estimated (by the County) between $500,000 and $1 million in the event the County, in its review, finds that the stated DVBE participation has not been met. The DVBE Good Faith Effort, if required, must be submitted on the DOCUMENTATION OF GOOD FAITH EFFORT forms (pages 2-13 through 2-16) contained in these Contract Documents and shall include sufficient and timely supporting documentation to validate the solicitations conducted.

8.

Protest Procedure for DVBE A bidder who does not attain the stated project DVBE participation or has not made a "good faith effort" in accordance with these bid document instructions may be declared non-responsive. A

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

1-11

PART 1

bidder so declared may file a protest in writing with the Director, Department of Purchasing and Contracting within five (5) business days of the notification of the declaration, in accordance with Board of Supervisor Policy A-97 “Protest Procedures for Award of Contract” located at: http://www.sdcounty.ca.gov/cob/docs/policy/A-97.pdf. 11.

DVBE Certification Eligible contractors, subcontractors and vendors wishing to participate as DVBEs on this project must be certified by the California State Department of General Services (DGS), Procurement Division (PD), Office of Small Business and DVBE Services (OSDS), and have a current certification on the date bids are opened. Information regarding certification and certified DVBEs can be obtained by visiting the Department of General Services site at: http://www.pd.dgs.ca.gov/pd

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

1-12

PART 1

PART II DOCUMENTS TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-1

PART 2

STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO PROPOSAL TO THE BOARD FOR SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING ORACLE PROJECT NO. 1012261 REQUEST FOR BID NO.: 6149 Name of Bidder Business Address Place of Residence LOCATION The work to be performed under this contract is located in the vicinity of San Diego, County of San Diego, California. Said work is to be performed in accordance with the Contract and the General Conditions annexed hereto and including Addenda Nos. , , and . The work to be done is shown on plans entitled: PLANS FOR SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING PROJECT NO. 1012261 RFB 6149 IN THE VICINITY OF SAN DIEGO Approved: July 18, 2013 By signing this bid on the signature portion hereof, the undersigned, as bidder, under penalty of perjury deposes and says: that the only persons or parties interested in this Bid as Principals are those named herein; that the bidder has not, either directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with said bid; that the undersigned has carefully examined the location of the proposed work, the annexed proposed form of Contract, and the Plans, Special Provisions and Specifications therein referred to; and the undersigned proposes, and agrees if this Bid is accepted, that the undersigned will furnish the required Bonds and Contract with the Owner, in the form and copy of the Contract annexed hereto, to provide all necessary machinery, tools, apparatus and other means of construction, and to do all the work and furnish all the materials specified in the Contract, in the manner and time therein set forth, and that the undersigned will take in full payment therefore the following unit and lump sum prices, to wit:

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-2

PART 2

BID SCHEDULE: Item No. 1

Description Construction of a one-story 3200 SF pre-engineered metal building and associate site work

Est. Qty. 1

Unit of Meas.

Unit Cost

Total Cost

LS

$___________

TOTAL BID:

Name of Bidder_____________________________________________________________

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-3

PART 2

BID COMPARISON AND AWARD If this Bid shall be accepted and the undersigned shall fail to contract as aforesaid and to give in sums as stated in the Notice to Contractors Inviting Bids, both a faithful Performance Bond, and a Payment Bond as required by Chapter 5 (commencing at Section 3225) and Chapter 7 (commencing at Section 3247), Title 15, Part 4, Division 3, of the California Civil Code, with surety satisfactory to the Owner within the time specified in Section 3-1.03 of the Standard Specifications after the undersigned has received notice of the award of the Contract from the Owner and that the Contract is ready for signature, the Owner may, at its option, determine that the bidder has abandoned the Contract, and thereupon this Bid and the acceptance thereof shall be null and void, and the forfeiture of the security accompanying this Bid shall operate and the same shall be the property of the Owner. Bids are required for the entire work shown in the Bid Schedule. The amount of the bid for comparison purposes will be the Total Bid. The Total Bid includes all work associated with the completing of the project as detailed in the attached plans and specification, and in any future addendum. The bidder shall set forth for each item of work, in clearly legible figures, a unit price and a total for the item in the respective spaces provided for this purpose. In the case of unit basis items, the amount set forth under the "Total" column shall be the extension of the unit price bid on the basis of the estimated quantity for the item. In case of discrepancy between the unit price and the total set forth for the item, the unit price shall prevail; provided, however, if the amount set forth as a unit price is ambiguous, unintelligible or uncertain for any cause, or is omitted, or in the case of unit basis items, is the same amount as the entry in the "Total" column, then the amount set forth in the "Total" column for the item shall prevail in accordance with the following: 1.

As to lump sum items, the amount set forth in the "Total" column shall be the unit price.

2.

As to unit basis items, the amount set forth in the "Total" column shall be divided by the estimated quantity for the item, and the price thus obtained shall be the unit price.

The quantities listed in the Bid are approximate only. Payment for work done will be made at the contract unit prices bid as applied to the quantities actually constructed or installed. Award of the Contract, if awarded, will be to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder, for the Total Bid, as determined by the Owner, subject to the Owner's right to reject any or all bids and to waive any minor irregularity in the bids or bidding. Bids in which the prices are obviously unbalanced may be rejected. Award of the Contract, if awarded, will be made to the lowest responsive, responsible bidder within forty-five (45) calendar days from the date specified for the opening of bids; within sixty (60) calendar days to the second lowest responsive, responsible bidder if the first does not execute the Contract; and within seventy-five (75) calendar days to the third lowest responsive, responsible bidder if neither the first nor the second bidder executes the Contract. PROHIBITED CONTRACTS Section 67 of the San Diego County Administrative Code provides that the County shall not contract with, and shall reject any bid or proposal submitted by, the person or entities specified below, unless the Board of Supervisors finds that special circumstances exist which justify the approval of such contract: (a) (b)

Persons employed by the County or of public agencies for which the Board of Supervisors is the governing body; Profit-making firms or businesses in which employees described in subsection (a) serve as officers, principals, partners, or major shareholders;

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-4

PART 2

(c)

(d)

Persons who, within the immediately preceding twelve (12) months came within the provisions of subsection (a) and who (1) were employed in positions of substantial responsibility in the area of service to be performed by the contract, or (2) participated in any way in developing the contract or its service specifications; and Profit making firms or businesses in which the former employees described in subsection (c) serve as officers, principals, partners, or major shareholders.

With the affixing of a signature to its response to this solicitation, officer certifies that the above provisions of the Code have been complied with, and that any exception will cause any ensuing contract to be invalid. DRUG AND ALCOHOL POLICY It is the policy of the Board of Supervisors that in order to attain or maintain a contract with the County, each contractor shall agree that while any contractor or the contractor’s employees are performing services for the County, or using County equipment, that the contractor or the contractor’s employees: 1. Shall not in any way be impaired because of being under the influence of alcohol or a drug. 2. Shall not possess, consume, or be under the influence of alcohol and/or an illegal drug. 3. Shall not sell, offer, or provide alcohol or an illegal drug to another person. DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION Contractor certifies that it, its principals, its employees and its subcontractors: 1. 2.

3. 4.

Are not presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, and declared ineligible or voluntarily excluded from covered transactions by any State or Federal Department or agency. Have not within a 3-year period preceding this Contract been convicted of, or had a civil judgment rendered against them for, the commission of fraud or a criminal offense in connection with obtaining, attempting to obtain, or performing a public (federal, State. or local) transaction; violation of Federal or State anti-trust statutes or commission of embezzlement, theft, forgery, bribery, falsification or destruction of records, making false statements, or receiving stolen property. Are not presently indicted or otherwise criminally or civilly charged by a government entity (federal, State, or local) with commission of any of the offenses enumerated in the paragraph above; and Have not within a 3-year period preceding this Contract had one or more public transactions (federal, State, or local) terminated for cause or default.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-5

PART 2

NONCOLLUSION AFFIDAVIT TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BID (Title 23 United States Code Section 112 and Public Contract Code Section 7106)

State of California County of San Diego

) ) ) )

ss

In accordance with Title 23 United States Code Section 112 and Public Contract Code 7106, (Name) , being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he or she is (Title) of (Company) the party making the foregoing bid that the bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership, company, association, organization, or corporation; that the bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that the bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other bidder to put in a false or sham bid, and has not directly or indirectly colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed with any bidder or anyone else to put in a sham bid, or that anyone shall refrain from bidding; that the bidder has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with anyone to fix the bid price of the bidder or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost element of the bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the public body awarding the contract of anyone interested in the proposed contract; that all statements contained in the bid are true; and, further, that the bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her bid price or any breakdown thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, or paid, and will not pay, any fee to any corporation, partnership, company association, organization, bid depository, or to any member or agent thereof to effectuate a collusive or sham bid. I hereby certify, under penalty of perjury, that the foregoing statement is true and correct.

SIGNATURE OF BIDDER _______________________________ DATE _______________________________________________

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-6

PART 2

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-7

PART 2

DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS Set forth below is the full name and the location of the place of business of each Subcontractor whom the Bidder proposes to subcontract portions of the work in excess of one-half of one percent of the total bid, or, in the case of construction of streets or highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of one percent of the total bid or $10,000, whichever is greater, and the portion of the work which will be done by each Subcontractor for each subcontract. The Bidder's attention is directed to the provision titled "Subcontracting" of the General Conditions contained in these Contract Documents. NOTE: The Bidder understands that if the Bidder fails to specify a Subcontractor for any portion of the work to be performed under the contract in excess of one-half of one percent of the bid, or, in the case of construction of streets or highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half of one percent of the bid or $10,000, whichever is greater, the Bidder shall be deemed to have agreed to perform such portion, and that the Bidder shall not be permitted to sublet or subcontract that portion of the work except in cases of public emergency or necessity, and then only after a finding, reduced to writing as a public record of the Awarding Authority, setting forth the facts constituting the emergency or necessity in accordance with the provision of the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act (Section 4100 et seq. of the California Public Contract Code). Unless changed in the General Conditions, at least 50 percent of the original contract price shall be performed by the Contractor’s own organization. The Business Name, Address and Portion of Work that will be done by each subcontractor are required at time of bid submittal. The remainder of the information shall be submitted by all bidders within two business days of Bid Opening by e-mail to the Procurement Contracting Officer listed as contact for this RFB. If no Subcontractors are to be employed on the project, enter the word "NONE.” DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS

PORTION OF WORK TO BE SUBCONTRACTED ITEM NO.

BUSINESS NAME AND ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION OF WORK

PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL CONTRACT

LICENSE NO.

TOTAL % SUBCONTRACTED _______________ Name of Bidder__________________________

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-8

PART 2

DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS PORTION OF WORK TO BE SUBCONTRACTED ITEM NO.

BUSINESS NAME AND ADDRESS

DESCRIPTION OF WORK

PERCENTAGE OF TOTAL CONTRACT

LICENSE NO.

TOTAL % SUBCONTRACTED _____________ Name of Bidder__________________________

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-9

PART 2

FOR:

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING, ORACLE PROJECT NO. 1012261

Accompanying this bid is __________________________________________________________________ (NOTICE: Insert the words "cash ($_______________________________________)," "cashier's check," "certified check," or "bidder's bond," as the case may be.) in amount equal to at least ten percent of total of the bid. The names of all persons interested in the foregoing proposal as principals are as follows:

IMPORTANT NOTICE If bidder or other interested person is a corporation, state legal name of corporation, also names of the president, secretary, treasurer and manager thereof; if a copartnership, state true name of firm, also names of all individual copartners composing firm; if bidder or other interested person is an individual, state first and last names in full.

Licensed in accordance with an act providing for the registration of Contractors, License No.

Classification (s)

Exp. Date _______________

I hereby certify, under penalty of perjury, that the foregoing proposal to the Board is true and correct.

(__________________________________________________________________________) Legal Name of Bidder ( ( ( ( by (SEAL) ( Signature ( ( (________________________________________________________________________________ Title

SIGN HERE

NOTE: If bidder is a corporation, the legal name of the corporation shall be set forth above together with the signature of the officer or officers authorized to sign contracts on behalf of the corporation; if bidder is a copartnership, the true name of the firm shall be set forth above together with the signature of the partner or partners authorized to sign contracts in behalf of the copartnership; and if bidder is an individual, his signature shall be placed above. If signature is by an agent, other than an officer of a corporation or a member of a partnership, a Power of Attorney must be submitted with the bid; otherwise, the bid may be disregarded as irregular and unauthorized. Business address Telephone (

____________________________________________________________________

)__________________ _____________

Fax(

)_________________________________

E-Mail address _______________________________________________________________________________

Dated

, 20

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

, at

California.

2-10

PART 2

BOND NO.___________________

BIDDER'S BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we .....................………………………………………………………………………………………………………………….. ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ as Principal, and ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the County of San Diego, a political subdivision of the State of California, hereinafter called the County, in the penal sum of TEN PERCENT (10%) OF THE TOTAL AMOUNT OF THE BID of the Principal above named, submitted by said Principal to the County for the work described below, for the payment of which sum in lawful money of the United States, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. In no case shall the liability of the Surety hereunder exceed the sum of ............................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................................................................................ THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, That whereas the Principal has submitted the above-mentioned bid to the County of San Diego for certain construction specifically described as follows, for which bids are to be opened on _____________ for DATE

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTIC BUILDING, ORACLE PROJECT NO. 1012261 NOW THEREFORE, if the aforesaid principal shall not withdraw said bid within the period specified therein after the opening of the same, or, if no period be specified, within sixty (60) days after said opening, and shall within the period specified therefor, or, if no period be specified, within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented to him for signature, enter into a written contract with the County, in the prescribed form, in accordance with the bid as accepted, and file the two bonds with the County, one to guarantee faithful performance and the other to guarantee payment for labor and materials, as required by law, then this obligation shall be null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and virtue. In the event suit is brought upon this bond by the County and judgment is recovered, the Surety shall pay all costs incurred by the Owner in such suit, including a reasonable attorney's fee to be fixed by the court. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, We have hereunto set our hands and seals on this ......... day of ....……….................. A.D. 20....... ………………………………………………………………………(SEAL).……………….................................................................... (SEAL) ………………………………………………………………………(SEAL)......………………............................................................. (SEAL) ………………………………………………………………………(SEAL)........………………............................................................ (SEAL) Surety Principal ATTORNEY-IN-FACT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF SURETY STATE OF ......................................................................... ) ) ss COUNTY OF ..................................................................... ) On this .................................... day of................................................................................. in the year 20................ before me ...............................................................................................................a notary public in and for said County and State personally appeared .................................................................................. known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be the person whose name is subscribed to the within instrument as the attorney-in-fact of the................................................ the corporation named as Surety in said instrument, and acknowledged to me that he subscribed the name of said corporation thereto as Surety, and his own name as attorney-in-fact.

NOTE: (a) Signature of those executing for Surety must be properly acknowledged. (b) The Attorney-in-fact must attach a certified copy of Power of Attorney.

................................................................. .............. Notary Public In and for the County of ............................................................................State of California

ORACLE PROJECT NO. 1017775

DATE: _______________________

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-11

PART 2

COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO BIDDER/OFFEROR DVBE INFORMATION (DUE WITHIN TWO (2) DAYS OF BID OPENING) DATE:

Bid/Offer No.:

PROJECT TITLE:

Project/Activity No.:

BIDDER/OFFEROR: BIDDER/OFFEROR REPRESENTATIVE: ITEM NO.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK, SERVICE OR MATERIAL

NAME OF CERTIFIED DVBE (PRIME, SUBCONTRACTOR, VENDOR) TO BE USED INCLUDING ADDRESS, TELEPHONE AND CERTIFICATION NUMBER.

DOLLAR AMOUNT TO BE PAID THIS DVBE

TOTAL DOLLARS TO CERTIFIED DVBE (PRIME,/SUBCONTRACTORVENDOR)

$

COMPUTATION OF UTILIZATION AND COMPARISON WITH THE DVBE PARTICIPATION.

CALCULATION Disabled Veterans

Total Amount to DVBE Total Bid/Offer

x 100 = Percent of Utilization x 100 =

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

%

2-12

3% *See DVBE Participation information sections for further information. PART 2

PART IIA DOCUMENTS TO BE EXECUTED AND SUBMITTED BY ALL BIDDERS WHO FAIL TO MEET A DVBE GOAL FOR PUBLIC WORK PROJECTS ESTIMATED (BY THE COUNTY) TO BE BETWEEN $500,000 AND $1 MILLION (SHALL BE SUBMITTED BY E-MAIL TO THE PROCUREMENT CONTRACTING OFFICER LISTED AS CONTACT FOR THIS RFB WITHIN TWO (2) BUSINESS DAYS OF THE BID OPENING) (Bidders are cautioned that even if their BIDDER DVBE INFORMATION form (page 2-12) indicates the stated DVBE participation has been met, all bidders should still consider submitting Documentation of Good Faith Effort. Submittal of satisfactory Documentation of Good Faith Effort will protect eligibility for award of a contract in the event the County, in its review, finds that the stated DVBE participation has not been met. These documents cannot be submitted in lieu of page 2-12, but may supplement page 2-12).

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-13

PART 2

COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO DVBE “Good Faith Effort” Package Documentation of Good Faith Effort (Due within two (2) days of bid opening) The DVBE Cover Sheet is to be attached for the required certified DVBE documentation of “Good Faith Effort” estimated by the County to be between $500.00 and $1 million.

Date:

Bid/Offer No.:

Project Title:

Project/Activity No. :

Bidder/Offeror: Bidder/Offeror Representative: Please check off the following to insure you have included them in your documentation: □

Documentation of “Good Faith Effort” (3 pages including this page)



Attachment of Any Additional Supporting Documentation

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-14

PART 2

COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO DOCUMENTATION OF GOOD FAITH EFFORT A.

List potential DVBEs that the bidder solicited prior to prime contractor bid submittal for participation in this contract along with dates.

Certified DVBE Firm

Date of Contact (Mail, Fax, Telephone, etc.)

Responded (Yes/No)

1.

□ Yes □ No

2.

□ Yes □ No

3.

□ Yes □ No

4.

□ Yes □ No

5.

□ Yes □ No

6.

□ Yes □ No

7.

□ Yes □ No

8.

□ Yes □ No

9.

□ Yes □ No

10.

□ Yes □ No

11.

□ Yes □ No

12.

□ Yes □ No

13.

□ Yes □ No

14.

□ Yes □ No

15.

□ Yes □ No

B.

Solicitations DVBE Solicitation Sample: Bidder must attach a sample of the solicitation sent to certified DVBE firms. If phone contact was made, document conversation: date, time, contact person, and business opportunities discussed.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

2-15

PART 2

DOCUMENTATION OF GOOD FAITH EFFORT Identification of (1) all DVBEs who submitted bids or quotations prime contractor bid submittal (2) nature of work, supplies or services offered which are not accepted, (3) dollar amounts of the DVBEs bids not accepted, (4) subcontractors and/or suppliers who will be used instead of the DVBEs, (5) dollar amounts of these subcontractors and/or suppliers’ bids/offers, and (6) the reason for the bidder not accepting the DVBE's bid/offer. Use additional sheets if necessary. Name of DVBE (1)

Nature of Work (2)

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

DVBE Bids/Offer($) (3)

Subcontractor/ Supplier to be used (4)

2-16

Bid/Offer Amount Accepted (5)

Reason Not Accepted (6)

PART 2

PART III DOCUMENTS TO BE EXECUTED BY THE SUCCESSFUL BIDDER (AFTER AWARD OF CONTRACT)

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

3-1

PART 3

STATE OF CALIFORNIA COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO CONTRACT FOR SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING PROJECT NO. 1012261 RFB NO.: 6149 THIS CONTRACT, made and concluded, in duplicate, this ______ day of __________________, Two Thousand and _______________, between __________________________________, Owner, by the Director, Department of Purchasing and Contracting, and Contractor, ARTICLE I. WITNESSETH, that for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the Owner, the Contractor agrees with the Owner, at the Contractor's own proper cost and expense, to do all the work and furnish all the materials, except such as are mentioned in the specifications to be furnished by the Owner, necessary to construct and complete in a good, workmanlike and substantial manner and to the satisfaction of the Owner, the project titled: Sheriff’s Defensive Tactics Building ORACLE PROJECT NO.: CIP 1012261 Said work is to be performed in accordance with the Contract and the General Conditions annexed hereto and including Addenda Nos. ___, ___, and ___. The work to be done is shown on plans entitled: PLANS FOR SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING CIP # 1012261 RS 688-4 IN THE VICINITY OF SAN DIEGO Approved (July 18, 2013), which said plans are hereby made a part of this Contract. ARTICLE II. And the Contractor agrees to receive and accept the unit and/or lump sum prices shown in the Bid Schedule for the items and quantities actually constructed or installed as full compensation for furnishing all materials and for doing all the work contemplated and embraced in this agreement; also for all loss or damage arising out of the nature of the work aforesaid, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen difficulties or obstructions which may arise or be encountered in the prosecution of the work until its acceptance by the Owner, and for all risks of every description connected with the work; and also for all expenses incurred by or in consequence of the suspension or discontinuance of work and for well and faithfully completing the work, and the whole thereof, in the manner and according to the Plans and Specifications, and the requirements of the Engineer under them. ARTICLE III. The Owner hereby promises and agrees with the Contractor to employ, and does hereby employ the Contractor to provide the materials and to do the work according to the terms and conditions herein contained and referred to, for the prices aforesaid, and hereby contracts to pay the same at the time, and in the manner and upon the conditions hereinafter set forth, and the Owner and the Contractor SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

3-2

PART 3

for themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, do hereby agree to the full performance of the covenants herein contained. ARTICLE IV. It is further expressly agreed by and between the parties hereto that should there be any conflict between the terms of this instrument and the Bid or Proposal of the Contractor, then this instrument shall control and nothing herein shall be considered as an acceptance of the terms of the Proposal conflicting herewith. ARTICLE V. The Owner has obtained from the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations said Director's determinations of the general prevailing rate of per diem wages and the general prevailing rate for holiday and overtime work for the locality in which the project is to be performed. Said determinations are on file and are available in the Office of the Department of Purchasing and Contracting, 5560 Overland Ave., Suite 270, San Diego, California 92123 and are available from the Department of Industrial Relations at www.dir.ca.gov/DLSR/PWD. Not less than these rates shall be paid to all workers employed on the project. ARTICLE VI. The Contract entered into consists of the following contract documents, all of which are component parts of the Contract as if herein set out in full, or attached hereto: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.

Notice to Contractors Inviting Bids Information for Bidders Proposal to the Board Designation of Subcontractors Contract Corporate Certificate Partnership Certificate Contractor's Certificate Regarding Worker's Compensation Performance Bond Payment Bond General Conditions Addenda Nos.___, ___, and ___, as issued Project Plans General Information Regarding Compliance with Disabled Veterans Business Enterprise Program Bidder DVBE Information (not required if bid does not exceed $500,000) Representations and Certifications

All of the above named contract documents are intended to be complementary. Work required by one of the above named documents and not by others shall be performed as if required by all.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

3-3

PART 3

IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have hereunto set their hands the day and year first above written. BASIS OF AWARD: TOTAL BID ___________________

By__________________________________ ________ JOHN M. PELLEGRINO, Director Date Department of Purchasing and Contracting

___________________________________

________________________________

Contractor Name

___________________________________

Signature of Authorized Official

________________________________

Contractor Address

___________________________________

Printed Name / Title

________________________________

City, State, Zip

Contractor License Number

________________________________ Federal Tax ID / SSN

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

3-4

PART 3

CORPORATE CERTIFICATE

I, _____________________________________________________________ certify that I am the Secretary of the Corporation named as Contractor in the foregoing Contract; that ____________________________, who signed said Contract on behalf of the Contractor, was then ________________________________________________________of said Corporation; that said Contract was duly signed for and in behalf of said Corporation by authority of its governing body and is within the scope of its corporate powers.

Corporate Name: _____________________________

Signature: __________________________________(Corporate Seal) Secretary

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

3-5

PART 3

PARTNERSHIP CERTIFICATE STATE OF ____ _________________________________ _)

) ss COUNTY OF ______________________________________)

On this _________________ day of _______________________, in the year 20_____, before me __________________________________________, a Notary Public in and for said County and State, personally appeared _________________________________, personally known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be the person that executed this instrument, on behalf of the partnership and acknowledged to me that the partnership executed it.

Notary's Signature: ________________________________________ Notary's Name: ___________________________________________ (Type or Print)

My Commission Expires: ___________________________________

(Notary Seal)

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

3-6

PART 3

CONTRACTOR'S CERTIFICATE REGARDING WORKER'S COMPENSATION

Section 3700 of the Labor Code provides in part as follows: "Every employer except the State shall secure the payment of compensation in one or more of the following ways: (a)

By being insured against liability to pay compensation in one or more insurers duly authorized to write compensation insurance in this State.

(b)

By securing from the Director of Industrial Relations a certificate of consent to self-insure, which may be given upon furnishing proof satisfactory to the Director of Industrial Relations of ability to self-insure and to pay any compensation that may become due to his employees..."

I am aware of the provisions of Section 3700 of the Labor Code which require every employer to be insured against liability for worker's compensation or to undertake self-insurance in accordance with the provisions of that code, and I will comply with such provisions before commencing the performance of the work of this contract. SIGNATURE:

BIDDER'S NAME: (Type or Print) ADDRESS:

(In accordance with Article 5, commencing at Section 1860, Chapter 1, Part 7, Division 2 of the Labor Code, the above certificate must be signed and filed with the awarding body prior to performing any work under this contract.)

BOND NO.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

3-7

PART 3

PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That WHEREAS, the County of San Diego, a political subdivision of the State of California (hereinafter designated as Owner) on ...............................20.................awarded to .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................... (hereinafter designated as the Principal) a contract for the work described as follows: Sheriff’s Defensive Tactics Building ORACLE PROJECT NO.: CIP 1012261 WHEREAS, said Principal is required under the terms of said contract to furnish a bond for the faithful performance of said contract,

NOW THEREFORE, We, the Principal and ............................................................................................................................. ..................................................................................................................................................................................................................... as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Owner in the penal sum of .................................................................................................. ................................................................................................................... Dollars ($ .................................) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators and successors, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT if the above bounden Principal, his or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, shall in all things stand to and abide by, and well and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions and agreements in the said contract and any alteration thereof made as therein provided, on his or their part, to be kept and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to their true intent and meaning, and shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, its officers and agents, as therein stipulated, then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise it shall be and remain in full force and virtue. And the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder of the specifications accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension to time, alteration or additions to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. In the event suit is brought upon this bond by the Owner and judgment is recovered, the Surety shall pay all costs incurred by the Owner in such suit, including a reasonable attorney’s fee to be fixed by the Court.

IN WITNESS WHEREOF .............................. identical counterparts of this instrument, each of whom shall for all purposes be deemed an original thereof, have been duly executed by the Principal and Surety above named, on the ................................................... day of .............................................. 20 ................. ...................................................................................... (SEAL) ....................................................................... (SEAL) ...................................................................................... (SEAL) ....................................................................... (SEAL) ...................................................................................... (SEAL) ....................................................................... (SEAL) Surety

Principal

ATTORNEY-IN-FACT ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF SURETY STATE OF ..........................................................................

) ) ss COUNTY OF ...................................................................... ) On this day of in the year 20 before me …………………………………………………………………. a notary public in and for said County and State personally appeared ………………………………………… known to me (or proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence) to be the person whose name is subscribed to this instrument as the attorney in fact of …………………….. the corporation named as Surety in said instrument, and acknowledged to me that he (she) subscribed the name of said corporation thereto as Surety, and his (her) own name as attorney in fact. NOTE:

(a) Signature of those executing for Surety must be properly acknowledged. (b) The Attorney-in-fact must attach a certified copy of Power of Attorney. California

................................................................................................................. Notary Public In and for the County of ..................................................................................... State

of

BOND NO.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

3-8

PART 3

PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That WHEREAS, the County of San Diego, a political subdivision of the State of California (hereinafter designated as Owner) on ..................................20.................awarded to ............................................................................................................................................ .......................................................................................................... (hereinafter designated as the Principal) a contract for the work described as follows: Sheriff’s Defensive Tactics Building ORACLE PROJECT NO.: CIP 1012261 WHEREAS, said Principal is required Chapter 5 (commencing at Section 3225) and Chapter 7 (commencing at Section 3247), Title 15, Part 4, Division 3 of the California Civil Code to furnish a bond in connection with said contract. NOW THEREFORE, We, the Principal and ................................................................................................................................................ as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the Owner in the penal sum of .................................................................................................. ..........................................................................................................................................Dollars ($ ............................ .) lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT if said Principal, hers/his/its subcontractors, heirs, executors, administrators, successors, or assigns, shall fail to pay any of the persons named in Section 3181 of the California Civil Code, or amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to work or labor performed under the contract, or for any amounts required to be deducted, withheld and paid over to the Employment Development Department from the wages of employees of the contractor and his subcontractors pursuant to Section 13020 of the Unemployment Insurance Code, with respect to such work and labor the Surety or Sureties will pay for the same, in an amount not exceeding the sum hereinabove specified, and also, in case suit is brought upon this bond, a reasonable attorney's fee, to be fixed by the court. This Bond shall inure to the benefit of any of the persons named in Section 3181 of the California Civil Code, so as to give a right of action to such persons or their assigns in any suit brought upon this bond. It is further stipulated and agreed that the Surety on this bond shall not be exonerated or released from the obligation of this bond by any change, extension of time for performance, addition, alteration or modification in, to, or of any contract, plans, specifications, or agreement pertaining or relating to any scheme or work of improvement hereinabove described or pertaining or relating to the furnishing of labor, materials or equipment therefor, nor by any change or modification of any terms of payment or extension of the time for any payment pertaining or relating to any scheme or work of improvement hereinabove described, nor by any rescission or attempted rescission of the contract, agreement or bond, nor by any conditions precedent or subsequent in the bond attempting to limit the right of recovery of claimants otherwise entitled to recover under any such contract or agreement or under the bond, nor by any fraud practiced by any person other than the claimant seeking to recover on the bond and that this bond be construed most strongly against the Surety and in favor of all persons for whose benefit such bond is given, and under no circumstances shall Surety be released from liability to those for whose benefit such bond has been given, by reason of any breach of contract between the Owner or Public Entity and original contractor or on the part of any obligee named in such bond, but the sole conditions of recovery shall be that claimant is a person described in Section 3110 or 3112 of the California Civil Code, and has not been paid the full amount of his claim and that Surety does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, addition, alteration or modification herein mentioned. IN WITNESS WHEREOF this instrument has been duly executed by the Principal and Surety above named, on the …………………… day of …………………………… 20……. ....................................................................................................... (SEAL) Principal By ..................................................................................................... (SEAL) NOTE: (a) Signature of those executing for Surety must be properly acknowledged. (b) The Attorney-in-fact must attach a certified copy of Power of Attorney.

..................................................................................................... (SEAL) By ....................................................................................................... (SEAL) Attorney-in-Fact

(Attach required acknowledgements)

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

3-9

PART 3

PART IV

GENERAL CONDITIONS

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4-1

Part 4

TABLE OF CONTENTS GENERAL CONDITIONS PAGE ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT 1.3 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS 1.4 INTERPRETATION

4-5 4-5 4-6 4-6

ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1 DEFINITION 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF OWNER 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT WORK 2.5 OWNER'S ACCESS TO WORK 2.6 REJECTED MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP 2.7 PROHIBITED INTERESTS

4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-7 4-7 4-7

ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1 GENERAL 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 3.5 WARRANTY 3.6 TAXES 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 3.8 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 3.10 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT SITE 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES 3.13 USE OF SITE 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING 3.15 CLEANING UP 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION OF ARCHITECT/ENGINEER AND OTHERS

4-7 4-7 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-9 4-9 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-10 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-11 4-12

ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF CONTRACT 4.1 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER 4.2 PROJECT MANAGER 4.3 ADMINISTRATION OF CONTRACT 4.4 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.5 RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 4.6 MEDIATION 4.7 ARBITRATION

4-12 4-12 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16

ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1 DEFINITIONS 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS

4-16 4-17 4-17

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4-2

Part 4

ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1 OWNER'S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY

4-17 4-17

ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN WORK 7.1 GENERAL 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES 7.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCESS 7.5 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK 7.6 FIELD CHANGE ORDERS 7.7 PUBLIC DISCLOSURE OF GIFTS AND CAMPAIGN CONTRIBUTIONS

4-18 4-19 4-19 4-19 4-20 4-20 4-20

ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1 DEFINITIONS 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME 8.4 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

4-21 4-21 4-21 4-22

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT 9.11 PAYMENT OF WITHHELD FUNDS

4-22 4-22 4-22 4-23 4-23 4-24 4-24 4-24 4-25 4-25 4-26

ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTION AND PROGRAMS 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS 10.4 CONTRACTOR’S MATERIALS 10.5 EMERGENCIES

4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27 4-27

ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE 11.2 CONTRACTOR'S INDEMNITY 11.3 CONTRACTOR'S BONDS

4-28 4-31 4-31

ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK AND WARRANTY PERIOD 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK

4-32 4-32 4-32

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4-3

Part 4

ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1 GOVERNING LAW 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS 13.6 COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD 13.7 OWNER'S RIGHT TO AUDIT

4-32 4-32 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-33 4-34

ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF CONTRACT 14.1 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE 14.2 SUSPENSION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.3 TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE 14.4 GENERAL TERMINATION PROVISIONS

4-34 4-34 4-35 4-35

ARTICLE 15 LABOR AND PREVAILING WAGES PROVISIONS 15.1 WORKERS NOT PERMITTED ON PROJECT 15.2 PREVAILING WAGES 15.3 LABOR CODE REQUIREMENTS

4-36 4-36 4-37

EXHIBIT "A"

4-39

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4-4

Part 4

GENERAL CONDITIONS ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1.1

BASIC DEFINITIONS

1.1.1 Contract Documents. Contract Documents consist of Agreement between Owner and Contractor (hereinafter called Agreement), Contract Conditions (General and Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, addenda issued prior to execution of Contract, other documents listed in Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, or (3) a Construction Change Directive signed by the Owner. Unless specifically enumerated in Agreement, Contract Documents do not include other documents such as bidding requirements (Notice to Contractors Inviting Bid, Information for Bidders, sample forms, Contractor's bid or portions of addenda relating to bidding requirements). 1.1.2 The Contract. Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between Architect/Engineer and Contractor, (2) between Owner and Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or material supplier, or (3) between any persons or entities other than Owner and Contractor. The Architect/Engineer shall, however be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect/Engineer's duties. 1.1.3 Work. The term "Work" means construction and services required by Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by Contractor to fulfill Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 1.1.4 Project. The Project is the total construction of which Work performed under Contract Documents may be whole or a part and which may include construction by Owner or by separate contractors. 1.1.5 Drawings. The Drawings are graphic and pictorial portions of Contract Documents, whenever located and whenever issued, showing design, location and dimensions of Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. 1.1.6 Specifications. The Specifications are that portion of Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. 1.1.7 Project Manual. The Project Manual is the volume assembled for the Work which includes bidding requirements, sample forms, Conditions of the Contract and Specifications. 1.1.8 Architect/Engineer. As used herein, the term "Architect/ Engineer" means any applicable "design professional," or such design professional's representative, engaged in connection with the Project. 1.2

CORRELATION AND INTENT

1.2.1 Correlation. Execution of the Contract by Contractor is a representation that Contractor has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2.2 Intent of Contract. The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work by Contractor. Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by Contractor shall be required only to extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce intended results. Large-size details and dimensions shall take precedence as to shape and details of construction. Specifications shall govern as to manufacturer, product, materials, workmanship and installation procedures. Scale drawings, full-size details and specifications are intended to be fully cooperative and to agree but, when the description of portions of the Work conflict, the Contractor is responsible to provide and include the more expensive product, process or method so described. Should any discrepancy or apparent difference occur between drawings and specifications, or should error occur in the work of others affecting the work, the Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer in writing at once, and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in contract for changes in work. 1.2.3 Specifications and Drawings. Organization of Specifications into divisions, sections, and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing extent of the Work to be performed by any trade. 1.2.4 Meaning of Words. Unless otherwise stated in Contract Documents, words which have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4-5

Part 4

1.2.5 Additional Details. Architect/Engineer may furnish additional details to fully explain the work, which shall be considered part of this Contract. If, in the opinion of Contractor, any details are more elaborate than warranted, written notice thereof must be given to Architect/Engineer within five (5) days of receipt of same. Architect/Engineer will then consider the claim and, if justified, drawings will be amended or extra work authorized in accordance with Article 7. 1.3

OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER DOCUMENTS

Drawings, Specifications and other documents, including those in electronic form, prepared by Architect/Engineer are instruments of Architect/Engineer's service through which the Work to be executed by Contractor is described. Contractor may retain one contract record set. Neither Contractor nor any Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, material or equipment supplier shall own or claim a copyright in Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by Architect/Engineer, and unless otherwise indicated the Architect/Engineer shall be deemed the author of them and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, in addition to the copyright. Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by Architect/Engineer and copies thereof furnished to Contractor, are for use solely with respect to this Project. They are not to be used by Contractor or any Subcontractor, Subsubcontractor or material or equipment supplier on other projects or for additions to this Project outside scope of Work without the specific written consent of Owner. Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized use and reproduce applicable portions of Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by Architect/Engineer appropriate to and for use in execution of their Work under the Contract Documents. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the statutory copyright notice, if any, shown on the Drawings, Specifications and other documents prepared by the Architect/Engineer. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect/Engineer's copyright or other reserved rights. 1.4 INTERPRETATION. In interest of brevity Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement, but appears in another is not intended to affect interpretation of either statement. ARTICLE 2 OWNER 2.1

DEFINITION

2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. Owner is the County of San Diego, a political subdivision of the State of California, of whom the Board of Supervisors is the governing body and whose official address is County Administration Center, 1600 Pacific Highway, San Diego, CA. 92101. 2.1.2 The Director of the Department of General Services is designated by the County Board of Supervisors to represent the Owner and to administer this contract. 2.2

INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF OWNER

2.2.1 Survey. The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics legal limitations and approximate utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. 2.2.2 Permits and Approvals. Except for permits and fees which are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, plan check, building permit, easements and assessments for construction, use, or occupancy of structures in this project. 2.3 OWNER'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK. If Contractor fails to correct Work which is not in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents as required by Paragraph 12.2 or persistently fails to carry out Work in accordance with Contract Documents, Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portions thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of Owner to stop Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any other person or entity. 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT WORK. If Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with Contract Documents and fails within a seven-day period after receipt of written notice from Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, Owner may after such seven-day period give Contractor a second written notice to correct such deficiencies within a second seven-day period. If Contractor within such second seven-day period after receipt of such second notice fails to commence and continue to correct any deficiencies, Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case, an appropriate Change Directive shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due Contractor the cost of correcting such deficiencies, including compensation for Owner's and Architect/Engineer's additional services and expenses made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. If payments then or thereafter due Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, Contractor shall pay difference to Owner.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4-6

Part 4

2.5 OWNER'S ACCESS TO WORK. Owner and its representatives shall at all times have access to all parts of the Work and to shops wherein work is in preparation, for purpose of inspection. Contractor shall at all times maintain proper facilities and provide safe access for such inspection. 2.6 REJECTED MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP. Owner has right to reject materials and workmanship, which are defective, or to require their correction. Rejected workmanship shall be satisfactorily corrected. 2.7 PROHIBITED INTERESTS. No Official of Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of Owner to negotiate, make, accept or approve, or to take part in negotiating, making, accepting or approving any architectural, engineering, inspection, construction or material supply contract or any subcontract in connection with construction of the Project, shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or any part thereof. No officer, employee, Architect, Attorney, Engineer or Inspector of or for Owner, who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of Owner to exercise any executive, supervisory or other similar functions in connection with construction of Project, shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or in any part thereof. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR 3.1

GENERAL

3.1.1 Definition. Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or Contractor's authorized representative. 3.1.2

Performance of Work. Contractor shall perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents.

3.1.3 Obligations to Perform. Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents either by activities or duties of Owner, its agents or employees, including Architect/Engineer, in Owner's administration of Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons other than Contractor. 3.2

REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR

3.2.1 Review by Contractor. Since the Contract Documents are complementary, before starting each portion of the Work, the Contractor shall carefully study and compare the various Drawings and other Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Subparagraph 2.2.1, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering discrepancies in the Contract Documents; however, any discrepancies discovered by the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Owner as a request for information in such form as the Owner may require. 3.2.2 Discrepancies. Any design discrepancies noted by the Contractor during this review shall be reported promptly to the Owner, but it is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations, but any nonconformity discovered by or make known to the Contractor shall be reported promptly to the Owner. 3.2.3 Contract Changes. If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions issued by the Owner in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Subparagraphs 4.4.5 and 4.4.6. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Subparagraphs 3.2.1 and 3.2.2, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. The Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect/Engineer for damages resulting from discrepancies in the Contract Documents or for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents unless the Contractor recognized such discrepancies and knowingly failed to report it to the Owner. 3.2.4 Existing Site Conditions and Utilities. Topography of site and existence and location of utilities indicated on plans are in accordance with best information obtainable but cannot be guaranteed and shall be investigated and verified at site by Contractor before starting work. Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to, and for maintenance and protection of existing utilities and structures to remain. 3.3

SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

3.3.1 Contractor's Supervision. Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using Contractor's best skill and attention. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under Contract, unless Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. Contractor must receive Sheriff’s approval for sequencing and procedures. 3.3.2

Contractor's Responsibilities. Contractor shall be responsible to Owner for acts and omissions of Contractors employees,

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4-7

Part 4

Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work for or on behalf of Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. It is understood and agreed that the relationship of the Contractor to the Owner shall be that of an independent contractor. Nothing herein shall be deemed or construed to (1) make the Contractor the agent, servant or employee of the Owner, or (2) create any partnership, joint venture or other association between the Owner and the Contractor. 3.3.3 Drug & Alcohol Free Work Place. In accordance with Board of Supervisor's Policy C-25, it is the policy of the Board that in order to attain or maintain a contract with the County, each contractor shall agree that while any contractor or the contractor’s employees are performing services for the County on County property, or using County equipment, that the contractor or the contractor’s employees: 1) Shall not be in any way impaired because of being under the influence of alcohol or a drug. 2) Shall not possess an open container of alcohol, consume alcohol, possess alcohol or be under the influence of alcohol and/or an illegal drug. 3) Shall not sell, offer, or provide alcohol or an illegal drug to another person. This policy, as it is relates to contractors, shall be implemented by requiring appropriate contract provisions to be included in any contract between the County and a contractor. 3.3.4 Unknown Utilities. If Contractor, or any Subcontractor, while performing Work discovers utility facilities not identified in Contract Documents, Contractor shall immediately notify Owner in writing and take necessary steps to protect said utilities from damage or immediately repair them if damaged. 3.3.5 Contractor's Inspection. Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed under this Contract to determine that such portions conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. 3.3.6 Contractor's Quality Control. The Contractor shall maintain an effective inspection system and perform such inspections as will ensure that the Work called for by this contract conforms to contract requirements. The Contractor shall maintain complete inspection records and make them available to the Owner. All Work shall be subject to Owner inspection and tests at all places and at all reasonable times before acceptance to ensure strict compliance with the terms of the contract. 3.3.7 Equal Opportunity. To implement County policy to comply with federal, State and local laws effecting equal opportunity, Contractor shall comply with Board of Supervisors' Policy C-17, "Policy for Effecting Equal Opportunities Within San Diego County," and with all applicable federal, State and local laws effecting equal opportunity. 3.3.8 Sexual Harassment. To implement County policy to provide a work environment free of sexual harassment, Contractor shall comply with Board of Supervisors' Policy C-22, "Sexual Harassment Policy," and with all applicable State and federal laws pertaining to sexual harassment or discrimination. 3.3.9 Water Pollution Control. Contractor shall comply with all applicable County, State and federal laws pertaining to water quality as it relates to construction site activities. In accordance with Paragraph 11.2, the Contractor shall indemnify the Owner against any and all fines, penalties or liabilities that result from the Contractor’s failure to comply with the laws and regulations pertaining to water quality. 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS. Unless otherwise provided in Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. 3.4.1 Responsibility for Materials. Contractor shall furnish materials in ample quantities and at such time as to insure uninterrupted progress of Work and store properly and protect as required. Contractor shall be responsible for damage or loss by weather or other causes to materials or Work under this Contract. Materials furnished and installed by the Contractor shall be a specified product or an approved substitute product approved by Change Order according to Subparagraph 3.4.2. A substitute product also includes any product confirmed as equal pursuant to requirements of Subparagraph 3.4.2. 3.4.2

Substitution of Materials.

3.4.2.1 Conditions. The Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of Owner after evaluation and opinion by the Architect/Engineer and in accordance with a Change Order (if necessary). After award of the Contract and within the specified time period, the Owner and the Architect/Engineer will consider a formal request for the substitution of products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth herein. Pursuant to Section 3400 of the Public Contract Code, in any reference in specifications or drawings, where any material, process or article is indicated or specified by grade, patent or proprietary name or by name of manufacturer, such specification shall be deemed to be used for the purpose of facilitating description of material, process or article desired and shall be deemed to be followed by the words, "or equal". Contractor may offer any material, process or article which shall be substantially equal or better in every respect to that indicated or specified by making a request for substitution within thirty-five days after award of the Contract; provided, however, that if material, process or article offered by Contractor is not, in opinion of the owner or Architect/Engineer, substantially equal or better in every respect to that specified, then Contractor must furnish material, process or article specified or one that in the opinion of the owner or Architect/Engineer is substantially equal or better in every respect to that specified. Burden of proof as to equality of any material, process or article shall rest with Contractor. In event that SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4-8

Part 4

Contractor furnishes material, process or article more expensive than that specified, the difference in cost of such material, process or article shall be borne by Contractor. 3.4.2.2 Request for Substitution. In requesting approval of a product substitution, the Contractor shall submit, to the Architect/Engineer, complete descriptive information and evidence leading to a reasonable certainty that the proposed substitution is equal to or better than the specified product. The submittal shall fully document the features, such as, physical size, appearance, function, technical characteristics, affect on other components, code compliance, quality and expected life of the proposed substitution. By making requests for substitutions based on Subparagraph 3.4.2 above, the Contractor: .1 represents that the Contractor has personally investigated the proposed substitute product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified; .2 represents that the Contractor will provide the same warranty for the substitution that the Contractor would for that specified; .3 certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all related costs under this Contract except the Architect's redesign costs, and waives all claims for additional costs related to the substitution which subsequently become apparent; .4 will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making such changes as may be required for the Work to be completed in all respects; and .5 certifies that use of substitute products will not delay the Contractor’s Construction Schedule, and waives all claims for additional contract time. 3.4.2.3 Owner’s Action. Upon the Architect/Engineer’s recommendation to approve a Contractor’s Request for Substitution of Materials, the Owner will prepare and process a Change Order to change the Work. The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work using substitute materials until the Owner has signed a Change Order. If the Architect/Engineer denies approval, the Contractor will be so notified along with the reason for denial. 3.4.3 Prohibited Materials. Materials manufactured or produced in penal or correctional institution shall not be incorporated in Project unless specifically required in Contract Documents. 3.4.4 Title to Materials, Supplies and Equipment. No materials, supplies or equipment for Work under this Contract shall be purchased subject of any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale or other agreement by which an interest therein or in any part thereof is retained by seller or supplier. Contractor warrants good title to all material, supplies and equipment installed or incorporated in Work and agrees upon completion of all Work to deliver premises, together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon, to Owner free from any claims, liens or charges and further agrees that neither Contractor nor any person, firm or corporation furnishing any materials or labor for any Work covered by this Contract shall have any right to a lien upon premises or any improvement or appurtenance thereon, except that Contractor may install metering devices and other equipment of utility companies or of political subdivisions the title to which is commonly retained by utility company or political subdivision. In event of installation of any such metering device or equipment, Contractor shall advise Owner as to ownership thereof. Nothing contained in this Article, however, shall defeat or impair the right of persons furnishing material or labor under any bond given by Contractor for their protection or any rights under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due Contractor in the hands of Owner. Provisions of this Article shall be insured in all subcontracts and material contracts and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing material for Work when no formal contract is entered into for such material. 3.4.5 Contractor's Employees and other persons. Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Contract. Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. The Owner may order the Contractor to remove any person who is incompetent or otherwise objectionable from the Work site. 3.5 WARRANTY. Contractor warrants to Owner that materials and equipment furnished under Contract will be of good quality and new unless otherwise required or permitted by Contract Documents, that Work will be of good quality and free from defects not inherent in quality required or permitted, and that Work will conform with requirements of Contract Documents. Work not conforming to these requirements, including substitutions not properly approved and authorized, may be considered defective. Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, modifications not executed by Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operations, or normal wear and tear under normal usage. If required by Owner or Architect/Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to kind and quality of materials and equipment. 3.6 TAXES. Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for Work or portions thereof provided by Contractor which are legally enacted when bids are received, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. 3.7

PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES

3.7.1 Fees, Licenses and Inspections. Except for approvals, easements, assessments, plan check and building permit furnished by the Owner according to Subparagraph 2.2.2, Contractor shall secure and pay for permits and governmental fees, licenses and SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4-9

Part 4

inspections necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work which are customarily secured after execution of Contract or which are legally required when bids are received. Contractor shall also be responsible for securing and paying for any approval or permit for portions of the Work designed or determined by Contractor or Subcontractor. 3.7.2 Notices. Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on performance of Work. Contractor shall be responsible for all SDG&E fees for review and permits. 3.7.3 Conformance to Laws. It is not Contractor's responsibility to ascertain that Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. However, if Contractor observes that portions of the Contract Documents are at variance therewith, Contractor shall promptly notify Owner and Architect/Engineer in writing, and necessary changes shall be accomplished by appropriate Modification. 3.7.4 Contractor's Responsibility. If Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations without such notice to Owner, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for such Work and shall bear attributable costs. 3.8 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT. Contractor shall not assign this project or any part thereof or any moneys due or to become due thereunder without prior written consent of Owner. No such assignment shall be valid unless it shall contain a provision that funds to be paid to assignee under assignment are subject to prior lien for services rendered or material supplied for performance of the Work called for under this Contract in favor of all persons, firms or corporations rendering such services or supplying such materials. 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT. Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at Project site during performance of Work. The Contractor’s Project site management personnel shall be subject to the approval of the Owner. Superintendent shall represent Contractor, and communications given to superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. Important communications shall be confirmed in writing. Other communications given be similarly confirmed on written request in each case. 3.10

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES

3.10.1 Schedule. Contractor, promptly after being awarded Contract but no later than first request for payment, shall prepare and submit for Architect/Engineer's information and owners approval Contractor's Construction Schedule for the Work. Schedule, that is electronic and intelligent, shall not exceed time limits in the Contract Documents, shall be updated monthly and submitted with each request for payment, shall be related to entire Project to extent required by Contract Documents including Change Order Work, shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work, and shall clearly establish the critical path tasks for the entire schedule. Using the Schedule of Values, Paragraph 9.2, the Contractor shall cost-load the Contractor’s Construction Schedule. The Schedule shall be sufficiently detailed so that Work progress can be clearly documented throughout the entire Project. Contractor shall obtain the Owner’s approval of any subsequent change to the critical path, critical path tasks or cost-loaded data. 3.10.2 Schedule of Submittals. Contractor shall prepare and keep current a Schedule of Submittals which is coordinated with Contractor's Construction Schedule and allows Architect/Engineer reasonable time to review submittals. 3.10.3 Use most recent Schedule. The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent Schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect/Engineer. 3.11 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT SITE. Contractor shall maintain at site one copy of As-Built Drawings, Specifications, addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to record changes and selections made during construction, and in addition approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. All significant changes incorporated into the Work which differ from the Construction Documents shall be noted on the As-Built set. The electronic and intelligent As-Built documents shall be delivered to Owner upon completion of Work and prior to Final Payment. 3.12

SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

3.12.1 Shop Drawings. Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop drawing shall be proved to Project Manager for review and approval. 3.12.2 Product Data. Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. Product data shall be proved to Project Manager for review and approval. 3.12.3 Samples. Samples are physical examples, which illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. If samples are request, they shall be proved to Project Manager for review and approval.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 10

Part 4

3.12.4 Not Contract Documents. Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. The purpose of their submittal is to demonstrate for those portions of the Work for which submittals are required by the Contract Documents the way by which Contractor proposes to conform to information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Review by Architect/Engineer is subject to limitations of Subparagraph 4.3.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect/Engineer is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals, which are not required by the Contract Documents, may be returned by the Architect/Engineer without action. 3.12.5 Contractor's Review. The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve by stamp, sign, and submit to the Architect/Engineer Schedule of Submittals, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents within 35 days after start of Contract and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of Owner or of separate contractors. Thirty-five day limit may be waived if approved in writing by Architect/Engineer or Owner, after request by Contractor, for submittal, which requires sufficient construction to proceed for proper completion of submittal. Submittals, which are not marked as reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents and approved by the Contractor, may be returned by the Architect/Engineer without action. 3.12.6 Contractor’s Verification. By approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, Contractor represents that Contractor has determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and has checked and coordinated information contained within such submittals with requirements of the Work and of Contract Documents. 3.12.7 No Work Before Approval. Contractor shall order no materials or perform no portion of Work requiring submittals and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until respective submittal has been approved by Architect/Engineer. Such Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals. 3.12.8 Deviations From Contract Documents. The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of Contract Documents by Architect/Engineer's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless Contractor has specifically informed Architect/Engineer in writing of such deviation at time of submittal and (1) Architect/Engineer has given written approval to specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop drawings, Product Data Samples, or similar submittals by Architect/Engineer's approval. Shop Drawing submittals that include a request for substitution of materials will be returned without action by the Architect/Engineer. See Subparagraph 3.4.2 for Substitution of Materials. 3.12.9 Revisions to Submittals. Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by Architect/Engineer on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice the Architect/Engineer’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. 3.13 USE OF SITE. Contractor shall confine operations at site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits and Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber site with materials or equipment. 3.14

CUTTING AND PATCHING

3.14.1 Contractor's Responsibility. Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. 3.14.2 Responsibility for Damage and Alteration. Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by Owner or separate contractor except with written consent of Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from Owner or a separate Contractor's consent to cutting or otherwise altering Work. 3.15

CLEANING UP

3.15.1 Cleaning During and at Completion of Work. Contractor shall keep premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, Contractor shall remove from and about the Project waste materials, rubbish, Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall dispose of excess material and debris from construction site in a safe and legal manner to sanitary landfill areas maintained by County, incorporated cities or other public agencies unless otherwise approved by Architect/ Engineer. 3.15.2 Cleaning by Owner. If Contractor fails to clean up as provided in Contract Documents, Owner may do so and cost thereof shall be charged to Contractor. 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK. Contractor shall provide Architect/Engineer and Owner access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 11

Part 4

3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of patent rights and shall hold Owner and Architect/ Engineer harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by Contract Documents or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect/Engineer. However, if Contractor has reason to believe that required design, process or product is an infringement of a patent, Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to Architect/Engineer. 3.18

INDEMNIFICATION OF ARCHITECT/ ENGINEER AND OTHERS

3.18.1 Architect/Engineer and Others. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Architect/ Engineer, and the consultants, agents and employees of each of them, from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself) but only to the extent caused by negligent acts or omissions of Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity which may otherwise be provided under this Contract or which would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Paragraph 3.18. 3.18.2 Obligation Not Limited. In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Paragraph 3.18 by an employee of Contractor, Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, this indemnification obligation under Paragraph 3.18.1 shall not be limited by limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF CONTRACT 4.1

ARCHITECT/ENGINEER

4.1.1 Definition. The Architect/Engineer is the person lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The term "Architect/ Engineer" means the Architect/ Engineer or the Architect/ Engineer's authorized representative. 4.1.2 Duties. Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect/Engineer as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect/Engineer. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. 4.1.3 Replacement. In case of termination of employment of the Architect/Engineer, the Owner shall appoint an Architect/Engineer whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the former Architect/Engineer. 4.1.4

County Employee. The Architect/ Engineer may be an employee of the County or other governmental entity.

4.2

PROJECT MANAGER

4.2.1 Definition. The Project Manager is the person or entity who has been identified in writing by Director of the Department of General Services to serve as the Owner's representative and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. When the Project Manager is an entity, other than a singular person, the term Project Manager includes the Project Manager acting through his authorized representatives as indicated to the Contractor in writing at the preconstruction meeting or whenever changes in personnel assignments occur. 4.2.2

Relationship to Owner. The relationship of the Project Manager to the Owner may be that of an independent contractor.

4.2.3 Duties. The Project Manager shall have authority to administer the Contract, as the Owner's representative, according to the Contract Documents. The Project Manager shall not have authority to change the Contract Work. 4.3

ADMINISTRATION OF CONTRACT

4.3.1 Owner's Representative. The Project Manager will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents, and will be the Owner's Representative (1) during construction, (2) until final payment is due and (3) with the Owner's concurrence, from time during the correction period described in Paragraph 12.2. The Project Manager will advise and consult with the Owner. The Project Manager will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents, unless otherwise modified by written instrument in accordance with other provisions of the Contract.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 12

Part 4

4.3.2 Architect/Engineer's Site Visits. The Architect/Engineer will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of the Contractor’s operations (1) to become generally familiar with and to keep the Owner informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, (2) to endeavor to guard the Owner against defects and deficiencies in the Work, and (3) to determine in general if the Work is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect/Engineer will neither have control over or charge of, not be responsible for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Subparagraph 3.3.1. The Architect/Engineer will be the judge of the performance of the Work and will use his powers under the Contract to enforce its faithful performance. 4.3.3 Control of Work. The Owner and Architect/Engineer will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Owner and Architect/Engineer will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. 4.3.4 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration. Except as otherwise provided in the Contract Document or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Architect/ Engineer and Contractor shall communicate through the Project Manager. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Project Manager. 4.3.5 Application for Payment. Based on Architect/Engineer's evaluations of Contractor's Applications for Payment, Architect/Engineer will review and certify amounts due Contractor, and submit to Owner for approval. 4.3.6 Rejection of Work. Owner and Architect/Engineer will have authority to reject Work, which does not conform to Contract Documents. Whenever the Owner and Architect/Engineer consider it necessary or advisable for implementation of intent of Contract Documents, the Owner will have authority to require additional inspection or testing of Work in accordance with Subparagraphs 13.5.2, 13.5.3 and 13.5.4, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of Owner or Architect/ Engineer nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of Architect/Engineer or Owner to Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons performing portions of the Work. 4.3.7 Action on Submittals. Architect/Engineer will review and approve or take other appropriate action upon Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept expressed in Contract Documents. Architect/Engineer's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness as to cause no delay in Work or in activities of Owner, Contractor or separate contractors while allowing sufficient time in the Architect/Engineer's professional judgement to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for purpose of determining accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of Contractor as required by Contract Documents. Architect/Engineer's review of Contractor's submittals shall not relieve Contractor of obligations under Paragraph 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. Architect/Engineer's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or unless otherwise specifically stated by Architect/Engineer of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. Architect/Engineer approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. 4.3.8 Directions of Changes. Owner will prepare and issue Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize changes in the Work as provided in Article 7. 4.3.9 Inspections for Completion. Architect/ Engineer along with the Owner, will conduct inspections to determine date or dates of Substantial Completion and date of final completion, will receive and review written warranties and related documents required by Contract and assembled by Contractor, and will approve a final Payment upon compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. 4.3.10 Interpretation of Contract Documents. Architect/Engineer will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under and requirements of Contract Documents on written request of Contractor or Owner. Architect/ Engineer's response to such requests will be made with reasonable promptness and within any time limits agreed upon. If no agreement is made concerning the time within which interpretations required of the Architect/Engineer shall be furnished in compliance with this Paragraph 4.3, then delay shall not be recognized on account of failure by the Architect/Engineer to furnish such interpretations until 15 days after written request is made for them. 4.3.11 Interpretations Consistent with Documents. Interpretations and decisions of Architect/Engineer will be consistent with intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents and will be in writing or drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, Architect/Engineer will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions so rendered in good faith. 4.3.12 Aesthetic Effect. Architect/Engineer's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with intent expressed in Contract Documents. SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 13

Part 4

4.4

CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

4.4.1 Definition. A Claim is a demand or assertion by one party seeking, as a matter of right, adjustment or interpretation of Contract terms, payment of money, extension of time or other relief with respect to terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to Contract. Claims must be made by written notice. Responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with party making Claim. 4.4.2 Time Limits on Claims. Claims by either party must be made within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after claimant first recognized condition giving rise to Claim, whichever is later. Claims must be made by written notice. An additional Claim made after initial Claim has been implemented by Change Order will not be considered. Contractor's failure to notify Owner within 21-day period shall be deemed a waiver and relinquishment of claim against Owner. 4.4.3 Continuing Contract Performance. Pending final resolution of a Claim except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Subparagraph 9.7 and Article 14, Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of Contract and Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with Contract Documents. 4.4.4 Claims for Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If conditions are encountered at site which are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions which differ materially from those indicated in Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, which differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of character provided for in Contract Documents, then notice by observing party shall be given to other party promptly before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of conditions. Architect/Engineer will promptly investigate such conditions and, if they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in Contractor' cost of, or item required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract time, or both. If Architect/Engineer determines that conditions at site are not materially different from those indicated in Contract Documents and that no change in terms of Contract is justified, Architect/ Engineer shall so notify Owner and Contractor in writing, stating reasons. Claims by either party in opposition to such determination must be made within 21 days after Architect/Engineer has given notice of decision. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree on adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time adjustment shall be referred to Architect/Engineer for initial determination, subject to further proceedings pursuant to Paragraph 4.5. 4.4.5 Claims for Additional Cost. If Contractor wishes to make Claim for increase in Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Paragraph 10.5. If Contractor believes additional cost is involved for reasons including but not limited to (1) a written interpretation from Architect/Engineer, (2) an order by Owner to stop Work where Contractor was not at fault, (3) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Owner (4) termination of Contract by Owner, (5) Owner's Suspension or (6) other reasonable grounds. Claim shall be filed in accordance with procedure established herein. No claim for damages of any character due to delays caused by adverse weather, acts of God, strikes, fire or unavoidable casualties will be allowed. 4.4.6

Claims for Additional Time

4.4.6.1 Written Notice. If Contractor wishes to make Claim for an increase in Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of Work. In case of a continuing delay only one Claim is necessary. Extensions of time are subject to requirements in Paragraph 8.3. 4.4.6.2 Weather Conditions. If adverse weather conditions are basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time and could not have been reasonably anticipated, and that weather conditions had an adverse effect on critical path scheduled construction tasks. 4.4.7 Injury or Damage to Persons or Property. If either party to Contract suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of other party, or any other parties, employees or agents, or of others for whose acts such party is legally liable, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after first observance. Notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable other party to investigate the matter. If a Claim for additional cost or time related to this Claim is to be asserted, it shall be filed as provided in Subparagraphs 4.4.7 or 4.4.8. 4.4.8 Claims for Consequential Damages. The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes: .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Subparagraph 4.4.8 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 14

Part 4

4.5

RESOLUTION OF CLAIMS AND DISPUTES

4.5.1 Decision of Architect/Engineer. Claims, including those alleging an error or omission by the Architect/Engineer, but excluding those arising under Paragraphs 10.3 and 10.4, shall be referred initially to the Architect/Engineer for decision. An initial decision by the Architect/Engineer shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation, arbitration or litigation of all Claims between Contractor and Owner arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Architect/Engineer with no decision having been rendered by the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. 4.5.2 Owner’s Action on Claims. The Owner will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of the Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Owner is unable to resolve the Claim if the Owner lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim. 4.5.3 Special Information. In evaluating Claims, the Owner may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from Contractor, Architect/Engineer or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist Owner in rendering decision. 4.5.4 Owner’s final action. The Owner will approve or reject Claims by written decision, which shall state the reasons therefor and which shall notify the Contractor of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The approval or rejection of a Claim by the Owner shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and arbitration. 4.5.5 Conditions of Decision. When a written decision of the Owner states that (1) the decision is final but subject to mediation and arbitration and (2) a demand for arbitration of a Claim covered by such decision must be made within 30 days after the date on which the party making the demand receives the final written decision, then failure to demand arbitration within said 30 days period shall result in the Owner’s decision becoming final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor. If the Owner renders a decision after arbitration proceedings have been initiated, such decision may be entered as evidence, but shall not supersede arbitration proceedings unless the decision is acceptable to all parties concerned. 4.5.6 Notification of Surety. Upon receipt of a Claim against the Contractor or at any time thereafter, Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy. 4.6

MEDIATION.

4.6.1 Mediation. Any unresolved claims (demands for monetary compensation or damages) arising or related to the performance of this contract shall be resolved by first submitting such claims to mediation, prior to their being taken to formal arbitration or litigation by any party. Any claim, which is not resolved by mediation, shall be resolved by arbitration pursuant to Paragraph 4.7 Arbitration. Mediation shall be initiated by filing a written notice requesting mediation. All such claims shall be filed and documented in conformance with Paragraph 4.4 Claims and Disputes. All mediation shall terminate not later than 180 days after the date of service in person or by mail on the Contractor of the final written decision by the Owner on the claim. Mediation of any claim shall not relieve the Contractor of the requirement to file a Complaint in Arbitration within the time period specified in Paragraph 4.7. 4.6.2

The Owner shall have the right to terminate the contract for cause or convenience at any time without regard to mediation.

4.6.3 Mediation shall be conducted utilizing the University of San Diego Municipal Dispute Resolution Group, American Arbitration Association, or by any other neutral organization agreed to by the parties. The organization conducting the mediation shall hereinafter be known as Administrator. .1 Costs. The costs for all mediation, including the administrative fees and Mediator compensation, shall be shared equally by all parties. Fees shall be jointly negotiated by all parties directly with the Administrator. The expenses of witnesses for any party shall be paid by the party producing such witnesses. .2 Selection of Mediator. A single mediator, acceptable to all parties, shall be used to mediate the dispute. The mediator will be knowledgeable in construction aspects and will be selected from lists furnished by the Administrator. The initial mediation session shall commence within 30 days of filing, unless otherwise agreed by the parties, or at the direction of the mediator. .3 Conduct of Mediation Sessions. All mediation sessions shall be conducted after the project is field complete unless a claim exceeds $25,000 and the project has in excess of four months remaining until field completion, or unless all parties agree to immediate mediation. Mediation hearings will be conducted in an informal manner and discovery will not be allowed unless agreed to by all parties. All discussions, statements or admissions will be confidential to the proceedings and may not be used for any other purpose as it relates to the party’s legal position.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 15

Part 4

Spokesperson shall be limited to owner, contractor, subcontractor and supplier personnel and their consultants. The contractor, subcontractor or supplier may have an attorney present and shall advise the other parties no less than five (5) working days before the mediation so that the other parties may also have their attorneys present. Any resultant agreements from mediation shall be documented in writing, as agreed upon during the mediation, and may be used as the basis for a change order or other directive as appropriate. All mediation results and documentation shall be non-binding and inadmissible for any purpose in any legal proceeding, unless such admission is otherwise agreed in writing by all parties. Mediators shall not be subject to any subpoena or liability and their actions shall not be subject to discovery. 4.7

ARBITRATION

4.7.1 Provided both parties to this Agreement specifically consent thereto in writing, any controversy, claim, dispute or other matter in question (collectively, "Claim") between the parties to this Agreement, arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the breach thereof, including any Claim based on contract, tort, or statute, may be decided by final and binding arbitration conducted at a location determined by an arbitrator in San Diego, California, in accordance with the provisions of this Article. 4.7.2 Following agreement by the parties to arbitrate a Claim, a Notice of Demand for Arbitration shall be filed in writing by either party with the other party to the Agreement, and with Judicial Arbitration & Mediation Services, Inc. ("JAMS"), or with another mutually-acceptable dispute resolution entity which utilizes retired judges as arbitrators; provided, however, that nothing herein shall be construed to allow such arbitration proceeding to take place after the date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. The JAMS' (or other acceptable arbitrator's) fee necessary to initiate the arbitration shall be remitted in equal portions by Owner and Contractor, however, the costs of arbitration shall ultimately be borne as determined by the arbitrator under the rules described in section 4.6.3, below. Unless otherwise directed by Owner, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Agreement pending final resolution of any arbitration. 4.7.3 Any such arbitration agreed to by the parties shall be administered by JAMS or by another dispute resolution entity which utilizes retired judges as arbitrators. Any such arbitration shall be conducted in accordance with Section 10240.2 et.seq. of the California Public Contract Code, and the then existing Rules of Practice and Procedure of JAMS. In the event of any conflict between Public Contract Code arbitration procedures and JAMS' arbitration procedures, the Public Contract Code arbitration procedures shall control. The following additional modifications shall be made to the aforementioned procedures: .1 Discovery shall be allowed in any such arbitration to the extent provided in California Code of Civil Procedures Sections 1283.05 and 1283.1; however, each party to the arbitration shall be entitled to take no more than two (2) depositions for discovery purposes in any arbitration proceeding. .2

Any sureties of the Contractor shall be bound by any arbitration award and may join in any arbitration proceeding.

.3 Unless the Owner and Contractor otherwise agree, no arbitration hearing shall be scheduled prior to Final Completion by Contractor of its duties under this Agreement. .4 Upon motion of either party, any arbitration arising out of or relating to this Agreement may include by consolidation or joinder, or in any other manner, any other parties whose interest or responsibility may be material to the dispute between the Owner and the Contractor, or any other action involving common questions or law or fact, whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration. The impossibility of such joinder, however, shall not invalidate the results of any arbitration conducted pursuant hereto. 4.7.4 Consent by both parties to submit one Claim to arbitration shall not be deemed to be consent by both parties to submit all Claims to arbitration, unless the parties specifically so agree in writing, or unless joinder of a Claim is required to allow complete relief to be accorded in arbitration, as provided below. The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered thereupon in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. The parties shall abide by the determination of the arbitrator with respect to any dispute hereunder and with respect to payment of the costs, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, of arbitration. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 5.1

DEFINITIONS

5.1.1 Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with Contractor to perform a portion of the Work or render service to Contractor at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. Each Subcontractor shall be properly licensed by the State of California to perform Work contemplated to be performed under his direction. 5.1.2 Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work or render a service to Subcontractor at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor' is referred to throughout the Contract SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 16

Part 4

Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. Each Sub-subcontractor shall be properly licensed by the State of California to perform Work contemplated to be performed under his direction. 5.1.3 Labor Provisions are any requirements regarding wage rates, hours of Work, travel and subsistence payments, records, apprentices, safety and health, affirmative action requirements and equal employment opportunity, as set forth in the Contract Documents, or as required by law, rules and regulations. 5.2

AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK

5.2.1 Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act. If the Contractor fails to specify a subcontractor or specifies more than one subcontractor for the same portion of Work to be performed under the contract in excess of one-half of one percent of the contract amount, the Contractor shall be deemed to have acknowledged that it is fully qualified to perform the portion of the Work, and shall perform such portion and shall not be permitted to subcontract such portion. Substitution of subcontractors is not permitted except as provided in the California Public Contract Code, Section 4100 et seq. 5.3

SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS

5.3.1 By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of Work to be performed by Subcontractor to be bound to Contractor by terms of Contract Documents, and to assume toward Contractor all obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor s Work, which Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward Owner and Architect/Engineer. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of Owner and Architect/Engineer under the Contract Documents with respect to Work to be performed by Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against Contractor that Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against Owner. Where appropriate, Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Subsubcontractors. Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of Contract Documents to which Subcontractor will be bound, and upon written request of Subcontractor, identify to Subcontractor terms and conditions of proposed subcontract agreement which may be at variance with Contract Documents. Subcontractors shall similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Subsubcontractors. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 6.1

OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS

6.1.1 Separate Construction or Operations. Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to Project with Owner's own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by Owner, Contractor shall make such Claim as provided elsewhere in Contract Documents. 6.1.2 Separate Contracts. When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of Project or other construction or operations on site, the term "Contractor" in Contract Documents in each case shall mean Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. 6.1.3 Coordination of Work. Owner shall provide for coordination of activities of Owner's own forces and of each separate contractor with Work of Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and Owner in reviewing their construction schedules when directed to do so. Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after joint review and mutual agreement. Construction schedules shall then constitute schedules to be used by Contractor, separate contracts and Owner until subsequently revised. 6.1.4 Owner Performed Construction or Operations. Unless otherwise provided in Contract Documents, when Owner performs construction or operations related to Project with Owner's own forces, Owner shall be deemed to be subject to same obligations and to have same rights which apply to Contractor under Conditions of Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. 6.1.5 Owner's Right to Clean Up. If a dispute arises among Contractor, separate contractors and Owner as to responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, Owner may clean up and allocate cost among those responsible. 6.2

MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY

6.2.1 Cooperation with Owner and Separate Contractors. Contractor shall afford Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities and shall connect and SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 17

Part 4

coordinate Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by Contract Documents. 6.2.2 Report Defects. If part of Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by Owner or a separate contractor, Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of Work, promptly report to Project Manager apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that Owner's or separate contractors' completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive Contractor's Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. 6.2.3 Cost for Delays. The Owner shall be reimbursed by the Contractor for costs incurred by the Owner which are payable to a separate contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction of the Contractor. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs incurred by the Contractor because of delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction of a separate contractor. 6.2.4 Remedy Damage. Contractor shall promptly remedy damage wrongfully caused by Contractor to completed or partially completed construction or to property of Owner or separate contractors as provided in Subparagraph 10.2.5. 6.2.5 Mutual Responsibility. The Owner and each separate contractor shall have same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for Contractor in Paragraph 3.14. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN WORK 7.1

GENERAL

7.1.1 Methods. Changes in Work may be accomplished after execution of Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Field Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in Contract Documents. 7.1.2 Basis of Change. A Change Order and a Field Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect/Engineer; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect/Engineer and may or not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Owner alone. 7.1.3 Work Performance. Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Field Change Order, or Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work. Contractor is not authorized to make changes to the Work until the Owner signs a Change Order, Field Change Order, Change Directive, or Minor Change. 7.1.4 Unit Prices. If stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are so changed in a proposed Change Order, Field Change Order, or Construction Change Directive that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. 7.1.5

Direct Costs. Direct Costs for the purposes of Subparagraph 7.2 and 7.3 shall be limited to the following:

.1 Direct Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' or workmen's compensation insurance; .2

Direct Cost of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;

.3

Direct Cost of rental machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

7.1.6 Contractor Markup. Contractor Markup is compensation for the cost of profit and overhead including the cost of bonds, insurance, engineering, supervision, jobsite overhead, home office overhead, small tools, and all other costs not included in clauses 1, 2, and 3 above. Contractor Markups are applied to the total of Direct Costs as follows: .1

For Work performed by the Contractor: in the amount equal to 15% for overhead and profit.

.2 For Work performed by Subcontractor(s): in the amount equal to 15% for the Subcontractor and 5% for the Contractor for overhead and profit. .3 For Work performed by any tier Sub-subcontractor(s): in the amount equal to 15% for the Sub-subcontractor, 5% for the Subcontractor, and 5% for the Contractor for overhead and profit. .4

In no case shall the total markups exceed 25% of the Direct Cost regardless of the number of contract tiers.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 18

Part 4

7.1.7 Net Change. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for a deletion or change, which results in a net decrease in Contract Sum shall be, net actual Direct Cost as confirmed by the Owner. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the Contractor Markup shall be figured on basis of Direct Cost net increase, if any, with respect to that change. 7.2

CHANGE ORDERS

7.2.1 Definition. Change Order is a written instrument issued by Owner and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect/Engineer, stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1

change in Work;

.2

amount of adjustment, if any, in Contract Sum; and

.3

extent of adjustment, if any, in Contract Time.

7.2.2

Adjustment to Contract Sum. The adjustment to Contract Sum shall be based on one of following methods:

.1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation. Lump sum shall be based upon (1) agreed upon estimated Direct Costs of the extra Work plus (2) Contractor’s Markup, as provided in Subparagraphs 7.1.6.

7.3

.2

unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, without additional markups;

.3

Actual Direct Costs for time and materials plus Contractor’s Markup, as provided in Subparagraph 7.1.6. CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES

7.3.1 Definition. A Construction Change Directive is a written order issued by the Owner and signed by the Owner and Architect/Engineer, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. 7.3.2 Absence of Agreement. A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. 7.3.3 Adjustment to Contract Sum. If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to Contract Sum, the methods used in determining adjustments to the Contract Sum may include those listed in Subparagraph 7.2.2. 7.3.4 Work Performance. Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Owner of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. 7.3.5 Contractor's Agreement. A Construction Change Directive signed by Contractor indicates the agreement of the Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. 7.3.6 Contractor's Disagreement. If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method of adjustment shall be actual Direct Costs for labor, material, and equipment plus fixed Contractor’s Markup. In such case the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Owner may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. 7.3.7 Final Action. When the Owner and Contractor agree concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded by preparation and execution of an appropriate Change Order. 7.4

CHANGE ORDER PROCESS

7.4.1 Initiation of Change. A change in the Work may be initiated by the Owner issuing a request for Change Proposal or by the Contractor issuing a letter within seven days from discovery of a condition requiring a change in the Contract price or time for performance. 7.4.2

Contractor's Proposal. The Contractor shall submit the completed Change Proposal within fifteen (15) days after receipt

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 19

Part 4

of the request. Schedule limitations may require a quicker response. If Contractor fails to submit the Change Proposal as required, the Owner may order the Contractor in writing to proceed with the Work immediately and resolve the costs using the actual Direct Cost plus Contractor’s Markup method in Subparagraph 7.3.6. The Owner may require change cost breakdown using a prescribed form. 7.5 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK. The Owner will have authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor. The Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly. 7.6

FIELD CHANGE ORDERS

7.6.1 Definition. Field Change Order is a written instrument issued by Owner and signed by the Owner and Contractor stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1

change in Work;

.2

amount of adjustment, if any, in Contract Sum.

7.6.2

Adjustment to Contract Sum. The adjustment to Contract Sum shall be based on one of following methods:

.1 mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation. Lump sum shall be based upon (1) agreed upon estimated Direct Costs of the extra Work plus (2) Contractor's Markup, as provided in Subparagraphs 7.1.6. .2

unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, without additional markups.

7.7 PUBLIC DISCLOSURE OF GIFTS AND CAMPAIGN CONTRIBUTIONS. Note: This Special Condition does not apply to the initial contract for the project. It only applies to Contract Change Orders that require Board of Supervisor approval. 7.7.1 San Diego County Charter Section 1000.1 requires that when a service contract is to be considered by the Board of Supervisors for approval, amendment, or extension, the Contractor and the registered lobbyists of the Contractor shall make the following disclosures: .1 All gifts reportable pursuant to the provisions of the Political Reform Act to any member of the Board of Supervisors or to the immediate family of such member during the year preceding the date of the disclosure. .2 All federal, State and local campaign contributions made to any member of the Board of Supervisors or his or her controlled committees during the year preceding the date of the disclosure. .3 7.7.2

Or a disclosure that there are no gifts or campaign contributions to disclose. Disclosure requirements:

.1 The Contractor’s disclosure shall include gifts and campaign contributions from any natural person or entity constituting the Contractor and from any principal owner and principal officer of the Contractor. .2

Contractor shall submit a written certification that the disclosure requirements have been complied with.

.3

This Clause does not apply to contracts between the County of San Diego and other governmental entities.

.4 The disclosure shall be made at least four (4) calendar days prior to the date of the meeting of the Board of Supervisors at which the approval, amendment, or extension is to be considered by the Board. .5 The required written disclosure shall be filed with the Clerk of the Board of Supervisors, on a form prescribed by the Clerk. The Clerk of the Board shall make all disclosures available to the public on the County’s Internet site after they are filed with the Clerk and prior to the day on which the Board acts on the service contract. .6 Supplemental Disclosures. Gifts or campaign contributions made subsequent to the required written disclosure, but prior to the Board’s decision, and any gift or campaign contribution inadvertently not included in the written disclosure, shall be disclosed in writing at the meeting of the Board of Supervisors prior to the Board’s decision to approve, amend or extend the service contract. .7 Failure to Comply. If subsequent to Board approval of an amendment or extension of the service contract, the disclosure is found to be incomplete or inaccurate due to intentional misconduct or gross negligence, the service contract may be SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 20

Part 4

voided at the discretion of the Board of Supervisors. .8 Contract Voidable. If subsequent to approval, amendment or extension of this contract by the Board of Supervisors, the Board finds that the disclosure required by San Diego County Charter Section 1000.1 is substantially incomplete or inaccurate due to intentional misconduct or gross negligence of the Contractor or the Contractor’s registered lobbyist, the contract may be voided at the sole discretion of the Board of Supervisors. All terms and conditions of the contract, including the County’s obligation to pay for services received, shall remain in effect until the effective date of the Board’s action to void the contract, and all contractual provisions set forth in the contract that by their terms survive the expiration or termination of the contract shall continue to remain in effect. .9 Cost of Implementation. The County of San Diego’s cost for implementing the disclosures required by this clause shall be paid by the Contractor at the time the initial disclosure is filed with the Clerk of the Board. .10 Disclosure Forms are available at the Clerk of the Board’s office at 1600 Pacific Highway, Room 402 and on the Clerk of the Board’s Internet Site (www.co.san-diego.ca.us/cnty/cntydepts/general/cob/ocd/index.html). Original copies of the Disclosure Forms are to be filed at the Clerk of the Board’s office. ARTICLE 8 TIME 8.1

DEFINITIONS

8.1.1 Contract Time. Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in Contract Documents beginning with the Notice to Proceed and ending with the Substantial Completion of Work. The Contract Time period is specified in Part 5, Section 012000 – 1.2 of the Division 1 General Requirements 8.1.2 Date of commencement of Work is the date established in Notice to Proceed letter from Owner. Date shall not be postponed by failure to act by Contractor or of persons or entities for which Contractor is responsible. 8.1.3 Date of Substantial Completion is date certified by Architect/Engineer in accordance with Paragraph 9.8. Refer to Part 5, Section 011000 – 1.1.D.1 of the Division 1 General Requirements. 8.1.4 Working Day. The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean days between and including Monday through Friday and not include public holidays and weekends, unless otherwise specifically defined in paragraph 8.2.4. 8.2

PROGRESS AND COMPLETION

8.2.1 Contract Time. Time limits stated in Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, Contractor confirms that Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. Refer to Part 5, Section 013000 – 1.3 of the Division 1 General Requirements. 8.2.2 Commencement of Work. Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on site or elsewhere prior to effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by Contractor. Date of commencement of Work shall not be changed by effective date of such insurance. 8.2.3 Proceed with Work. Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within Contract Time. 8.2.4 Weekend and Holiday Work. Contractor shall not work at Project site on Saturdays, Sundays, and holidays unless Project Manager is first notified at least two (2) working days before, and Project Manager's written approval is obtained before beginning work with the exception of the mandatory Saturday and Sunday cutover, refer to Part 5, Section 013000 – 1.2.B.14 of the Division 1 General Requirements. 8.3

DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME

8.3.1

Definitions. As used herein, the following terms shall have the following meanings:

.1 "Excusable Non-Compensable Delay" means any unforeseeable delay of completion of the Work beyond the expiration of the Contract Time caused by conditions beyond the control and without the fault or negligence of either the Contractor or the Owner, such as strikes, embargoes, fire, unavoidable casualties, unusual delays in transportation, national emergency, and abnormally severe weather conditions in which the Work cannot continue. An Excusable Non-Compensable Delay may entitle the Contractor to an extension of the Contract Time, in accordance with Subparagraphs 8.3.2 and 8.3.6, but shall not entitle the Contractor to any adjustment in the Contract Sum. SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 21

Part 4

.2 "Excusable-Compensable Delay" means any unforeseeable delay of the completion of the Work beyond the expiration date of the Contract Time caused by the gross negligence or willful acts of the Owner, such as Owner-directed changes, differing site conditions, or suspension of the Work, and which delay is unreasonable under the circumstances involved and not within the contemplation of the parties. A Compensable Delay may entitle the Contractor to an extension of the Contract Time, in accordance with Subparagraph 8.3.2, but subject to Subparagraph 8.3.6, and/or an adjustment of the Contract Sum, subject to Subparagraph 8.3.3. Except as provided herein, the Contractor shall have no claim for damage or compensation for any delay, interruption, hindrance, or disruption of the Work. .3 "Unexcusable Delay" means any foreseeable delay of the completion of the Work beyond the expiration of the Contract Time caused by conditions within the control of the Contractor, including performance of the Contractor and Subcontractors, timely material delivery, financial inability of the Contractor or any subcontractors, and any default of any subcontractor without limitation. An Unexcusable Delay shall not entitle the Contractor to an extension of the Contract Time or an adjustment of the Contract Sum. 8.3.2 Claims for Adjustment of the Contract Time for Delays. The Contractor may make a claim for an extension of the Contract Time, for an Excusable Non-Compensable or Compensable Delay, in accordance with applicable provision of Paragraph 4.4, subject to the following: .1 If an Excusable Non-Compensable Delay and an Excusable Compensable Delay occur concurrently, the maximum extension of the Contract Time shall be the number of days from the commencement of the first delay to the cessation of the delay which ends last. The Excusable-Non-Compensable delay shall take priority. .2 If an Unexcusable Delay occurs con-currently with either an Excusable Non-Compensable Delay or an ExcusableCompensable Delay, the maximum extension of the Contract Time shall be the number of days, if any, by which the Excusable NonCompensable Delay or Excusable-Compensable Delay exceeds the Unexcusable Delay. .3 If an Unexcusable Delay occurs concurrently with both an Excusable Non-Compensable Delay and an ExcusableCompensable Delay, the maximum extension in the Contract Time shall be the number of days, if any, by which the number of days determined pursuant to Subparagraph 8.3.2.1 exceeds the number of days of the Unexcusable Delay. 8.3.3 Claims for Adjustment of the Contract Sum for Delays. For a Excusable-Compensable Delay, the Contractor shall only be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum in an amount equal to the actual additional labor costs, material costs, and unavoidable equipment costs incurred by the Contractor as a result of the Compensable Delay, plus the actual additional wages or salaries and Fringe Benefits and Payroll Taxes of supervisory and administrative personnel necessary and directly employed at the Project site for the supervision of the Work during the period of Compensable Delay. In no event shall Owner compensate Contractor for any "extended overhead," such as lost profits or finance charges. To be entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Sum for Compensable Delay, the Contractor shall comply with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.4 through 4.6. Except as provided herein, the Contractor shall have no claim for damage or compensation for any delay, interruption, hindrance, or disruption. 8.3.4 Rights of the Parties. The parties agree that the Owner's exercise of its rights to order changes in the Work, regardless of the extent and number of changes, or to suspend the Work, is within the contemplation of the parties and shall not be the basis for any Claim for Compensable Delay. The rights of the Contractor to adjustments of the Contract Time and the Contract Sum, based on changes ordered in the Work or suspension of the Work, shall be solely governed by the provisions of Articles 7 and 14, respectively. 8.3.5 Earlier Delays. The determination of whether a delay is an Excusable Non-Compensable Delay, Excusable-Compensable Delay, or Unexcusable Delay shall not be affected by the fact that any earlier delay occurred, regardless of fault or causation. 8.3.6 Critical Path Delays. An adjustment of the Contract Time will be made only for delays that affect Work activities on the critical path of the Contract Schedule. 8.4

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES. This project has two specific requirements for liquidated damages.

LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR CRITICAL CUTOVER FROM OLD SWITCHGEAR TO NEW SWITCHGEAR. If the cutover is not performed in the time allowed under paragraph 1.12A of Section 16010 Basic Electrical Requirements, it is understood that Owner will suffer damage. It being impractical and infeasible to determine amount of actual damage, in light of the impossibility of predicting the effect of the particular delay on the public welfare, it is agreed that Contractor shall pay to Owner as fixed and liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the sum of $800 per hour for each hour of delay until cutover is completed and accepted, maximum $5,000 for each calendar day. Contractor and Contractor Surety shall be liable for the amount thereof. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES FOR WORK NOT COMPLETED WITHIN CONTRACT TIME. If any Work other than the cutover is not completed within Contract Time specified in, paragraph1.2A of Section 012000, Technical Specifications, it is understood that Owner will suffer damage. It being impractical and infeasible to determine amount of actual damage, in light of the impossibility of predicting the effect of the particular delay on the public welfare, it is agreed that Contractor shall pay to Owner as fixed and liquidated damages, and not as a penalty, the sum $1000 for each calendar day of delay until Work is completed and accepted. Contractor and Contractor Surety shall be liable for the amount thereof. SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 22

Part 4

ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9.1 CONTRACT SUM. Contract Sum is stated in Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is total amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES. Before the first Application for Payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a Schedule of Values allocated to various portions of the Work prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Owner may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Owner, along with the cost-loaded Contractor’s Construction Schedule shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 9.3

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

9.3.1 Submittal Times. Not later than the fifth day of each month, Contractor shall submit to Owner an itemized Application for Payment for operations completed in accordance with Schedule Of Values. Cost line items for Work complete shall be determined by the cost-loaded Construction Schedule, see Paragraph 3.10.1. 9.3.1.1 Payment for Changes. Such application may include requests for payment on account of changes in Work which have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives but not yet included in Change Orders. 9.3.1.2 Payment Exclusions. Such applications shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay to a Subcontractor or material supplier because of dispute or other reason. 9.3.2 Stored Materials. If approved in advance by the Owner, partial payments may be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site in a bonded warehouse at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures and invoices satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. 9.3.3 Payment for Stored Materials. Payments for stored materials may be made for up to 70 percent of the invoice value, less retainage, for items safely delivered and securely stored as required herein. It is Contractor's responsibility to prove that it is in the Owner's best interest to include stored materials in the Application for Payment. Any payment shall not be construed as acceptance of such materials nor relieve the Contractor from sole responsibility for the care and protection of such materials; nor relieve the Contractor from risk of loss to such materials from any cause whatsoever; nor relieve the Contractor from its obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract; nor act as a waiver of the right of the Owner to require fulfillment of all terms of the Contract. 9.3.4 Contractor Warranties. The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. 9.3.5 Previous Payments. After initial payment, Contractor shall sign a certificate with each payment request which stipulates that all amounts have been paid by Contractor for Work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner. 9.4

CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT

9.4.1 Review of Application. The Owner will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, conduct a concurrent review with the Architect/Engineer and either issue a Certificate for Payment, for such amount as the Architect/ Engineer determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor in writing of the reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Subparagraph 9.5.1. 9.4.2 Representation by Architect/ Engineer. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect/Engineer to the Owner, based on the Architect/Engineer's observations at the site and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that, to the best of the Architect/ Engineer knowledge, information and belief, quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect/Engineer. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 23

Part 4

Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect/Engineer or Owner has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. 9.4.3 Stop Notice Retainage. An amount equaling one hundred twenty-five (125%) percent of the value of the Work related to any Stop Notice shall be withheld from payments applied for by the Contractor until the Stop Notice is cleared or removed. 9.4.4 Retainage. From each progress estimate ten (10%) percent will be deducted and retained by the Owner, and the remainder, less the amount of all previous payments, will be paid to the Contractor. After fifty (50%) percent of the Work is satisfactory, at the Owner's discretion, the deduction to be made from the remaining progress estimate may be limited to ten (10%) percent of the first half of the total contract amount. 9.4.5 Water Pollution damage Retainage. In addition to the Retainage as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.4, the Owner will deduct and retain an amount equal to the value of any fine, penalty or damage, imposed upon the Owner by any third party agency, that results from the Contractor’s failure to comply with the laws and regulations pertaining to water quality. The retainage will be retained until the fine, penalty or damage is satisfied, cleared, or removed. 9.5

DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION

9.5.1 Certifications Withheld. The Architect/Engineer, or Owner may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect/Engineer's or Owner's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Subparagraph 9.4.2 cannot be made. If unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Owner will notify the Contractor as provided in Subparagraph 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Owner cannot agree on a revised amount, the Owner will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect/Engineer is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Owner may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Owner's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because of: .1

defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by Contractor; .3

failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment;

.4

reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5

damage to the Owner or another contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7

Failure of the Contractor to maintain and update project As-Built documents.

.8

Failure of the Contractor to submit schedules or their updates as required by the Contract Documents.

.9

Persistent failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.

9.5.2 Release of Certificates. When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. 9.6

PROGRESS PAYMENTS

9.6.1 Procedure. After the Owner has issued a Certificate for Payment, payment shall be made in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents. 9.6.2 Contractor's Actions. The Contractor shall promptly pay each Subcontractor, upon receipt of payment from the Owner, out of the amount paid to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work, the amount to which said Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of such Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-contractors in similar manner.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 24

Part 4

9.6.3 Information Furnished to Subcontractors. The Owner will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. 9.6.4 Payment to Subcontractors. Neither the Owner nor Architect/Engineer shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor except as may otherwise be required by law. 9.6.5 Payment to Material Suppliers. Payment to material suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Subparagraphs 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. 9.6.6 Exceptions. A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT. Subject to the withholding provisions of Subparagraph 9.4, the Owner shall pay the Contractor the amount set forth in the Certificate for Payment no later than twenty one (21) days after the issuance of the Certificate for Payment. 9.8

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

9.8.1 Definition. Substantial completion is the stage in progress of Work when Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with Contract Documents so Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. Only incidental corrective Work and any final cleaning, beyond that needed for the Owner's full use, may remain. Notwithstanding any provisions of the foregoing to the contrary, Substantial Completion shall not be deemed to have occurred until (i) any certificates or governmental approvals and permits required for Owner to occupy or utilize the Work for its intended purposes have been obtained, and (ii) all necessary building services are available. 9.8.2 Contractor's Punch List. When Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, Contractor shall prepare and submit to Owner a comprehensive Punch List of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Contractor shall proceed promptly to complete and correct items on the list. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter responsibility of Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with Contract Documents. 9.8.3 Review by Owner and Architect/ Engineer. Upon receipt of Contractor's Punch List, Owner and Architect/Engineer will make an inspection to determine whether Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by Owner. In such case, Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection to determine Substantial Completion. 9.8.4 Preparation of Certificate. When Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, Owner will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion which shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which Contractor shall finish all items on Punch List accompanying the Certificate. 9.8.5 Contractor’s acceptance and Payment. Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to Contractor for written acceptance of responsibilities assigned in such Certificate. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Owner shall proceed, according to Paragraphs 2.4 and 12.2, with any corrections of punch list Work that is not completed within (30) calendar days after Substantial Completion. 9.8.6

Warranty Start Date. All warranties required by Contract Documents shall commence on date of Substantial Completion.

9.9

PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE

9.9.1 Owner's Occupancy. Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with Contractor. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage if any, security, maintenance, heat utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning period for correction and final completion of Work required by Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a Punch List to the Architect/Engineer as provided under Subparagraph 9.8.2. Consent of Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor. 9.9.2 Inspection. Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, Contractor, Owner and Architect/Engineer shall jointly inspect area to be occupied or portion of Work to be used in order to determine and record condition of the Work. 9.9.3

Work not Acceptable. Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 25

Part 4

not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with requirements of Contract Documents. 9.10

FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT

9.10.1

Definition. Upon receipt of:

.1

written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance,

.2 notification that all governmental approvals necessary for Owner to use or occupy the Work for its intended purpose, including, as applicable, a certificate of occupancy issued by the governing jurisdiction, have been obtained, and .3

final Application for payment,

Owner and Architect/Engineer will promptly make such inspection and, when they find the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, Architect/Engineer will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect/ Engineer's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect/Engineer's observations and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in said final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect/Engineer's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Subparagraph 9.10.4 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. 9.10.2 Notice of Completion. Upon satisfactory completion of the foregoing requirements, the Owner will prepare and have recorded a Notice of Completion. The date of Final Completion is the date that the Notice of Completion is recorded. 9.10.3 Final Payment. Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until Contractor submits to Owner: .1 an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which Owner might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, .2 a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until a 30 day's prior written notice has been given to the Owner, .3 a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, .4

consent of surety to final payment,

.5 if required by Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to extent and in such form as may be designated by Owner, and .6

acceptance by Owner of all warranties, operation-maintenance manuals, and As-Built documentation.

If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by Owner, Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner against such claim. If such claim remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such claim, including all costs and reasonable attorney's fees. The final payment for value of the Work done under this Contract, if unencumbered, shall be made thirty-five (35) calendar days after the Owner records the Notice of Completion. 9.10.4 Delay After Completion. If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, Owner shall upon application by Contractor and approval by Architect/Engineer, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, written consent of surety to payment of balance due for that portion of Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Architect/Engineer prior to approval of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. 9.10.5 Waiver of Claims by Owner. The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from: .1

liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;

.2

failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 26

Part 4

.3

terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents.

9.10.6 Waiver of Claims by Contractor. Acceptance of final payment by Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at time of final Application for Payment. 9.11

PAYMENT OF WITHHELD FUNDS

9.11.1 Withheld Funds Deposited. At request and expense of Contractor, securities equivalent to amount withheld shall be deposited with public agency, or with a State or Federally chartered bank as escrow agent, who shall then pay such moneys to Contractor. Upon satisfactory completion of Contract, securities shall be returned to Contractor. 9.11.2 Eligible Securities. Securities eligible for investment under this section shall include those listed in Government Code Section 16430, bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit, interest bearing demand deposit accounts, standby letters of credit, or any other security mutually agreed to by Contractor and Owner. 9.11.3 Owner of Securities. Contractor shall be beneficial owner of any securities substituted for moneys withheld and shall receive any interest thereon. 9.11.4 Escrow Form. The escrow agreement used shall be null, void, and unenforceable unless it is substantially similar to the form of escrow agreement attached hereto as Exhibit "A": ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTION AND PROGRAMS. Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with performance of Contract. 10.2

SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY

10.2.1 Safety. Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: .1

employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off site, under care, custody or control of Contractor or Contractor's Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; and .3 other property at site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in course of construction. 10.2.2 Compliance with Laws. Contractor shall give notices and comply with applicable laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss. 10.2.3 Safety and Protection. Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. Contractor shall provide a site specific safety plan. 10.2.4 Hazardous Materials or Equipment. When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. 10.2.5 Remedy Damage and Loss. Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by Contractor, Subcontractor, sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which Contractor is responsible under Clauses 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect/Engineer or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. Foregoing obligations of Contractor are in addition to Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18. 10.2.6 Accident Prevention. Before commencement of Work, Contractor shall submit evidence of their Injury & Illness Prevention Program (IIPP) and shall designate a responsible member of Contractor's organization at site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by Contractor in writing to Owner. SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 27

Part 4

10.2.7 Overloaded Construction. Contractor shall not load or permit any part of construction or site to be loaded so as to endanger its safety. 10.3

HAZARDOUS MATERIALS

10.3.1 General. If reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect/Engineer in writing. 10.3.2 Verify by Laboratory. The Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to verify that it has been rendered harmless. Adjustments, if any, to the Contract Time or Contract Sum shall be accomplished as provided in Article 7 and Article 8. 10.4 CONTRACTOR’S MATERIALS. The Owner shall not be responsible under Paragraph 10.3 for materials and substances brought to the site by the Contractor unless such materials or substances were required by the Contract Documents. 10.5 EMERGENCIES. In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, Contractor shall act, at Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by Contractor on account of emergency shall be determined as provided in Paragraph 4.4 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1

CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE

11.1.1 Contractor's Insurance. Without limiting Contractor's indemnification obligations under this Contract, Contractor shall provide and maintain at its own expense, during the term of this Contract, or as may be further required herein, the insurance specified in this Article. Contractor's insurance shall protect Contractor from claims which may arise out of or result from Contractor's operations under the Contract and for which Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations are performed by Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable. 11.1.2 Required Policies. Before commencement of the Work, Contractor shall submit Certificates of Insurance, and additional insured endorsements, acceptable to Owner evidencing that Contractor has obtained for the period of the Contract insurance in the following forms of coverage and minimum amounts: A. Required General Liability Insurance Coverage. Contractor shall procure either Comprehensive General Liability Insurance or Commercial General Liability Insurance in the amounts and form set forth below: (1) Comprehensive General Liability Insurance. A policy of Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with a combined single limit (CSL) per occurrence of $1,000,000 per occurrence; OR (2) Commercial General Liability Insurance. A policy of Commercial General Liability Insurance which provides limits of: (a) Per Occurrence: $2,000,000 (b) General limit Project Specific Aggregate: $2,000,000 (c) Products/Completed Operations: $2,000,000 (d) Personal & Advertising Injury limit: $2,000,000 For either type of insurance, deductibles applying to liability coverages shall be declared to and approved by the Owner's Risk Manager. (3) Required General Liability Policy Coverage. Any general liability policy provided by Contractor hereunder shall include the following coverage: (a)

Premises and Operations

(b) Products/Completed Operations with limits of two million dollars ($2,000,000) per occurrence to be maintained for three (3) years following Acceptance of the work by the Owner. SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 28

Part 4

(c)

Contractual Liability expressly including liability assumed under this Contract.

(d)

Personal Injury Liability

(e)

Independent Contractors' Liability

(f) Severability of Interest clause providing that the coverage applies separately to each insured, except with respect to the limits of liability, and that an act or omission by one of the named insureds shall not reduce or avoid coverage to the other named insureds. (g)

Explosion, Collapse & Underground Damage Hazards (X, C & U)

(4) Required Endorsements. For either type insurance, coverage shall include the following endorsements, copies of which shall be provided to Owner: (a) Additional Insured Endorsement. Any general liability policy provided by Contractor hereunder shall contain an endorsement which applies its coverage to the Owner, the members of the Board of Supervisors of the County and the officers and employees of the Owner, individually and collectively, as additional insureds. (b) Primary Insurance Endorsement. The coverage afforded by the additional insured endorsement described above shall apply as primary insurance, and any other insurance maintained by the Owner, the members of the Board of Supervisors of the County, or its officers, agents, employees and volunteers, or any Owner self-funded program, shall be excess only and not contributing with such coverage. (c) Contractual Liability Endorsement: Insurance afforded by this policy shall apply to liability assumed by the insured under written contract with the County of San Diego. If Contractor is working near a railroad or light rail operation, any exclusion as to performance of operations within the vicinity of any railroad bridge, trestle, track, roadbed, tunnel, underpass or crossway shall be deleted. (d)

Personal Injury Endorsement: The policy shall provide Personal Injury coverage.

(e) Severability of Interest Endorsement: The policy shall provide coverage separately to each insured who is seeking coverage or against whom a claim is made or a suit is brought, except with respect to the Company's limit of liability. (f) X C & U (Explosion, Collapse and Under-ground) Hazards Endorsement: The policy shall provide X, C & U Hazards coverage. (5) Form of General Liability Insurance Policies. All general liability policies shall be written to apply to all bodily injury, including death, property damage, personal injury and other covered loss, however occasioned, occurring during the policy term, and shall specifically insure the performance by Contractor of that part of the indemnity agreement contained herein relating to liability for injury to or death of persons and damage to property. If the coverage contains one or more aggregate limits, a minimum of 50% of any such aggregate limit must remain available at all times; if over 50% of any aggregate limit has been paid or reserved, Owner may require additional coverage to be purchased by Contractor to restore the required limits. Contractor may combine primary, umbrella and as broad as possible excess liability coverage to achieve the total limits indicated above. Any umbrella or excess liability policy shall include the Additional Insured Endorsement described above. B.

Builder's Risk Insurance. Contractor shall provide Builder's Risk Insurance as follows:

(1) Coverage shall be provided on an "all-risk" or special form basis (including the perils of earthquake and flood, unless waived by the Owner). (2) Coverage shall be provided on the work and materials which are the subject of this Contract, whether in process or manufacture or finished, including "in transit" coverage to the final agreed-upon destination of delivery, and including loading and unloading operations, and such coverage shall be in force until the work and materials are accepted by the Owner. (3)

Owner shall be named as an additional insured and/or loss payee as its interests may appear at the time of loss.

(4)

Coverage shall be in an amount no less than the full replacement value of the property at the time of loss.

(5) The deductible shall not exceed $10,000 per occurrence and shall be borne by the Contractor, except higher deductibles for earthquake and flood may be approved by the Owner. (6) Loss, if any, shall be adjustable with and payable to the Owner as trustee for all entities having an insurable interest, except in such cases as may require payment of all or a proportion of such insurance to be made to a mortgagee as its interest may SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 29

Part 4

appear. (7) If Contractor fails to maintain such insurance as is called for herein, the Owner, at its option, may order the Contractor to suspend work at Contractor's expense until a new policy of insurance is in effect and on file with the Owner. C. Professional Errors and Omissions Liability Insurance. If Contractor provides and/ or engages the services of any type of professional, including, but not limited to, engineers and architects, whose failure due to a mistake or deficiency in design, formula, plan, specifications, advisory, technical or other services could result in Liability, Contractor shall obtain Contractor's Pollution Liability insurance including the Professional Liability endorsement in an amount of not less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per claim, with an aggregate limit of not less than two million dollars ($2,000,000). If this policy contains a self retained limit, it shall not be greater than Ten Thousand Dollars ($10,000) per occurrence/event; if the coverage contains one or more aggregate limits, a minimum of 50% of any such aggregate limit must remain available at all times; if over 50% of any aggregate limit has been paid or reserved, Owner may require additional coverage to be purchased by Contractor to restore the required limits. The policy shall include limited contractual liability coverage. This coverage shall be maintained for a minimum of two (2) years following termination or completion of contractor's work pursuant to the Contract. D. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance. Contractor shall procure Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance written for bodily injury, including death, and property damage, however occasioned, occurring during the policy term, in the amount of not less than One Million Dollars ($1,000,000), combined single limit per occurrence, applicable to all owned, non-owned and hired vehicles. This coverage shall include Contractual Liability. E. Statutory Workers' Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance. Unless Contractor is a sole proprietorship, Contractor shall maintain a policy of California Workers' Compensation coverage in statutory amount and Employer's Liability coverage for no less than one million dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence for all employees of Contractor engaged in services or operations under the Contract. Coverage shall include the Waiver of Subrogation endorsement, copy of which shall be provided to the Owner. 11.1.3 Limits of Liability. The insurance required by Subparagraph 11.1.2 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from date of commencement of the Work until date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment. 11.1.4 Adjustment of Coverage. Certificates of Insurance and the insurance policies required by this Paragraph 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner. If any of the foregoing insurance coverages are required to remain in force after final payment and are reasonably available, an additional certificate evidencing continuation of such coverage shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Subparagraph 9.10. Information concerning reduction of coverage shall be furnished by Contractor with reasonable promptness in accordance with Contractor's information and belief. Owner shall retain the right at any time to review coverage, form and amount of insurance required herein and may require Contractor to obtain insurance sufficient in coverage, form and amount to provide adequate protection against kind and extent of risk which exist at time a change in insurance is required. Owner's requirements shall be reasonable. 11.1.5

Policy Terms and General Provisions.

A. Certificates of Insurance. Contractor shall, as soon as practicable following the placement of insurance required hereunder, but in no event later than the effective date of the Contract, deliver to Owner, certificates of insurance together with appropriate separate endorsements thereto, evidencing that Contractor has obtained such coverage for the period of the Contract. Contractor shall deliver certified copies of the actual insurance policies specified herein, within thirty days after commencement of work. Thereafter, copies of renewal policies, or certificates and appropriate separate endorsements thereof, shall be delivered to County within thirty (30 ) days prior to the expiration of the term of any policy required herein. Contractor shall permit County at all reasonable times to inspect any policies of insurance of Contractor which Contractor has not delivered to County. B. Claims Made Coverage If coverage is written on a "claims made" basis, the Certificate of Insurance shall clearly so state. In addition to the coverage requirements specified above, such policy shall provide that: (1) The policy retroactive date coincides with or precedes Contractor's commencement of work under the Contract (including subsequent policies purchased as renewals or replacements). (2) Contractor will make every effort to maintain similar insurance during the required extended period of coverage following expiration of the Contract, including the requirement of adding all additional insureds. (3) If insurance is terminated for any reason, Contractor shall purchase an extended reporting provision of at least two years to report claims arising in connection with the Contract. (4)

The policy allows for reporting of circumstances or incidents that might give rise to future claims.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 30

Part 4

C. Failure to Obtain or Maintain Insurance; Owner's Remedies. Contractor's failure to procure the insurance specified herein, or failure to deliver certified copies or appropriate certificates of such insurance, or failure to make the premium payments required by such insurance, shall constitute a material breach of the Contract, and Owner may, at its option, terminate the Contract for any such default by Contractor. D. No Limitation of Obligations. The foregoing requirements as to the types and limits of insurance coverage to be maintained by the Contractor, and any approval of said insurance by the Owner or its insurance consultant(s), are not intended to and shall not in any manner limit or qualify the liabilities and obligations otherwise assumed by the Contractor pursuant to the Contract, including, but not limited to, the provisions concerning indemnification. E. No Recourse. The insurer shall have no recourse against Owner for payment of any premium or for assessments under any insurance policy maintained in connection with this Contract. F. Notice of Cancellation or Change of Coverage. All certificates of insurance provided by Contractor must evidence that the insurer providing the policy will give Owner thirty (30) days' written notice, at the address shown in the section of the Contract entitled "Notices," in advance of any cancellation, lapse, reduction or other adverse change respecting such insurance. G. Other Insurance Clause. The insurance shall be primary and any "other insurance clause" shall not apply to Owner. H. Qualifying Insurers. All policies of insurance required hereby shall be issued by generally recognized responsible insurers, who have been approved to do business in the State of California by the State Department of Insurance, and which hold a current policy holder's alphabetic and financial size category rating of not less than A, VII according to the current Best's Key Rating Guide, or a company of equal financial stability that is approved in writing by Owner's Risk Manager. I. Review of Coverage. Owner reserves the right to require complete and certified copies of all required policies at any time. Owner shall retain the right at any time to review the coverage, form and amount of insurance required herein and may require Contractor to obtain insurance reasonably sufficient in coverage, form and amount to provide adequate protection against the kind and extent of risk which exists at the time a change in insurance is required. J. Self-Insurance. Contractor may, with the prior written consent of Owner's Risk Manager, fulfill some or all or the insurance requirements contained in the Contract under a plan of self-insurance. Contractor shall only be permitted to utilize such selfinsurance, however, if, in the opinion of Owner's Risk Manager, Contractor's (i) net worth, and (ii) reserves for payment of claims of liability against Contractor, are sufficient to adequately compensate for the lack of other insurance coverage required by the Contract. Contractor's utilization of self-insurance shall not in any way limit liabilities assumed by Contractor under the Contract. K. Waiver of Subrogation. The insurer shall waive all rights of recovery or subrogation against Owner, its agents, officers and employees which might arise by reason of any payment under the policies. Contractor hereby waives all rights to recovery against Owner on account of loss or damage occasioned to Contractor or others under Contractor's control to the extent such loss or damage is insured against under any insurance policies, which may be in force at the time of the loss or damage. 11.1.6 Blanket Coverage. In lieu of more than one policy for Employer's Liability Insurance, Comprehensive General Liability Insurance, Automobile Liability Insurance, and Errors and Omissions Insurance, Contractor may maintain Comprehensive Liability and Property Damage insurance inclusive of all insurance, subject to the terms and conditions and with the same aggregate limits of coverage set forth above. 11.1.7 Subcontractor's Insurance. Contractor shall make certain that any and all subcontractors hired by Contractor are insured according to this agreement. If any subcontractor's coverage does not comply with the foregoing provisions, Contractor shall indemnify and hold Owner harmless of and from any damage, loss, cost, or expense, including attorneys' fees, incurred by Owner as a result thereof. Contractor shall include subcontractors under its policies or shall furnish separate certificates of insurance and endorsements for each subcontractor. In addition to the foregoing, Contractor shall make certain that any and all subcontractors performing any excavation of the Project have Explosion, Collapse and Underground Damage Liability Insurance and coverage in the amount of One Million Dollars ($1,000,000) per occurrence. 11.2 CONTRACTOR'S INDEMNITY. To the fullest extent permitted by law, including without limitation, the provisions of California Civil Code sections 2782 and 2782.5, Owner shall not be liable for, and Contractor shall protect, defend, reimburse, indemnify and hold Owner, and the employees and agents of Owner, and each and every one of them, free and harmless at all times from and against any and all claims, liabilities, expenses, losses, demands, damages, judgments, fines, mechanics' liens or other liens, and causes of action of every kind and character from any cause whatsoever, including actual attorneys' fees and court costs (hereinafter collectively referred to as "Claims") arising from or in connection with, or caused by, directly or indirectly, (i) any act, error, omission or negligence of Contractor or its contractors, licensees, agents, servants or employees, and (ii) any labor dispute involving Contractor, its employees, contractors or agents, including, without limitation, Claims caused by the concurrent negligent act or omission, of Owner or its agents; provided, however, that Contractor shall have no obligation to defend or indemnify Owner from Claims (i) caused solely by the negligent, willful or criminal act of Owner or its agents, or (ii) to the extent they arise from Owner’s active, concurrent negligent act or omission. Claims shall include, without limitation of enumeration, all taxes, debts, penalties, forfeitures, patent infringements, death SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 31

Part 4

and injury and damage to all persons and property. This clause shall survive the termination of this Contract. 11.2.1 Nonliability of Owner. Use of Contractor's and its subcontractor's tools and equipment will be at the sole risk of Contractor and Owner will have no responsibility therefor. 11.3

CONTRACTOR'S BONDS

A. Contract Bonds. Prior to execution of the Contract, Contractor shall file with the Owner on the approved forms, the two surety bonds in the amounts and for the purposes noted below, duly executed by a reputable surety company satisfactory to Owner, and Contractor shall pay all premiums and costs thereof and incidental thereto, as security for payment of persons named in California Civil Code Section 3181 or amounts due under Unemployment Insurance Code with respect to Work or Labor performed by any such claimant. All alterations, time extensions, extra and additional work, and other changes authorized by the Specifications, or any part of the Contract, may be made without securing consent of the surety or sureties on the contract bonds. Each bond shall be signed by both Contractor and the sureties. (1) The "payment bond for public works" shall be in an amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price, as determined from the prices in the bid form, and shall inure to the benefit of persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection with the work of the proposed Contract. This bond shall be maintained in full force and effect until all work under the Contract is completed and accepted by the Owner, and until all claims for materials and labor have been paid. (2) The "performance bond" shall be in an amount of one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price as determined from the prices in the bid form, and shall insure the faithful performance by Contractor of all work under the Contract. It shall also insure the replacing of, or making acceptable, any defective materials or faulty workmanship. B. Qualification of Sureties. Should any surety or sureties be deemed unsatisfactory at any time by the Owner, notice will be given Contractor to that effect, and Contractor shall forthwith substitute a new surety or sureties satisfactory to the Owner. No further payment shall be deemed due or will be made under the Contract until the new sureties qualify and are accepted by the Owner. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12.1

UNCOVERING OF WORK

12.1.1 Covered Contrary to Requirements. If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to Owner's request or to requirements specifically expressed in Contract Documents, it must, if required in writing by Owner, be uncovered for Owner's examination and be replaced at Contractor's expense without change in Contract time. 12.1.2 Inspection Requested after Covering. If a portion of the Work has been covered which Owner has not specifically requested to observe prior to its being covered, Owner may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be charged to Owner. If such Work is not in accordance with Contract Documents, Contractor shall pay such costs unless condition was caused by Owner or a separate contractor in which event Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. 12.2

CORRECTION OF WORK AND WARRANTY PERIOD

12.2.1 Before or After Substantial Completion. Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by Owner or Architect/Engineer for failing to conform to requirements of Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Contractor shall bear cost of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, and compensation for Owner's services and expenses made necessary thereby. 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion. In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Paragraph 3.5, if, within one year after date of Substantial Completion of the Work, as provided in Subparagraph 9.8.6, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by Contract Documents, any Work found to be not in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents, Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from Owner to do so unless Owner has previously given Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. Contractor shall bear cost of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, and compensation for Owner's services and expenses made necessary thereby. If Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner, Owner may correct it in accordance with Paragraph 2.4. The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of the work corrected pursuant to this Paragraph 12.2. 12.2.3 Remove Non-Conforming Materials. Contractor shall remove from site portions of the Work which are not in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and are neither corrected by Contractor nor accepted by Owner.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 32

Part 4

12.2.4 Cost of Repairing Destroyed or Damaged Construction. Contractor shall bear cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of Owner or separate contractors caused by Contractor's correction or removal of Work which is not in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. 12.2.5 Time Period not Limited. Nothing contained in this Paragraph 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations which Contractor might have under the Contract Documents. Establishment of time period of one year as described in Subparagraph 12.2.2 relates only to specific obligation of Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to time within which obligation to comply with Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish Contractor's liability with respect to Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK. If Owner prefers to accept Work, which is not in accordance with requirements of the Contract Documents, Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13.1

GOVERNING LAW. The Contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of California.

13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, and any partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives to other party and to partners, successors, assigns and legal representatives of such other party in respect to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of Owner. If Contractor attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, Contractor shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE. Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or a member of the firm or entity or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended, or if delivered at or sent by registered or certified mail to the last business address known to the party giving notice. 13.4

RIGHTS AND REMEDIES

13.4.1 Additional Rights. Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. 13.4.2 Failure to Act. No action or failure to act by Owner, Architect/Engineer or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. 13.5

TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

13.5.1 Action at Appropriate Time. Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work required by the Contract Documents or by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities having jurisdiction shall be made at an appropriate time. Contractor shall give Owner at least 5 working days notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so Owner may observe such procedures. Should any Work be covered up without such notice, approval or consent, it shall, if required by Owner, be uncovered for inspection and repaired at Contractor's expense. 13.5.2 Additional Testing. If Owner, Architect/ Engineer or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Subparagraph 13.5.1. Owner will, instruct Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity selected by Owner, and Contractor shall give at least 2 working days notice to Owner of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so Owner may observe such procedures. 13.5.3 Testing Agency. All testing and special inspections required by the Contract Documents, except as otherwise specified, shall be made by an independent professional testing agency or public authority selected and paid by Contractor. For testing required by the Contractor, Contractor shall select an Owner-approved independent professional testing agency or firm. Owner inspections and tests are for the sole benefit of the Owner and do not: .1

Relieve the Contractor of responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures;

.2

Relieve the Contractor of responsibility for damage to or loss of the material before acceptance;

.3

Constitute or imply acceptance; or

.4

Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after acceptance of the completed Work latent defects, gross mistakes, fraud or

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 33

Part 4

the Owner's rights under any warranty or guarantee. The presence or absence of an Owner inspector does not relieve the Contractor from any contract requirement, nor is the inspector authorized to change any term or condition of the specification without the Owner's written authorization. 13.5.4 Cost of Failed Tests. If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Subparagraphs 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by Contract Documents, Contractor shall bear all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for Owner's expenses will be deducted from contract price by change order. 13.5.5 Certificates Secured by Contractor. Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by Contract Documents, be secured by Contractor and promptly delivered to Owner. 13.5.6 Tests, Inspection or Approvals Observed by Owner. If Owner is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by Contract Documents, Owner will do so promptly and, where practicable, at normal place of testing. 13.5.7 Prompt Tests or Inspections. Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in Work. 13.6

COMMENCEMENT OF STATUTORY LIMITATION PERIOD

As between the Owner and Contractor: .1 Before Substantial Completion. As to acts or failures to act occurring prior to the relevant date of Substantial Completion, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than such date of Substantial Completion; .2 Between Substantial Completion and Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring subsequent to the relevant date of Substantial Completion and prior to issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall commence to run and any alleged cause of action shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment; and .3 After Final Certificate for Payment. As to acts or failures to act occurring after the relevant date of issuance of the final Certificate for Payment, any applicable statute of limitations shall be deemed to have accrued in any and all events not later than the date of any act or failure to act by the Contractor pursuant to any warranty provided under Paragraph 3.5, the date of any correction of the Work or failure to correct the Work by the Contractor under Paragraph 12.2, or the date of actual commission of any other act or failure to perform any duty or obligation by the Contractor or Owner, whichever occurs last. 13.7 OWNER'S RIGHT TO AUDIT. The Owner and entities and agencies designated by the Owner shall have access to and the right to audit and the right to copy at the Owner's cost all of the Contractor's books, records, contracts, correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, purchase orders, and memoranda relating to the Work. The Contractor shall preserve all such records and other items for a period of at least three (3) years after Final Completion. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF CONTRACT 14.1

TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CAUSE

14.1.1.

Owner may terminate the Contract if Contractor:

.1 persistently or repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; to prosecute the Work, to insure completion of Work within specified time or any authorized extension thereof; or to complete the Work in compliance with the Contract Documents. .2 fails to make payment to subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with respective agreements between Contractor and Subcontractors. .3 is adjudged a bankrupt, or if Contractor should make a general assignment for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; .4

persistently disregards laws, ordinances, or rules, regulations or orders of a public authority having jurisdiction; or

.5

otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of Contract Documents.

14.1.2 In the event of such termination, the Owner shall immediately serve written notice thereof upon surety and Contractor. Surety shall have the rights and obligations set forth in the performance bond. Subject to the surety’s rights under the performance SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 34

Part 4

bond (which rights are waived upon a default under the performance bond) the Owner may, at its sole option, take over the Work and prosecute it to completion by contract or by any other methods it may deem advisable, or require the surety to prosecute the Work to completion. The Owner may take possession of and use all or any part of the Contractor’s materials, tools, equipment, and appliances upon the premises to complete the contract. The Owner may effectuate the provisions of this paragraph through any necessary written agreement with the surety, Contractor, or other contractors. 14.1.3 Contractor not Entitled to Payment. When Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Subparagraph 14.1.1, Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until Work is finished. 14.1.4 Excess Costs. If unpaid balance of Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for Owner's expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to Contractor. If such costs exceed unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay difference to Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Architect/Engineer, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. 14.2

SUSPENSION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE

14.2.1 Notice by Owner. Owner may, without cause, order Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as Owner may determine. 14.2.2 Adjustment in Costs. The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Subparagraph 14.2.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent: .1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which Contractor is responsible; or .2 14.3

that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of this Contract. TERMINATION BY OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE

14.3.1 Notice by Owner. Owner may, without cause, order Contractor to cease work in whole or in part and terminate the Contract (without prejudice to any right or remedy of Owner) upon not less than seven days prior written notice. 14.3.2 effect.

Termination Date. The Owner’s notice of termination shall specify the date said termination for convenience shall take

14.3.3 Contractor’s Sole Remedy. In the event of termination for the convenience of the Owner, Contractor’s sole remedy shall be the allowable termination costs permitted by this Article under Paragraph 14.3.4, below, Adjustments in Costs. Contractor shall not be entitled to collect, and hereby expressly waives any and all rights to any profit on work not performed and any damages related to that portion of the Contract which has been terminated. 14.3.4 .1

Adjustment in Costs. Upon termination for convenience, Contractor shall be entitled to reimbursement for: the costs of work completed in an amount consistent with the Schedule of Values as described in Article 9.

.2 the value of profit and overhead in amounts proportionate to the value of work completed; provided, however, that if there is evidence that the Contractor would have sustained a loss on the entire Contract had it been complete, no profit shall be included or allowed hereunder. .3 the costs of materials delivered to job site. Specially fabricated materials not delivered or returnable shall be paid at full cost upon delivery to job site. .4

the nonreturnable portion of premiums paid by Contractor for insurance and bonds.

.5

the costs of demobilization of the Contractor’s occupancy of the job site and home office.

.6 the costs of temporary closures, barricades, protections as directed by the Owner to protect the completed work, stored materials, and secure the job site. .7 settlement costs for termination of subcontracts. 14.3.5 Protection of Construction. Contractor, upon receipt of Notice of Termination from Owner, shall take appropriate action to: protect construction or stored materials previously provided from future damage (including damage from the elements), rectify safety hazards, provide temporary closures and barricades and secure the job site.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 35

Part 4

14.3.6 Subcontract Termination Clauses. Contractor shall include termination clauses identical to this article in each of its subcontracts, if any. 14.3.7 Time Period For Submitting Termination Claims. Following receipt of a Notice of Termination for convenience, the Contractor shall submit to the Owner a termination claim, in the form and with such certification as may be prescribed by the Owner. Such claim shall be submitted promptly but in no event later than three (3) months following the effective date of termination, provided, however, that if the Owner, in its sole discretion, determines that the facts justify such action, it may receive and evaluate any such termination claim at any time after such three (3) month period or any extension thereof. Upon failure of the Contractor to submit a termination claim within the time allowed, the Owner, in its sole discretion, may determine, on the basis of information available, the amount, if any, due to the Contractor by reason of the termination. 14.3.8 Maximum Termination Cost. In no event shall the total sum to be paid to the Contractor under this Section, Termination by Owner for Convenience, exceed the Contract Sum, as reduced by the amount of payments otherwise made or to be made for Work not terminated, and as otherwise permitted by the Contract. 14.4

GENERAL TERMINATION PROVISIONS

14.4.1 Following termination of the Contract, for any reason, pursuant to this Article, and except as may be otherwise directed in writing by the Owner, the Contractor shall: .1

Stop work under the Contract on the date and to the extent specified in any notice of termination received by Contractor;

.2 place no further orders or subcontracts for materials, services or facilities, except as may be necessary for completion of such portion of the Work under the Contract as is not terminated; .3 terminate all orders and subcontracts to the extent that they relate to the performance of Work terminated by a notice of termination; .4 at the option of the Owner, assign to the Owner in the manner, at the times and to the extent directed by the Owner, all of the rights in any orders or subcontracts pertaining to the terminated contract, in which case the Owner shall have the right, at its discretion, to settle or pay any or all claims arising out of the termination of such orders and subcontracts; .5 settle all outstanding liabilities and all claims arising out of termination of orders and subcontracts pertaining to the terminated contract, with the approval or ratification of the Architect to the extent the Architect may so require, which approval or ratification shall be final for all the purposes of this Article; .6 transfer title and deliver to the entity or entities designated by the Owner, in the matter, at the times and to the extent directed by the Owner, the following: (a) the fabricated or unfabricated parts, work in process, partially completed supplies and equipment, materials, parts, tools, dies, jigs and other fixtures, completed work, supplies and other material produced as part of, or acquired in connection with the performance of, the Work terminated by the notice of termination; and (b) the completed or partially completed plans, drawings, information, releases, manuals and other property related to the work and which, if the Contract had been completed, would have been required to be furnished to the Owner; but only to the extent such items have been specifically produced or specifically acquired by the Contractor for the performance of such portion of the Work as has been terminated. .7 use his best efforts to sell, in the manner, at the times, to the extent and at the prices evaluated by the Architect, any property of the types referred to in this Section General Termination Provisions; provided, however, that the Contractor: (a) shall not be required to extend credit to any buyer, and (b) may acquire any such property under the conditions prescribed by and a price or prices approved by the Architect or evaluated by the Owner, and provided further that the proceeds of any such transfer or disposition shall be applied in reduction of any payments to be made by the Owner to the Contractor under the Contract or shall otherwise be credited to the Contract Sum covered by the Contract. .8

complete performance of such part of the Work as shall not have been terminated by the Notice of Termination; and

.9 take such action as may be necessary, or as the Architect may direct, for the protection and preservation of the property related to the Contract which is in the possession of the Contractor and in which the Owner has or may acquire an interest. 14.4.2 The Contractor shall refund to the Owner any amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor in excess of any costs reimbursable to Contractor under this Article. 14.4.3

The Owner may, at his option, have those costs, which may be reimbursable to Contractor under this Article audited and

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 36

Part 4

certified by an independent certified public accountant selected by the Owner. Contractor shall furnish the Owner with all records deemed appropriate by Owner for verification of Contractor’s claims. The cost of producing such records shall be at Contractor’s expense. ARTICLE 15 LABOR AND PREVAILING WAGES PROVISIONS 15.1 WORKERS NOT PERMITTED ON PROJECT. No person under the age of sixteen (16) years, or currently serving sentence in a penal or correctional institution, or whose age or physical condition is such as to make employment dangerous to said person's health or safety or the health or safety of others shall be employed to perform any Work under this Contract, except that physically handicapped persons otherwise employable may be employed under this Contract where such persons may be safely assigned to Work which they can ably perform. Except as may otherwise be required by applicable anti-discrimination laws, any person who may be employed by Contractor and whom Owner may deem incompetent or unfit shall be dismissed from Work and shall not again be employed on it except with written consent of Owner. 15.2

PREVAILING WAGES

15.2.1 Contractor shall comply with Articles 2 and 3 of Chapter 1, Part 7, Division 2, of California Labor Code regulating wages and working hours on public works. Contractor shall forfeit to Owner as a penalty, up to Fifty Dollars ($50.00): .1 for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than the stipulated prevailing rates for any public work performed under this Contract by Contractor or any Subcontractor. .2 for each worker employed in execution of this Contract by Contractor or by any Subcontractor for each calendar day during which said worker is required or permitted to labor for more than eight (8) hours in any one calendar day or for more than forty (40) hours in any one calendar week in violation of provisions of said Article 3. The amount of such penalty shall be determined by the Labor Commission in accordance with the Labor Code Section 1775. 15.2.2 Prevailing Wage Rates. In accordance with California Labor Code, Section 1770 the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations of the State of California has determined the general prevailing rate of per diem wages, and general prevailing rate for holiday and overtime Work in accordance with standards set forth in Labor Code Section 1773. 15.2.3 The Board of Supervisors has obtained from the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations the general prevailing rate of per diem wages, and general prevailing rate for holiday and overtime Work for locality in which this project is to be performed for each craft, classification or type of worker, needed to execute the Contract. .1 Not less than the general rate of per diem wages, and not less than the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for holiday and overtime Work as determined by Director of the Department of Industrial Relations shall be paid to all workers employed on Project. .2 Holidays upon which such rates shall be paid shall be all holidays recognized in collective bargaining agreement applicable to particular craft, classification or type of worker employed on Project. .3 Per diem wages shall be deemed to include employer payments for health and welfare, pension, vacation, travel time and subsistence pay as provided for in Labor Code Section 1773.8, apprenticeship or other training programs authorized by Labor Code Section 3093, and similar purposes. 15.2.4 It shall be mandatory upon Contractor and any Subcontractor to pay not less than specified prevailing wage rates to all workers employed by them in execution of this Contract. 15.2.5 Owner.

Claims and disputes pertaining to classification of labor employed on the Work under this Contract shall be decided by

15.2.6 Travel and Subsistence Payments. As required by Labor Code, Section 1773.1, per diem wages as determined by Director of the Department of Industrial Relations shall be deemed to include payments for travel time, and subsistence pay as provided for in Section 1773.8. Travel payments, in addition to travel time payment under Section 1773.1, if any, as such travel payments are defined in applicable collective bargaining agreements filed in accordance with Section 1773.8, shall be paid by Contractor or Subcontractor as required by said Section 1773.8. 15.2.7 Minimum Wage Rates. Specified wage rates are minimum only, and Owner will not consider any claims for additional compensation made by Contractor because of payment by Contractor of any wage rate in excess of applicable rates contained in this Contract. All disputes regarding payment of wages in excess of those specified in this Contract shall be adjusted by Contractor. 15.2.8 Underpayment of Wages. Contractor agrees that in case of underpayment of wages to any worker under this Contract by Contractor or any Subcontractor, Owner may withhold from Contractor out of payments due an amount sufficient to pay such worker the difference between wages required to be paid under this Contract and wages actually paid such worker for the total number of SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 37

Part 4

hours worked, and Owner may disburse such amount so withheld for and on account of Contractor to employee to whom such amount is due. Contractor further agrees that any amounts withheld pursuant to this paragraph shall be in addition to percentages or amounts, which may be retained by Owner pursuant to other provisions of this Contract. 15.2.9 Persons on Payrolls. Contractor's payrolls shall not carry persons not employed by Contractor, nor shall employees of Subcontractor be carried on said Contractor's payrolls. Employees of Subcontractors shall be carried only on payrolls of employing Subcontractor. 15.3 LABOR CODE REQUIREMENTS. Contractor and any subcontractors employed in execution of Project shall comply with Labor Code Sections 1775 and 1776. 15.3.1 Apprentices. Pursuant to Labor Code, Sections 1777.5 and 1777.6 and regulations of California Apprenticeship Council and local apprenticeship standards for the trade, registered apprentices may be employed in prosecution of Work. Contractor is advised to review provisions of Section 1717.7 relating to noncompliance with Section 1777.5. 15.3.1.1 Information Regarding Apprentices. Information relative to apprenticeship standards, wage schedules and other requirements may be obtained from Director of Industrial Relations, ex officio the Administrator of Apprenticeship, San Francisco, CA; or from Division of Apprenticeship Standards and its branch offices. 15.3.1.2 County Policy Regarding Apprentices. It is County policy to encourage employment and training of apprentices on public works contracts as may be permitted under local apprenticeship standards. 15.3.1.3 Responsibility of Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with Labor Code Section 1777.5 for all apprenticeable occupations. 15.3.2 Payroll Records. Contractor's attention is directed to following provisions of Labor Code Section 1776 (Stats. 1978, Ch. 1249). Contractor shall be responsible for compliance with these provisions by his Subcontractors: .1 Accurate Records. Contractor and each Subcontractor shall keep accurate payroll records, showing the name, address, social security number, Work classification, straight time and overtime hours worked each day and week, and actual per diem wages paid to each journeyman, apprentice, worker, or other employee employed by him or her in connection with the public work. .2 Certified. All Contractor and Sub-contractor payroll records enumerated under subdivision .1 above, shall be certified. Contractor shall require subcontractors to submit certified payroll records to Contractor. All certified payroll records shall be available for inspection at all reasonable hours at principal office of Contractor on following basis: .A Available to Employees. A certified copy of an employee's payroll record shall be made available for inspection or furnished to such employee or his or her authorized representative on request. .B Available to Public Entities. A certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in subdivision (.1 above) shall be made available for inspection or furnished upon request to representative of body awarding Contract, the Division of Labor Standards Enforcement and Division of Apprenticeship Standards of the Department of Industrial Relations. .C Available to Public. A Certified copy of all payroll records enumerated in subdivision .1 above shall be made available upon request to public for inspection or copies thereof made; provided, however, that a request by public shall be made through either the body awarding Contract, Division of Apprenticeship Standards, or Division of Labor Standards Enforcement. Public shall not be given access to such records at principal office of Contractor. .3 Filing Copies. Contractor shall file a certified copy of records enumerated in subdivision .1 above with entity that requested such records within 10 days after receipt of written request. .4 Mark for Privacy. Any copy of records made available for inspection as copies and furnished upon request to public or any public agency, awarding body, Division of Apprenticeship Standards or Division of Labor Standards Enforcement shall be marked or obliterated in such a manner as to prevent disclosure of individual's name, address and social security number. Name and address of Contractor awarded the contract or performing the contract shall not be marked or obliterated. .5 Location of Records. Contractor shall inform the body awarding contract of location of the records enumerated under subdivision .1 above, including the street address, city and county, and shall, within five working days, provide a notice of a change of location and address. .6 Noncompliance. Contractor's willful or fraudulent violation of the requirements of Labor Code Section 1770, et. seg. shall subject Contractor to the penalties specified in Labor Code Section 1777.1. - End of GENERAL CONDITIONS SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 38

Part 4

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 39

Part 4

Page 1 of 2 EXHIBIT "A" ESCROW AGREEMENT FOR SECURITY DEPOSITS IN LIEU OF RETENTION This Escrow Agreement is made and entered into by and between County of San Diego, Department of General Services, whose address is 5560 Overland Avenue, 4th Floor Suite 410 (MS 0-368), San Diego, California 92123, hereinafter called "Owner", and

whose address is

hereinafter called "Contractor" and

whose address is

hereinafter called "Escrow".

For consideration hereinafter set forth, Owner, Contractor and Escrow Agent agree as follows: 1.

Pursuant to Section 22300 of the Public Contract Code of the State of California, Contractor has option to deposit securities with Escrow Agent as a substitute for retention earnings required to be withheld by Owner pursuant to the Construction Contract entered into between Owner and Contractor for in the amount of dated ("Contract"). Alternatively, on written request of the Contractor, Owner shall make payment of the retention earnings directly to the Escrow Agent. When Contractor deposits securities as a substitute for Contract earnings, Escrow Agent shall notify Owner within ten days of deposit. The market value of securities at time of substitution shall be at least equal to cash amount then required to be withheld as retention under terms of Contract between Owner and Contractor. Securities shall be held in the name of , and shall designate Contractor as beneficial owner.

2.

Owner shall make progress payments to Contractor for those funds which otherwise would be withheld from progress payments pursuant to the Contract provisions, provided that Escrow Agent holds securities in the form and amount specified above.

3.

When the Owner makes payment of retention earned directly to the Escrow Agent, the Escrow Agent shall hold them for the benefit of the Contractor until the time that the escrow created under this contract is terminated. The Contractor may direct the investment of the payments into securities. All terms and conditions of this agreement and the rights and responsibilities of the parties shall be equally applicable and binding when the Owner pays the Escrow Agent directly.

4.

Contractor shall be responsible for paying all fees for expenses incurred by Escrow Agent in administering escrow account, and all expenses of Owner. These expenses and payment terms shall be determined by Owner, Contractor and Escrow Agent.

5.

Interest earned on securities or money market accounts held in escrow and all interest earned on that interest shall be for the sole account of Contractor and shall be subject to withdrawal by Contractor at any time and from time to time without notice to Owner.

6.

Contractor has the right to withdraw all or any part of the principal in Escrow Account only by written notice to Escrow Agent accompanied by written authorization from Owner to Escrow Agent that Owner consents to withdrawal of amount sought to be withdrawn by Contractor.

7.

Owner has the right to draw upon securities in event of default by Contractor. Upon seven days' written notice to escrow agent from Owner of default, escrow agent shall immediately convert securities to cash and shall distribute the cash as instructed by Owner.

8.

Upon receipt of written notification from Owner certifying that Contract is final and complete, and that Contractor has complied with all requirements and procedures applicable to the Contract, Escrow Agent shall release to Contractor all securities and interest on deposit less escrow fees and charges of Escrow Account. Escrow shall be closed immediately upon disbursement of all moneys and securities on deposit and payments of fees and charges.

9.

Escrow Agent shall rely on written notifications from Owner and Contractor pursuant to Subparagraphs .4 to .6, inclusive, of this agreement and Owner and Contractor shall hold Escrow Agent harmless from Escrow Agent's release and disbursement of securities and interest as set forth above.

10.

Names of persons who are authorized to give written notice or to receive written notice on behalf of Owner and on behalf of Contractor in connection with the foregoing, and exemplars of their respective signatures are as follows:

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 40

Part 4

3DJHRI ON BEHALF OF OWNER:

ON BEHALF OF CONTRACTOR:

Manager, Controller Branch Office

Title

Name

Name

Signature

Signature

5560 Overland Ave, 4th Floor Suite 410 San Diego, CA 92123-1294

Address

ON BEHALF OF ESCROW AGENT: Title Name Signature Address At time Escrow Account is opened, Owner and Contractor shall deliver to Escrow Agent a fully executed counterpart of this Agreement. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties have executed this Agreement by their proper officers on date first set forth above. OWNER

CONTRACTOR

Deputy Director, Project Management Division

Title

Name

Name

Signature

Signature

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING 4 - 41

Part 4

PART V

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-1

Part 5

TABLE OF CONTENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

PAGE DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF THE WORK SECTION 01 25 00 PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT COORDINATION SECTION 01 31 19 PROJECT MEETINGS SECTION 01 32 00 SCHEDULES, REPORTS AND PAYMENTS SECTION 01 33 00 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES SECTION 01 40 00 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS SECTION 01 45 00 QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING SECTION 01 74 00 CLEANING SECTION 01 77 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

5-4 5-5 5-8 5-11 5-13 5-15 5-17 5-20 5-21 5-25 5-27 5-28 5-29

DIVISION 2 - EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 02 00 01 GENERAL DEMOLITION, ALTERATIONS AND SALVAGING

5-31

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE SECTION 03 11 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT SECTION 03 30 00 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

5-32 5-35 5-38

DIVISION 5 - METALS SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 05 40 00 COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

5-45 5-49

DIVISION 6 - WOOD, PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY

5-52

DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 10 00 VAPOR RETARDER BENEATH SLAB SECTION 07 21 16 BUILDING INSULATION SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALERS

5-55 5-56 5-58

DIVISION 8 - OPENINGS SECTION 08 11 00 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES SECTION 08 41 00 ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARWARE SECTION 08 81 00 GLAZING

5-61 5-63 5-68 5-72

DIVISION 9 - FINISHES SECTION 09 30 00 TILE SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING

5-74 5-78

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE SECTION 10 44 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES

5-88 5-90

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT SECTION 11 66 23 FLOOR MATS AND WALL PADS

5-92

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-

Part 5

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS SECTION 12 21 16 VERTICAL BLINDS AND SHADES

5-93

DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION SECTION 13 34 19 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING STRUCTURAL STEEL SECTION 13 34 20 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING ROOF SYSTEM SECTION 13 34 21 PRE-ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING WALL SYSTEM

5-94 5-97 5-100

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING SECTION 23 05 00 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

5-102

DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 00 ELECTRICAL GENERAL - DESIGN BUILD

5-107

DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE ALARM - DESIGN BUILD

5-121

DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING SECTION 31 13 00 TREE PROTECTION SECTION 31 22 00 GRADING SECTION 31 23 00 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING, COMPACTING SECTION 31 31 16 TERMITE CONTROL

5-125 5-127 5-129 5-133 5-136

DIVISION 32 - EXTERIOR IMPROVMENTS SECTION 32 12 00 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING SECTION 32 13 00 CONCRETE WALKS, RAMPS AND STEPS SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKERS SECTION 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES

5-137 5-139 5-141 5-142

DIVISION 33 - UTILITIES SECTION 33 40 00 SITE DRAINAGE

5-149

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-3

Part 5

SECTION 01 11 00 - SUMMARY OF THE WORK 1.1

DESCRIPTIVE SUMMARY OF THE WORK: 1.1.1 Identification: Refer to the Contract (Owner-Contractor Agreement) for name location, project number and abbreviated identification of the work of the project. 1.1.2 Contract Documents: Requirements of the work are contained in the contract documents, and include cross-references herein to published information, which is not necessarily bound therewith. The misplacement addition or omission of any letter, work or punctuation mark shall in no way damage the true spirit, intent or meaning in these specifications. 1.1.3 Verbal Summary: Without force and effect on requirements of contract documents, the description of the work of the Contract can be summarized as follows: Work included in this contract is for the complete construction of a one story (approximately 40’ x 80’ = 3,200 SF) pre-engineered metal building and associated site work. All work shall be in accordance with drawings and specifications prepared by domusstudio architecture. Work includes but is not limited to site preparation, excavation, earthwork, drainage & storm water, paving & concrete flat work, landscaping, demolition, general construction, paving, heating, air conditioning, plumbing, and electrical work, including fire alarm and related equipment. Work not included in contract: Any equipment, work, or item indicated on the drawings to be N.I.C. (Not In Contract) shall be provided under some other contract or arrangements of the owner or others. If any equipment or item noted N.I.C. is to be by contractor, it will be so noted on drawings and/or specified in appropriate section of the specifications. 1.1.4

Contractor Use of Premises: 1.1.4.1

General: During the entire construction period, the Contractor shall keep the premises available for the Owner and existing campus operation. 1.1.4.1.1 Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available at all times. Do not use for parking or storage of materials. 1.1.4.1.2 Do not encumber the site with materials or equipment. 1.1.4.1.3 Lock automotive type vehicles and other mechanized or motorized construction equipment, when parked and unattended. Do not leave vehicles or equipment unattended with the motor running or ignition key in place. 1.1.4.1.4 Allow continued operations of the existing Campus.

1.1.5 Compliance with Regulations: It is the intent of these contract documents that the project, when completed, shall conform to regulations of the "California Building Code, current edition (CBC)”, California Administrative Code Title l9 Public Safety, California Administrative Code Title 24 Accessibility Standards and Energy Standards, Uniform Plumbing Code, National Electrical Code, NBFU, CAL/OSHA, and other applicable codes. All publications shall be of the latest edition in force at the time of building permit date. 1.1.5.1

Anything in the Contract Documents not withstanding, the Contractor accepts the responsibility of constructing a watertight, weather tight project.

1.1.6

Owner shall have access to the Work site at all reasonable times.

1.1.7

Scheduling and reasonable security measures are the responsibility of the Contractor.

1.1.8 Approved Applicators: Where specific instructions in these specifications require that a particular product and/or material(s) be installed and/or applied by an "approving applicator” of the manufacturer. It shall be the Contractor responsibility to insure that any subcontractors used for such work be approved applicators. 1.1.9 ARCHITECTURAL AND ENGINEERING SERVICES: It is understood that normal Architectural and Engineering liaison for the purpose of interpretation of the Drawings and Specifications is provided for the Owner. Should any services of the Architect be required to assist in the corrections of error or omissions in construction by the Contractor, or services of the Architect be required because of changes in structure or equipment where the Contractor has requested approval of substitute methods of material these services will be provided by the Architect at their standard hourly rates and shall be paid for by the Contractor. 1.1.10 SCAFFOLD, STAGING, PROTECTION ETC: The work under each Section of these specifications shall include providing, installing and maintaining all scaffold, staging, testles, and planking necessary for the work under each Section in strict conformity with applicable laws and ordinances and maintenance of same so as not to interfere with or obstruct the work of other trades. Additionally, the work under each Section of these specifications shall include providing all forms of protection as necessary to preserve the work of other trades free from damage. These provisions shall be considered as though repeated under each Separate Section of these specifications. END OF SECTION 01 11 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-4

Part 5

SECTION 01 25 00 - PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS PART 1 - PROCEDURAL REQUIREMENTS 1.1

GENERAL LIMITATIONS: Where possible, provide entire required quantity of each generic product, material or equipment from a single source; and, where not possible to do so, match separate procurement as closely as possible. To extent selection process is under Contractor's control, provide compatible products, material and equipment. Where available and complying with requirements, provide standard products which have been used previously and successfully in similar applications, and which are recommended by manufacturers for applications indicated.

1.2

PRODUCT SELECTION LIMITATIONS: 1.2.1

Product Selections: Comply with the following for selection of products, materials and equipment: 1.2.1.1

Single Product Named: Provide only that product, unless determined to be unavailable, non-compatible with the work, or non-complying with requirements or governing regulations.

1.2.1.2

Two or More Products Named: complies with requirements.

1.2.1.3

"Or Equal" Clause: Provide named product which complies with requirements, or comply with requirements for gaining approval on "substitution" to select and use an unnamed product.

Selection from named products is Contractor's option, provided selection

1.2.2 Compliance with Standards: Selection of product which complies with requirements, including applicable standards, is Contractor's option where no product names are indicated. 1.2.3 Performance Requirements: Selection of product which has been tested to show compliance with requirements, including indicated performances, is Contractor's option where no product names are indicated. 1.2.4 Prescriptive Requirements: Selection of product which has been certified by manufacturer to comply with requirements, including prescriptive requirements, is Contractor's option where no product names are indicated. 1.2.5 Visual Requirements: Where indicated to be selected from manufacturer's standard options, selection is Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's option, subsequent to determination or selection of manufacturer (Contractor' option). Where indicated to be selected from among standard options available within industry, selection is Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's option prior to determination or selection of manufacturer. 1.2.6 Nameplates: Where indicated or needed for operation and maintenance, provide permanent nameplates on equipment, located in inconspicuous but accessible places, and containing suitable information and operational data. Otherwise, do not allow manufacturer's trademarks or similar labels or nameplates to be placed on products in locations where exposed to view after installation. 1.3

SUBSTITUTIONS: 1.3.1 Conditions: All proposals shall be considered only when submitted in strict compliance with Drawings and Specifications. Except where expressly provided for in Specifications and defined in Supplementary Instruction to bidders, request for substitutions will not be considered. If Contractor determines that systems or products, to his knowledge and experience, will provide same function, design and value as those materials and methods specified herein, he may submit, with his proposal for work, on the attached Substitution Request Form stating difference in cost and reason(s) for such a proposal. Each attachment shall be reviewed by Owner prior to execution of work. In any case, requests for substitutions will not be considered after award of Contract unless for cost savings or unavailability. All proposals for substitutions shall comply with the following: 1.3.1.1

Substitutions shall, without exception, be manufactured of same basic materials, and comply with or exceed all specification requirements of dimension, function, structure and appearance, without deviation.

1.3.1.2

Use of approved substitutions shall in no way relieve Contractor from responsibility for compliance, after installation. It shall be incumbent upon Contractor using approved substitutions to assume all extra costs caused by use of approved substitute materials, where affecting other work or trades. Under no circumstances shall Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer be required to pay for material or labor as a result of substitutions granted General Contractor.

1.3.1.3

Submittal of proposed substitutions shall be made only by the General Contractor (Prime Bidder). The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will not entertain direct submittals by manufacturers, suppliers or subcontractors. The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will consider written request(s) by a Prime Bidder only, for substitutions(s) which is/are considered equivalent to the item(s) specified. The written request will be considered only if it is received within 35 (thirty-five) consecutive calendar days after contract award. The prime bidder shall furnish at his own expense and on their own letterhead the necessary data per the substitution request form to substantiate and validate that the physical, chemical and operational qualities of each substitute item is such that this item will fulfill its required function.

1.3.1.4

Substitutions for the specified product, brand or manufacturer that have been submitted for this project and disapproved by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer shall not be re-submitted in any modified

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-5

Part 5

form for this particular project, and the General Contractor will be required to furnish the specified materials at no extra cost to the Owner. 1.3.1.5

In the event materials are substituted and installed without proper authorization, the Contractor shall remove all materials and install those specified at his own expense.

1.3.1.6

It shall be mandatory upon the Contractor using approved substitutions to determine the effect said substitution may have on other portions of the Work and so inform his subcontractors and employees of these effects. The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer shall not be responsible for any effects to other portions of the Work caused by the use of approved substitutions.

1.3.1.7

Related to an "or equal" or similar provision in contract documents.

1.3.1.8

Required product cannot be supplied in time for compliance with Contract Time requirements.

1.3.1.9

Required product is not acceptable to governing authority, or determined to be non-compatible, or cannot be properly coordinated, warrantied or insured, or has other recognized disability as certified by Contractor. 1.3.1.10 Substantial advantage is offered Owner after deducting offsetting disadvantages including delays, additional compensation to Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer for redesign, investigation, evaluation and other necessary services, and similar considerations.

1.4

SUBMITTALS: Include full documentation, including product data, samples where appropriate, detailed performance comparisons and evaluations, testing laboratory reports where applicable, coordination information for effect on other work and time schedule, cost information for proposed change order, Contractor's general certification of recommended substitution, and similar information germane to circumstance. The Substitution Request Form provided at the end of this Section shall be filled in and accompany submittal package.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: Receive, store and handle products, materials and equipment in a manner which will prevent loss, deterioration and damage. Schedule deliveries to minimize long-term storage at project site.

1.6

WARRANTIES (GUARANTEES): 1.6.1 Categories of warranties required for the work include: 1) Special project warranty issued by Contractor and, where required, countersigned by Installer or other recognized entity involved in performance of the work; 2) Specified product warranty issued by a manufacturer or fabricator, for compliance with requirements in contract documents; and 3) Coincidental product warranty available on a product incorporated into the work, by virtue of manufacturer's publication of warranty without regard for application requirements (non-specified warranty). Refer to sections of Divisions 2 through 16 for requirements of specified warranties. 1.6.2 Warranty Obligations: Restore or remove-and-replace warranted work to its originally specified condition, at such time during warranty as it does not comply with or fulfill terms of warranty. Restore or remove-and-replace other work which has been damaged by failure of warranted work, or which must be removed and replaced to gain access to warranted work. Except as otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, warranties do not cover consequential damages to property other than work of the Contract (e.g., building contents). Cost of restoration or removal-and-replacement is Contractor's obligation, without regard to whether Owner has already benefited from use of failing work. 1.6.2.1

Reinstatement of Warranty: Upon restoration or removal-and-replacement of warranted work which has failed, reinstate the warranty by issuing newly executed form, for at least the remaining period of time of the original warranty, but for not less than half of the original warranty period.

1.6.3 Owner's Recourse: Warranties and warranty periods do not diminish implied warranties, and do not deprive Owner of actions, rights and remedies otherwise available for Contractor's failure to fulfill requirements to reject coincidental produce warranties considered to be conflicting with or detracting from requirements of the contract documents.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-6

Part 5

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

DATE:

______________________________________________

TO:

______________________________________________

PROJECT:

______________________________________________

SPECIFIED ITEM: _________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Section Page Paragraph Description

The undersigned requests consideration of the following: PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:

____________________________________

PROPOSED MANUFACTURER:

____________________________________

REASON FOR SUBSTITUTION:

_________________________________________________________________________________

_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Attached data includes product description, specification information, drawings, photographs, performance and test data for evaluation of request applicable portions of the data are clearly identified. Attached data also includes description of changes to the Contract Documents which proposed substitution requires for its proper installation. The undersigned states that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct: 1. 2. 3. 4.

The proposed substitution will not affect dimensions shown on the Drawings. The undersigned will pay for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing and construction costs caused by the requested substitution. The proposed substitution will have no adverse affect on other trades, the construction schedule, or the specified warranty/guarantee requirements. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.

The undersigned further states that the function, appearance and quality of the Proposed Substitution are equivalent or superior to the Specified Item. The difference in cost shall reflect a savings/increase (circle one) to the Owner $__________. Submitted By: Accepted Accepted as Noted Rejected Received too Late

Accepted Accepted as Noted Rejected Received too Late

By:

__________________ Project Manager

By:

__________________ Sheriff

Date:

Date:

__________________

Date:

__________________

Telephone: __________________________

Remarks: __________________

Remarks: __________________

Reviewed for General Contractor by:

__________________________

__________________________

____________________________________

__________________________

__________________________

Signature: ____________________________ Firm: ____________________________ Address: ____________________________ ____________________________________

END OF SECTION 01 25 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-7

Part 5

SECTION 01 26 00 – CONTRACT MODIFICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL: 1.1

1.2

1.3

Sections Include: 1.1.1

Change Procedures.

1.1.2

Request for Information Procedures

Related Documents or Sections: 1.2.1

Document - Contract

1.2.2

Document – General Conditions

1.2.3

Section 01 33 00 - Submittals

Change Procedures: 1.3.1 Contractor shall establish measures as needed to assure familiarity of the Contractor’s staff and employees with procedures for processing changes in Contract Documents. 1.3.2 The Contractor shall maintain and coordinate a Register of Requests for Information, Architects Supplemental Instructions, Contractor Change Order Requests, Construction Change Directives, Field Change Orders and Change Orders at the job site, accurately reflecting current status of all pertinent data as submitted by the Contractor. 1.3.3 Per Article 7 Changes in Work, General Conditions, Contractor is not authorized to make changes to the Work described by any of the Contract modification documents specified in this Section, until said documents are signed by the Owner. 1.3.4 Architect’s Supplemental Instruction (ASI): The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will advise of minor changes in the Work that do not involve an adjustment to Contract Price or Contract Time by issuing supplemental instructions on form provided by the Owner. 1.3.5 If Contractor considers the minor change does represent a change in the contract, Contractor shall immediately notify the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer of Contractors intention to make a claim. 1.3.6 Proposal Request (PR): The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer may issue a Proposal Request, which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications.

1.3.7

1.3.6.1

Analyze the change and its impact on costs and time. Submit response within 10 days. If accepted by Owner, Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will prepare Change Order.

1.3.6.2

When requested, meet with the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer as required explaining costs and, when appropriate, determining other acceptable ways to achieve the desired objective.

1.3.6.3

Alert pertinent personnel and subcontractors as to the impending change and, to the maximum extent possible, avoid such work as would increase the Owner’s cost for making the change, advising Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer in writing when such avoidance no longer is practicable.

1.3.6.4

Following review, and if accepted by Owner, Contractor will prepare Change Order.

Change Order Request (COR): 1.3.7.1

Contractor may submit a COR to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer for changes in conditions, Owner changes, or other direction from the jurisdictional authority or Owners inspector.

1.3.7.2

Document the proposed change and its complete impact, including its effect on the cost and schedule of the work.

1.3.7.3

Present total cost and schedule impacts in documentation, including all mark-ups permitted by General Conditions. Provide detailed back-up as required by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, including supplier costs, sub-contractor labor time and rates, and all other data deemed necessary by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

1.3.7.4

Following final review by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer of original and supplemental information, and if COR is accepted, no additional cost or schedule adjustments will be included.

1.3.7.5

Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will review COR. If accepted, Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will prepare a Change Order or Construction Change Directive, as directed by Owner.

1.3.8 Field Change Order (FCO): Field Change Order will be issued by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer in accordance with procedures established in General Conditions, Part 4 - Section 7.6.1. 1.3.8.1

Field Change Order Forms: Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer issued document, form provided by Owner.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-8

Part 5

1.3.8.2

Execution of Field Change Orders: Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract.

1.3.9 Change Order (CO): Change Orders will be issued by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer or Contractor in accordance with procedures established in General Conditions. 1.3.9.1

Change Order Forms: Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer or Contractor issued document, form provided by Owner.

1.3.9.2

Execution of Change Orders: Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer or Contractor will issue Change Orders for signatures of all parties as provided in the General Conditions of the Contract.

1.3.10 Construction Change Directives (CCD): Construction Change Directives (CCD) will be issued by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. 1.3.10.1 Construction Change Directive Forms: Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer issued document, form provided by Owner. 1.3.10.2 Execution of Construction Change Directive: Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will issue CCD with Owners signature. Proceed with work as defined by CCD. 1.3.10.3 Unless otherwise agreed, maintain detailed records of work done under the direction of a CCD on Time and Material basis. Provide full information required to substantiate costs for changes in the Work. 1.3.10.4 Following agreement on cost of the work, a Change Order will be prepared. 1.3.11 Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will provide a single copy of all documents issued under this Article for transmission to Contractor. Contractor shall prepare copies as required for distribution to subcontractors, suppliers and others at no cost to Owner. 1.4

Payment For Contract Modifications: 1.4.1 The Contractor shall compensate the Owner, by Owner-Contractor Contract adjustment, for the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer reasonable costs to modify Contract Documents required by work not performed in accordance with approved Contract Documents.

1.5

Request For Information: 1.5.1

The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will respond to legitimate and bonafide Requests for Information (RFI) initiated by Contractor.

1.5.2

Submit all RFI’s on the Contractors standard form. RFI’s submitted by subcontractors or supplier will not be reviewed.

1.5.3 The Contractor shall compensate the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, by Owner-Contractor Contract adjustment, for the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's reasonable costs to respond to RFI’s if the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer determines: 1.5.3.1

The RFI does not reflect careful study and review of the documents, or;

1.5.3.2

Demonstrates a lack of knowledge or construction competency reasonably expected of a Contractor performing the work.

1.5.4 The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's action will be taken with such reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's professional judgment to permit adequate review. 1.5.5 RFI’s received in Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's office after 9:00 AM Friday will be logged in as received by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer on Monday, 8:00 AM. This applies to all forms of communication, including RFI’s arriving via FAX transmission. PART 2 – PRODUCTS: Not Used PART 3 – EXECUTION: Not used

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-9

Part 5

CONTRACTORS REQUEST FOR INFORMATION

RFI #

From:

domusstudio Project #

To:

domusstudio Project:

Disciplines Impacted:

[] Structural [] Civil

[] Mechanical [] Landscape

Reference: Drawing(s)

[] Electrical [] Kitchen []

Date:

[] Architectural

Spec Section(s)

Other

Please clarify or provide the following information:

Possible Cost Impact

[] Increase

[] Decrease

[] No Change

[] Unknown

Possible Time Impact

[] Increase

[] Decrease

[] No Change

[] Unknown

This information is required as soon as possible, but no later than

[ ] PRIORITY ATTENTION REQUIRED Copies to:

Contractors Representative Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's Response: Date:

Copies to: Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer Representative

END OF SECTION 01 26 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-10

Part 5

SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT COORDINATION 1.1

ADMINISTRATION AND SUPERVISION: 1.1.1

Coordination: 1.1.1.1

The Contractor shall consult the contract documents, the field layouts of the various trades, their shop drawings and applicable manufacturer's brochures and instructions, and he shall coordinate all phases of the work described and affected by these documents. He shall be responsible for the accurate location and layout of all chases, pipe sleeves and openings in the construction required to accommodate the work of all the trades, and with work by separate contractors (if any) and by Owner.

1.1.1.2

Existing Utility and Drainage Lines: 1.1.1.2.1 The contract documents show all known utility and drainage lines existing on the site of the work. Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer recommends Contractor also review record drawings from Owner for existing conditions. Location of said lines is in accordance with information furnished to the Architect by the Owner. Responsibility for locating, uncovering and protecting of said lines shall rest solely with the Contractor, who shall lay out and arrange his operations in such a way as to insure that safe conditions are maintained for the entire construction period. Any interruptions of service shall be coordinated with the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, Owner, and authorities having jurisdiction. 1.1.1.2.2 Contractor shall send proper notices, make all necessary arrangements and provide all other services required in care and maintenance of all public utilities including, but not limited to, street lights, traffic signals, street signs, hydrants, man-holes, mains, catch basins, valve boxes, poles, guys, and other appurtenances. Contractor shall assume all responsibility concerning same for which Owner may be liable. 1.1.1.2.3 Enclosing or boxing in, for protection of any public utilities equipment, shall be done by Contractor. Upon completion of work, Contractor shall remove all enclosures, fill in all openings in concrete or masonry, grout same watertight, and leave in a finished condition. 1.1.1.2.4 Arrange for disconnection of all water pipes, sewers, gas lines, electrical services, telephone wires and all similar work. The Contractor shall be certain that those utilities which will not be used in the new construction, or will not be used beyond an established point are not in use at the time of demolition or removal. If existing active services are not indicated but are encountered and require protection or relocation, request the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, in writing, for decision or disposition. DO NOT PROCEED until written instructions are obtained from proper authorities. Provide a 72 hour minimum notice before disconnection.

1.1.1.3

Divisions of the Specifications: 1.1.1.3.1 These specifications are divided for convenience into sections as set forth in the index of the specifications. 1.1.1.3.2 Schedules of work included in these sections are given for convenience and shall not be considered as a comprehensive list of items necessary to complete the work of any section. 1.1.1.3.3 Where devices or items, or parts thereof are referred to in the singular, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many such devices, items or parts as are required to properly complete the work. 1.1.1.3.4 Where the specifications are divided into two or more sections, the Contractor shall coordinate the work covered in each section with the work of other sections. The necessary information and the items, accessories, anchors, connections, patterns, templates, etc., shall be delivered when required, in order to prevent any delay in the progress and completion of the work. 1.1.1.3.5 Items or parts of work specified shall constitute a responsibility of the Contractor, regardless of where they are located in the specifications. The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will not make decisions on jurisdiction or responsibilities of subcontractors.

1.1.2

1.1.1.4

Errors and Omissions: Should there be omissions or discrepancies found to exist between the drawings and specifications or any parts of either, or should language of any part of the contract prove to be ambiguous or doubtful, the Contractor shall notify the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, who will decide as to the true intent and meaning. Should the Contractor fail to give such notification in writing and proceed with the work so affected without receiving proper instructions from the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, he shall do so at his own risk, and he shall remove and replace the work so as to be in compliance with the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's instructions. The costs of replacing said work and of any damages or defects which result shall be paid by the Contractor.

1.1.1.5

Oral Modifications: It shall be distinctly understood that no oral statement of any person shall be allowed in any manner to modify any of the contract provisions. Changes shall be made only on written authorization of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer except in an emergency endangering life or property.

1.1.1.6

Transmittal: Any notice from one party to the other under the contract shall be in writing, and shall be dated and signed by the party giving such notice, or by duly authorized representative of such party.

Survey/Recording:

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-11

Part 5

1.1.2.1

1.1.3

General: The Contractor shall employ, at contractor's own expense, a registered civil engineer or licensed land surveyor working from established lines and levels at or near project site, establish and maintain dependable markers for lines and levels of the work, including markers for each story of construction. Calculate dimensions and measure for layout of work; do not scale the drawings. Maintain surveyor's log of layout work. It is the Contractors option to utilize the services from the engineer who generated the construction documents at the Contractor's expense. Record deviations (if any) from drawing information on existing conditions, and review with Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer at time of discovery.

Preparation for Installation: 1.1.3.1

Installer Inspections: Require installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate and conditions for installation, and to report (in writing) unsatisfactory conditions. Subcontractor's should notify Contractor in writing of unacceptable substrate conditions to correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding. Inspect each product immediately before installation. Once a contractor or subcontractor proceeds or installs over defective or nonsuitable substrate conditions it is now the responsibility of the Contractor and latest trade subcontractor involved to correct all work. Do not install and/or install over damaged or defective products, materials or equipment.

1.1.3.2

Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to starting installation of each major component of the work, hold a preinstallation conference, attended by each entity involved or affected by planned installation. Include technical representatives of product manufacturers and others recognized as expert or otherwise capable of influencing success of the installation. 1.1.3.2.1 The Contractor to provide 7-day notification of the date and time of each meeting to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer so they can attend if they desire. In any event, the Contractor shall document minutes of the meetings and provide copies to the Owner’s representative and the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. 1.1.3.2.2 Review significant aspects of requirements for the work. Record discussion and distribute as plan of action.

1.1.3.3

Installation, General: 1.1.3.3.1 Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to extent printed information is more detailed or stringent than requirements contained directly in contract documents. 1.1.3.3.2 Timing: Install work during time and under conditions which will ensure best possible results, coordinated with required inspection and testing. 1.1.3.3.3 Anchor work securely in place, properly located by measured line and level, organized for best possible uniformity, visual effect, operational efficiency, durability, and similar benefit to Owner's use. Isolate noncompatible materials from contact, sufficiently to prevent deterioration. 1.1.3.3.4 Mount individual units of work at industry-recognized mounting heights, if not otherwise indicated; refer uncertainties to Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 1.1.3.3.5 Contractor shall coordinate and provide protection of dissimilar metals coming in contact with one another. Contractor shall provide adequate barriers (size, type and method prior approved by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer prior to installation) to prevent electrolysis and/or breakdown of adjacent metals. 1.1.3.3.6 Contractor shall notify the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer and coordinate for an opportunity to review the site installation of fixtures, boxes, controls, etc. for electrical, tel/com, a/v, and sprinkler piping/heads prior to close up within the finish wall and ceiling/floor assemblies.

1.1.4

Cleaning and Protection: 1.1.4.1

General: For each element of work, provide sufficient maintenance and protection during construction to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration and clean each element of work thoroughly at time of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION 01 31 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-12

Part 5

SECTION 01 31 19 - PROJECT MEETINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK The work includes scheduling and administering project progress meetings as specified herein. The Conditions of the Contract and other sections of Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 1.2.1 Contractor: Schedule and administer progress meetings. Prepare agendas, and make arrangements for meetings. Make advance notices of regular and special meetings at least four working days prior to meeting. Preside at meetings. 1.2.2 The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will attend meetings to ascertain that the project is expedited consistent with construction schedule and with Contract Documents. The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will record minutes including all significant proceeding and decisions and will distribute copies to all participants no later than four working days after the meeting. Unless advised expeditiously in writing otherwise the Contractor and the team members will assume that the minutes accurately record the events discussed and agreements reached at the meeting.

1.3

PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING: 1.3.1

Schedule within seven days after date of Notice of Intent or Contract Award.

1.3.2

Attendance: Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, Contractor, major subcontractors of the Contractor.

1.3.3

Minimum Agenda: 1.3.3.1

Distribute and discuss list of major subcontractors, tentative construction schedule.

1.3.3.2

Critical work sequencing.

1.3.3.3

Relation and coordination of major subcontractors.

1.3.3.4

Designation of responsible personnel.

1.3.3.5

Processing of field decisions and Change Orders.

1.3.3.6

Submittal of shop drawings, project data and samples.

1.3.3.7

Procedures for maintaining record documents.

1.3.3.8

Use of Premises: Office and storage areas, Owner's requirements.

1.3.3.9

Major equipment deliveries and priorities.

1.3.3.10 Housekeeping procedures. 1.3.3.11 Temporary utilities. 1.3.3.12 Restriction of access and temporary parking. 1.3.3.13 Schedule regular progress meetings. 1.4

PROGRESS MEETINGS: 1.4.1

Schedule regular meetings at a time and date to be established at the pre-construction meeting.

1.4.2

Hold special meetings as progress of work dictates.

1.4.3

Attendance: Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, Contractor, subcontractors as pertinent to agenda.

1.4.4

Minimum Agenda: 1.4.4.1

Review work progress since last meeting.

1.4.4.2

Note field observations, problems and decisions.

1.4.4.3

Identify problems which impede planned progress.

1.4.4.4

Develop corrective measures and procedures to regain planned schedule.

1.4.4.5

Revise construction schedule as required.

1.4.4.6

Plan progress during next work period.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-13

Part 5

1.4.4.7

Review changes proposed by the Owner for effect on construction costs schedule and completion date.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable) END OF SECTION 01 31 19

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-14

Part 5

SECTION 01 32 00 - SCHEDULES, REPORTS and PAYMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

PROGRESS SCHEDULE AND REPORTS: 1.1.1 General: Within 14 days of date established for notice of intent or contract award, submit a comprehensive baseline (CPM) (bar-chart type) progress schedule indicating a time bar for each significant category or unit of work to be performed at the site. Arrange schedule to indicate required sequencing of units, and to show time allowances for submittals, inspections and similar time margins.

1.2

1.1.1.1

Show critical submittal dates related to each time bar, or prepare separate coordinated listing of critical submittal dates. Schedule must have logic ties and contract milestones identified.

1.1.1.2

Submittal Schedule: The Contractor shall also furnish a separate schedule along with the Construction Schedule specified above, showing the proposed dates for submittal of all samples, shop drawings, and product data.

1.1.1.3

Show double cost line immediately below date line in heading, showing precalculated dollar-volume and space for recording actual dollar-volume of completed work at end of each period scheduled.

1.1.1.4

Show schedule of work and its relation to keeping the client/site operations functional.

1.1.1.5

Subcontractors to submit changes to the schedule if applicable within seven (7) days of distribution. Contractor to submit revised schedule within seven (7) days to project Manager and Sheriff.

SUBMITTAL: Following initial revision of schedule after Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's review, print and distribute schedule to entities with a need-to-know responsibility, including three copies to Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. Revise at intervals matching payment requests, work accomplished, and redistribute/repost. Provide copies required with payment requests. 1.2.1 A copy of the most recent updated Construction Schedule shall be posted in the Contractor's job office, and copies of all out-of-date schedules shall be kept at the job office at all times for perusal by the Owner.

1.3

SCHEDULE OF VALUES: 1.3.1 Immediately upon being awarded the Contract, and before request for payment, prepare and submit to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer a Schedule of Values (per Part 4 General Conditions, Section 9.2) allocated to the various portions of the work. This Schedule of Values, unless objected to by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, shall be used only as the basis for the Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.3.2 The schedule shall list the installed value of the component parts of the work in sufficient detail to serve as a basis for computing values for progress payments during construction. Follow the table of contents of this Project Manual as the format for listing component items. For each major line item, list sub-values of major products or operations under the item, where applicable. 1.3.3

Each item shall include a directly proportional amount of the Contractor's overhead and profit.

1.3.4 For items on which progress payments will be requested for stored materials, break down the value into (1) the cost of the materials, delivered and unloaded, with taxes paid, and (2) the total installed value.

1.4

1.3.5

Submit a subschedule for each separate stage of work specified in Section 01 11 00.

1.3.6

The sum of all values listed in the schedule shall equal the total Contract sum.

PAYMENT REQUESTS: 1.4.1 Submit request for each calendar month, not later than the 15th day of the following month. Use AIA Form G702, fully completed and executed. Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer recommends to pencil rough draft of previous approved applications for review prior to executing final forms. Submit the final forms in triplicate, including attachment of waivers and similar required documentation with one copy. 1.4.2

Prior to the initial payment request, submit: 1.4.2.1

List of principal subcontractors and suppliers.

1.4.2.2

Schedule of values.

1.4.2.3

Progress schedule and first progress report.

1.4.2.4

Copies of building permits and similar start-up authorization or certifications.

1.4.3 Following issuance by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer of Certificate of Substantial Completion, Contractor may submit special payment request, provided the following have been completed: 1.4.3.1

Obtain permits, certificates of inspection and other approval and releases by governing authorities, required for

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-15

Part 5

Owner's occupancy and use of project.

1.4.4

1.4.3.2

Submit warranties and similar documentation.

1.4.3.3

Submit maintenance manuals and provide instruction of Owner's operational/maintenance personnel.

1.4.3.4

Complete final cleaning of the work.

1.4.3.5

Submit record documents.

1.4.3.6

Majority and major punch list items have been corrected and approved by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

1.4.3.7

Contractor submit a contractor generated listing of work to be completed before final acceptance.

Following completion of the following requirements, final payment request may be submitted: 1.4.4.1

Complete work listed as incomplete at time of substantial completion, or otherwise assure Owner of subsequent completion of individual incomplete items.

1.4.4.2

Settle liens and other claims, or assure Owner of subsequent settlement.

1.4.4.3

Submit proof of payment on fees, taxes and similar obligations.

1.4.4.4

Transfer operational, access, security and similar provisions to Owner; and remove temporary facilities, tools and similar items.

1.4.4.5

Completion of requirements specified in "Project Closeout" section.

1.4.4.6

Obtain consent of surety for final payment.

PART 2 - MATERIAL (Not applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable) END OF SECTION 01 32 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-16

Part 5

SECTION 01 33 00 - SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA and SAMPLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY: The work includes the preparation and submission of samples, shop drawings and product data as specified herein and in the various sections of these specifications. The requirements specified herein are in addition to any requirements for samples and shop drawings, product data materials lists, substitutions of materials, or other submittals specified elsewhere in these specifications. The Conditions of the Contract and the other sections of Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

PART 2 - DEFINITIONS: 2.1

As used herein, the term "manufactured" applies to standard units usually mass-produced; and "fabricated" means items specifically assembled or made out to selected materials to meet individual design requirements.

PART 3 - GENERAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 3.1

SCHEDULING: Submit samples, shop drawings, and product data in accordance with the schedule specified in Section 01 32 00 but in no event later than 30 days after Notice of Intent or Contract Award. Extension of Contract time will not be granted because of the Contractor's failure to make timely submittals. Do not purchase materials or equipment or begin work covered by the required submittals until submittals have been reviewed and returned.

3.2

TRANSMITTAL: Accompany each submittal with a dated, signed and sequence numbered transmittal on forms prescribed by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. Include all information required by this form including project identification, name and address of Contractor and of subcontractor or supplier, a list of items included in the submittal, and identification of drawing numbers, specification section and paragraph numbers to which the submittal pertains, and space for Contractor's review and approval stamp.

3.3

CHECK OF RETURNED SUBMITTALS: Check the submittals returned for correction and ascertain if the corrections result in extra cost above the included under the Contract Documents, and give written notice within five days if, in Contractor's opinion, such extra cost results from corrections. By failing to so notify or by starting any Work covered by a submittal, Contractor waives all claims for extra costs resulting from required corrections.

PART 4 - SAMPLES 4.1

Furnish for review, samples of the various materials, together with the finish thereon, as specified for and intended to be used on or in the work. Samples shall be sent to the office of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, carriage prepaid. The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will distribute the samples, when approved.

4.2

Submit all samples to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer for review before purchasing, fabricating, applying or installing such materials and finishes. The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will review and take action on samples within ten working days of the Contractor's submission. All actions will be by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer in writing.

4.3

Submit all samples, other than field samples, in sets of four. A covering letter shall accompany the sample and shall list all items being transmitted, designating their particular usage and location in the project and shall be identified as to manufacturer, trade name, style, model, etc. Two approved samples shall be returned to the Contractor with one returned set to maintain at the project site for purposes of quality control comparisons. Provide sample cabinet at job site for storage of returned samples. Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer each will retain one set of samples.

4.4

Approval of a sample shall not be taken in itself to change or modify any contract requirement. All materials, finishes, and workmanship in the completed building shall be equal in every respect to that of the approved sample.

4.5

Unless otherwise specified, samples shall be 8"x10" in size and shall be limited in thickness to a minimum consistent with sample analysis. In lieu thereof, the actual full size item may be submitted.

4.6

Samples of value may be returned to the Contractor for use in the project after review, analysis, comparison and/or testing as may be required by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, provided that the location is recorded and the samples bear temporary identification as samples.

4.7

Field samples shall be prepared at the site by the Contractor as specified in the various sections of these Specifications. Affected finished work shall not be commenced until the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer has given written approval for the field samples.

PART 5 - SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA 5.1

SHOP DRAWINGS: The term "shop drawings" as used herein includes fabrication and installation, layout and setting drawings; wiring and control diagrams; and other drawings as defined in the applicable Section(s) of the General Conditions, as referenced herein.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-17

Part 5

5.1.1 The Contractor shall check and verify all field measurements and shall submit for review, with such promptness as to cause no delay in his own work or in that of any other contractor or subcontractor, all shop or setting drawings and schedules required for the work of the various trades. Shop drawings shall be prepared at the Contractor's expense and shall be sent to the office of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, carriage prepaid if applicable. 5.1.2 Drawings shall show all information required by the applicable Technical Section and shall be in sufficient detail as may be required to show that fabricated materials, equipment or systems, and the positions thereof conform to the Contract Documents. 5.1.3 Shop drawings shall establish the actual detail of all fabricated items, indicate proper relation of adjoining work, amplify design details of mechanical and electrical equipment in proper relation to physical spaces in the structure, and incorporate minor changes of design or construction to suit actual conditions. Shop drawings shall be drawn to scale and shall be completely dimensioned. 5.1.4 Composite Shop Drawings and Field Layouts: Prepare and submit composite Shop Drawings and field layouts as required to solve tight field conditions and when required to coordinate the Work of several trades. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details and give complete information particularly as to kinds and types of materials and equipment, size and location of sleeves, inserts, attachments, chases, openings, conduits, ducts, boxes, and structural interferences. Coordinate these composite Shop Drawings and field layouts in the field for proper relationship to Work of applicable trades based on field conditions. Contractor shall have competent personnel readily available for coordinating, checking, and supervision of field layouts. The procedures for submittals and resubmittals, and final distribution shall be as specified for Shop Drawings. 5.1.5

Prepare shop drawings on sheet of same size as project drawings or on 8-1/2" x 11" document/files.

5.1.6

Each shop drawing shall have a title block containing the following information:

5.1.7

5.1.6.1

Name and location of the project.

5.1.6.2

Name and address of the Contractor.

5.1.6.3

Name and address of the subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor as applicable.

5.1.6.4

Name and address of Owner.

5.1.6.5

Date, scale of drawings and identification number.

5.1.6.6

Space for the Contractor's review and approval stamp.

Grouping of Submittals

Unless otherwise specifically permitted by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, make all submittals in groups containing all associated items. Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer may reject partial submittals as not complying with the provisions of the contract documents. 5.1.8 Submit one electronic file set of each shop drawing only for Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer’s action. Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will distribute as required for Consultant review/comment. 5.1.9 The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will review and take action on shop drawings within ten working days of the Contractor's submission. All actions will be by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer in writing. 5.2

PRODUCT DATA: The terms "product data" as used herein includes manufacturer's standard drawings, certificates of conformance, substantiating calculations and other data as defined in Clause 3.12.2 of the General Conditions. 5.2.1 The data shall include all information required by the applicable technical section and shall be in sufficient detail to show that manufactured materials and equipment conform to the Contract Documents. 5.2.2 Catalog Cuts: Clearly mark each copy to indicate the product or model as well as all optional sizes, finishes or other features proposed for use. Delete all inapplicable data. 5.2.3 Submittal Preparation: Submit one electronic file set of each product data for Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer’s action. Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will distribute as required for Consultant review/comment. Group product data with labeled cover sheets with an index listing the contents. Undocumented product data submittals will be returned without review. 5.2.4 The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will review and take action on product data within ten working days of the Contractor's submission. All actions will be by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer in writing.

5.3

OWNER'S ACTION: The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will review the submittals with reasonable promptness (generally ten working days) and will affix the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's initials or signature as follows: 5.3.1

Submittals signed and identified as "REVIEWED" require no further action and fabrication and/or construction may proceed.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-18

Part 5

The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will stamp and return to the Contractor, the transparency and one copy of shop drawings and one marked copy and four unmarked copies of brochures, schedules, materials lists, and other product data, except where required otherwise. 5.3.2 Submittals signed and identified as "FURNISH AS CORRECTED" require no further action and fabrication and/or construction may proceed contingent upon all corrections being made as noted. Quantities returned to be as specified in paragraph 5.3.1. 5.3.3 Submittals signed and identified as "REJECTED" or "REVISE AND RESUBMIT" or “SUBMIT SPECIFIED ITEM” require the Contractor to resubmit them with reasonable promptness and no fabrication or construction may begin. The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will stamp and return to the Contractor; the transparency of shop drawings and one marked copy and four unmarked copies, of brochures, schedules, materials lists, and other product data. 5.3.4 Resubmittals: If first or subsequent submittal is signed and identified as "REJECTED" or "REVISE AND RESUBMIT", corrective action shall be taken and resubmittal procedure shall be same as for first submittal. The Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing, by highlighting, by clouding, or in some matter clearly noting on resubmitted shop drawing corrections as to revisions requested and also revisions other than the correction requested by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer on previous submissions. 5.3.5 Distribution Copies: The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining required reviewed electronic files & samples and for distribution to Subcontractors. All distribution files of shop drawings and product data and physical copies of samples shall bear the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer 's review stamp. Maintain one copy of all submittals at the project site. 5.4

The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will check and take action on such drawings and schedules only for conformance with the design concept of the project and compliance with information given in the contract documents. When so directed by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall make any and all corrections required by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

5.5

The shop drawings, product data and supporting data shall be prepared by the Contractor or his suppliers and subcontractors, but shall be submitted as the instruments of the Contractor.

5.6

The Contractor shall check the drawings of his suppliers and subcontractors as well as his own drawings before submitting them. In particular, the Contractor shall ascertain that the drawings meet all requirements of the contract drawings and specifications, and conform to the structural and space conditions. If such shop drawings show variations from contract documents, whether because of standard shop practice or other reasons, the Contractor shall clearly describe such variations including other changes required to correlate the work in his letter of transmittal.

5.7

Shop drawings, product data and samples, when submitted to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer for review, shall be accompanied by a written statement signed by the Contractor, that the shop drawings, product data, and samples have been checked by him and found to be in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications, and that proper provision has been made to accommodate all abutting work. This statement may be in the form of an approval stamp bearing the Contractor's (superintendent) signature. Submittals shall be rejected if Contractor fails to take appropriate action prior to submission.

5.8

Substantiating calculations, when specified, shall be prepared and signed by a California registered civil or structural engineer, employed by the Contractor.

5.9

The Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's review of submittals will be general only and shall not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors of any sort, for deviations from drawings or specifications, or for conflict with the work of others that may result from such deviations. Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's review of a separate item does not indicate a review of an assembly in which the item functions. Refer to Part 3 General Conditions as referenced herein, for other pertinent information.

END OF SECTION 01 33 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-19

Part 5

SECTION 01 40 00 - DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS PART 1 - DEFINITIONS: 1.1

General: Except as specifically defined otherwise, the following definitions supplement definitions of the Contract, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and other general contract documents, and apply generally to the work. 1.1.1 General Requirements: The provisions of Division 1 sections, General Requirements, apply to the entire work of the Contract. 1.1.2 Indicated: Shown on drawings by notes, graphics or schedules, or written into other portions of contract documents. Terms such as "shown", "noted", "scheduled", and "specified" have same meaning as "indicated", and are used to assist the reader in locating particular information. 1.1.3 Directed, Requested, Approved, Accepted, etc.: Architect/Engineer ", unless otherwise indicated.

These terms imply "by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and

1.1.4 Reviewed/Approved by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer: In no case releases Contractor from responsibility to fulfill requirements of contract documents. Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer is typically reviewing for general conformance and compliance of the Contract Documents. 1.1.5 Project Site: Space available to Contractor at location of project, either exclusively or to be shared with separate contractors, for performance of the work. 1.1.6 Furnish: Supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar subsequent requirements. 1.1.7 Install: Operations at project site, including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar requirements. 1.1.8

Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use.

1.1.9 Installer: Entity (firm or person) engaged to install work, by Contractor, subcontractor or sub-subcontractor. Installers are required to be skilled in work they are engaged to install. 1.1.10 Specification Text Format: Underscoring facilitates scan reading, no other meaning. Imperative language is directed at Contractor, unless otherwise noted. 1.1.11 Overlapping/Conflicting Requirements: Most stringent (generally) requirement written directly into the contract documents is intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into the contract documents clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is acceptable. Refer uncertainties to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer for a decision before proceeding. 1.1.12 Minimum Requirements: Indicated requirements are for a specific minimum acceptable level of quality/quantity, as recognized in the industry. Actual work must comply (within specified tolerances), or may exceed minimums within reasonable limits. Refer uncertainties to Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 1.1.13 Abbreviations, Plural Words: Abbreviations, where not defined in contract documents, will be interpreted to mean the normal construction industry terminology, determined by recognized grammatical rules, by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. Plural words will be interpreted as singular and singular words will be interpreted as plural where applicable for context of contract documents. 1.1.14 Testing Laboratory: An independent entity engaged for the project to provide inspections, tests, interpretations, reports and similar services at Contractor's expense. 1.2

Standards and Regulations: 1.2.1 Industry Standards: Applicable standards of construction industry have same force and effect on performance of the work as if copied directly into contract documents or bound and published therewith. Standards referenced in contract documents or in governing regulations have precedence over non-referenced standards, insofar as different standards may contain overlapping or conflicting requirements. Comply with standards in effect as of date of contract documents, unless otherwise indicated. 1.2.1.1

Abbreviations: Where abbreviations or acronyms are used in contract documents, they mean the well recognized name of entity in building construction industry; refer uncertainties to Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer before proceeding, or consult "Encyclopedia of Associations" by Gale Research Co.

1.2.2 Trade Union Jurisdictions: Maintain current information on jurisdictional matters, regulations, actions and pending actions; and administer/supervise performance of work in a manner which will minimize possibility of disputes, conflicts, delays, claims or losses. END OF SECTION 01 40 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-20

Part 5

SECTION 01 45 00 - QUALITY CONTROL SERVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS & DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes testing laboratory services and inspections required during the course of construction, as specified herein and in other sections of this specification. The Requirements of the Contract and the other sections of Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

TESTING LABORATORY: 1.2.1

Required testing and inspections will be performed by an independent testing laboratory selected by the Owner.

1.2.2 Testing and inspection services which are performed shall be in accordance with requirements of the "California Building Code, current edition (CBC)” and as specified herein. Testing and inspection services shall verify that work meets the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.2.3 Test reports shall be performed by a registered deputy inspector and signed by a Registered Civil Engineer licensed in the State of California. 1.3

PAYMENTS: 1.3.1 Costs of initial testing and inspection, except as specifically modified hereinafter, or specified otherwise in technical sections, will be paid for by the Owner, providing such testing and inspection indicates compliance with Contract Documents. Initial tests and inspections are defined as the first tests and inspections as hereinafter specified. 1.3.2 In the event a test or inspection indicates failure of a material or procedure to meet requirements of Contract Documents, costs for retesting and reinspection will be paid by the Owner and backcharged to the Contractor. 1.3.3 Additional tests and inspections not herein specified but requested by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, will be paid for by Owner, unless results of such tests and inspections are found to be not in compliance with Contract Documents, in which case the Owner will pay all costs for initial testing as well as retesting and reinspection and backcharge the Contractor. 1.3.4 Costs for additional tests or inspections required because of change in materials being provided or change of source or supply shall be paid by Contractor direct to testing laboratory. 1.3.5

Costs for work which is required to correct deficiencies shall be borne by the Contractor.

1.3.6 Cost of testing which is required solely for the convenience of Contractor in his scheduling and performance of work shall be borne by the Contractor. 1.3.7 Testing laboratory will separate and identify on the invoices, the costs covering all testing and inspections which are to be backcharged to the Contractor as specified above. 1.3.8 Testing laboratory will furnish to Owner a cost estimate breakdown covering initial tests and inspections required by Contract Documents. Estimate will include number of tests, man-hours required for tests, field and plant inspections, travel time, and costs. 1.4

TEST AND INSPECTION REPORTS: 1.4.1 Testing laboratory will certify in writing that all work specified or required to be tested and inspected conforms to or does not conform to drawings, specifications and applicable building codes. 1.4.2

The testing laboratory will make the following distribution of all test and inspection reports:

Contractor: Owner: County Inspector 1.5

1 3 1

REPORTING TEST FAILURES: Immediately upon testing laboratory determination of a test failure, the laboratory will telephone the results of test to Owner. On the same day, laboratory will send written test results to those named on above distribution list.

1.6

AVAILABILITY OF SAMPLES: 1.6.1 Contractor shall make materials required for testing available to laboratory and assist in acquiring these materials as directed by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. The samples shall be taken under the immediate direction and supervision of the testing laboratory. 1.6.2 If work which is required to be tested or inspected is covered up without prior notice or approval, such work, may be uncovered at the discretion of Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. 1.6.3

Unless otherwise specified, Contractor shall notify testing laboratory a minimum of ten (10) working days in advance of all

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-21

Part 5

required tests, and a minimum of two (2) working days in advance of all required inspections. Extra work resulting from a failure to notify the laboratory shall be paid for by the Contractor. 1.6.4 Contractor shall give sufficient advance notice to testing laboratory in the event of cancellation or time extension of a scheduled test or inspection. Charges due to insufficient advance notice of cancellations or time extension shall be paid for by the Contractor. 1.7

REMOVAL OF MATERIALS: Unless otherwise directed, materials not conforming to the requirements of Contract Documents shall be promptly removed from the job site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EARTHWORK: 3.1.1 The Owner's Soils Engineer will provide continuous inspection of fill and will field test fill and earth backfill as placed and compacted, and inspect excavations and subgrade before concrete is placed and provide periodic inspection of open excavations, embankments, and other cuts or vertical surfaces of earth. The Soils Engineer will submit a report indicating that he has observed and tested fills and that in his opinion the fills were placed in accordance with the project specifications. 3.1.2 Contractor shall remove unsatisfactory material, re-roll, adjust moisture, place new material, or in the case of excavations, provide proper protective measures, perform other operation necessary, as directed by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer whose decisions and directions will be considered final.

3.2

3.1.3

Soils Engineer may require deepening of footings and so order such deepening per Soils Engineer's direction.

3.1.4

Soils Test and Inspection Procedure: 3.1.4.1

Allow sufficient time for testing, and evaluation of results before material is needed. The Soils Engineer shall be sole and final judge of suitability of all materials.

3.1.4.2

Laboratory compaction tests to be used will be in accordance with ASTM D 1557-78.

3.1.4.3

Field density tests will be made in accordance with ASTM D 1556-82.

3.1.4.4

Number of tests will be determined by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer and Soils Engineer. Materials in question may not be used pending test results.

3.1.4.5

Excavation and Embankment Inspection Procedure: Soils Engineer will visually or otherwise examine such areas for bearing values.

TESTING OF CONCRETE: 3.2.1 Notify Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer and testing laboratory of brand and type of cement and sources of aggregates, in time for review sampling and testing, if required. 3.2.2 At least three cylinders for each 150 cubic yards of each separate mix design of concrete of required strength in excess of 2000 PSI, or fraction thereof, being placed each day will be taken. 3.2.3 Cylinders will be taken so as to represent as nearly as possible the batch of concrete from which they are taken. Sampling procedures shall conform to ASTM C 172-82. 3.2.4

Test cylinders shall be made and cured in compliance with ASTM C 31-83, except as modified hereinafter.

3.2.5 Test cylinders from respective batches, one at age of 7 days, and one at age of 28 days. The third shall be used as directed by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer if concrete strength is under that specified. Cylinder testing procedures shall conform to ASTM C 39-81 for strength. 3.2.6 Slump tests shall be taken as required by testing laboratory to certify compliance with Contract Documents. Slump shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C 143-78. 3.2.7 Minimum compressive strength of test cylinders, in pounds per square inch, shall not be less than the specified required design strength. 3.2.8 If minimum strengths of test cylinders fall below those specified, Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer may require test cores from hardened concrete to be taken and tested. Each core test, if taken, shall consist of three (3) cores. Costs of such cores and tests shall be borne by the Contractor. Cores shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C 42-77, from locations selected by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. Contractor shall repair core holes with a non-shrinking grout. 3.2.8.1

Concrete tested by coring shall be considered acceptable if the average strength of three (3) cores is equal to at least 0.85 of the minimum specified 28 day strength and if no single core strength is less than 0.75 of the minimum 28 day strength.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-22

Part 5

3.3

CONCRETE INSPECTIONS: An authorized inspector of the testing laboratory shall be present at all times during placing of structural, reinforced cast in place concrete. Prior to placing concrete, he will inspect and approve (if satisfactory) accuracy of all formwork and quantity and placement of all reinforcing steel and post-tensioning tendons. Work shall not proceed until inspections are complete and the inspected work is approved.

3.4

CONCRETE MIX DESIGNS: 3.4.1

See requirements specified in Section 03 30 00.

3.4.2 In addition to original mix designs, new mix designs shall be provided if change in brand or type of cement or change in source or gradation of aggregate is permitted, or if defective concrete occurs. 3.4.3 3.5

Contractor shall pay all costs for mix designs.

CONCRETE PLANT INSPECTION: 3.5.1 Manufacturer of structural concrete shall deliver to Inspector a certificate with each mixer truck in accordance with ASTM C 94-83, Section 15.1 and all items of 15.2 with the addition of type and brand of cement and admixtures, source and identification of aggregates. Certificates shall be from a Public Weighmaster. Inspector will not accept concrete which is not accompanied by and identified by the above certificate. 3.5.2 Periodic inspection of quality of materials used may be made by testing laboratory, as directed by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

3.6

REINFORCING STEEL: 3.6.1

Tests: 3.6.1.1

Tests shall be performed by manufacturer prior to the delivery of steel to job site. Steel not meeting specifications shall not be shipped to the job.

3.6.1.2

Testing procedure shall conform to ASTM A 615-82.

3.6.1.3

Submit mill certificates and report per paragraph 1.4.2.

3.6.1.4

Welds: Reinforcing bar welds shall be inspected as stated on structural drawings. Tests of reinforcing bar welds shall be in accordance with ASTM E109-63 and AWS D1.4-79.

3.6.2 Inspector will inspect all reinforcement for concrete work for size, dimensions, locations and proper placement. Inspector shall be present during welding of all reinforcing steel. 3.7

ASPHALT PAVING: 3.7.1 Asphalt concrete mix design proposed by the Contractor shall be submitted for review by Owner's agent. Proposed mix shall be tested for conformance with the specifications, including grading, asphalt content and stability.

3.8

3.7.1.1

One sample of the mix shall be taken during each day's paving operation and tested for asphalt content and gradation.

3.7.1.2

Continuous inspection of the paving operation shall be provided. Testing laboratory shall check for proper thickness, proper mix temperatures, proper rolling procedures and general workmanship.

CONCRETE MASONRY: 3.8.1 Field Tests for Strength of Mortar and Grout: The strengths specified for grout and mortar shall be verified during the progress of the work by testing samples taken at the job site as follows. 3.8.1.1

Mortar: Take at least 3 specimens each day of mortar placed that day. Spread a layer of mortar 1/2-inch to 5/8inch thick on the masonry units and allow to stand for one minute. Remove the mortar and place it in a 2-inch by 4-inch cylinder in two layers, compressing the mortar into the cylinder using a flat end stick or fingers. Lightly tap the mold on opposite sides, level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until taken to the laboratory. After 48 hours, remove molds and place specimens in a fog room until tested in the damp condition. Samples shall be tested in accordance with the applicable portions of ASTM C39 and shall exhibit a minimum ultimate compressive strength of 1800 pounds per square inch.

3.8.1.2

Grout: Take at least 3 specimens each day of grout placed that day. On a flat non-absorbent base, form a space approximately 3 inches by 3 inches by 6 inches using masonry units having the same moisture condition as those being laid. Line the space with a permeable paper or porous separator so that water may pass through the liner into the masonry units. Thoroughly mix or agitate grout to obtain a fully representative mix and place into molds in two layers. Puddle each layer with a one inch by two inch puddling stick to eliminate air bubbles. Level off and immediately cover molds and keep them damp until taken to the laboratory. After 48 hours, remove molds and place specimens in a fog room until tested in the damp condition. Samples shall be tested in accordance with the applicable portions of ASTM C39 and shall exhibit a minimum ultimate compressive strength of 2000 pounds per

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-23

Part 5

square inch. 3.8.1.3

3.9

Prism Tests: Perform prism testing of all masonry requiring special inspection in accordance with Section 2405 of the Uniform Building Code.

Mock-up Quality Control Field Sample: Contractor shall provide as specified in the various Sections a sample of finish work for Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer review. Upon written approval from the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, this established quality control sample shall remain on site in a location determined by Contractor for the duration of the work.

END OF SECTION 01 45 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-24

Part 5

SECTION 01 50 00 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES PART 1 - SUMMARY 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS & DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Furnish and install all required temporary facilities as shown or specified herein plus such facilities as required for proper performance of the Contract. All such temporary facilities shall be located where directed and maintained in a safe and sanitary condition at all times until completion of the Contract. The Requirements of the Contract and the other sections of Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE: Comply with governing regulations and utility company regulations and recommendations. Comply with pollution and environmental protection regulations for use of water and energy, for discharge of wastes and storm drainage from project site, and for control of dust, air pollution and noise.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES: 3.1.1 Provide adequate temporary sanitary conveniences for the use of all employees and persons engaged on the work, including subcontractors and their employees, as required by law, ordinances, or regulations of public authorities having jurisdiction. Refer to Supplementary Conditions, Article 15.2.

3.2

3.2.1

Sanitary facilities shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition during the entire course of the work.

3.1.3 Owner.

Use of permanent toilet facilities in the work under construction will not be permitted except by written approval of the

ELECTRIC FACILITIES: Contractor shall make arrangements with Owner to use existing electricity in connection with the work to be performed hereunder. If existing power is not available, provide and pay for service required to complete the work.

3.3

TEMPORARY WATER: Contractor shall make arrangements with Owner to use existing water in connection with the work to be performed hereunder. If existing water is not available, provide and pay for service required to complete the work.

3.4

CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT: 3.4.1 Contractor shall erect, equip, and maintain construction equipment in strict accordance with applicable statutes, laws, ordinances, rules and regulations of authority having jurisdiction. 3.4.2 Contractor shall provide, maintain and remove upon completion of the work all temporary rigging, scaffolding, hoisting equipment, rubbish chutes, barricades around openings and excavations, ladders, fences, and other temporary work as required for all work hereunder. 3.4.3 Temporary work shall conform to requirements of State, County and local authorities and underwriters which pertain to operation, safety, and fire hazard. Contractor shall furnish and install items necessary for conformity with such requirements, whether or not called for under the separate divisions of these specifications.

3.5

FENCES AND BARRICADES: Construct and maintain fences, planking, barricades, lights, shoring, and warning signs as indicated on the drawings and as required by local authorities and State safety ordinances and as required to reasonably protect the Owner's property from injury or loss and as necessary for the protection of the public, and provide walks around obstructions made in a public place for carrying on the work covered in this contract. Leave protection in place and maintain in good condition until removal is authorized. Contractor shall review security fencing plan and obtain approval from local police department prior to starting construction.

3.6

STORAGE: Operations of the Contractor, including storage of materials, shall be confined to areas approved by Owner. Contractor shall be liable for damage caused by him during such use of property of the Owner or other parties. Contractor shall save the Owner, its officers and agents, and the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer and his employees free and harmless from liability of any nature or kind arising from any use, trespass, or damage occasioned by his operations on premises of third persons.

3.7

REMOVAL AT COMPLETION: Upon completion of the work, or prior thereto, when so directed by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, Contractor shall remove all temporary facilities, structures, and installation from the Owner's property. Similarly, return exterior areas utilized for temporary facilities to substantially their original state, or when called for on the drawings, complete the areas as shown or noted.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-25

Part 5

Sanitary facilities shall be properly disinfected and evidence of same removed from site. 3.8

JOB SIGN: Contractor shall provide and install a 4’ x 8’ job sign to identify the location of the project. Signage should be directional an state "DETAC Construction Site".

END OF SECTION 01 50 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-26

Part 5

SECTION 01 73 29 - CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

Definition: "Cutting and patching" includes cutting into existing construction to provide for the installation or performance of other work and subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

1.2

Refer to other sections of these specifications for specific cutting and patching requirements and limitations applicable to individual units of work.

1.3

Structural Work: Submit proposal and request and obtain Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's approval before proceeding with cut and patch of any structural work. Do not cut and patch structural work in a manner resulting in a reduction of loadcarrying capacity or load/deflection ratio.

1.4

Visual/Quality Limitations: Submit proposal and request and obtain Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer approval before proceeding with cut and patch of work. Do not cut and patch work exposed to view (exterior and interior) in a manner resulting in noticeable reduction of aesthetic qualities and similar qualities, as judged by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. 1.4.1 work.

1.5

Engage the original Installer/Fabricator, or (if not available) an acceptable equivalent entity, to cut and patch the exposed

Limitation on Approvals: Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's approval to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive right to later require removal/replacement of work found to be cut and patched in an unsatisfactory manner, as judged by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

PART 2 - MATERIALS: 2.l

General: Use materials for cutting and patching that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not available, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materials for cutting and patching that will result in equal or better performance characteristics. Repaint enough of existing surface to allow unnoticeable transition or locate logical terminating point as directed by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION: 3.1

Inspection: Before cutting, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which the work is to be performed. If unsafe or otherwise unsatisfactory conditions are encountered, take corrective action before proceeding with the work.

3.2

Temporary Support: To prevent failure, provide temporary support of work to be cut.

3.3

Protection: Protect other work during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for that part of the project that may be exposed during cutting and patching operations. 3.3.1

3.4

Avoid interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

Cutting: Cut the work using methods that are least likely to damage work to be retained or adjoining work. Where possible review proposed procedures with the original installer; comply with original installer's recommendations. 3.4.1 Where cutting is required, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum saw or core drill. Cut holes and slots neatly to size required with minimum disturbance of adjacent work. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut and drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

3.5

Patching: Patch with seams which are durable and as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances for the work. 3.5.1 Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and where necessary extend finish restoration into retained adjoining work in a manner which will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

END OF SECTION 01 73 29

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-27

Part 5

SECTION 01 74 00 - CLEANING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS & DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, and services, and performing all operations necessary for, and properly incidental to, clean up during construction and final cleaning of the building prior to acceptance by the Owner, including waxing and polishing as specified herein and in other sections when specified. The Conditions of the Contract and the other sections of Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

CLEAN UP DURING CONSTRUCTION: 1.2.1 It is required that the entire site be kept in a neat and orderly condition, especially near existing buildings in operation during construction, and the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer may, at any time during construction, order a general clean up of the site as a part of the work under this section. 1.2.2 Dispose of waste, trash, and debris in a safe, acceptable manner, in accordance with applicable laws and ordinances and as prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction. Bury no such waste material and debris on the site. Burning of trash and debris on the site will not be permitted. 1.2.3

1.3

Location of dump for trash and debris and length of haul is the Contractor's responsibility.

FINAL CLEANING OF BUILDING: Prior to final inspection by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, and after all construction work is essentially complete, thoroughly clean the building, utilizing professional building cleaners. Items to be cleaned include, but are not limited to: all glass, plastic, doors, opening frames, grilles, trim, exposed non-ferrous metal surfaces, floor covering, light fixtures and plates, plumbing fixtures and trim, and all finish surfaces throughout the construction. Thoroughly remove ink trademarks from laminated plastic surfaces. Vacuum-clean the building and remove all spots, smears, dust, debris, hand prints and defacements of every sort, including those of vandals. Follow the recommendations of the manufacturer of the materials and items to be cleaned for all cleaning, polishing and treatment such as waxing.

1.4

FINAL SITE CLEAN UP: Also prior to final inspection, thoroughly clean the entire construction site and put it into a neat, acceptable condition. Remove from the entire site all construction waste and unused materials, dunnage, loose rock and stones, excess earth, roots, weeds, and all debris of any description resulting from the work. Hose down and scrub where necessary all new and existing concrete and asphalt pavement and walks dirtied as a result of the work. Thoroughly remove mortar droppings from concrete walks and other pavements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not applicable) END OF SECTION 01 74 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-28

Part 5

SECTION 01 77 00 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT PART 1 - GENERAL DEFINITIONS The provisions of this section apply primarily to close out of actual physical work, not to administrative matters such as final payment and change-over of insurances. Closeout requirements relate to both final completion and substantial completion of work, and apply to individual portions of completed work as well as the total work. Specific requirements in other sections have precedence over general requirements of this section. PART 2 - PROCEDURES AT SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 2.1

PREREQUISITES: Comply with General Conditions and complete the following before requesting Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's inspection of the work, or designated portion thereof, for substantial completion: 2.1.1 Submit executed warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, inspection certificates and similar required documentation for specific units of work, enabling Owner's unrestricted occupancy and use. 2.1.2 All plumbing and mechanical equipment shall operate quietly and free from vibration. Properly adjust, repair, balance, or replace equipment producing objectionable noise or vibration. All systems shall operate without humming, surging, or rapid cycling.

2.2

2.1.3

All operating instructions for equipment shall be properly mounted and posted as specified in their respective sections.

2.1.4

Submit record documentation, maintenance manuals, tools, spare parts, keys and similar operational items.

2.1.5

Complete instruction of Owner's operating personnel, and start-up of systems.

2.1.6

Complete final cleaning, and remove temporary facilities and tools.

INSPECTION PROCEDURES: Upon receipt of Contractor's request, Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will either proceed with inspection or advise Contractor of prerequisites not fulfilled. Following initial inspection, Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will either prepare Certificate of Substantial Completion, or advise Contractor of work which must be performed prior to issuance of certificate; and repeat inspection when requested and assured that work has been substantially completed. Results of completed inspection will form initial "punch list" for final acceptance.

2.3

PROCEDURES AT FINAL ACCEPTANCE: 2.3.1 Reinspection Procedure: Upon receipt of Contractor's notice that work has been completed, including punch list items resulting from earlier inspections, and excepting incomplete items delayed because of acceptable circumstances, Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will reinspect work. Upon completion of reinspection, Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will either recommend final acceptance and final payment, or advise Contractor of work not completed or obligations not fulfilled as required for final acceptance. If necessary, procedure will be repeated. 2.3.2 Record Drawings: The Contractor shall maintain at the job site, accessible to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. 2.3.2.1

2.3.2.2

One set of black line prints of the site work on which shall be indicated complete "as installed" layouts of all underground utilities up to the building connections. (1)

Included hereunder are all water, gas, sewer, site grading and drainage and electrical systems.

(2)

Dimension all systems to the nearest 0.1 foot from adjacent buildings by means of perpendicular offsets. Show all elevations for lines and structures to the nearest 0.1 foot from the tops thereof, except at sewer and drains use invert elevations.

One set of dimensioned black line prints showing "as installed" work inside building and extending out to a point of connection to site utilities. (1)

Show all not readily visible lines and items of equipment of the electrical, plumbing, heating, ventilating and air conditions systems.

(2)

Where deviations from the original drawings occur in the layout of ducts or equipment connected thereto, show "as installed" locations and sizes including locations of access doors, dampers and control equipment and wiring.

2.3.2.3

Should any item of equipment differ in type, model, catalog number or manufacturer from that called for on original drawings or specifications, such deviations shall be shown on the black line prints required under the first part of this Article. The Contractor shall submit a reproducible print of any equipment deviating from the original drawings. This print shall be verified by the Job Inspector and signed if accurate.

2.3.2.4

Show all changes in the Work.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-29

Part 5

2.3.2.5

Make all entries within 24 hours after installing any part of the Work. Progress payments will not be certified unless this is complied with, and the Job Inspector has signed (monthly) the record set of prints.

2.3.2.6

Measurements and drawings for exterior work shall be made by the California Registered Civil Engineer or a California Licensed Land Surveyor and the drawings certifying to their accuracy.

2.3.2.7

Immediately upon completion of the portion of the installation involved and the certification by parties as required herein above, the drawings shall be submitted to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer for approval.

2.3.2.8

Reproducible "Record" Drawings: Upon completion of the work and before final inspection, a completely updated record set used during construction, shall be submitted to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer shall select a competent draftsman to make changes on the original drawings. After original drawings are corrected, one set of reproducible prints will be made. Contractor shall provide costs of reproduction and draftsman's cost, for the Record Set. Record Civil documentation shall be provided separately and shall not be part of this.

2.3.3 Record Specifications: Maintain a complete set of specifications for record mark-up purposes. Mark-up during course of work to show changes sufficient to form a complete record for Owner's purposes and Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's review. Date and sign each mark-up. 2.3.4 Maintenance Manuals: Provide 3-ring vinyl-covered binders containing required maintenance manuals, properly identified and indexed. Include operating and maintenance instructions; extended to cover emergencies, spare parts, warranties, inspection procedures, diagrams, safety, security, and similar appropriate data for each system or equipment item. 2.3.5 T-24 Certificates: Certificate(s) of Compliance and a list of the features, materials, components, and mechanical devices installed in the building and instructions on how to operate them efficiently. 2.3.6 Extra Materials: Extra materials as required by other Sections of the Document, shall be properly packaged and labeled, then delivered to the Owner. 2.4

GENERAL CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS: Operator Instructions: Require each installer of systems requiring continued operation/maintenance by Owner's operating personnel, to provide on-location instruction to Owner's personnel, sufficient to ensure safe, secure, efficient, non-failing utilization and operation of systems. Provide instructions for the following categories of work:

2.5

2.4.1

Mechanical/electrical/electronic systems (not limited to work of Divisions 15 and 16).

2.4.2

Live plant materials and lawns.

2.4.3

Roofing, flashing, joint sealers.

2.4.4

Floor finishes, wall finishes.

FINAL CLEANING: Clean up as specified in section 01 74 00.

END OF SECTION 01 77 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-30

Part 5

SECTION 02 00 01 DEMOLITION, ALTERATIONS and SALVAGING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SCOPE OF WORK: The work includes demolition, alteration and salvage work, required by the respective Sections, generally but not limited to the following: 1.1.1 All temporary work required, including the protection of existing construction and finishes, temporary enclosures for openings in existing walls and other precautions as may be required or deemed necessary to prevent damages. 1.1.2 Cutting and patching for and after the installation of new construction, equipment, finishes and the like under the work of the Contract. 1.1.3

Salvaging and reusing or storing existing materials, equipment, fixtures, etc., where shown and as specified.

1.1.4 All required shoring, bracing, underpinning, etc. that may be required to complete the work of the Contract in a safe and workmanlike manner. 1.2

DAMAGE: Should any portion of the existing site or buildings be damaged due to Contractor's operations, the Contractor shall report the conditions and circumstances to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer and all necessary repairs and replacement to such damaged work shall be made at no extra cost to the Owner. All such repairs and replacements to such damaged work shall be with new materials to match existing work in every respect to meet the approval of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

1.3

FIELD MEASUREMENTS: The Contractor shall verify dimensions and conditions on the job so that all work will properly join the existing work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

REMOVALS: 3.1.1 Existing construction and finishes shall be removed as required for the execution of the work under the contract. Such work shall be done in a manner so as to avoid damage to construction and finishes that are to remain and not be demolished. 3.1.2 Where concrete is indicated to be cut and removed, cut along lines indicated using special saws to provide cuts which are vertical in relation to the original plane, with straight sharp lines with no undercut, feather edges, loose or disintegrated portions. Cut to full depth of section thickness before breaking out remainder of material. 3.1.3 Materials resulting from removal operations shall not be allowed to accumulate on the site, in the buildings or the premises, but shall be promptly removed and disposed of off site at the appropriate locations.

3.2

SALVAGE: 3.2.1 Existing items of work indicated on the drawings or specified to be re-used and relocated shall be removed with extreme care and stored and protected by the Contractor until incorporated in the new work. Any damage to the items caused by demolition, storage or re-installation shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.2.2 All existing equipment scheduled to be salvaged and reused shall be in working condition upon completion of work under this contract. The Contractor shall make all repairs required to leave the equipment in working order. 3.2.3

3.3

All existing items scheduled to be removed shall be disposed of.

CLEAN-UP: The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all existing surfaces in all areas where demolition or alteration work has been performed. Cleaning of surfaces shall include, but not be limited to: landscape, irrigation, and hardscape surfaces.

END OF SECTION 02 00 01

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-31

Part 5

SECTION 03 11 00 - CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK: This section covers the furnishing and installing and removing of forms for cast-in-place concrete work as shown and noted on the drawings and as specified. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

CODES: 1.2.1 Except as modified by the requirements specified herein or the details on the drawings, form work shall conform to the "California Building Code, current edition (CBC)”, Chapter 19, "Concrete".

1.3

REFERENCES: The latest editions of the specifications and standards referenced herein, published by the following organizations, apply to the work only to the extent specified by the reference.

1.4

1.3.1

American Concrete Institute (ACI).

1.3.2

U.S. Department of Commerce Product Standard (PS).

1.3.3

Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).

1.3.4

West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).

SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1

Submittal procedures and quantities are specified in Section 01 33 00.

1.4.2

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications for form ties, spreaders and coating for review.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Forms for Unexposed Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will not be exposed in the finished structure with plywood, lumber, metal or other acceptable material.

2.1.2 forms.

2.1.1.1

Lumber shall be standard or better grade Douglas fir, in accordance with WCLIB "Standard Grading Rules" or WWPA "Western Lumber Grading Rules". Boards shall be surfaced on at least 2 edges and one side for a tight fit.

2.1.1.2

Plywood shall be B-B Plyform, Class I exterior grade in accordance with PS 1-07, 5/8" minimum thickness for 12" stud spacing and 3/4" minimum thickness for 16" stud spacing.

Forms for Exposed Concrete: Form concrete surfaces which will be exposed in the finish structure with plywood or plastic

2.1.2.1

Plywood shall be High Density Overlay Plyform, Class 1 exterior grade in accordance with PS1-07, 5/8" minimum thickness for 12" stud spacing and 3/4" minimum thickness for 16" stud spacing. The maximum deflection of facing materials reflected in concrete surfaces exposed to view, shall be 1/240 of the span between structural members.

2.1.3 Framing, Studding and Bracing: "Standard" or "Construction" grade Douglas fir, rough or S4S, conforming to the WCLIB "Standard Grading Rules” or WWPA "Western Lumber Grading Rules". 2.1.4 Form Ties and Spreaders: Standard metal form clamp assembly, of type acting as spreaders and leaving no metal within 1" of concrete face. Spreader cones shall not exceed 1" in diameter unless otherwise noted. Inner tie rod shall be left in concrete when forms are removed. Wire ties or wood spreaders will not be permitted. Form accessories shall be commercially manufactured type. 2.1.5 Form Coating: Non-grain raising and non-staining type that will not leave residual matter on surface of concrete or adversely affect proper bonding of subsequent application of other material applied to concrete surface. Coatings containing mineral oils or other non-drying ingredients will not be permitted. Form coating for use with form liners shall be of type recommended by form liner manufacturer. Form coating for color concrete shall be of type recommended by color manufacturer. 2.1.6

Nails: Common wire, steel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

DESIGN OF FORMWORK AND SHORING: 3.1.1 The engineering and construction of all formwork, shoring, and bracing shall be carried out by and under the direction of the Contractor, and he shall be held responsible for the engineering, construction, maintenance, and safety of all formwork during the

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-32

Part 5

entire construction period. 3.1.2 The formwork shall be designed for the loads and lateral pressures outlined in Part 3, Section 102, of ACI 347, and lateral forces as specified by the current edition of the California Building Code and updates. 3.1.3 Provide and install shores and centering for the work, constructed to required shape, size, and form, well braced and made rigid and capable of supporting and sustaining the loads imposed. Leave shores and centering in place until the concrete is sufficiently set to safely carry its own weight and added loads of construction. 3.2

CONSTRUCTION: 3.2.1 Earth Forms: Earth forms may be used for footings only where the soil is firm and stable and the concrete will not be exposed to view. Where earth forms are to be used, excavations shall be cut neat and accurately to size for placing of concrete directly against the excavation. Construct wood edge strips at each side of trench at top to secure reinforcing and prevent trench from sloughing. Form sides of footings where earth sloughs. Earth forms shall be tamped firm and cleaned of all debris and loose material before depositing concrete. 3.2.2 Wood Forms: Construct forms of sound material to the correct shape and dimensions, mortar tight, and of sufficient strength, and so braced and tied together that the movement of men, equipment, materials, or placing and vibrating the concrete will not throw them out of exact shape under all imposed loads. They shall be so constructed that they may be easily removed without damage to the concrete. Before concrete is placed in forms, the horizontal and vertical position of the form shall be carefully verified and all inaccuracies corrected. All wedging and bracing shall be completed in advance of placing of concrete. Board forms having joints opened by shrinkage of the wood shall be swelled until closed by wetting before concrete is placed. Seal plywood and other wood surfaces not subject to shrinkage against absorbtion by commercial oil or sealer, or factory applied non-absorptive liner. Utilize form coating per color manufacturers written literature for color concrete. 3.2.3 Framing bracing, supporting members, and centering shall be of ample size and strength to safely carry, without deflection, all dead and live loads to which forms may be subjected, and shall be spaced sufficiently close to prevent any bulging or sagging of forms. Concrete out of line, level, or plumb will be cause for rejection of the whole work affected. 3.2.4 Tolerances: Formwork shall be so constructed as to ensure that the concrete surfaces will conform to the tolerances of Section 203.1, ACI 347. Camber the formwork to compensate for anticipated deflections in the formwork due to weight and pressure of the fresh concrete and construction loads. 3.2.5 Chamfered Corners: All exposed corners shall be chamfered 3/4", unless noted otherwise on drawings. Provide molding in forms for all chamfering required. 3.2.6 Form Ties: Ties shall be of sufficient strength and used in sufficient quantities to prevent spreading of the forms. Ties shall be placed at least 1" away from the finished surface of the concrete, and equally spaced when exposed to view. 3.2.7 Steel Forms: When steel forms are coated to prevent bond with concrete, it shall be done prior to placing of the reinforcing steel. Do not allow excess material to stand in puddles in the forms or allow it to come in contact with concrete against which fresh concrete will be placed. 3.2.8 Joints: Construction joints, isolation joints, shrinkage control joints and expansion joints shall be installed as approved. Location of construction joints shall be coordinated with and reviewed in advance of concrete pouring. 3.2.9

Embedded Piping and Rough Hardware: 3.2.9.1

The Contractor shall afford access to every tradesman who is required to fasten his work to that of the Contractor, or who is required to insert therein any piping, box, bolt, anchor, insert sleeves or other rough hardware, with every facility for setting the same accurately in the forms.

3.2.9.2

Conduits or pipes shall be so located as not to reduce the strength of the construction and in no case shall be placed in a slab less than 3-1/2 inches in thickness except for local off-sets. No conduit buried in a concrete slab shall have an outside diameter greater than 33 percent of the thickness of the slab, and no conduit shall be placed under slab reinforcing steel, except for slab mesh. No conduits or pipes shall be placed in structural slabs or grade beams without written approval from structural engineer.

3.2.9.3

Coating of Forms: Thoroughly clean forms and coat with specified form coating before each use. Do not reuse any form for exposed work which cannot be reconditioned to "like new" condition. Apply form coating to all forms in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications. Apply form coating to all forms before placing reinforcing steel. Where as cast finishes are required, do not apply materials which will impart a stain to concrete. Where the finished surface is required to be plastered, the material applied to form surfaces shall be compatible with type of plaster to be used. If plaster is applied over concrete surfaces, use a bond breaker. Utilize form coating per color manufacturer's written literature for color concrete.

3.2.9.4

Inspection: Prior to placing of concrete, and after placement of reinforcing steel in the forms, provide notification so that proper inspection can be made. Such notification shall be made at least two working days in advance of placing concrete.

3.2.9.5

Rejection of Defective Work: Any movement or bellying of forms during construction or variations in excess of the tolerances specified will be considered just cause for the removal of such forms and, in addition, the concrete work so affected. Reconstruction of forms, new concrete and any required reinforcing steel shall be furnished at no additional cost to the Owner.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-33

Part 5

3.3

REMOVAL OF FORMS: 3.3.1 Formwork for stem walls and other parts not supporting the weight of the concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations, particularly when form ties will be bent by the removal operations, but not sooner than 24 hours after placing concrete. 3.3.2 Whenever the formwork is removed during the curing period, the exposed concrete shall be cured by one of the methods specified in Section 03 30 00. 3.3.3

Use softwood wedges to release form faces from concrete. Do not pry with metal tool.

3.3.4 Arrangement: concrete.

Arrange formwork to allow proper erection sequence and to permit form removal without damage to

END OF SECTION 03 11 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-34

Part 5

SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK: This section covers the furnishing and installing of reinforcing steel for cast-in-place-concrete work as shown and noted on the drawings and as specified. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

CODES: Except as modified by the requirements specified herein and/or the details on the drawings, concrete reinforcing work shall conform to the "California Building Code, current edition (CBC)”, Chapter 19, "Concrete".

1.3

REFERENCES: The latest editions of the specifications and standards referenced herein, published by the following organizations, apply to other work only to the extent specified by the reference:

1.4

1.3.1

American Concrete Institute (ACI).

1.3.2

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

1.3.3

Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI).

1.3.4

American Welding Society (AWS).

SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1

Submittal procedures and quantities are specified in Section 01 33 00.

1.4.2

Shop Drawings: Shop and placement drawings of all reinforcing shall be reviewed prior to fabrication. 1.4.2.1

Placement drawings shall show the locations and spacing of reinforcing in the various parts of the structure with details as required, all in accordance with ACI 315. Cutting and bending lists submitted without placement drawings will be returned without review as incomplete. Placement drawings shall be complete so that placement of the reinforcing may proceed without reference to the design drawings.

1.4.2.2

Review shall not act to relieve the Contractor from responsibility for accuracy of the fabrication details and placing diagrams. Dimensions and locations shall be verified prior to the preparation of shop drawings.

1.4.2.3

No work shall be done except from reviewed drawings which must be kept at all work locations. The Contractor shall provide all reinforcing as noted on the engineering drawings.

1.4.2.4

If there is a discrepancy between the shop drawings and the engineering drawings, the engineering drawings will take precedence.

1.4.3 Product Data: Mill affidavits, stating the grades and physical and chemical properties of the reinforcing steel, and conformance with ASTM Specifications, shall be submitted before delivery of the steel to the job site. 1.5

DELIVERY AND STORAGE: 1.5.1

Delivery: Deliver reinforcement bundled and tagged to identify placement and certify testing.

1.5.2 Reinforcing steel shall be transported to the building site, stored and covered in a manner which will insure that no damage shall occur to it from moisture, dirt, grease, or any other cause that might impair bond to concrete. A sufficient supply of approved reinforcing steel shall be stored on the building site at all times to insure that there will be no delay of the work. Identification of steel shall be maintained after bundles are broken. 1.6

COORDINATION: Contractor shall check architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings for anchor bolt schedules and locations, anchors, inserts, conduits, sleeves, block outs, and any other items which are required to be cased in concrete, and shall make necessary provisions as required so that reinforcing steel will not interfere with the placement of such embedded items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Reinforcing Bars: New, deformed, billet steel bars, conforming to ASTM A 615 Grade 60 or ASTM A706 Grade 60, unless otherwise shown on the drawings. Deliver bars new and free from rust and mill scale in original bundles with mill tags intact. 2.1.2 Welded Wire Fabric: New welded steel wire fabric, conforming to ASTM A 185. Gauge and center-to-center spacing shall be as indicated.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-35

Part 5

2.1.3 Accessories: Reinforcement accessories, consisting of spacers, chairs, ties, and similar items shall be provided as required for spacing, assembling, and supporting reinforcement in place. Accessories shall be galvanized steel or approved plastic accessories, conforming to the applicable requirements of the CRSI Standards hereinbefore specified. 2.1.4 Tie Wire: Tie wire for reinforcement shall be #16 gauge or heavier, where noted or specified, black or galvanized steel wire, conforming to ASTM A 82. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

FABRICATION: 3.1.1 Fabrication of steel reinforcement shall be in accordance with the details shown on the drawings. Where specific details are not shown or noted, comply with the applicable requirements of CBC and ACI 315 hereinbefore specified. 3.1.2 Bars shall be accurately bent, cut and placed as indicated on the drawings. Bars shall be bent cold; heating of bars will not be permitted. Bars shall not be bent or straightened in any manner that will injure the material. Bars shall not be field bent.

3.2

PLACING: 3.2.1 General: Reinforcing steel shall be placed in accordance with the drawings and the applicable requirements of the "Codes and Standards" hereinbefore specified. Install reinforcement accurately and secure against movement, particularly under the weight of workmen and the placement of concrete. 3.2.2 Reinforcing Supports: Bars and welded wire fabric larger than 8 gauge shall be supported on metal chairs or spacers on metal hangers, accurately placed and securely fastened to steel reinforcement in place. Support legs of accessories in forms without embedding in form surface. Spacing of chairs and accessories shall conform to CRSI's "Recommended Practice for Placing Bar Supports". No wood will be permitted inside forms. Precast concrete cubes may be used to support footing and slab on grade reinforcing. Use of "hook and pull" method for slab on grade reinforcing is prohibited. 3.2.3 Placing and Tying: All reinforcing shall be set in place, spaced, and rigidly and securely tied or wired with #16 gauge steel tie wire at all splices and at crossing points and intersections in the position shown, or as directed. Point ends of wire away from forms. 3.2.4 Spacing: Bars shall be spaced as indicated on the drawings. Where not shown, the clear spacing for main longitudinal column reinforcement shall be not less than 1.5 times the nominal bar diameter, or 1-1/2 inches, or 1-1/3 times the maximum size aggregate, whichever is less. For all other parallel bars, where spacing is not shown, the minimum clear spacing shall not be less than the nominal bar diameter, or one inch, or 1-1/3 times the maximum size aggregate, whichever is less. The clear distance limitations above also apply between the bars being spliced at a contact lap splice and adjacent bars. 3.2.5 Splices: Use Class B splices as defined in ACI 318 unless detailed locations are given for these splices on the design drawings. Stagger lapped splices by the required lap splice length minimum. Wherever possible, splices of adjacent bars shall be staggered. 3.2.6 Welded Wire Fabric: Wire fabric shall be in as long lengths as practicable and shall be wired at all laps and splices. Laps shall be one full spacing of the cross wires plus 2" at splices. Welded wire fabric shall be supplied in flat sheets. Contractor will execute care in making sure fabric is placed in the center of slab. 3.2.7 Dowels: Dowels shall be tied securely in place before concrete is deposited. In the event there are not bars in position to which dowels may be tied, No. 3 minimum shall be added to provide proper support and anchorage. Bending of dowels after placement of concrete will not be permitted. Dowels extended for future construction shall be protected from weather exposure and/or as shown on the drawings. Compliance with safety law requirements for extended dowels is also required. 3.2.8

Cleaning: Reinforcement, at time of pour, shall be free of coatings that would impair bond to concrete.

3.2.9 Welding: Welding of reinforcing steel will not be permitted except as specifically approved. Welding shall comply with AWS D1.4 using low hydrogen electrodes. Prior to welding, determine weldability of reinforcing bars by a laboratory chemical analysis. All welded reinforcing shall be ASTM A706. 3.2.9.1

3.3

Welding shall also comply with the latest edition of standards per the City in which the project is located "MINIMUM SPECIFICATIONS FOR WELDING OF REINFORCING STEEL", or as approved by the City Building Department.

TESTING AND INSPECTION: 3.3.1 Special inspection by a registered Deputy Inspector for all reinforcing steel as stated in structural drawings. Contractor shall provide notification to Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer at least two working days ahead of each concrete placement, and no concrete shall be placed until all reinforcing steel has been installed by the Contractor and approved by all required inspectors. All reinforcing shall be complete in every way by the end of the working day prior to concrete placing. Testing and inspections are specified in Section 01 45 00.

3.4

DEFECTIVE WORK: 3.4.1

Defective work shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. The examples of

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-36

Part 5

reinforcing steel work which will be considered defective shall include, but not be limited to the following: 3.4.1.1

Bars with kinks or bends not shown on drawings.

3.4.1.2

Bars injured due to bending or straightening.

3.4.1.3

Bars heated for bending.

3.4.1.4

Reinforcement not placed in accordance with the drawings or specifications.

END OF SECTION 03 20 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-37

Part 5

SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK This section covers the furnishing and installing of cast-in-place concrete work attached and within the building as shown and noted on the drawings and as specified. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

CODES: Except as modified by the requirements specified herein and/or the details on the drawings, concrete work shall conform to the "California Building Code, current edition (CBC)”, Chapter 19, "Concrete".

1.3

REFERENCES: The latest editions of the specifications and standards referenced herein, published by the following organizations, apply to the work only to the extent specified by the reference:

1.4

1.5

1.3.1

American Concrete Institute (ACI).

1.3.2

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1

Submittal procedures and quantities are specified in Section 01 33 00.

1.4.2

Product Data: 1.4.2.1

Submit certificates of compliance for Portland cement.

1.4.2.2

Submit manufacturers technical literature for admixtures, curing compounds, expansion joint filler, sealer and chemical hardener.

1.4.2.3

Submit concrete mix designs.

1.4.2.4

Submit plan for approval of all type joint locations.

LABORATORY TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS: 1.5.1 General: Compression tests of concrete shall be performed by a qualified testing laboratory in accordance with Section 01400, Testing and Inspections. Mill tests and manufacturer's certification of compliance with ASTM Specifications shall be submitted to the Inspector in lieu of testing of cement and aggregate analysis. Contractor shall notify Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer and testing laboratory 24 hours in advance of placement.

1.6

1.5.2

Compression Tests: See Section 01 45 00, Testing and Inspections.

1.5.3

Mix designs shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 1.5.3.1

Determine mix designs to fulfill the specified requirements for strength, aggregate size and workability of concrete, and such designs shall be used in proportioning all structural concrete. Mix designs shall be submitted, with three point mix design tests performed within one year of submittal, for review by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

1.5.3.2

Mix designs shall be made in accordance with ACI 211.1-81 for regular concrete.

1.5.3.3

Cover and clear distances between reinforcing bars shown on the drawings shall be considered in determining the aggregate size for mix designs and may result in an aggregate size smaller than the maximum aggregate size allowed elsewhere in this specification.

1.5.3.4

Contractor shall provide a list of where the mix designs are to be used and curing method to be used concurrently with the designs for review.

1.5.3.5

Review shall not be considered unqualified approval, and shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish concrete of proper consistency and specified strengths.

1.5.3.6

All interior slabs on grade shall be tested for vapor emissions prior to installation of flooring finishes as described in subsequent sections. Three tests for first 1000 s.f. and one test per 1000 s.f. thereafter.

PROPERTIES AND PROPORTIONS: 1.6.1

Concrete: 1.6.1.1

Minimum concrete strengths at 28 days for slabs on grade shall be high density, 4,000 psi unless otherwise noted on the Structural drawings. Special Inspection is not required for slabs on grade unless noted in

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-38

Part 5

the Structural Drawings. 1.6.1.2

Slumps: Shall be 4" max range typical. Slump for 4,000 psi. concrete shall be 3.5 inches max.

1.6.1.3

Maximum Size Aggregate: Shall be 1-1/2" at footings, 1" slab on grade, ¾” for all other concrete. In no case shall the maximum aggregate size used exceed 20% of a member's thickness, nor shall it exceed 3/4 of the clear spacing between reinforcing. The maximum size aggregate shall be utilized where-ever possible.

1.6.1.4

Interior slabs shall have a maximum Water/Cement Ratio of 0.45. (Exceeding 0.50 is not allowed).

1.6.2 Grout: One part Portland cement and two parts fine aggregate by volume. Grout shall be of a consistency suitable for the intended purpose and shall be used immediately after mixing. Grout used under minor bearing plates shall be "drypack" and shall be rammed into place. Small quantities of grout may be mixed by hand, but any grout requiring one-half sack of cement, or more, per batch shall be machine mixed. Grout shall produce a 3000 psi compression strength of in 28 days unless otherwise noted. 1.6.3 Non-Shrink Grout: Non-Shrink Non-Metallic Grout shall be pre-mixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive, nongaseous grout complying with CE CRD-C621. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications of type specified in this section. 1.6.4

1.6.5

1.7

Quick setting hydraulic cement: shall be one of the following: 1.6.4.1

"Por-Rok" as manufactured by Hallemite/Lehn and Fink or approved equal.

1.6.4.2

"Thorogrip" as manufactured by Thoro System Products or approved equal.

1.6.4.3

"Masterflow 713" as manufactured by Master Builders or approved equal. Grout shall produce a 7000 psi compression strength in 28 days unless otherwise indicated on structural drawings.

Grout Mixture for Hollow Metal Door Frames: 1.6.5.1

Metal door frames are furnished and installed under another section of the specifications. This Contractor shall furnish and install grouting, as specified herein, for all hollow metal door frames. This Contractor shall coordinate his work with the work of the other trades affected.

1.6.5.2

After door frames have been erected, anchored, shimmed, plumbed, leveled, and braced into position, all voids behind frames shall be completely grouted.

1.6.5.3

Care shall be taken to achieve the results as shown on the door frame details with all recesses held to exactly the depths shown, and to a level or plumb straight line so as to be even and smooth.

COORDINATION: Contractor shall check architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings for anchor bolt schedules and locations, anchors, inserts, conduits, sleeves, block outs, and any other items which are required to be cased in concrete, and shall verify their placement before placing of concrete.

1.8

TOLERANCES: 1.8.1

All tolerances shall be as defined in ACI 117 and as specified.

1.8.2

Classification shall be per General Building: Cast-in-Place, ACI 117, Section 4.0, unless noted otherwise.

1.8.3 Unless noted otherwise, depressions in slab floors between high points shall be a maximum 3/16 inch in ten feet, using a metal straight edge placed at any location on slab, and measured within 72 hours of pour. 1.9

PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING: 1.9.1

Prior to commencing the work of this section, the contractor shall schedule and attend a meeting at the job site to discuss conformance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Request attendance of representatives from Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, Contractor, subcontractors and other parties who are involved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II unless otherwise noted on drawings. Type II cement shall meet the strength requirements of Type I cement. Compressive strength per drawings. Type V shall be used for foundations in aggressive environments, see drawings. 2.1.2

Pozzolan: ASTM C 618, Type F or C. Limit use of pozzolan to not more than 20% of cement content by weight.

2.1.3 Regular Weight Concrete Aggregates: ASTM C 33. In lieu of the use of ASTM C 227-81 to determine alkali reactivity of the aggregates as specified therein, the alkali reactivity shall be "innocuous" as determined by ASTM C 289-81.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-39

Part 5

2.1.3.1

Fine aggregate shall be washed clean, shall be uniformly screen graded, and shall contain not more than 2% by weight of deleterious materials such as shale, shist, alkali, clay lumps, earth, loam, mica or similar materials. Fine aggregate shall be graded uniformly from fine to coarse.

2.1.3.2

Coarse aggregate shall consist of clean, hard, crushed rock or washed gravel, free from organic materials or soft or friable materials and shall not contain more than 2% by weight of shale or cherty material and not more than 15% by weight of elongated fragments.

2.1.3.3

Grading of combined aggregate shall be in conformance with ASTM C33 for Class A concrete aggregates.

2.1.4 Admixtures, if used: ASTM C 494, of a type that increases workability and reduces water demand of concrete, but will not increase shrinkage. Admixture shall be subject to approval as to type and amount used. Admixtures shall contain not more than one percent chloride ions. Calcium chloride shall not be used. Super plasticizer shall be Darex "WRDA-19" by W. R. Grace Co. or equalsubject to approval at mix review. 2.1.5

Air-Entraining Agent: ASTM C 260, subject to approval.

2.1.6 Water Used in Mixing Concrete: Potable, clean and free from deleterious amounts of acid, alkalis, organic or other materials. No water is to be added at job site. 2.1.7

Curing Membrane: Non-staining paper conforming to ASTM C 171, or 6 mil thick polyethylene film.

2.1.8 Curing Compound for Footings: ASTM C 309, liquid membrane forming, with fugitive dye for identification. Compound shall be compatible with finish to be applied thereto. Curing compound and areas receiving it must be approved. (Do not use curing compound on area to receive pavers, ceramic tile, resilient flooring or walls receiving waterproofing membrane) subject to review at mix review. 2.1.9 Expansion Joint Filler: Premolded, non-extruded, resilient type, non-bitumous, 1/4" to 1/2" thick unless otherwise noted on drawings, conforming to ASTM D1751.

2.1.10

Expansion Joint Sealing Compound: Expansion joint sealant and backer rod shall be in accordance with Section 07 92 00.

2.1.11 Vapor Retarder: Vapor retarder under interior concrete slab-on-grade shall be 10 mil, 5 layer laminated UV stabilized high density polyethylene copolymer. See Section 07 10 00. 2.1.12 Sand for use with vapor barrier under concrete slab-on-grade shall be washed fine aggregate conforming to ASTM Test Standard D2419 “Sand Equivalency”, with a Sand Equivalency (SE) value of greater than 30. 2.1.13 Sealer: Sealer for floors shall be one of the following acrylic resin compounds designed to seal and dust-proof concrete floors. (Do not use sealer on walls receiving waterproofing membrane.) Burke Co.: "Spartan-Seal" Nox-Crete: "Bro-Cure" Sonneborn-Contech: "Kure-N-Seal" Or equal 2.1.14 Chemical Hardener: Chemical hardener for floors shall be one of the following colorless aqueous solution containing a blend of magnesium flousilicate and zinc flousilicate combined with a wetting agent, containing not less than 2 lbs. of flousilicates per gallon: "Surfhard"; Euclid Chemical Company "Lapidolith"; Sonneborne-Contech "Saniseal"; Master Builders "Burk-O-Lith"; The Burke Company Or equal 2.1.15 Control Joints: Shall be manufactured by "Straightline" used with special installation tool. Control joint depth shall be 25% thickness of slab minimum 2.1.16 White Polyethylene Sheeting: (do not use clear) The sheeting shall be a minimum of 3 mil (.004) in thickness per ASTM C171. Units shall be lapped at least 18 inches. 2.1.17 Cold Joint Waterstop: Cold joint waterstop shall be 1” x ¾-inch continuous self-adhesive flexible strip of butyl rubber (24.9%), bentonite (75%) and volatiles (less than 1%) as manufactured by ACC - “Waterstop RX,” or “MiraStop” by Mirafi, or equal. 2.2

STAINED AND/OR COLORED CONCRETE: NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

MIXING: 3.1.1

Ready mixed concrete shall be used and shall be mixed and transported in accordance with ASTM C 94. The dosage rate

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-40

Part 5

and all mix designs for Integral Colored Concrete must be approved in writing with manufacturers representative prior to ordering. 3.1.2 Re-tempering: Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use. Concrete which has not been placed 1 1/2 hours after the water has been added at the batch plant shall be rejected. The concrete shall be discarded off the site and disposed of by the Contractor. 3.1.3 Indiscriminate addition of water to increase slump shall be prohibited. When concrete arrives at the project with slump below that suitable for placing, water may be added only if neither the maximum permissible water-cement ratio nor the maximum slump is exceeded. The water must be incorporated by additional mixing equal to at least half of the total mixing required. Any addition of water above that permitted by the limitation of water-cement ratio must be accompanied by a quantity of cement sufficient to maintain the proper water-cement ratio. Such addition must be approved in writing by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer prior to placing concrete. 3.1.4 Unacceptable vapor emissions may be caused by excessive moisture from too high water / cement ratio in the concrete mix or curing practices or admixtures which prevent proper hydration by “rushing” the curing process. 3.1.5 Newly poured interior slabs on grade tested and found to have a moisture emission rate higher than that allowed by the flooring material manufacturer, but not more than 5.0 pounds / 1000 square feet/ 24 hours, shall require that the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer be notified and specific instructions will be prepared. For excess moisture in existing slabs, the contractor will be compensated for the additional costs of sealing the concrete. However, any costs incurred for remedial work in new slabs on ground shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.2

CONVEYING AND PLACING CONCRETE: 3.2.1

Notification: Notify the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer at least two working days in advance of placing concrete.

3.2.2

3.2.3

Preparation Before Placing: 3.2.2.1

Hardened concrete and foreign materials shall be removed from the inner surfaces of the conveying equipment.

3.2.2.2

Formwork shall have been completed; excess water shall have been removed; reinforcement and anchor bolts shall have been secured in place; expansion joint material, anchors, and other embedded items shall have been positioned; and the entire preparation shall have been approved on the day prior to the placing of concrete.

3.2.2.3

Semi-porous subgrades shall be sprinkled sufficiently to eliminate suction and extremely porous subgrades shall be sealed in an approved manner.

3.2.2.4

Before placing of any concrete, all forms shall be thoroughly cleaned, washed out with water, and made tight. Before reinforcing steel is placed on top of and/or adjacent to forms which have been sealed, the surface sealer shall be wiped off so that none may be tracked over, or in any other way come in contact with the reinforcing steel.

3.2.2.5

All incrustation shall be removed from forms and reinforcing steel at construction joints.

3.2.2.6

Depositing against other concrete. Before depositing new concrete on or against hardened concrete, re-tighten forms and roughen surface of hardened concrete as follows. Concrete which has been placed longer than 3-1/2 hours, but less than 6-1/2 hours, prepare by removing all laitance from concrete by wire brushing. Concrete which has been placed longer than 6-1/2 hours, prepare by sand blasting to roughen surfaces to 1/8” min. Thoroughly clean of foreign matter and laitance, and moisten with water.

Placement: 3.2.3.1

Place all concrete in accordance with ACI 318, Chapter 5.

3.2.3.2

Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practicable by methods which will prevent separation or loss of ingredients.

3.2.3.3

Conveying equipment shall be of size and design to ensure a continuous flow of concrete at the delivery end.

3.2.3.4

Concrete shall be deposited continuously, or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams, planes, or weakness within the section, or visible pour lines in the finish surface.

3.2.3.5

All concrete shall be consolidated by vibration, so that the concrete is thoroughly worked around the reinforcement, around the embedded items, and into corners of forms, eliminating all air or stone pockets which may cause honeycombing, pitting, or planes of weakness. All mechanical vibrators shall have a minimum frequency of 7,000 rpm and shall be operated by competent workmen. Over-vibration and use of vibrators to transport concrete within forms shall not be allowed. Vibrators shall be inserted and withdrawn at many points, from 18 to 30 inches apart, for 5 to 15 seconds duration. A spare vibrator shall be kept on the job site during all concrete placing operations. Particular care shall be given at exposed concrete surfaces.

3.2.3.6

Inspections: Continuous inspection required during placement of concrete with a structural engineer required

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-41

Part 5

strength over 3,250 psi and/or as required per the structural drawings. 3.2.3.7

Hot Weather Requirements: 3.2.3.7.1 All concrete placed shall be in compliance with ACI 305. 3.2.3.7.2 The maximum placing temperature of the deposited concrete shall be 90 degrees F. 3.2.3.7.3 If weather conditions would cause the concrete temperature, when deposited, to exceed 90 degrees F, the mix shall be cooled by wetting the aggregate or by other appropriate methods. Revise mix design as necessary.

3.2.3.8

3.2.4

3.3

Contractor shall have the superplastisizer's manufacturer's representative on site supervising the dispersing procedures when utilizing superplatisizer in all integral colored concrete.

Flatwork: 3.2.4.1

Edge forms and intermediate screed strips shall be set accurately to produce the designed elevations and contours in the finished surface, and shall be sufficiently strong to support vibrating bridge screeds or roller pipe screeds if the nature of the finish specified requires the use of such equipment. The concrete surface shall be aligned to the contours of screed strips by the use of strike-off templates or approved compacting type screeds.

3.2.4.2

When the formwork is cambered, contractor shall take appropriate measures to maintain the proper concrete thickness.

3.2.4.3

Joints in slabs on grade shall be located and detailed as indicated in the project drawings. Unless otherwise noted, slab joints should be placed so as not to create an area of over 400 square feet, keeping the shape of the area as close to square as possible. Contractor shall notify Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer on location of all other required joints not shown on drawings before reinforcing is placed. Contractor shall install sealant as referenced in Division 7 in all joints.

3.2.4.4

Concrete slabs shall be thoroughly consolidated. Internal vibration shall be used along the bulkheads of slabs on grade. Consolidation of slabs and floors shall be obtained with vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other approved means. Concrete to be consolidated shall be as dry as practicable and the surfaces thereof shall not be manipulated prior to the finishing operations.

3.2.4.5

Slabs on grade and topping slabs shall slope uniform to grades and elevation where shown on the drawings, locally slope to drains. Concrete shall slope a minimum 1% away from building.

REPAIR OF SURFACE DEFECTS: 3.3.1 Repair of Surface Defects: All form tie holes shall be filled and repairable defective areas patched immediately after the forms have been removed. Remove fins and burrs. 3.3.2 Removal: After forms have been removed, any concrete which is not formed as shown on the plans, or which is out of alignment or level beyond required tolerances shall be removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Defective surfaces may be repaired and patched in accordance with the following procedure. All conditions requiring patches and completed patches will be inspected. Patches disapproved as not restoring the quality and appearance of the surrounding work shall be removed and replaced so as to match the surrounding work. 3.3.3

Repair Procedure: 3.3.3.1

All honeycombed and other defective concrete shall be removed to sound concrete, but in no case to a depth of less than 1 inch. The area to be patched and an area of at least 6 inches wide surrounding it shall be dampened to prevent absorption of water from the patching mortar. A bond of neat Portland cement and water, and, if permitted, some fine sand passing a No. 30 sieve, shall be mixed to the consistency of thick cream and shall then be well brushed into the surface. Other concrete bonding agents may be used when approved.

3.3.3.2

The patching mixture shall be made of the same material and of approximately the same proportions as used for the concrete, except that the course aggregate shall be omitted and the mortar shall consist of not more than 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand by damp loose volume. White Portland cement shall be substituted for a part of the gray Portland cement on exposed concrete in order to produce a color matching the color of the surrounding concrete, as determined by a trial patch.

3.3.3.3

The quantity of mixing water shall be no more than necessary for handling and placing. The patching mortar shall be mixed in advance and allowed to stand with frequent manipulation with a trowel, without addition of water, until it has reached the stiffest consistency that will permit placing.

3.3.3.4

After surface water has evaporated from the areas to be patched, the bond coat shall be well brushed into the surface. When the bond coat begins to lose the water sheen, the pre-mixed patching mortar shall be applied. The mortar shall be thoroughly consolidated into place and struck off so as to leave the patch slightly higher than the surrounding surface. To permit initial shrinkage, it shall be left undisturbed for at least one hour before being finally finished. The patched area shall be kept damp for seven days.

3.3.4 Prior to proceeding with any patch work, the Contractor is responsible for establishing trial patch areas to develop the approved patching color and the method of applying and surface-texturing the patching material.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-42

Part 5

3.4

CONCRETE FINISHES: 3.4.1

Finishes for Formed Surfaces: 3.4.1.1

3.4.2

As-cast Surfaces: After surface defects have been repaired, as specified, concrete shall be left with finish imparted by forms.

Finishes for Flatwork: 3.4.2.1

Provide Floated Finish for Subfloors for Ceramic Tile: After concrete has been placed, struck off, consolidated and leveled, concrete shall not be worked further until ready for floating. Floating shall begin when water sheen has disappeared, and/or when mix has stiffened sufficiently to permit proper operation of a power-driven float. Surface shall then be consolidated with power-driven floats of impact type. Hand floating with wood or cork-faced floats shall be used in locations inaccessible to power-driven machine. Trueness of surface shall be re-checked at this stage with a 10 ft. straight-edge applied at not less than two different angles. All high spots shall be cut down and all low spots filled during this procedure to produce planes checking true under the straight-edge in any direction, with tolerances not exceeding 1/8 inch in 10 ft. Slab shall then be refloated immediately to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

3.4.2.2

Provide Troweled Finish for Interior Concrete Finish Floors and Subfloors for Resilient or Vinyl Flooring and Carpet: Surface shall be finished first with impact power floats, as specified above where applicable, then with power trowels, and finally with hand trowels. First troweling after power floating shall be done by a power trowel and shall produce a smooth surface which is relatively free of defects but which may still contain some trowel marks. Additional trowelings shall be done by hand after surface has hardened sufficiently. Final troweling shall be done when a ringing sound is produced as trowel is moved over surface. Surface shall be thoroughly consolidated by the hand troweling operations. Finished surface shall be free of any trowel marks and shall be uniform in texture and appearance. On surfaces intended to support floor covering, any defects of sufficient magnitude to show through floor covering shall be removed by grinding.

3.4.2.3

Provide the same finish on the new concrete slab as the existing slab when the two join.

3.4.2.4

Edge and Joint Finish: Use standard tools to produce rounded edge corners and intermediate line scoring.

3.4.2.5

Mark-Off Lines: Mark-off lines shall be formed with curved edging tool, neat and true to line, uniform throughout. Conform to markings shown on drawings.

3.4.2.6

Sealer: Remove all dirt, dust, oil, grease, asphalt and other foreign matter. Cleanse with caustics and detergents as necessary. Apply sealer in two coats using an ordinary garden sprayer. Apply first coat evenly and uniformly as soon as possible after final finishing. Apply second coat when all trades have completed work and structure is ready for occupancy.

3.4.2.7

Broomed Finish: Provide a non-slip broomed finish for walks and exterior slabs unless otherwise indicated. Accomplish the broom finishing in accordance with ACI 301, except as modified hereinafter. Use a flexible bristle brush. The brooming or brushing shall be in a direction transverse to that of traffic or at right angles to the slope of the floor.

3.4.3 Chemical Hardener: Apply chemical hardeners in accordance with manufacturer's printed instruction. After final coat of chemical hardener solution is applied and dried, remove surplus hardener by scrubbing and mopping with water. 3.5

PROTECTION AND CURING: 3.5.1 General: Freshly deposited concrete for interior slabs - on - grade, shall be protected from premature drying and excessively hot or cold temperatures, and shall be maintained without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for the hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete. 3.5.2

Initial Curing: Initial curing shall immediately follow the finishing operation. 3.5.2.1

Fog Spray: Immediately after the finishing operations have been completed and marring of the concrete will not occur, the entire surface of the newly placed concrete shall be fog sprayed with water and then covered with white polyethylene while still moist. A one inch cover of sand shall be installed and remain for five (5) days over the polyethylene to hold it in place.

3.5.3 Final Curing: Immediately following the initial curing and before the concrete has dried, additional curing shall be accomplished by the following materials. 3.5.3.1

Continuing the method used in initial curing, the contractor shall cure the slab an additional 7 days by keeping it polyethylene covered in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. CONTRACTOR TO PROVIDE TIME IN PROJECT SCHEDULE FOR PROPER CURING PER THIS SPECIFICATION.

3.5.4 Duration of Curing: The final curing shall continue until the cumulative number of days or fractions thereof, not necessarily consecutive, during which temperature of the air in contact with the concrete is not less than 50 degrees F has totaled seven days. If high early strength of concrete has been used, the final curing shall continue for a total of three days. Rapid drying at the end of the curing period shall be prevented. The concrete shall not be left exposed for more than 1/2 hour between stages of curing or during the curing period. Failure to provide sufficient cover material to adequately take care of both curing and other requirements shall be cause

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-43

Part 5

for immediate suspension of concrete operations. 3.5.5 Formed Surfaces: Steel forms heated by the sun and all wood forms in contact with the concrete during the final curing period shall be kept wet. If forms are to be removed during the curing period, one of the above curing materials or methods shall be employed immediately. Such curing shall be continued for the remainder of the curing period. 3.5.5.1

Curing for Colored Concrete: Per manufacturers written literature.

3.5.6 Protection from Mechanical Injury: During the curing period, the concrete shall be protected from damaging mechanical disturbances, particularly load stresses, heavy shock, and excessive vibration. All finished concrete surfaces shall be protected from damage caused by construction equipment, materials, or methods, and by rain or running water. Self-supporting structures shall not be loaded in such a way as to over stress the concrete. The slab is to be kept undisturbed with no material or equipment on the slab for 12 consecutive days after placement. 3.5.7 Surfaces to receive resilient flooring, waterproofing or dampproofing member, pavers and ceramic tile shall be cured by covering with waterproof paper coverings. Do not use curing compounds on area to receive pavers, ceramic tile, resilient flooring or walls receiving waterproofing. 3.6

CONSTRUCTION SLAB JOINTS: 3.6.1 Construction Joints: Joints in concrete slabs shall be located to limit area of placement to 15,000 square feet. Contractor shall ensure areas of placement are correctly sized and staffed to ensure proper placing, finishing, and jointing within a continuous operation. Joints in slab on ground shall be keyed and doweled with smooth dowels or diamond dowels when formed in accordance with the drawings. 3.6.2 Control Joints: (Weakend Plane Joints): Form in slabs and walks 12-feet o.c. maximum or where shown. After initial set occurs, round top edges of joint slightly with joinery tool to create “tooled joint”. A continuous sawcut to a minimum depth of 1 to 1-1/2 inch depth made while slab is green (within 4 hours of pour) will be acceptable in lieu of above. Provide cold joint waterstops in all joints formed in slabs on ground and in all joints between slab on ground and walls, foundations and as indicated within the building perimeter. Sawcut joints to a depth of ¼ of the thickness of the slab may be allowed subject to approval of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer in writing. Location, pattern, and spacing shall be as above or as indicated. 3.6.3 Expansion Joints with Sealant: Expansion joint filler shall be full depth of concrete. Provide expansion joints with sealant typically between exterior concrete slabs on ground and building structure walls and columns, and where shown. Note: Bondbreaker tape will not be required if specific expansion joint filler with peel-off edge is used throughout. Provide 3/8-inch diameter x 24-inch round dowels at 24 inches on center, sleeved one side, between slab pours when and where noted on drawings. For joint sealant refer to Division 7, SEALANTS.

3.7

DEFECTIVE WORK: Defective concrete work shall be removed and replaced at Contractor's expense.

END OF SECTION 03 30 00

SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-44

Part 5

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1.1

This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing structural steel.

1.1.2 Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in mill, shop, and components field, conducted by a qualified inspection agency or as allowed by an approved QA QC manual procedure for approved facilities. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated which do not comply. 1.1.3 Design of Members and Connections: Details are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. Notify Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer whenever design of members and connections are not clearly indicated. 1.2

SUBMITTALS: 1.2.1 Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a registered professional engineer, including complete details and schedules for fabrication and assembly of structural steel members, procedures and diagrams.

1.3

1.2.1.1

Include details of cuts, connections, camber, holes, and other pertinent data. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, and show size, length, and type of each weld.

1.2.1.2

Furnish setting diagrams, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorage’s to be installed as work of other Sections.

1.2.1.3

Prepare erection drawings with sequencing in compliance with all current OSHA requirements.

1.2.1.4

Test Reports: Furnish copies of test reports conducted on shop and field bolted and welded connections. Include data on types of tests conducted and test results.

1.2.1.5

Surveys: Furnish certified copies of each survey conducted by a registered professional engineer, showing elevations and locations of base plates and anchor bolts, and final elevations and locations for members. Show discrepancies between actual installation and contract documents.

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.3.1 Welding Qualifications: Prior to commencing welding, welding procedures, welding operations, all welders shall be qualified in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1.3.2

1.4

1.5

Codes: All work shall be executed in accordance with Chapter 22 of the "California Building Code, current edition (CBC)”.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 1.4.1

Deliver materials to site at intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of the work.

1.4.2

Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry.

1.4.3

Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. 1.4.3.1

Keep structural steel members off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports.

1.4.3.2

Protect steel members and packaged materials from erosion and deterioration.

1.4.3.3

Do not store materials on structure in a manner to cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures.

PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING: 1.5.1 Prior to commencing the work of this section, the contractor shall schedule and attend a meeting at the job site to discuss conformance with requirements of the Contractor Documents. Request attendance of representatives from Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, Contractor, subcontractors and other parties who are involved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1 General: For fabrication of work which will be exposed to view, and use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, rust and scale, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness. Remove blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating, and application of surface finishes.

2.1.2

Structural Steel Shapes: ASTM A992

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-45

Part 5

2.1.3

Plates and Bars: ASTM A36 or ASTM A572 as specified.

2.1.4

Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.

2.1.5

Hot-Formed Steel Rubbing: ASTM A501.

2.1.6

Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B; or ASTM A501. 2.1.6.1

Finish: Black, except where indicated to be galvanized.

2.1.6

Steel Castings: ASTM A27, Grade 65-35, medium-strength carbon steel.

2.1.7

Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, nonleaded type unless otherwise indicated.

2.1.8 Unfinished Threaded Fasteners: ASTM A307, Grade A, regular low carbon steel bolts and nuts. Provide hexagonal heads and nuts for all connections unless otherwise indicated. 2.1.9 Headed Stud-Type Shear Connectors: complying with AISC Specifications.

ASTM A 108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finished carbon steel, dimensions

2.1.10 High Strength Threaded Fasteners: Heavy hexagonal structural bolts, heavy hexagon nuts, and hardened washers. Provide quenched and tempered medium-carbon steel bolts, nuts, and washers, complying with ASTM A325. 2.1.11

Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS Code. AWS Code E70XX min.

2.1.12 Structural Steel Primer Paint: VOC complaint rust-inhibitive primer; Tnemec Series 18 Enviro-Prime or approved equal acrylic emulsion primer. 2.1.13 Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C150, Type I or II, and clean, Uniformly graded, natural sanded, ASTM C404, Size No. 2. Mix at a ratio of 1 part cement to 3 parts sand, by volume, with minimum water required for placement and hydration. 2.1.14 Metallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: premixed factory-packaged ferrous aggregate grouting compound; Euclid Chemical Co. “Firmix”, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. “Ferrogrout”, Master Builders “Embeco 885”, Sonneborn/Rexnord “Ferrolith G” or approved equal. 2.1.15 Nonmetallic Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining product containing selected silica sands, Portland cement, shrinkage compensating agents, plasticizing and water-reducing agents; Euclid Chemical Co. “Euco N.S.”, L&M Construction chemicals, Inc. “Crystex”, Master Builders “Masterflow 713” or approved equal. 2.2

FABRICATION 2.2.1

2.2.2

Shop Fabrication and Assembly: 2.2.1.1

Fabricate and assembly structural assemblies in shop where possible.

2.2.1.2

Fabricate items in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on file shop drawings.

2.2.1.3

Provide camber in structural members where indicated.

2.2.1.4

Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly.

2.2.1.5

Fabricate for delivery sequence, which will expedite reaction and minimize filed handling.

2.2.1.6

Where shop priming is required, complete assembly, including welding, before start of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed-to-view which are free of markings, butts and other defects.

Connections: Weld or bolt shop connections as indicated 2.2.2.1

Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated.

2.2.2.2

Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for all bolted connections, unless unfinished bolts are indicated.

2.2.2.3

Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for bolting secondary members to primary members, and for temporary bracing to facilitate erection.

2.2.2.4

High-strength Bolted Connections: Install in accordance with AISC “Specifications for structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts”, (RCRBSJ).

2.2.3 Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance, and quality of welds and methods. Assemble and weld built-up sections by methods, which will produce true alignment of axes without warp. 2.2.4 Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through framing members as indicated on final shop drawings. 2.2.4.1 Punch, drill, or cut holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-46

Part 5

2.3

2.2.4.2

Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning.

2.2.4.3

Drill holes in bearing plates.

SHOP PAINTING: 2.3.1 General: Shop paint structural steel, except members to be embedded in concrete or mortar. Paint embedded steel which is partially exposed on exposed portions and initial 2-inches of embedded areas only. 2.3.1.1

Do not paint surfaces which are to be field welded or high-strength bolted with slip critical connections. An approved Class B faying surface shop primer may be used.

2.3.1.2

Do not paint surfaces which are to receive sprayed on fire proofing.

2.3.1.3

Apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. Each coat shall be a different color.

2.3.2 Surface Preparation: After inspection and after shipping, clean steel to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel to be field-painted in accordance with SSPC SP-6. Clean steel concealed in finish work in accordance with SP-3. 2.3.3 Painting: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer at dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils, in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Use painting methods which result in full coverage of joints, corners edges and exposed surfaces. 2.4

SHOP INSPECTION: 2.4.1 “Approved” fabrication shops shall be responsible for providing / performing all shop inspections and testing required under AISC, AWS, or Special Inspection provisions in the drawings in accordance with their approved QA and QC Manual using in-house or contracted third party inspection as outlined in their approved Manual procedures. No work shall proceed that will prevent the fabricator from issuing a certificate of compliance for all shop fabricated elements. 2.4.2 Non-“Approved” fabrication shops shall be responsible for contracting third party testing and inspection to comply with all required AISC, AWS, or Special Inspection provisions in the drawings to ensure a statement of compliance can be issued for all shop fabricated work. Adequate co-ordination and scheduling consideration will be provided to ensure all work is properly inspected. The Fabricator’s third party inspection firm shall issue a statement of compliance to the Owner’s third party inspection firm for inclusion in the final report to the Building Authority. The Fabricator may contract with the Owner’s third party inspection firm. In no case shall the cost of normal shop fabrication inspections and testing be transferred to the Owner through “assumed” responsibility.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

ERECTION: 3.1.1 Surveys: Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and location of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection proceeds. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made. 3.1.2 Temporary Shoring and Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and bracing members with connections of sufficient strength to bear imposed loads. Remove temporary members and connections when permanent members are in place and final connections are made. 3.1.3

3.1.4

Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: 3.1.3.1

Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve surface bond.

3.1.3.2

Clean bottom surfaces of base and bearing plates.

3.1.3.3

Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges or other adjusting devices.

3.1.3.4

Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims; cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

3.1.3.5

Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates filling voids. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to dray.

Field Assembly: 3.1.4.1

Set structural frames to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust members before permanently fastening.

3.1.4.2

Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces which will be in permanent contact before assembly.

3.1.4.3

Adjust for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

3.1.4.4

Level and plumb individual members within specified AICS tolerances. Establish measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for differences between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature of structure when completed.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-47

Part 5

3.1.5

3.2

3.1.4.5

Erection Bolts; Remove erection bolts on exposed welded construction. Fill holes with plumb welds and grind smooth. Bolts in concrete shall coincide with steel structural requirements and engineering.

3.1.4.6

Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections, alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.

3.1.4.7

Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by use of drift pins. Ream holes requiring enlargement to admit bolts.

Touch-Up Painting: 3.1.5.1

Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint.

3.1.5.2

Apply paint by brush or spray to exposed areas using same material and thickness as used for shop painting.

3.1.5.3

Apply by brush or spray, minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 3.2.1

3.2.2

The Owner’s Testing Laboratory will: 3.2.1.1

Review material certifications and certificates of compliance.

3.2.1.2

Inspect high strength bolted connections as required by the CBC and the Structural Drawings.

3.2.1.3

Periodic or Continuous Visual Inspection of all welding as required by the CBC and the Structural Drawings.

3.2.1.4

Non-destructive testing of welding as specified in the Structural Drawings.

Contractor Responsibility: 3.2.2.1

Work shall be inspected by county inspectors.

END OF SECTION 05 12 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-48

Part 5

SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS & DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes the furnishing and installing of cold-formed axially or wind loaded light gauge steel studs, tracks, joists, bridging and related accessories as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.2.1

Inspection and Quality Control 1.2.1.1

Contractor shall provide effective full time quality control over all fabrication and erection activities.

1.2.1.2

As directed by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, Owner's testing agency may inspect the maintenance of a quality control program including spot checking weldments and welding procedures in accordance with AWS standards.

1.2.1.3

Steel framing manufacturer shall provide a qualified representative for periodic on-site review of fabrication and installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.2.1.4

Inspection by Owner's testing agency is not intended to be comprehensive or complete. Full responsibility for quality control shall remain with contractor.

1.2.2 Standards: Work shall meet the requirements of the following standards. The most stringent requirements shall govern in conflicts between specified codes and standards.

1.3

1.2.2.1

Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA) Product Technical Information ICBO ER-4943P.

1.2.2.2

American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.

1.2.2.3

American Welding Society (AWS) D.1.3, Structural Welding Code -Sheet Steel.

1.2.2.4

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

1.2.2.5

American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) Manual of Steel Construction, 9th Edition.

1.2.2.6

All pertinent Federal, State and Local codes.

SUBMITTALS: 1.3.1.

Submittal procedures and quantities are as specified in Section 01 33 00.

1.3.2 Structural Calculations: Submit recommended structural design with supporting calculations as prepared by manufacturer for review by the Structural Engineer for all wind loaded metal framing. 1.3.3 Shop Drawings: Prior to framing fabrication, submit formal fabrication and erection shop drawings for Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer 's approval. Shop drawings shall not be reproductions of the structural drawings. Shop drawings shall include.

1.4

1.3.3.1

Prefabricated framing with individual panel drawings for each condition including configuration, dimensions, materials, attachments and panel location.

1.3.3.2

All member gauges (mils), spacings and sizes.

1.3.3.3

Shop and field assembly details including cut and connections.

1.3.3.4

Type and location of welds, bolts and fastening devices.

1.3.3.4

Calculations and drawings shall be signed by a California Registered Civil Engineer.

HANDLING AND STORAGE: Immediately upon delivery to the site, material shall be stored under impervious covering or otherwise protected from exposure to the weather and from contact with soil.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1 All framing members shall be of the type, size and gauge (mils) as shown on the plans and shall be manufactured by RC-1, Milcore, US Gypsum Co., Western Steel Framing Systems or equal, in accordance with General and Supplementary Conditions..

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-49

Part 5

2.1.2

2.1.3

2.1.4

Painted Materials (for interior load bearing walls): 2.1.2.1

All painted studs and joists, 3 5/8” (362), 4” (400), or 6” (600) with 1 5/8” flange (162) - 12 gauge (97 mil), 14 gauge (68 mill), and 16 gauge (54 mil) shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM A570, Grade 50 with a minimum yield of 50,000 psi.

2.1.2.2.

All painted track, 3 5/8” (362), 4” (400), or 6” (600) ) with 1 5/8” flange (162) - 14 gauge (68 mil) and 16 gauge (54 mil) shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM A570, Grade 33 with minimum yield of 33,000 psi.

2.1.2.3.

All painted studs, joists and track, 3 5/8” (362), 4” (400), or 6” (600) with 1 5/8” flange (162) - 18 gauge (43 mil) and 20 gauge (33 mil); all painted bridging, end closures and accessories shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM A611, Grade C with a minimum yield of 33,000 psi.

2.1.2.4.

All painted material and accessories shall be primed with rust inhibitive paint meeting the performance requirements of TT-P-636C.

Galvanized Materials (for exterior walls): 2.1.3.1

All galvanized studs and joists, 3 5/8” (362), 4” (400), or 6” (600) with 1 5/8” flange (162) - 14 gauge (68 mill), and 16 gauge (54 mil) shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the minimum requirements of ASTM A570, Grade 50 or ASTM A446, Grade D with a minimum yield of 50,000 psi.

2.1.3.2

All galvanized studs, joists and track, 3 5/8” (362), 4” (400), or 6” (600) with 1 5/8” flange (162) - 18 gauge (43 mil) and 20 gauge (33 mil); all galvanized bridging, end closures and accessories shall be formed from steel that corresponds to the requirements of ASTM A611, Grade C or A446, Grade A with a minimum yield of 33,000 psi.

2.1.3.3

All galvanized studs, joists, track, bridging and accessories shall be formed from steel having a G-60 galvanized coating meeting the requirements of ASTM A525.

Galvanized materials (for non-bearing interior walls): 2.1.4.1

Light gauge metal studs shall be roll formed channel type studs, 3 5/8” (362), 4” (400), or 6” (600) with 1 1/4” flange (125) - 20 gauge (33mil) electrogalvanized conforming to ASTM C-645. Use 20 gauge (33 mil) studs and joists unless otherwise noted on the Drawings for walls to receive ceramic tile and for walls over 14 feet high.

2.1.4.2

Metal furring channels for walls shall be 25 gauge (18 mil) electrogalvanized steel, conforming to ASTM C-645..

2.1.5 Properties: The physical and structural properties as listed by referenced manufacturers as indicated shall be considered the minimum permitted for the respective framing members. Specifically, the following minimum properties, calculated in accordance with the latest AISI Specification shall be provided: Ix (in.4), Area (in.2), rx(in.), Fy (KSI), Resisting Moment (in. - 1b.). 2.2

FABRICATION: 2.2.1 Framing components may be preassembled into panels prior to erecting. Prefabricated panels shall be square, with components attached in a manner as to prevent racking. 2.2.2 All framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members, or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Members shall be held positively in place until properly fastened. 2.2.3 Provide insulation equal to that specified elsewhere in all double jamb studs and double header members which will not be accessible to the insulating contractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION: Prior to installation, inspect work of all other trades. Verify that all such work is complete and accurate to the point where this installation may properly commence in strict accordance with framing shop drawings. Immediately notify Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer of all discrepancies. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancies until such discrepancy has been fully resolved.

3.2

ERECTION (WALLS): 3.2.1

Wind Load Only: 3.2.1.1

Erect framing and panels plumb, level and square in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings.

3.2.1.2

Handling and lifting of prefabricated panels shall be done in a manner as to not cause distortion in any member.

3.2.1.3

Track shall be securely anchored to the supporting structure as shown on the fabrication and erection drawings.

3.2.1.4

At track butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to common structural elements, or they shall be butt-welded or spliced together.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-50

Part 5

3.3

3.2.1.5

Studs shall be plumbed, aligned and securely attached to the flange or webs of both upper and lower tracks.

3.2.1.6

Jack studs or cripples shall be installed below window sills, above window and door heads, at free standing stair rails and elsewhere to furnish support, and shall be securely attached to supporting members.

3.2.1.7

Wall stud bridging shall be attached in a manner to prevent stud rotation. Bridging rows shall be spaced according to the following schedule. Walls up to 10'-0" height: one row at mid-height. Wall exceeding 10'-0" height: bridging rows spaced not to exceed 5'-0" on center.

3.2.1.8

Provision for structure vertical movement shall be provided where indicated on the plans using vertical slide clip or other means in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

LIGHT GAUGE FRAMING: 3.3.1 Attach steel runners at floor and ceiling to structural elements with suitable fasteners located 2" from each end and spaced 24" o.c., or to suspended ceilings with toggle or molly bolts spaced at 16" o.c. 3.3.2 Position studs vertically, engaging floor and ceiling runners and spaced at 16" o.c. unless otherwise indicated on drawings. When necessary, splice nonbearing studs with 8" nested lap and one positioned attachment per stud flange. Place studs in direct contact with all door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partition corners and existing construction elements. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchor clips of door or borrowed-light frames, place horizontally a cut to length section of runner, with a web-flange bend at each end, and secure with one positive attachment per flange. Position a cut-to-length stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall surfaces as directed by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. 3.3.3 Bridge stud partitions at mid height with 1-1/2" channels through studs secured in place. Lap channels by nesting one inside the other to a depth of at least 8" and wire tie together.

3.4

WALL FURRING: 3.4.1 See drawings for location of finish material over masonry wall. Attach 7/8" metal furring channels or metal studs as shown on drawings, vertically spaced 16" o.c., to masonry or concrete surfaces with hammer-set or power driven fasteners or concrete stub nails staggered 24" o.c. on opposite flanges. Nest channel 8" at splices and anchor with two fasteners in each wing. Where furring channel is installed directly to exterior wall and a possibility of water penetration through walls exists, install asphalt felt protection strip between furring channel and wall.

3.5

RESILIENT CHANNEL: 3.5.1 Attach at right angles to framing members. Position with nailing flange down. Use 1-1/4" screws. Locate channels 24" up from floor, with 6" of the ceiling line and no more than 24" on center. Extend channels into all corners and fasten to corner farming. At floor beneath channels, attach 1/2" x 3" wide continuous gypsum panel filler strips to bottom plate. Splice channel directly over studs by nesting, not butting, the channels and fastening both flanges to the support.

END OF SECTION 05 40 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-51

Part 5

SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to work of this section.

1.2

DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.2.1 Provide framing lumber, plywood sheathing, blocking, plates, curbs, etc. and incidental carpentry work supporting other work. Furnish and install standard product rough hardware and specially fabricated rough hardware in connection with work of this section. 1.2.2

1.3

The following categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications: 1.2.2.1

Fabrication of special rough hardware that are in connection with work of this section.

1.2.2.2

Acoustical and insulation work.

1.2.2.3

Concrete formwork.

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.3.1 Grading Standards: "Grading Rules for Western Lumber." "Product Standard PS 1-07 for Softwood Plywood/Construction and Industrial." All lumber and plywood shall be grade-marked. All lumber and plywood shall be grade-stamped. Do not mark lumber in an area where it is scheduled to be exposed. 1.3.2 Codes: All work shall be executed in accordance with Chapter 23 of the "California Building Code, current edition (CBC)”.

1.4

SUBMITTALS: Submit the following: quantities and procedures are as specified in Section 01 33 00. 1.4.1

Wood treatment data including treatment plant's certificate of compliance with indicated requirements.

1.4.2 Calculations and drawings of pre-fabricated wood components and their respective hangers/connections, signed by a California registered civil engineer. 1.5

DELIVERIES AND STORAGE: 1.5.1 Lumber shall be piled and protected to ensure proper protection. Material having warps, crooks, and other defects shall not be incorporated into the work, even though such defects may develop after material is delivered to site.

1.6

PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING: 1.6.1 Prior to commencing the work of this section, the contractor shall schedule and attend a meeting at the job site to discuss conformance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Request attendance of representative from Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, Contractor, subcontractors, and other parties who are involved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

FRAMING LUMBER: Unless otherwise noted on Structural Drawings and Structural Notes concealed framing lumber shall be Douglas Fir – Larch No. 2 900fb and 19% or less moisture content. Provide lumber species and grade as noted on structural notes in structural drawings.

2.2

SHEATHING: Unless otherwise noted on Structural drawings and Structural Notes plywood shall be 5/8" C-D with exterior glue with Identification Index of 40/20. Provide APA rated sheathing as noted on structural notes on structural drawings. Provide fire-retardant treated plywood sheathing where indicated.

2.3

PLYWOOD BACKING FOR ELECTRICAL AND TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT: APA C-D Plugged Int. with exterior glue, fire-retardant treated, 3/4" thick except as otherwise indicated.

2.4

LUMBER FOR MISCELLANEOUS USES: 2.4.1 Unless otherwise indicated, provide standard grade lumber of other works, including cant strips, nailers, blocking, and other similar members.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-52

Part 5

2.5

2.6

Preservative pressure-treated lumber and plywood with water-borne preservatives to comply with AWPA C2 and C9, respectively, and with requirements indicated below: 2.5.1

Wood for Above-Ground Use: AWPB LP-2.

2.5.2

Treat cants, nailers, blocking, curbs, stripping and similar items in conjunction with roofing, flashing, and vapor barrier.

2.5.3

Treat blocking, sleepers, and similar items in direct contact with concrete.

STANDARD PRODUCT ROUGH HARDWARE: Simpson "Strong-Tie Connectors", unless otherwise specified, of size, type, material, suited to application shown. Prior approved substitution shall have an equal or better rating acceptable to ICC and meet requirements of the CBC. All hardware to be painted finish or hot-dip galvanized.

2.7

OTHER ROUGH HARDWARE: 2.7.1 Common Nails: Conform to ASTM F1667 and CBC Section 2306.6 unless otherwise noted on drawings. Contractor shall use galvanized or aluminum on exterior where exposed to weather and exterior covered only by paint. 2.7.2 Screws: Conform to ANSI/ASME B18.6.1, unless otherwise noted on drawings Contractor shall use galvanized on where exposed to weather and exterior covered only by paint. 2.7.3 Bolts and Nuts: Unless otherwise noted or specified, use unfinished American Standard. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, Contractor shall use galvanized at exterior where exposed to weather and exterior covered only by paint. Provide with matching cut or pressed steel washers for both bolts and nuts where bearing on wood, unless otherwise shown. 2.7.4 Connectors Into Concrete or Masonry: Powder-activated fastening system prior approved equal to "Ramset" or "Hilti". Anchor shall be installed to depth of embedment recommended by manufacturer. Anchors shall be galvanized where exposed to weather. Concrete nails are not acceptable. 2.7.5

Construction Adhesive: Adhesive shall conform to APA Specification AFG-01.

2.7.6

Mastic: As specified in Division 07 11 00.

2.7.7

Connector Plates: Contractor shall use galvanized at exterior where exposed to weather and covered only by paint.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

FRAMING: Verify all measurements and dimensions at the job. Set framing members and assemblies accurately to required lines and levels, and to arrangements shown. Accurately and neatly cut and fit work, and strongly nail, spike, bolt or otherwise secure in place, in workmanlike manner. Erect roofs level or sloped as noted, aligned in planes except where "warping" is specifically noted. Do not splice structural wood framing members between bearing points or supports. Have capable mechanics do cutting, assembling, and erecting of wood members. Secure approval before cutting any wood members that may weaken structure. Do all cutting, framing and fitting necessary for accommodation of work of other trades. All blocking for structural member shall be as detailed and noted in structural drawings. Exercise due care in placing framing so that structural and other important members do not require cutting for openings, pipes, vents, conduits, ducts, or like work. Finish bearing surfaces on which wood structural members are to rest to give full, true, and even support. Do not use wedges or shims to overcome faulty work. Remove and replace wood members, which have been split or otherwise damaged to such an extent as to materially impair their strength, as directed at no extra cost to Owner. Provide wood grounds, strips and blocking, indicated or required by conditions, of thickness and shape required to receive finish materials. Provide all blocking necessary for toilet accessories. Provide wood framing for air conditioning curbs as detailed or by manufacturers standard literature.

3.2

CONNECTIONS: Term "rough hardware" includes bolts, nails, lag screws, washers, plates, and similar items employed in erection and construction of rough work, bolt anchorages embedded in concrete to concrete trade prior to erection of forms. Provide rough hardware as shown and required to complete work, including installation of such items furnished under other sections.

3.3

NAILING: Drive nails not closer together than 1/2 their length unless driven in drilled holes, nor closer to edge of member than 1/4 its length; drill holes slightly smaller than nail diameters when necessary to prevent splitting. Penetrate second or farther member not less than 1/2 length of nail. Use common nails except where other nails are shown or specified. Refer to Nailing schedule in UBC unless otherwise noted in Structural Notes or Structural Drawings.

3.4

BOLTS AND NUTS: Provide malleable or cut steel washers under heads and nuts except where bearing on steel plates or other steel attachments, or where flat-head countersunk bolts are shown. Clamp members together and bore holes of same diameter as bolts, true to line; drive bolts in place, and draw nuts up tight. Immediately prior to enclosing bolts with finish or, if left exposed, upon completion of other work, draw bolts tight again. Holes at anchor bolts embedded in concrete may be 1/16" larger than bolt diameter.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-53

Part 5

3.5

SCREWS: Screw (do not drive) lag and wood screws into place. Bore hole to receive lag screw, first of same diameter and depth as shank, and then continue to depth equal to length of screw with diameter equal to base of thread. Screw shall penetrate a distance equal to at least 7 times diameter of screw shank into far member. Install washer under each lag screw head bearing on wood.

3.6

PLYWOOD SHEATHING: 3.6.1 Arrange so that no piece is less than 12" wide in either face dimension. Install with face grain across supports, end joints over joists and staggered, and provide blocking at unsupported edges as noted. Nail as noted using specified nails. 3.6.2 Plywood sheathing to receive traffic-bearing roof deck surfacing shall have all edges supported and have sheets staggered so that no four corners adjoin and must be well secured with screw or ring-shank type nails. All plywood floor sheating shall be glued and ring-shank nailed to structure below. 3.6.3 Provide continuous bead of construction adhesive between wood sheathing and wood supporting member at all locations concurrent with nailing. 3.6.4 Where plywood is designated for a shear wall, it shall be continuous over the full surface of that entire wall plane, whether or not the wall is designated as a shear wall for the full length and including over and under openings.

3.7

STRIPPING: Provide as shown and required.

3.8

GROUNDS: Install over lath, sizes as shown or required, secured at maximum 16" intervals, accurately set to required finish lines and planes.

3.9

TREATED LUMBER: Contractor shall install pre-treated lumber at all locations of foundation attachment where concrete and/or masonry contacts plates or ledgers. Wherever necessary to cut, notch, dap, drill or frame treated lumber, treat newly cut or bored surfaces with two heavy coats of same preservative used in original treatment, minimum 1/4" depth of penetration. 3.9.1

Contractor shall place all exterior wall sill plates in mastic.

3.9.2 Contractor shall place all interior wall sill plates in mastic where interior finish floor slab is installed or called to be less than 1 1/2" above adjacent room depressed finish floor slab. 3.10

CLEAN-UP: During progress of work, remove from site discarded wood scrap daily.

END OF SECTION 06 10 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-54

Part 5

SECTION 07 10 00 - VAPOR RETARDER BENEATH SLAB PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS: Documents affecting work of this Section include, but are not necessarily limited to, General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Sections in Division 1 and 9 of these Specifications.

1.2

DESCRIPTION / SUMMARY: 1.2.1 Work Included: The work includes, but is not necessarily limited to furnishing of all materials, labor and equipment and transportation to provide an air infiltration barrier and secondary weather resistive membrane as indicated and as specified herein. 1.2.2 Related Work Specified Elsewhere: Note: Coordinate work of this section with work of other sections to properly execute the work and maintain satisfactory progress of work of other sections including: Cast in Place Concrete 03 30 00

1.3

1.4

TECHNICAL DATA: 1.3.1

Applicable Standards Air-ins, Inc.: Air-ins Air Permeance Test American National Standards Institute (ANSI).

1.3.2

Standard Specification for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs: ASTM E 1745 Class “A”

1.3.3

Installation: ASTM 1643

SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1

Provide submittals under provisions of Section 01 33 00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

VAPOR RETARDER; Vapor Retarder shall be five-layer laminated UV stabilized high density polyethylene copolymer and nylon yarn laminate. Weight: 39 lbs/1000 sq.ft., 3” tensile 4,500 psi, PPT tear strength: 23 lbs per ASTM-D2582, Permeance (perms): 0.059. “Griffolyn” brand, “T-85” as manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc. (800) 231- 6074) www.reefindustries.com or “Stego Wrap” 10 mil Class ‘A’ as manufactured by Stego Industries LLC, (949) 493-5460 www.stegoindustries.com or Perminator 10 mil Class “A” as manufactured by W.R. Meadows, (909) 469-2606 www.wrmeadows.com or equal.

2.2

ADHESIVE TAPE: Adhesive tape shall be 1-1/2 inch wide 35 mil. double sided asphaltic pressure sensitive tape in rolls with release paper.

2.3

SAND BASE: Sand base material shall be “Manufactured Sand” graded and passing the following sieve analysis: 4/100%, 8/75%, 16/51%, 30/36%, 50/27%, 100/14% and 200/17%, or ASTM Test Standard D2419 “Sand Equivalency” with a Sand Equivalency (SE) of greater than 30. Material shall be compatible at optimum moisture content. Class II road base mix is an acceptable alternate for the sand base below the vapor retarder. Confirm material with the Geotechnical Engineer prior to placement.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION: Install sand or Class II road base rolled and compacted at optimum moisture content over compacted and smooth graded subgrade. Apply layer of vapor retarder in rolls with 6-inch laps at all joints and tape with specified tape or as required by the vapor retarder manufacturer. Prepare “sleeves” of vapor retarder material and turn up minimum 6-inches around conduits, pipes, ducts, etc., and tape seal. Spread 2-inch thick layer of manufactured compactable sand rolled and compacted to protect the vapor retarder and install screeds and reinforcing without penetrating the vapor retarder. No holes in vapor retarder will be allowed.

END OF SECTION 07 10 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-55

Part 5

SECTION 07 21 16 - BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes the furnishing and installing of thermal and sound insulation in the building as shown and noted on the drawings and specified herein. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

SUBMITTALS: 1.2.1 Submit a list of insulation materials proposed for use, giving the manufacturer's names and brand designations for each material. 1.2.2

1.3

See Section 01 33 00 for number and manner of submittals.

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.3.1 Thermal Resistivity: Where thermal resistivity properties of insulation materials are designated by R-values they represent the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly 1" thick, measured by test method included in referenced material standard or otherwise indicated. They are expressed by the temperature difference in degrees F between the two exposed faces required to cause one BTU to flow through one square foot per hour at mean temperatures indicated. 1.3.2 Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide insulation materials which are identical to those whose fire performance characteristics, as listed for each material or assembly of which insulation is a part, have been determined by testing, per methods indicated below, by UL or other testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.4

1.3.2.1

Surface Burning Characteristics: ASTM E84

1.3.2.2

Fire Resistance Ratings: ASTM E119

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver, store and handle insulation in a manner to prevent damage or deterioration due to moisture or physical abuse.

1.5

SCHEDULING: Do not install insulation until construction has progressed to the point that inclement weather will not damage or wet the insulation material. Install insulation after electric wiring, plumbing and other concealed work is in place. Insulation shall not be closed-in until it has been inspected and approved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

BATT INSULATION: 2.1.1 Insulation materials shall be kraft-faced, foil faced or unfaced glass fiber batts or blankets of the types and R-values as specified below unless otherwise called for in the Title 24 energy calculations for the various applications as manufactured by Schuller International, Inc. (Manville), Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp., U.S. Gypsum Co., or approved equal in accordance with Section 01 25 00. All materials shall have a flame spread less than 25. 2.1.2 Between Studs in all Exterior Walls: Kraft-faced Batts with an R-value as noted on the drawings and/or Title 24 energy calculations (contractor's responsibility) 2.1.3

Sound Insulation in Interior Walls: NOT USED.

2.1.4

Roof Insulation in all Finish Ceiling (Concealed) locations with Exterior Exposures: NOT USED.

2.1.5 Roof Insulation in all Unfinished Ceiling (Exposed Structure) locations with Exterior Exposures: (FSK-25) Foil-faced batts with an R-value as noted in the drawings and/or Title 24 energy calculations. Foil faced materials shall have a flame spread rating of not more than 25 and a smoke index of not more than 50. All exposed faces shall be painted. 2.1.6

Sound Insulation in Interior Floor/Ceiling Assemblies: NOT USED.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION OF BATT INSULATION: 3.1.1 Installation of batt insulation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Insulation shall be installed the full height of the wall or between joists, as indicated. Insulation shall be continuous behind all lighting switches, convenience outlet boxes, and other devices. 3.1.2

Fully insulate small areas between closely spaced framing members.

3.1.3

Do end matching neatly with ends fitting snugly or overlapped.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-56

Part 5

3.1.4 Cut and fit insulation materials around pipes, conduits, outlet boxes and other obstructions as necessary to maintain the integrity of the insulation. Where pipes are installed in spaces to receive insulation, place insulation between exterior wall and the pipe, compressing insulation if necessary. 3.1.5 Batts and Blankets: Where insulation is cut to fit small or irregular spaces, cut the insulation slightly larger than the space to ensure a tight friction fit. Insert blankets between the studs from the inside face of the wall, recessed slightly from the face of the studs where blankets are not adequately supported by friction, attach the blankets with adhesive, 9/16" long divergent point staples located at four corners and center of each blanket or with tie wires spaced not more than 36" on centers. 3.1.6 Exercise extreme care to maintain vapor barrier continuous over insulated surface. Patch all tears in vapor barrier in a manufacturers approved manner. 3.2

INSULATING FILL: Install loose fill insulation in all hollow masonry cells adjacent to interior occupied spaces. Tightly caulk or otherwise permanently seal electrical outlets, apertures for conduits, pipes and all other wall openings prior to installation of insulation. 3.2.1 Before any insulation is poured, Contractor shall place temporary statement in each room and no more than 20 feet on center on the interior face of walls to be insulated warning all trades who might subsequently cut into wall to use caution to prevent loss of insulation. 3.2.2

Height of any pour shall not exceed 20 feet or one story whichever is less.

END OF SECTION 07 21 16

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-57

Part 5

SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2

Description of Work: 1.2.1 The work includes the furnishing and installing of all sealant work, except glazing sealants, required to weatherproof the structure, including interior sealant work, as shown and noted on the drawings and as specified. Sealants for glazing work are specified in Section 08 81 00. Sealant for preformed roof and wall panels are specified in Section 13 34 20 and Section 13 34 21. 1.2.2 This section contains requirements pertaining to all weather sealing and caulking throughout the project and becomes a part of each and every section calling for caulking and sealing, unless otherwise specified, as though written in full in each section.

1.3

System Performances: Provide joints sealers that have been produced and installed to establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals.

1.4

Quality Assurance: 1.4.1 Installer Qualifications: Engage an Installer who has, within the last 3 years, successfully completed at least 3 joint sealer applications similar in type and size to that of this project and who will assign mechanics from these earlier applications to this project, of which one will serve as lead mechanic. 1.4.2 Single Source Responsibility for Joint Sealer Materials: Obtain joint sealer materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required.

1.5

Submittals: 1.5.1

Submittal procedures and quantities as specified in Section 01 33 00.

1.5.2 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for each joint sealer product required, including instructions for joint preparation and joint sealer application. 1.5.3 Samples for Initial Selection Purposes: Submit manufacturer's bead samples consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, including special colors provided by manufacturer for each product exposed to view. 1.5.4 Samples for Verification Purposes: Submit samples of each type and color of joint sealer required. Install joint sealer samples in 1/2" wide joints formed between two 6" long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealers in the work. The workmanship, bond and color of sealant work throughout the project shall match that of the approved sample. 1.5.5 Certificates: Submit certificates from manufacturers of joint sealers attesting that their products comply with specification requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. 1.6

Delivery, Storage, and Handling: 1.6.1 Deliver materials to project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. 1.6.2 Store and handle materials to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, contaminants or other causes. Store sealants in an area where they will not be subject to temperatures above 100 degrees fahrenheit. Do not store materials that have exceeded the manufacturer's recommended shelf life.

1.7

Project Conditions: 1.7.1 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside the limits permitted by joint sealer manufacturers, or when joint substrates are wet due to rain, fog, frost, condensation or other causes. 1.7.2 Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers when joint widths are less than allowed by joint sealer manufacturer for application indicated.

1.8

Warranty: In addition to the warranty and correction of work requirements of the General Conditions, work under this section shall be warranteed against moisture penetration for a period of 20 years from the date of "Substantial Completion". The written warranty shall include materials and labor required to repair leaks that develop. The warranty shall be signed by the sealant manufacturer, the sealant installer and the Contractor and shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 77 00. 1.8.1

20 year limited warranty for Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-58

Part 5

1.8.2

20 Year non-staining Warranty for Dow Corning 795 Silicone Building Sealant

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

Materials: Products shall conform to the reference documents listed for each use. Color of sealant and caulking shall match adjacent surface color, unless specified otherwise. In concealed installation, use standard gray or black sealant. For ASTM C 920 sealants, use a sealant that has been tested on the type(s) of substrate to which it will be applied. 2.1.1

Silicone Rubber One Component – (SLNT-1) Dow Corning 790 or 795 silicone construction sealant or equal.

2.1.2 Self-Level Polyurethane Two-Part (SLNT-2): sealant or equal.

Two-part self-leveling polyurethane sealant, Sonneborn SL-2 Paving JT

2.1.3

Urethane Sealant (SLNT-3): One-part polyurethane sealant, Vulkem 116 or equal.

2.1.4

Silicone Sanitary (SLNT-4): Silicone rubber base sanitary sealant, Dow Corning 786 or equal.

2.1.5 Concealed Acoustical Sealant (SLNT.5): sealant for concealed applications per ASTM C 919.

Non-drying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, nonbleeding, gunnable

2.1.6 Latex Acrylic Sealant (SLNT-6): ASTM C834-81, latex acrylic sealant, Sonneborn Sonolac or equal. Also used for Exposed Acoustical Sealant. 2.1.7 Primer for Sealant: Use a non-staining, quick-drying type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the particular application that has been tested for durability on the surfaces to be sealed. 2.1.8

Bond Breakers: Use the type and consistency recommended by the sealant manufacturer for the particular application.

2.1.9 Joint Backings: Use polyurethane or polyethylene foams free from oil or other staining elements as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. Backing material shall be compatible with the sealant. Do not use oakum and other types of absorptive materials as joint backings. 2.1.10 Masking Tape: For masking around joint, provide an appropriate masking tape which will effectively prevent application of sealant on surfaces not scheduled to receive it and which is removable without damage to substrate. 2.1.11

Color of sealants to match adjacent surfaces which may require a special color normally produced by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

Surface Preparation: Surfaces shall be clean, dry to the touch, and free from moisture, grease, oil, wax, lacquer, paint, or other foreign matter that would tend to destroy or impair adhesion. Where adequate grooves have not been provided, clean out grooves to a depth of 1/2 inch and grind to a minimum width of 1/4 inch without damage to the adjoining work. No grinding shall be required on metal surfaces. 3.1.1

3.1.2

3.2

Concrete Surfaces: 3.1.1.1

Install only on surfaces which are dry, sound, well-brushed and wiped free from dust.

3.1.1.2

At all open joints, remove dust by mechanically blown compressed air if so required.

3.1.1.3

To remove oil and grease, use sandblasting or wire brushing.

3.1.1.4

Where surfaces have been treated, remove the surface treatment by sandblasting or wire brushing.

3.1.1.5

Remove laitance and mortar from joint cavities.

Steel Surfaces: 3.1.2.1

Unprimed or Unfinished Steel Surfaces in Contact with Sealant: Sandblast as required to achieve acceptable surface bond. If sandblasting is not practical, or would damage adjacent finish, scrape the metal or wire brush to remove mill scale and rust. Use solvent to remove oil and grease, wiping the surfaces with clean white rags only.

3.1.2.2

Remove protective coatings on steel by sandblasting or by using a solvent which leaves no residue.

Sealant Preparation: Do not modify the sealant by addition of liquids, solvents, or powders. Mix multicomponent elastomeric sealants in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

3.3

Application: 3.3.1 Backstops: Where joint cavities are constructed deeper than indicated, tightly pack the back or bottom with backstop material to provide a joint of the depth indicated. Install backstops dry and free of tears or holes.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-59

Part 5

3.3.2 Primer: Just prior to application of the sealant or caulking compound, clean out all loose particles from joints. Apply primer in accordance with compound manufacturer's directions. Do not apply primer to exposed finish surface. 3.3.3 used.

Bond Breaker: Provide bond breakers, as recommended by the sealant manufacturer, for each type of joint and sealant

3.3.4 Sealant and Caulking Compounds: Use a compound that is compatible with the material to and against which it is applied. Do not use a compound that has exceeded its shelf life or has become too jelled to be discharged in a continuous flow from the gun. Apply the compound in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions. Force the compound into joints with sufficient pressure to fill the joints solidly. Compound shall be uniformly smooth and free of wrinkles. 3.3.4.1

Installation of SLNT-1: Use SLNT-1 where indicated on drawings, and for other sealant work subject to movement not otherwise indicated on drawings or specified herein. Use for non-sleeved mechanical and electrical penetrations in interior or exterior walls above grade and other exterior applications, including vertical surfaces. Joints to receive SLNT-1 shall be not less than 1/4 inch and not exceed two inches in width. Depth of sealant shall be as follows: Joint Width 1/4" to 1/2" 1/2" to 1"

Min. Depth

Max. Depth

1/4" 1/2"

Equal to width 5/8"

3.3.4.2

Installation of SLNT-2: Use SLNT-2 for horizontal surface joints subject to foot or vehicular traffic where indicated on drawings and as specified. Install in joints of exterior sidewalks adjacent to building, interior exposed joints in slabs where subject to foot or vehicular traffic, and interior exposed perimeter joints in slabs abutting walls and other vertical surfaces.

3.3.4.3

Installation of SLNT-3: Use SLNT-3 where indicated on drawings, and for joints not subject to movement between windows, door frames, sidelights, louvers, other frames, and similar conditions in interior or exterior walls. Joints to receive SLNT-3 shall be not less than 1/4 inch and not exceed 3/4 inch in width. Depth of sealant shall be as follows: Joint Width 1/4" to 1/2" 1/2" to 3/4"

Min. Depth 1/4" 1/4"

Max. Depth Equal to width 1/2 of width

3.3.4.4

Installation of SLNT-4: Use SLNT-4 where indicated on drawings, and for joints around counters, fixtures, and walls in toilet rooms and area requiring sanitary sealant.

3.3.4.5

Installation of SLNT-5: Use SLNT-5 where indicated on drawings and for concealed application of acoustical sealants.

3.3.4.6

Installation of SLNT-6: Use SLNT-6 where indicated on drawings and for exposed application of acoustical sealant.

3.3.4.7

Installation of SLNT-6: Use SLNT-6 for interior wall penetrations that will be exposed to view and require painting and for interior wall penetrations that will not be exposed to view.

3.3.5 Sealed joints shall be neatly pointed on flush surfaces with beading tool, and internal corners with eaving tool. Excess material shall be cleanly removed. Sealant, where exposed, shall be free of wrinkles and uniformly smooth. Sealing shall be complete before final coats of paint are applied. 3.3.6 Miscellaneous Caulking and Sealing Work: The entire extent of sealing work is not necessarily fully or individually described herein. Sealing shall be provided wherever required to prevent light leakage as well as moisture leakage. Refer to drawings and other sections of these specifications for conditions and related parts of the work. 3.4

Protection and Cleaning: 3.4.1 Protection: Protect areas adjacent to joints from compound smears. Masking tape may be used for this purpose if removed five to ten minutes after the joint is filled. 3.4.2 Cleaning: Immediately scrape off fresh compound that has been smeared on masonry and rub clean with a solvent as recommended by the compound manufacturer. Upon completion of compound application, remove all remaining smears and stains resulting therefrom and leave the work in a clean and neat condition.

END OF SECTION 07 92 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-60

Part 5

SECTION 08 11 00 - METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes the furnishing and installing of all metal doors, transoms, sidelights and frames as shown and noted on the drawings and as specified. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

1.3

GOVERNING DOCUMENTS: 1.2.1

UL (Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.) Building Materials Director for labeled openings.

1.2.2

Steel Door Institute Standards.

SUBMITTALS: Submit fully detailed shop drawings of all hollow metal, including a complete schedule of all doors and frames. No manufacture or fabrication of doors and frames shall be commenced until the shop drawings have been reviewed and returned to the Contractor. See Section 01 33 00 for required number and manner of submittals.

1.4

QUALITY CONTROL: 1.4.1 Labeled Openings: Where labeled openings occur, coordination is required for labeled assembly (door, frame, hardware), not merely labeled items within assembly. Conform to UL requirements. Doors and frames shall bear the specific UL labels as required for the rated openings. 1.4.2 Protection: Protect for shipping in either wood crates or paper cartons. Doors or frames with the prime coat damaged on exposed surfaces or damaged in any other respect will be rejected or corrected in a manner acceptable to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. Do not store doors or frames in contact with the ground and protect at all times from damage of any kind, before, during and after erection. 1.4.3

Templates: Secure templates from finish hardware supplier for specified hardware and mounting locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

DOORS: 2.1.1 Materials: Commercial quality, stretcher leveled, cold rolled steel conforming to ASTM A 366-72 or hot rolled steel, pickled and oiled conforming to ASTM A 569-72, free from scale, pitting or surface defects; with edges, angles and corners square. Exterior doors shall be hot dipped galvanized (0.6 ounces zinc coating minimum); surfaces shall be free of spangles, runs, etc. 2.1.1.1

Approved manufacturers:

Steelcraft, Amweld, CECO, or Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer’s approved equal. Must meet WUI requirements.

2.1.2 Construction: Doors shall be full flush type, 1-3/4 inch thick, fabricated from steel sheets, 12 gauge at exterior doors and 12 gauge at interior doors. Top and bottom edges to be flush and closed with minimum 12 gauge channels at exterior doors and minimum 12 gauge channels at interior doors. 2.1.3 Internal Construction: Vertical and/or horizontal steel, rigidly formed members welded to the face panels with sound deadening material filling all interior hollow spaces; or polyurethane, polystyrene or mineral core bonded to the inside of both faces. 2.1.4 Hardware Preparation and Reinforcing: Doors shall be factory mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped for mortised hardware. Reinforce doors for specified surface applied hardware, for which drilling and tapping will be done in the field by others. Provide manufacturer's standard heavy duty hinge (butt) reinforcement, 10 gauge minimum; 12 gauge for closers and 14 gauge minimum for all other hardware reinforcement. 2.1.5 Louvers: Provide factory installed door louvers where scheduled; blades shall be 20 gauge with 18 gauge frame, all welded construction. Exterior door louvers shall be "Y" or "Z" type, provided with 18 x 14 bronze insect screen in a steel frame, mounted to be removable from the interior side. Interior door louvers to be "V" or "Y" type. 2.2

FRAMES: 2.2.1 Materials: Commercial quality steel as specified for doors. Exterior door frames shall be hot dipped galvanized (0.6 ounces zinc coating minimum); surfaces shall be free of spangles, runs, etc. 2.2.2 Construction: Welded-unit type with integral stop and trim, fabricated from 12 gauge steel for exterior locations, 12 gauge steel for interior locations, to profiles and sizes indicated. Head, jamb member joints shall be mitered, continuously welded and ground smooth where exposed to view. Stops shall be a minimum of 5/8" deep. 2.2.3 Anchors: Provide welded-in floor anchor in each jamb member and a minimum of three wall anchors at each jamb, located at a maximum of 24" centers. Wall anchors, unless indicated otherwise, shall be of a type as recommended by the manufacturer for fastening to the specific wall condition. Provide a minimum of two head anchors for frames installed in stud walls and three or more anchors if frame width exceeds 3'6". All anchors shall be 18 gauge minimum. Provide UL approved anchors at labeled frames.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-61

Part 5

2.2.4 Hardware Preparation and Reinforcing: Frames shall be factory mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped for mortised hardware and reinforced for surface applied hardware, for which drilling and tapping will be done in the field. Provide manufacturer's standard reinforcement for hinges, 10 gauge minimum; 12 gauge for closers; and 14 gauge for other hardware reinforcement. Provide 26 gauge minimum grout guards for grouted frames at hardware cutouts and mortise hardware locations. Provide three rubber button silencers at single door strike jambs and one per leaf at the head of pairs of doors. Provide center pivot offset closures at exterior curtain wall doors where shown on drawings. 2.3

SHOP FINISH: Metal doors and frames shall be thoroughly cleaned, bonderized and given a factory dip or spray coat of rust-inhibitive metallic oxide or synthetic resin primer on concealed and exposed surfaces. Finish field painting is specified in Section 09 91 00.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION: 3.1.1 Frames shall be set accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. The bottom of frames shall be anchored securely to floors with expansion bolts or with powder-driven fasteners. Wall anchors shall be built-in or secured to adjoining construction as indicated or required by adjoining construction. Where frames require ceiling struts or other structural overhead bracing, they shall be anchored securely to structure above, as required. Frames shall be filled solid with Portland cement grout where shown or required by class of opening. 3.1.2 Doors shall fit snug against stops. Fit accurately and hang free from hinge bind with uniform clearance of 3/32" at heads and jambs. After hanging, make all adjustments and then remove lockset hardware for finish painting. Reinstall hardware after finish painting. 3.1.3 Installation of labeled doors and frames, including hardware and operational characteristics, shall be in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet No. 80 and NFPA Pamphlet No. 101. 3.1.4 The Contractor shall receive, install and be responsible for all metal door hardware delivered to the project. The hardware shall be fitted, removed, and stored until painter's finish has been completed. All hardware shall then be reset and left in good working order and the door rehung. Prior to completion of building, examine all doors and hardware. Adjust as required, and have hardware in good working order. 3.1.5 The location of hardware in doors shall be as specified in Section 08 71 00, unless otherwise shown on drawings. Properly tag, index and deliver all keys to Owner.

END OF SECTION 08 11 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-62

Part 5

SECTION 08 41 00-ALUMINUM STOREFRONT SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS & DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes the engineering, associated calculations, furnishing, installing, and testing of the curtain wall and exterior storefront system complete, as indicated and as per manufacturers specifications. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as full as if repeated herein.

1.2

CODES AND STANDARDS: 1.2.1

1.3

WINDOWS, DOORS, CURTAINWALL & EXTERIOR STOREFRONT SYSTEM SUPPLIERS: 1.3.1

1.4

A. Aluminum windows and exterior storefront system shall conform with the "California Building Code, Current Edition, (CBC)”. B. State of California title 24 Building Energy Efficiency standards, and the values listed on the ENV-1 form filed elsewhere in the contract documents

A. Exterior storefront and curtainwall system shall be the 2” x 4 ½” center glazed system as manufactured by Arcadia inc. B. The following manufacturers may be considered equal provided they can supply product certified by the N.F.R.C. and provided they are prepared to be the “responsible party” for N.F.R.C. certification: 1. Vista Wall, 2. U.S. Aluminum, 3. Kawneer, 4. or equal.

CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY: The contractor is hereby advised that the responsibility for the curtainwall/storefront system (including engineering) is totally his and that all designs and resolutions proposed in the shop drawings, calculations and related documentation and certification must be demonstrated not only in the test procedure, but also throughout the guarantee periods as herein specified. No compensation for omissions or errors on the part of the windows, sliding doors, curtain wall, and exterior storefront system contractor in the engineering, design, and execution of this contract will be awarded. The contractor's responsibility shall also include, but not be limited to, the following: 1.4.1 Submit written notification to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer of any deficiencies or discrepancies that would affect the proper or timely installation of the work in this section. 1.4.2

Coordinate and verify dimensions affecting his work by measurement at the job site.

1.4.3 Obtain decisions regarding corrective measures from the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer prior to the refabrication and/or modification of items affected by field conditions which vary with those on the approved shop drawings and/or contract documents. Obtain decisions on those items, which are detrimental to the proper and timely installation. 1.4.4

Insure the compatibility of adjacent items and materials that relate to this work.

1.4.5 Prior to bid, the Contractor and/or supplier shall perform and assume design and engineering per manufacturers specification, of the storefront and/or curtain wall system to define all necessary integral components including but not limited to, anchors, attachments, steel reinforcing, etc to conform with parameters as defined in the drawings {sizes and configurations) and the specifications. 1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.5.1

Qualifications: 1.5.1.1

Welding shall be done by skilled and qualified mechanics licensed where required in accordance with local building regulations. Welding shall be in conformance with AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1-84.

1.5.1.2

Testing Laboratories shall be specifically qualified to conduct the performance test required by these specifications. 1.5.1.2.1 Air infiltration, water penetration, and structural tests shall be conducted by an approved laboratory. 1.5.1.2.2 Performance tests may be conducted in the Suppliers Laboratories provided they are witnessed and certified by an independent professional engineer.

1.5.1.3

1.5.2

Any or all tests may be waived provided test reports prepared by recognized testing agencies or certified by independent professional engineers, are submitted showing that the doors, store fronts, entrances, curtain walls and other components or acceptable facsimile thereof have met or exceeded all performance requirements. Certifications of compliance with a standard by a recognized testing agency is also acceptable in lieu of testing.

Performance and Testing Requirements: All components, assemblies and completed work included in and pertinent to the work of this section shall conform to the following performance standards and comply with the applicable sections of the current California Building Code, California Title 24, codes and regulations of all governing agencies having jurisdiction and

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-63

Part 5

shall be in accordance with published applicable industry standards and these specifications, whichever is more restrictive. 1.5.2.1

Provision for Thermal Movements: Storefront and curtainwall framing systems shall be designed to provide for such expansion and contraction of component materials as will be caused by a surface temperature ranging from... -20 F to 180 F... without causing buckling, stresses on glass, failure of joint seals, undue stress on structural elements, damaging loads on fasteners, reduction of performance, or other detrimental effects. Doors shall function normally over this temperature range.

1.5.2.2

Structural Properties: 1.5.2.2.1 Exterior storefront and curtainwall systems shall be designed to withstand the following minimum wind loads acting normal to the plane of the wall as per the “California Building Code, Current Edition, (CBC)”: 1) 15 psf acting inward and 20 psf acting outward. 1.5.2.2.2 The deflection of any framing member in a direction normal to the plane of the wall when subjected to a uniform load deflection test at design pressures specified above, in accordance with ASTM E330-70 shall not exceed 1/175 of its clear span, up to 13 feet 6 inches and 1/240 + ¼” of its clear span when the span is over 13 feet 6 inches. Maximum fiber stress shall be 1.65. 1.5.2.2.3 Uniform load structural tests shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM E330-70. Inward and outward acting test pressures shall be equal to 1.5 times the inward and outward acting design wind pressures specified. At the conclusion of these tests, there shall be no glass breakage, permanent damage to fasteners or anchors, hardware parts or actuating mechanisms. Main curtain wall framing members shall have no permanent deformation in excess of 0.2% of their clear span. 1.5.2.2.4 Deflection measurements shall be made from gauges located on the vertical mullions, and horizontal members at 1/3 points and 1/2 points of span. 1.5.2.2.5 The deflection of any member in a direction parallel to the plane of the wall when carrying its full dead load shall not exceed an amount which will reduce the glass bite below 75% of the design dimension and the member shall have a 1/8" minimum clearance between itself and the top of the fixed panel, glass, or other fixed part immediately below. The clearance between the member and door shall be at least 1/16".

1.5.2.3

Water Infiltration: 1.5.2.3.1 Water infiltration, in this Specification, is defined as the appearance of water other than condensation on the indoor face of any part of the wall. 1.5.2.3.2 Provision shall be made to drain to the exterior face of the wall any water entering joints and/or condensation occurring within the wall construction. 1.5.2.3.3 Water infiltration shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 331. No water penetration at a test pressure of 10 psf.

1.6

1.5.2.4

Air Leakage: Air leakage through the system shall not exceed 0.06 cfm per square foot of fixed area at a test pressure of 6.24 psf. and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.

1.5.2.5

Other Performance Requirements and Tests: Seismic Racking.

SUBMITTALS: 1.6.1

Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01 33 00.

1.6.2 Shop Drawings: Drawings shall show scale elevations and details shall be at full scale as far as practical. Drawings shall include a hardware schedule where required and shall show construction of all parts of the work, including metal and glass thickness, methods of joining, break metal details, details of all field connections and anchorage, fastening and sealing methods, metal finishes and all pertinent information. Relationship to other work should be clearly indicated. No work shall be fabricated until shop drawings for that work have been finally approved. Show provision for and control of thermal movements at all anchors and splice joints. Size all sealant joints per sealant manufacturer's printed instructions. Include engineered calculations, stamped and signed by a California licensed engineer, assuring the structural properties of the system. 1.6.3 Samples: Before any work is fabricated, the following samples, properly identified, shall be submitted to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer for his approval: 6-inch length of extrusions fully glazed with sealants - framing two sides of glass, and incorporating both interior and exterior finish systems. 1.6.4 Test Reports: Certified copies of test reports on the performance of standard wall systems and components shall be submitted to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer on request in lieu of conducting repeat tests. 1.6.5 Sealant Manufacturer's Acceptance: Letter of acceptance by sealant manufacturer for the use of the product(s) as detailed in the shop drawings shall be submitted to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. 1.6.6 A. Provide a copy of the ENV-1 form showing the thermal performance required for the fenestration products B. Provide evidence of who will be the “responsible party” for certifying the fenestration products.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-64

Part 5

C. Provide documentation to show that all fenestration products can be certified equal to or less than the requirements shown on the ENV-1 form. AAMA test reports and or simulations will not be accepted as they are not allowed under the current code. 1.7

IDENTIFICATION, DELIVERY, AND STORAGE OF MATERIALS: 1.7.1 All components of the system shall be identified after fabrication by marks clearly indicating their location on the building. Packaging, if necessary, shall be the minimum necessary to protect the parts from damage during shipping and hoisting. 1.7.2 Pre-designated storage spaces shall be used so that the stored materials will not be exposed to damage from wetting, traffic or operations of other trades.

1.8

WARRANTY: 1.8.1 This Contractor, at no additional cost, shall warrant for 2 years from the date of Substantial Completion of the work related to the system that the work is not defective in workmanship or materials and conforms to the final, reviewed shop drawings, except for reasonable variances not impairing the usefulness thereof. This warranty applies to both patent and latent defects but does not include damage caused by acts of God, ordinary wear and tear or unusual abuse or neglect or the acts or omissions of parties other than this Contractor. This warranty is in lieu of all other warranties expressed or implied.

1.9

REIMBURSEMENT FOR SPECIAL PROVISIONS: 1.9.1 If variations exceed the tolerances specified, for the building frame, or if variations within permissible tolerances leave insufficient clearance for proper anchorage, necessitating extra fabrication or installation work by this Contractor in order to install the systems in a manner acceptable to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, he may be reimbursed the extra costs involved, provided these costs are determined by the Contractor and approved by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer before installation work in the affecting area is begun.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

METALS: 2.1.1

Extrusions and break metal shall be 6063-T6 alloy and temper (ASTM B 221 alloy G.S. 10A-T5). Fasteners, where exposed, shall be aluminum, stainless steel or plated steel in accordance with ASTM A 164. Perimeter anchors shall be aluminum or steel, providing the steel is properly isolated from the aluminum. Exterior glazing gasket shall be E.P.D.M. and interior glazing seal shall be closed cell P.V.C. foam sealant tape. All mullions and horizontals for 1/4" glazing shall be thermally isolated from the pressure plate by a rigid vinyl separator.

2.1.2

Aluminum Alloys: Standard Alloys shall conform to the requirements published in the Aluminum Association's "Aluminum Standards and Data," and to the following standards: 2.1.2.1

Sheet and plate: ASTM B209-83

2.1.2.2

Extruded bars, rods, shapes and tubes: ASTM B221-84

2.1.2.3

Bars, rods and wire: ASTM B211-73

2.1.2.4

Standard structural shapes: ASTM B308-72

2.1.2.5

Drawn seamless tube: ASTM B210-73

2.1.2.6

Extruded structural shapes: ASTM B429-73

2.1.2.7

Sand castings: ASTM B26-74

2.1.2.8

Permanent mold castings: ASTM B108-73

2.1.2.9

Die castings: ASTM B85-73

2.1.2.10 Welding rods and bare electrodes: AWS A5-10 2.2

FASTENER METALS FOR JOINING VARIOUS METAL COMBINATIONS: 2.2.1

2.3

No exposed view fasteners. 2.2.1.1

Aluminum to Aluminum: Zinc plated steel, concealed.

2.2.1.2

Aluminum to Stainless Steel or Carbon Steel: Zinc plated steel, concealed, or cadmium plated steel, concealed.

2.2.1.3

Stainless Steel Fastener Types, Designation and Standards: 300 or 400 series.

PROTECTIVE MATERIALS FOR METALS: 2.3.1

Painting for carbon steel and high strength steel: zinc chromate Fed. Spec. TT-P-645.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-65

Part 5

2.4

FINISHES: 2.4.1

Aluminum: 2.4.1.1

All exposed framing surfaces, break metal, and accent trim shall be free of scratches and other serious blemishes. Aluminum extrusions shall be given a caustic etch followed by an anodic oxide treatment to obtain a: Dark Bronze anodic coating

2.5

EXTERIOR STOREFRONT/CURTAINWALL SYSTEM: 2.5.1 Exterior storefront system shall be 2” x 4 ½" center glazed system as shown on drawing and per manufacturer standard. Exterior storefront manufacturer shall be responsible for the detailed design and engineering of the system and supply all necessary anchoring devices, door fittings, brackets, break metal, housings, steel reinforcing, end dams, and integral hardware for the proper installation of the entire system. Framing, reinforcing, and anchoring devices shall be structurally adequate to carry the dead load, to resist the wind load and seismic load to comply with the current governing Uniform Building Code and to withstand the normal loads imposed by the operations of the entrance doors. 2.5.2 Entrance doors shall be Standard Aluminum Entrance medium stile door. Doors shall have medium width stiles where specified and/or where full mortise hardware is specified, see Section 08710.Corner construction shall consist of mechanical clip fastening, SIGMA deep penetration and fillet welds. Thickness of doors and side lights shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. Doors shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and with the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer approved shop drawings.

2.6

2.5.3

Integral hardware finish shall match storefront system finish.

2.5.4

The installed exterior storefront system shall meet the applicable performance requirements specified.

FABRICATION: 2.6.1 All parts of the exterior storefront system and break metal shall be of the materials, design, sizes, and thickness, subject to commercial tolerances, shown or called for on the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer reviewed drawings and/or herein specified. Methods of fabrication and assembly, however, unless otherwise specifically stated, shall be at the discretion of the manufacturer. 2.6.2 Joints in Metal Work: All exposed work shall be carefully matched to produce continuity of line and design, with all joints, unless otherwise shown or specified, being accurately fitted and rigidly secured. 2.6.3

Shop Assembly: As far as practicable, all fitting and assembly work shall be done in the shop.

2.6.4 Exposed Fasteners: Exposed fasteners on finished surfaces shall have Phillips Head - countersunk screw heads unless otherwise shown or specified. 2.6.5 Protection of Metals: Protection against galvanic action shall be provided wherever dissimilar metals are in contact. This protection shall be provided either by painting the contact surfaces with zinc rich primer as specified, or by application of an appropriate separator. 2.6.6

Welding: 2.6.6.1

All welding shall be in accordance with recommendations of the American Welding Society and shall be done with electrodes and/or by methods recommended by the suppliers of the metals being welded. Type, size, and spacing of welds shall be as shown on approved shop drawings. All exposed welds shall be ground smooth to match adjacent surfaces.

2.6.6.2

Welds behind finished surfaces shall be so done as to minimize distortion and/or discolorations on the finished side. Weld spatter and welding oxides on finished surfaces shall be removed by descaling and/or grinding.

2.6.6.3

All glass surfaces should be protected from weld spatter. These can produce surface damage, which can materially weaken the glass surface.

2.6.7 Use of Sealing Materials: Sealing materials shall be used in accordance with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material and joints to be sealed shall be in accordance with the designs and tolerances shown on the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer reviewed shop drawings. 2.6.8 Shop or Field Glazing: Glazing work shall be done in accordance with the recommendations of the FGMA Glazing Manual or Glazing Materials Manufacturer. Refer to Section 08 81 00 for related information. Gasket color shall be approved by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer prior to installation. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

LINES AND GRADES: 3.1.1 Curtain walls and Exterior Store Fronts: The Contractor will provide this contractor with a building perimeter offset line located per the drawings. He shall provide bench marks at convenient points immediately adjacent to each entrance. The Contractor shall be responsible for the accuracy of the location of the perimeter lines and the elevation of the bench marks.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-66

Part 5

3.1.2 Correction of Errors: Should any error be found in either location or elevation of the above, this contractor shall so notify the Contractor in writing. Installation work shall not proceed in the affected areas until the errors have been corrected. All removal and reinstallation of work properly installed but out of line or elevation as a result of improperly located reference marks shall be executed by this contractor as authorized extra work. In the event that the above corrective work involves a substantial delay in the installation schedule, such delay shall be handled in accordance with the provisions of the contract documents. 3.2

PRIOR INSPECTION OF THE STRUCTURE: 3.2.1 After lines and grades have been established, and before beginning installation in any assigned area, this contractor shall examine all parts of the structure affecting the installation of his work in that area. Should any conditions be found which, in his opinion, will prevent the proper execution of his work, he shall report such conditions in writing to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer and the Contractor. Installation work shall not proceed in that area until such conditions are corrected or adjusted to the satisfaction of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer and the Contractor.

3.3

INSTALLATION: 3.3.1 Store front and curtainwall system (and break metal trim) shall be erected plumb and true, in proper alignment and relation to established lines and grades in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and as shown on the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer reviewed shop and erection drawings. All joints between framing and building structure shall be sealed in order to secure a watertight installation. 3.3.2 Entrance Doors: Entrance doors shall be securely anchored in place to a straight, plumb and level condition, without distortion, in accordance with the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer reviewed drawings. Weather stripping contact and hardware movement shall be checked and final adjustment made for proper operations and performance of units. 3.3.3 Operable windows to be installed in prepared openings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Windows to be set level, plumb, and securely fastened, using caulking and flashing in accordance with good window installation practices.

3.4

ERECTION TOLERANCES: 3.4.1

Permissible dimensional tolerances in the building frame and other work adjacent to the wall are as follows: 3.4.1.1

Store front/curtainwall shall be designed to accommodate these tolerances, provided irregularities do not exceed them, and clearances shown on approved shop drawings are maintained, all parts of the store front/curtainwall when completed, shall be within the following tolerances: 3.4.1.1.1 Maximum variation from plan or location shown on approved shop drawings: 1/16" per 12 feet of length. 3.4.1.1.2 Maximum offset from true alignment between two identical members abutting end to end in line: 1/16"

3.5

ANCHORAGE: 3.5.1 Anchorage of the wall to the building structure shall be in accordance with the approved shop and erection drawings. Anchors shall meet the requirements of these specifications. After the wall is properly positioned, all connections so designated on Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer reviewed drawings shall be rigidly fixed.

3.6

WELDING: 3.6.1 Welds and adjacent metal areas shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted with primer specified. Special care shall be taken to prevent fires and to protect glass and other finished surfaces from damage by weld splatter. Any damage to adjacent areas due to welding will be borne by this contractor.

3.7

REMOVAL OF DEBRIS: 3.7.1

3.8

All debris by or incidental to the installation work shall be promptly removed from the job site as the work progresses.

PROTECTION AND CLEANING: 3.8.1 This contractor shall remove from the installed work all mastic smears or other unsightly marks caused by his workmen, and shall be responsible for any damage to, or disfigurement of the work caused at any time by his own men. Protection of the work against damage by other trades, as well as any cleaning other than this, shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.

END OF SECTION 08 41 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-67

Part 5

SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1.1.1 The work includes the furnishing, delivery and installing of finish hardware as indicated on drawings and as specified. The Conditions of Contract and Division 1 apply as fully as if repeated herein. 1.1.2

1.2

Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere and is not a part hereof: 1.1.2.1

Rough hardware (structural).

1.1.2.2

Toilet accessories of all kinds including grab bars.

1.1.2.3

Installation.

1.1.2.4

Finish Carpentry (casework/millwork).

1.1.2.5

Stair handrails/guardrails.

SUBMITTALS: 1.2.1

Submittal procedures and quantities are as specified in Section 01 33 00.

1.2.2 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data containing drawings or cuts of all hardware items at same time hardware schedule is submitted. Contractor shall submit sample of hardware finishes integral with storefront system for review by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer prior to purchasing and installation of the hardware. Make submittal in a neat brochure form and include an index list of all items, with manufacturer's names and catalog numbers. Include a list of all manufacturers used and their nearest representative with address and phone number. If proposing a substitute, submit that product data attached to one showing specified item and indicated savings to be made. 1.2.3 Hardware Schedule: Submit six typewritten copies of schedule at earliest possible date prior to ordering of hardware. Do not order hardware for purchase until the schedule has been reviewed by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's review of the schedule shall not be construed as certifying the schedule as being complete. Organize schedule into "Hardware Sets" with an index of doors and heading, indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: 1.2.3.1

Type, style, function, size, quantity and finish of each hardware item.

1.2.3.2

Name, part number and manufacturer of each item.

1.2.3.3

Fastenings and other pertinent information.

1.2.3.4

Location of hardware set cross referenced to indications on drawings both on floor plans and in door schedule.

1.2.3.5

Explanation of all abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.

1.2.3.6

Mounting locations for hardware.

1.2.3.7

Door and frame sizes and materials.

1.2.4 Templates: Where required, furnish hardware templates to each fabricator of doors, frames and other work to be factoryprepared for the installation of hardware. 1.2.5 Keying Schedule: Meet with Owner/Architect/Contractor to develop keying and locking requirements. Submit three copies of separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks and card access has been fulfilled. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.3.1

Qualifications: 1.3.1.1

Obtain each kind of hardware (latch and lock sets, hinges, and closures) from only one manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.

1.3.1.2

Hardware supplier shall be a direct factory contract supplier who has in his employment an experienced hardware consultant for a period of not less than (2) two years in the same area as project and who is available at all reasonable times during the course of the work for project hardware consultation to the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer and Contractor. 1.3.2 Schedule Designations: Except as otherwise indicated, the use of one manufacturer's numeric designation system in schedules does not imply that another manufacturer's products will not be acceptable, unless they are not equal in design, size, weight, finish, function, or other quality of significance. However, do not make substitutions after the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's acceptance of hardware supplier's completed hardware schedule.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-68

Part 5

1.3.3

1.4

Exit Doors: Operable at all times from the inside without the use of a key or any special knowledge or effort.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 1.4.1 Acceptance at Site: Individually package each unit of finish hardware complete with proper fastening and appurtenances, clearly marked on the outside to indicate contents, specific locations in the work, and with reference to the Hardware Schedule. 1.4.2 Deliver packaged hardware items at the times and to the locations (shop or field) for installation, as directed by the Contractor.

1.5

PROJECT CONDITIONS: 1.5.1 Coordination: Coordinate hardware with other work. Furnish hardware items of proper design for use on doors and frames of the thickness, profile, swing, security and similar requirements indicated, as necessary for proper installation and function, regardless of omissions or conflicts in the information on the Contract Documents. 1.5.2 Upon request, check the Shop Drawings for doors and entrances to confirm that adequate provisions will be made for the proper installation of hardware. 1.5.3

1.6

Installation shall conform to local governing agency security ordinance.

WARRANTY: 1.6.1

Provide guarantee from hardware supplier as follows: 1.6.1.1

Closures: Five years, except electronic closures, two years.

1.6.1.2

All other Hardware: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MANUFACTURERS: 2.1.1 Approval of manufacturers other than those listed shall be in accordance with Section 01 25 00. Proposed substitutions shall be made through prior approved method as defined in Section 01 25 00. The decision of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer shall be final. Item Hinges Locks Panics, Exit Devices Closures, Holder Arms Push and Pull Items Miscellaneous Weather-stripping

Manufacturer Stanley, Bommer, Tager, or approved equal Schlage, or approved equal Von Duprin, American Device, or approved equal LCN, Norton, or approved equal Builders Brass, or approved equal H.B. Ives, Door Controls Int., or approved equal Pemko, Reese, or approved equal

2.1.2 Furnish all items of hardware required to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications and the manufacturer's instructions. Items of hardware not specified shall be provided even though inadvertently omitted from this specifications. Items shall be of equal quality and type. 2.1.3 Where the exact types of hardware specified are not adaptable to the finished shape or size of the members requiring hardware, furnish substitute types having as nearly as practicable the same operation and quality as the type specified, subject to Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's approval. 2.2

MATERIALS: 2.2.1 Locksets: All locksets and latchsets shall be as specified. Strikes shall be 16 gage curved steel, to match existing with 2" deep box construction, and have lips of sufficient length to clear trim and protect clothing. 2.2.1.1

Locks shall have minimum 3/4 inch throw. All deadbolts shall have 1 inch minimum throw.

2.2.1.2

Comply with requirements of local security ordinances.

2.2.1.3

Provide approved fusible links at levers for labeled doors.

2.2.1.4

Lock Series and Design: Schlage Mortise Deadbolt

2.2.2 Hinges: Outswinging exterior doors shall have non-removable (NRP) pin. All hinge open widths shall be minimum, but of sufficient size to permit door to swing 180 degrees. Furnish hinges with flush bearings. 2.2.2.1

Furnish 3 hinges per leaf to 7 foot 6 inch height. Add one for each additional 2 foot height.

2.2.2.2

Exterior hinges with prime finish shall have Mont-Hard K base.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-69

Part 5

2.2.3 Floor hinges shall have maximum degree dead stop permitted by trim of adjacent structure. Furnish special pins and longer spindles as may be required. 2.2.4

Panic Hardware: Furnish all sets with hex bolts unless otherwise specified. Lever handle trim shall match locksets.

2.2.5 Kick Plates: Provide with four beveled edges, 10 inches high by width less 2 inches. Furnish with machine or wood screws of bronze or stainless steel to match other hardware. 2.2.6

Seals: All seals shall be as indicated and finished to match adjacent frame color.

2.2.7

Screws: All exposed screws shall be Phillips head.

2.2.8 Silencers: Furnish silencers for interior hollow metal frames, 3 for single doors, 4 for pairs of doors. Omit where sound or light seals occurs, or for fire-resistive rated door assemblies. 2.2.9 Contractor shall provide and install signs under a separate division within these specifications above the main exit doors utilizing indicating type dead bolts which state - "This door to remain unlocked during business hours". See Section 101400. 2.2.10 Key Cards: Provide Continental panel , Thinline II, or ProxPoint card readers or approved equal at exterior doors. 2.3

FINISH: 2.3.1

Generally to match existing.

2.3.2 Spray door closures to match finish hardware, or color of finished doors as indicated by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. The finishes for all hardware shall be subject to the approval of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. 2.4

KEYING REQUIREMENTS: 2.4.1 Keying of cylinder locks shall be coordinated with the Owner at Contractor's request so as not to delay manufacturing of the doors and frames. For estimate use masterkeying charge. Keying system shall be approved by Owner's representative in writing. Furnish construction key system with keys which can be rendered inoperative by the turn of the change key. Stamp all keys "Do Not Duplicate." 2.4.2 For protection of the Owner, all locks and cylinders shall be keyed at the factory of the lock manufacturer where permanent records are maintained. Locks and cylinders shall be of the same manufacturer. 2.4.3

Permanent keys shall be delivered only to Owner's representative, properly tagged and indexed.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

HARDWARE LOCATIONS: 3.1.1

3.2

Hinges: 3.1.1.1

Bottom Hinge: 10 inches from door bottom to bottom of hinge.

3.1.1.2

Top Hinge: 5 inches from door top to top of hinge.

3.1.1.3

Center Hinge: Center between top and bottom hinge.

3.1.1.4

Extra Hinge: Equally spaced where there is more than one intermediate hinge.

3.1.2

Cylinder Deadlock Centered 44 inches above floor.

3.1.3

Door Knobs: Centered 40 5/16 inches above floor.

3.1.4

Door Pulls: 40 inches from bottom of door to center of pull.

3.1.5

Push Plate: 45 inches from bottom of door to center of plate.

3.1.6

Panic: 36-1/4 inches from finished floor to center of pad.

INSTALLATION: Install each hardware item per manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. Do not install surface mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrate. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation.

3.3

ADJUSTING: 3.3.1

Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door, to ensure proper operation or function of every unit.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-70

Part 5

Replace units which cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly. 3.3.2 Inspection: Hardware supplier shall inspect all hardware furnished within 10 days of contractor's request and include with his guarantee a statement that this has been accomplished. Inspector or Contractor will sign off the hardware as being complete and correctly installed and adjusted. Further corrections of defective material shall be the responsibility of his representative. 3.4

GUARANTEE: All hardware shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from filing of Notice of Completion. Defects in material and workmanship occurring during the guarantee period shall be corrected without expense to the Owner.

END OF SECTION 08 71 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-71

Part 5

SECTION 08 81 00 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes the furnishing and installing of all glass work complete, as shown and noted on the drawings and as specified. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

CODES: 1.2.1 Glass and glazing shall conform with the "California Building Code, current edition (CBC)”, Chapter 24 "Glass and Glazing", Consumer Product Safety Commission regulation CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and CAC Title 8, Section 3010(b)(1)). 1.2.2 Contractor shall provide and install tempered glazing per all applicable codes. Locations shown on drawings are for Contractors convenience only and shall not relieve responsibility to provide tempered glazing in all locations required by code.

1.3

REFERENCED STANDARDS: The editions of Federal Specifications and other standards and specifications published by the following organizations, and referenced herein, apply to the work only to the extent specified by the reference.

1.4

1.3.1

American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).

1.3.2

Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA).

SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1

Submittal procedures and quantities are specified in Section 01 33 00.

1.4.2 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data for each type of glazing material specified, including manufacturer's recommendations for setting and sealing materials and installations. 1.4.3 Samples: Submit factory labeled samples of each type of glazing material specified, gaskets and colors of glazing compounds for approval. No glazing material, gaskets, or glazing compounds shall be purchased until all samples have been approved. 1.4.4 1.5

Certificate of Compliance: Certify and label each product to indicate materials meet specified requirements.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 1.5.1 Delivery: Do not deliver glass to the site until the areas to be glazed are ready to receive the glass. Deliver glass in manufacturers storage cases with interleaving between lights. Deliver glazing compound in manufacturer's original cartons with labels intact. 1.5.2 Storage: Store glass in original storage cases. Store cases in a dry, well ventilated area with temperatures maintained above the dew point. Do not store glass where it will be exposed to direct sunlight. 1.5.3 Handling: Do not unpack glass until needed for installation. Handle and install materials in a manner to prevent breakage, scratching or other damage. Keep vacuum cups free from foreign material that would scratch glass.

1.6

JOB CONDITIONS: Do not perform glazing work when the ambient temperature is below 40 degrees F. Provide sufficient ventilation to prevent condensation from forming on surfaces to be glazed. Do not perform glazing during damp or rainy weather.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Note: Where pre-manufactured window units incorporate glazing from window manufacturer, glazing shall be provided under that separate division. 2.1.2 Annealed glass: except tempered glass, shall conform to Fed.Spec. DD-G-451D, of the types, classes and qualities specified below. Unless otherwise noted glazing shall be tinted, color-Evergreen, dual glazed Low ‘E’ as manufactured by Pilkington or approved equal. Maximum U-factor: 0.57; Maximum SHGC: 0.55.

2.1.3

2.1.2.1

Clear Float Glass: shall meet federal spec. DD-G-451D, Type I (float), Class 1 (transparent), quality Q3 (glazing select) 1/4" thick minimum or as required by code.

2.1.2.2

Obscure Float Glass:

NOT USED.

2.1.2.3

Fire Rated Glass:

NOT USED.

Heat Treated Glass: Comply with Fed.Spec. DD-G-1403 and with manufacturing process indicated for the following:

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-72

Part 5

2.1.3.1

Tempered glass shall conform to Fed.Spec. DD-G-1403, Grade B, Style I, Type I, quality q3, Class 2. Provide tempered glass in all openings where required by CSPC 16 CRF 1201, codes and in other areas where shown on the drawings at 1/4" thick minimum or as required by code. Where tinted, glass is to comply with requirements for tinted glass.

2.1.3.2

Tinted glass: Evergreen - See 2.1.2 above

2.1.3.3

Spandrel Glass: NOT USED.

2.1.4 Laminated Glazing: Shall be utilized in controlling sound as indicated on drawings. Glazing panels of 1/8" thickness each, unless otherwise noted or required by code, shall sandwich a plastic sheet of standard mil thickness. 2.1.5

Clips for Metal Surrounds: Respective surround manufacturer's standard (steel-to-steel, aluminum-to-aluminum, etc.).

2.1.6 Sealant for Glazing: General Electric Corp. "1200", Dow-Corning Corp. "999A" or equivalent approved in accordance with Section 01 25 00 or as recommended by glass manufacturer. Installed as per section 07 92 00 of these specifications. 2.1.7 Preformed Sealant Tape: Pecora "Extru-Seal", Tremco "Preshimmed 440 Tape" or equivalent approved in accordance with Section 01 25 00, or as recommended by glass manufacturer. Installed as per section 07 92 00 of these specifications. 2.1.8 Preformed Gaskets: Closed cell sponge neoprene conforming to ASTM C509-70 and dense neoprene wedge gaskets conforming to NAAMM SG-1. Gaskets shall be preformed to shapes and sizes to suit the glazing stops furnished with the doors and windows and to compress the sponge neoprene gasket 25% to 40%. Installed as per section 07 92 00 of these specifications. (Gasket color to be approved by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer prior to installation.) 2.1.9

Fire Rated Glass: NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS: 3.1.1 Manufacturer's labels, showing strength, grade, thickness, type and quality will be required on each piece of glass. Labels must remain on glass until it has been set, inspected and approved. 3.1.2

Sizes indicated on the drawings are approximate. Actual sizes shall be determined by measuring in the field.

3.1.3

Stops or beads for glazed openings will be provided under other sections for use under this section.

3.1.4 Tong marks of tempered plate glass, when glazing, shall occur on the side of the narrow dimension only. When the long dimension of glass panes are vertical the tong marks shall occur at the bottom of the pane. 3.2

GLAZING: 3.2.1 Conform to applicable portions of FGMA "Glazing Manual", latest edition. Check dimensions of openings to be sure that glass thickness is as required for code minimums and adequate clearances are maintained on all four sides at perimeter. Shop cut all glass; cut clean, straight edges, free from chips and fissures. Fixed stops, glass edges, and applied stops shall be cleaned of all dust, dirt, oil or other debris before glazing. Dry all glazing components completely. 3.2.2

3.3

Aluminum Openings: Glaze with preformed gasket as supplied by the aluminum frame manufacturer.

REGLAZING: Existing windows to be re-used, broken windows and other glass areas to be reglazed shall have all glass cleanly removed from rabbets and glass stops. All old glazing compound shall be removed from rabbets and stops, and all surfaces to receive new glazing compound shall be washed clean with solvent. Re-glazing shall conform to the requirements specified under "Glazing" after preparing rabbets and stops as specified above.

3.4

TESTS: All exterior glazing shall be completely watertight, and tests shall be as specified in Section 08 41 00.

3.5

CLEANING AND PROTECTION: 3.5.1 Upon completion of other glazing work and after approval of the glass installation, all glass surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned, and all labels, paint spots and other defacements shall be removed. Contractor shall request walk through with Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer to identify scratched glazing prior to releasing horizontal blind subcontractors for installation. Contractor shall be responsible for all scratched glazing. Glazing to be replaced for unreasonable defects or damage as directed by Architect. Cleaning solution shall not etch or stain frames, painted or finished surfaces, or affect the glazing compound. 3.5.2 Cracked, broken and imperfect glass shall be replaced at no additional cost to the Owner. Protect all glass against damage from weld spatter, stains from alkaline or flourine materials, abrasive materials or other damage until final acceptance of the project. Where it is necessary to alert workmen that openings have been glazed, use tape or banners attached to framing. Do not spray paint or other foreign matter directly on the glass.

END OF SECTION 08 81 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-73

Part 5

SECTION 09 30 00 - TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY: 1.1.1

Section Includes: Provide ceramic tile installations with accessories, as required for complete installation. 1.1.1.1

1.1.2

1.2

1.3

Provide waterproofing and crack isolation membrane integral with tile setting beds.

Related Sections: 1.1.2.1

Section 03 30 00: Cast-in-Place Concrete

1.1.2.2

Section 07 92 00: Sealants

REFERENCES: 1.2.1

ANSI A108.1: Installation of Tile with Portland Cement Mortar.

1.2.2

ANSI A108.02: General Requirements; Materials, Environmental and Workmanship.

1.2.3

ANSI A108.5: Installation of Tile with Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.

1.2.4

ANSI A108.6: Installation of Tile with Chemical Resistant Water Cleanable Tile Setting and Grouting Epoxy.

1.2.5

ANSI A108.10: Installation of Grout in Tilework.

1.2.6

Tile Council of North America (TCNA): Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

SUBMITTALS: 1.3.1

Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of material to be provided for Project.

1.3.2 Certificates: Submit Master Grade Certification for each shipment and type of ceramic tile, signed by manufacturer and installer. 1.3.3

1.4

1.5

Samples: Furnish each type of tile and grout clearly indicating pattern, coloration and joints. 1.3.3.1

Color Charts: Submit actual tile sections showing full range of colors, textures and patterns available for each type of tile.

1.3.3.2

Prepare two 12" square sample panels of each selected type of tile and grout.

PROJECT CONDITIONS: 1.4.1

Provide sufficient heat and ventilation in areas where ceramic tile work is being performed, so as to allow tile to properly set.

1.4.2

Take precautionary measures necessary to ensure excessive temperature changes do not occur.

WARRANTY: 1.5.1 Special Warranty: Provide for correcting failures of waterproofing membrane to resist water penetration, except where failures are result of structural failures of building. Hairline cracking of concrete due to temperature or shrinkage is not considered structural failure. 1.5.1.1

Repair and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.

1.5.1.2

Special Warranty Period: Two years.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Tile: Types as indicated; porcelain tile to comply with ANSI A137.1 Specifications for Ceramic Tile for types and grades of tiles; furnish tile complying with Standard Grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. 2.1.1.1

Color, Style and Pattern: Dal-Tile, Continental Slate CS53 Asian Black or approved equal and conforming to Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer-approved samples.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-74

Part 5

2.1.2

2.1.1.2

Floor Tile: Ceramic Tile Flooring demonstrating a coefficient of friction of at least 0.6 per ASTM C1028 shall be accepted as meeting the intent of slip resistance. CBC Section 1124B.1 / ADA Standards 4.5.1

2.1.1.3

Base and Trim: Provide complete matching trim pieces, coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile as directed by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer; types as indicated, as selected by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer where not indicated. Provide cove base trim for all tile.

Setting And Grouting Materials 2.1.2.1

Chemical-Resistant, Water-Cleanable, Tile-Setting and -Grouting Epoxy: ANSI A118.3, with a VOC content of 65 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CRF 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Epoxy Grout: Mapei Kerapoxy Charcoal 47 or approved equal.

2.1.3 Portland Cement Setting Bed: Portland cement bed conforming to ANSI A108.1 and TCNA Handbook, including separator sheet and reinforcing mesh. 2.1.3.1

Separator Sheet / Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt felt, ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15); or polyethylene sheeting, ASTM D 4397, 4.0 mils (0.1 mm) thick.

2.1.3.2

Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 0.062-inch (1.57-mm) diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.

2.1.4 Latex Thin Set: Thinset bond coat, consisting of latex-cementitious mortar conforming to ANSI A118.4, Latex/PolymerModified Portland Cement Mortar. 2.1.4.1

Manufacturers: 2.1.4.1.1 Laticrete International Inc. 2.1.4.1.2 Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment. 2.1.4.1.3 Custom Building Products. 2.1.4.1.4 Mapei Corp. 2.1.4.1.5 Mer-Kote Products, Inc.

2.1.5 Epoxy Mortar and Grout: Chemical resistant and water cleanable thinset epoxy mortar and grout conforming to ANSI A118.3. Use epoxy grout at all floors. 2.1.5.1

Manufacturers: Same as listed above.

2.1.6 Waterproof Membrane: Manufacturer's standard sheet or liquid rubber polymer, complying with ANSI A118.10, designed specifically for application under tile in non-immersed applications. Select one system from the following. 2.1.6.1

Manufacturers: 2.1.6.1.1 Laticrete International Inc./9235 Waterproof Membrane. 2.1.6.1.2 Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment/Hydroment Ultra-Set. 2.1.6.1.3 The Nobel Company/NobelSeal TS 2.1.6.1.4 Mapei Corp. PRP M19. 2.1.6.1.5 Mer-Kote Products, Inc. /BFP Membrane or Hydro-Guard 2000.

2.1.6.2

Un-reinforced, Fluid-Applied Product: Liquid-latex rubber, with a VOC content of 65 g/L of less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), in a consistency suitable for trowel application and intended for use as waterproofing.

2.1.7 Crack Isolation Membrane: A sheet membrane product specifically manufactured for thin-set installation between concrete slab-on-grade and tile floors, the purpose of which is to protect the tile from cracking should the slab below crack. Liquid-applied products will not be allowed. Use at all ground (slab-on-grade) floors. Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include the following: 2.1.7.1

Strataflex anti-fracture membrane; National Applied Construction Products, Inc.

2.1.7.2

Nobleseal CIS crack isolation sheet - The Noble Company

2.1.7.3

Laticrete 9235 waterproof and anti-fracture membrane - Laticrete, Intl.

2.1.7.4

AFM Anti-Fracture Membrane - Protecto Wrap Co.

2.1.7.5

CrackBuster – Custom Building Products.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-75

Part 5

2.1.8

Cleaning and Sealing Materials: As recommended by tile and grout manufacturers.

2.1.9

Provide other materials, not specifically described but as may be required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and subject to the approval of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. 2.1.9.1

2.2

Do NOT use organic adhesive to set tile.

ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS: 2.2.1 General: Provide manufacturer’s standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Section 079200 “Joint Sealants.” Use mold-resistant silicone type. 2.2.1.1

2.3

VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

MIXES: 2.3.1

Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site-made leveling coats, setting beds and grout as recommended by theTCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.

2.3.2

Mix and proportion pre-mixed setting beds and grout materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION: 3.1.1

3.1.2

Prior to installing tile, ensure surfaces are level. 3.1.1.1

Bed Set Tile Tolerance: Maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10'-0".

3.1.1.2

Thin Set Tile Tolerance: Maximum surface variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".

Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured. 3.1.2.1

Drains: Where indicated, ensure surfaces are properly sloped to drains.

3.1.3 No not commence work until surface conditions are within tolerances required for proper installation; apply latex leveling material where necessary to meet required tolerances. 3.1.4 Waterproof and Crack Isolation Membranes: Install waterproof membrane at tile areas located above grade (second floor), in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; extend membrane minimum 6" up walls.

3.2

3.1.4.1

Comply with waterproof membrane manufacturer recommendations for installation of tile over waterproof/crack isolation membrane.

3.1.4.2

Install crack isolation membrane under all thin-set tile where waterproof membrane is not used.

INSTALLATION: 3.2.1 Install tile in accordance with referenced ANSI Standards, manufacturer’s specifications, and most current TCNA Handbook recommendations for type of substrate and indicated setting method. 3.2.1.1

Bed-Set (Thick set) Floors over Concrete: TCNA F114, with latex-portland cement bond coat. Use epoxy grout at floors. Installation Specification: ANSI A108.1C.

3.2.1.2

Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors with Waterproof Membrane, over a cured mortar bed: TCNA F122.

3.2.1.3

Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors over Crack Isolation Membrane: TCNA F125A – Full Coverage

3.2.1.4

Latex-Cement Thin Set Wall Tile over Glass Mat Gypsum Backer Board: TCNA W245.

3.2.2 Place tile in accordance with patterns indicated on Drawings or as directed by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer; carefully plan tile layouts, ensure pattern is uninterrupted from one surface to the next and through doorways. 3.2.2.1

Apply latex thin set to back of tile where necessary to ensure 100% bond between bond coat and substrate; replace tiles which break due to voids between tile and substrate.

3.2.3 Neatly cut tile around fixtures and drains; accurately form corners, base, intersections and returns. Align floor joints with base and wall joints, unless otherwise detailed.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-76

Part 5

3.2.3.1

Base, Coves: Flush cove type with base grout joint on wall, cove tile on floor, unless otherwise indicated.

3.2.3.2

Corners and Edges: Bullnose tile unless otherwise indicated.

3.2.4 Locate expansion joints, control joints, contraction joints, and isolation joints where indicated; where not indicated, provide as recommended by TCNA Handbook (EJ-171) and as approved by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. Color match the sealant to grout colors 3.2.4.1

Install special trim pieces as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, true to lines and levels indicated and in correct relationship with tile and adjacent materials.

3.2.5 Ensure tile joints are uniform in width subject to normal variance in tolerance allowed in tile size; ensure joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout.

3.3

3.2.6

Sound tile after setting. Remove and replace hollow sounding units.

3.2.7

Allow tile to set for a minimum 48 hours prior to grouting.

3.2.8

Grout tile to comply with recommendations of TCNA and as specified.

3.2.9

Leave completed installation free of broken, damaged and faulty tile.

CLEANING AND PROTECTING: 3.3.1

Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 3.3.1.1

Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible.

3.3.1.2

Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3.3.1.3

Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent it from clogging drains.

3.3.2 When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. 3.3.3

Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

3.3.4

Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces.

END OF SECTION 09 30 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-77

Part 5

SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and General Provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.2

DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.2.1

Extent of painting work is indicated on schedules, and as herein specified.

1.2.2 Work includes painting and finishing of interior and exterior exposed items and surfaces throughout project, except as otherwise indicated. 1.2.2.1

Surface preparation, priming and coats of paint specified are in addition to shop-priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.

1.2.3 Work includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), and of hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under mechanical, electrical work, sealants and caulking, except as otherwise indicated. 1.2.3.1

Upon final completion Contractor shall provide the Owner with properly labeled new sealable containers of mixed paint which were utilized on the project in the following quantities. Two (2) - five (5) gallon containers of each color mix which was applied to a surface area totaling greater than 15,000 s.f. One (1) - one (1) gallon container of each color mix which was applied to a surface area totaling less than 15,000 s.f.

1.2.4 "Paint" as used herein means all coating systems materials, including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, and other applied materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats. 1.2.5 Surfaces to be painted: Except where natural finish of material is specifically noted as a surface not to be painted or where natural finish of material matches adjacent material color, paint exposed surfaces whether or not colors are designated in "schedules". Where items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned, paint the same as similar adjacent materials or areas. Note: Contractor shall paint all sprinkler piping, supply and return mechanical grille registers and/or ductwork, speaker grilles, louvers, etc. to match adjacent wall surfaces even if grilles are pre-finished. Contractor shall paint all electrical light fixture trim in contact with adjacent wall or ceiling surface even if fixture trims are pre-finished. Exact color of paint to be selected by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer in field at time of field samples. If color or finish is not designated, Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will select these from standard colors or finishes available. 1.2.6

1.2.7

Following categories of work are not included as part of field-applied finish work. 1.2.6.1

Pre-Finished Items: Unless otherwise indicated, do not include painting when factory-finishing or installerfinishing is specified for such items as (but not limited to) pre-finished partition systems, acoustic materials, ceramic tile, pre-formed roof and wall panels, elevator entrance doors and frames, elevator equipment, and mechanical and electrical equipment, including switchgear and distribution cabinets.

1.2.6.2

Concealed Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, painting is not required on surfaces such as walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas, foundation spaces, furred areas, pipe spaces, duct shafts and elevator shafts.

1.2.6.3

Finished Metal Surfaces: Unless otherwise indicated, metal surfaces of anodized aluminum, stainless steel, chromium plate, copper, bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting. (Galvanized metal is not a finished metal surface).

1.2.6.4

Operating Parts: Unless otherwise indicated, moving parts of operating units, mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages, sinkages, sensing devices, motor and fan shafts will not require finish painting.

Following categories of work are included under other sections of these specifications. 1.2.7.1

Shop Priming: Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various sections for structural steel, metal fabrications, hollow metal work and similar items. Contractor to coordinate for exposure – that finish coat is compatible with shop prime. Provide certificate of primer specification and paint compatibility. Shop primers are used specifically to avoid flash rusting on the jobsite while waiting to be painted. Where exposure has compromised the shop prime, a “high performance epoxy-based primer” or “inorganic zinc-rich primer” should be used. 1.2.7.1.1 Unless otherwise specified, shop priming of fabricated components such as architectural woodwork, and shop-fabricated or factory-built mechanical and electrical equipment or accessories is included under other sections of these specifications. Contractor to coordinate for exposure – that finish coat is compatible with shop prime. Shop primers are used specifically to avoid flash rusting on the jobsite while waiting to be painted. Where exposure has compromised the shop prime, a “high performance epoxy-based primer” or “inorganic zinc-

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-78

Part 5

rich primer” should be used. 1.2.7.2

Painting to separate dissimilar metals are specified under other sections.

1.2.8 Do not paint over any code-required labels, such as Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual, or any equipment identification, performance rating, name, or nomenclature plates. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.3.1 Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers and other undercoat paint produced by same manufacturer as finish coats. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer, and use only within recommended limits. 1.3.2 Coordination of Work: Review other sections of these specifications in which prime paints are to be provided to ensure compatibility of total coatings system for various substrates. Upon request from other trades, furnish information or characteristics of finish materials provided for use, to ensure compatible prime coats are used.

1.4

SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application instructions for each material proposed for use. 1.4.2 Samples: Prior to beginning work, Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted. Use representative colors when preparing samples for review. Submit samples for Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer's review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of material and application for each coat of each finish sample. 1.4.2.1

On 12" x 12" hardboard provide three samples of each color and material, with texture to simulate actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer until acceptable sheen, color, and texture is achieved.

1.4.2.2

On actual wood surfaces, provide two 4" x 8" samples of natural, painted, and stained wood finish. Label and identify each as to location and application. Allow for maximum 3 different brushouts of each color.

1.4.2.3

On actual wall surfaces and other exterior and interior building components, duplicate painted finishes of prepared samples. Provide full-coat finish samples on at least 100 sq. ft. of surface, as directed, until required sheen, color, cover and texture is obtained. Allow for maximum 3 different brushouts of each color. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of in-place work. 1.4.2.3.1 Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job.

1.5

DELIVERY AND STORAGE: 1.5.1 Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and following information: Name or title of material. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacturer. Manufacturer's name. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents. Thinning instructions. Application instructions. Color name and number. 1.5.2 Store materials not in actual use in tightly covered containers. Maintain containers used in storage of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1.5.2.1

1.5.3

Protect from freezing and excessive heat where necessary. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take all precautions to ensure that workmen and work areas are adequately protected from fire hazards and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing and application of paints.

Job Conditions: 1.5.3.1

Apply water-base paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 degrees F. (10 degrees C.) and 90 degrees F. (32 degrees C.), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

1.5.3.2

Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 degrees F. (7 degrees C.) and 95 degrees F. (35 degrees C.), unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

1.5.3.3

Do not apply paint in high winds, rain, fog, or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85%, or to damp or wet surfaces, unless otherwise permitted by paint manufacturer's printed instructions.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-79

Part 5

1.5.3.3.1 Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas and surfaces to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by paint manufacturer during application and drying periods. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 2.1.1

Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

Dunn-Edwards Corporation (Dunn-Edwards) Frazee Paint and Wall Coverings (Frazee) Sherwin Williams (SW) Or approved equal 2.2

MATERIALS: 2.2.1 Material Quality: Provide best quality grade of various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by acceptable paint materials manufacturers. Materials not displaying manufacturer's identification as a standard, best-grade product will not be acceptable. 2.2.2 VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC limits of the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), or authorities having jurisdiction. 2.2.3 Proprietary names used to designate colors or materials are not intended to imply that products of named manufacturers are required to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. 2.2.3.1

Color Pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION: 3.1.1 Applicator must examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Applicator to produce the results called for herein. 3.1.2

Starting of painting work will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within any particular area.

3.1.3 Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, welding slag and burrs, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions otherwise detrimental to formation and adhesive bond of a durable paint film. 3.2

SURFACE PREPARATION: 3.2.1 General: Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions and as herein specified, for each particular substrate condition. 3.2.1.1

Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime as required. Notify Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer in writing of any anticipated problems in using the specified coating systems with substrates primed by others.

3.2.1.2

Remove hardware, hardware accessories, machined surfaces, plates, lighting fixtures, and similar items in place and not to be finish-painted or provide surface-applied protection prior to surface preparation and painting operations. Remove, if necessary, for complete painting of items and adjacent surfaces. Following completion of painting of each space or area, reinstall removed items.

3.2.1.3

Clean surfaces to be painted before applying paint or surface treatments. Fill cracks, holes and imperfections. Remove oil and grease prior to mechanical cleaning. Remove mill scale and welding slag, grind welding joints and burrs smooth. Program cleaning and painting so that contaminants from cleaning process will not fall onto wet, newly-painted surfaces.

3.2.1.4

Remove mildew from exterior impervious surfaces by scrubbing with a solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Power wash with a minimum of 3500psi clean water and allow substrate to dry.

3.2.2 Cementitious Materials: Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, cement plaster and cement-asbestos board to be painted by removing efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils and by roughening as required to remove glaze. 3.2.2.1

Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of finish paint, correct this condition before application of paint. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's printed directions.

3.2.2.2

Clean concrete floor surfaces scheduled to be painted with a commercial etching cleaner. Flush floor with clean water to neutralize acid, and allow to dry before painting.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-80

Part 5

3.2.3 Wood: Clean wood surfaces to be painted of dirt, oil or other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sandpaper smooth those finished surfaces exposed to view, and dust off. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer, before application of priming coat. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood-filler. Sandpaper smooth when dried. 3.2.3.1

Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery to job. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of such wood, including cabinets, counters, cases, paneling.

3.2.3.2

When transparent finish is required, use spar varnish for backpriming.

3.2.3.3

Seal tops, bottoms and cut-outs of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or equivalent sealer immediately upon delivery to job or immediately after machining by Contractor on site.

3.2.4 Ferrous Metals: Clean ferrous surfaces, which are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning. 3.2.4.1

Repaint shop-applied prime coats as required by other sections of these specifications. Clean and paint with same type or compatible primer.

3.2.5 Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants with non-petroleum based solvent, per SSPC-SP1. Apply a test coat of primer and allow the coating to dry for one week. In the presence of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, perform an adhesion test per ASTM D-3359 before proceeding with painting. If coating does not adhere per test method, hand tool clean all galvanized or non-ferrous metal per SSPC-SP2. Apply a test coat of primer and test for adhesion per ASTM D-3359 in the presence of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. 3.3

MATERIALS PREPARATION: 3.3.1

Mix and prepare painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.

3.3.2

Maintain containers used in mixing and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.

3.3.3 Stir materials before application to produce a mixture of uniform density, and stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. Remove film and, if necessary, strain material before using. 3.4

APPLICATION: 3.4.1 General: Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 3.4.1.1

Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes as selected by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. For the purposes of bidding, the Contractor shall assume that a minimum of 4 trips will be required for brush-outs as required per 1.4.2.2 and 1.4.2.3

3.4.1.2

Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime paints used. Where a deep color finish color is chosen, primer must be tinted to the appropriate monochromatic gray tone for a two coat coverage. Provide the monochromatic primer only on the walls to receive the deep chromatic color.

3.4.1.3

Apply additional coats when undercoats, stains or other conditions show through final coat of paint, until paint film is of uniform finish, color and appearance. Give special attention to insure that surfaces, including edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces.

3.4.1.4

Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Paint surfaces behind permanently-fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only before final installation of equipment.

3.4.1.5

Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a flat, non-specular black paint.

3.4.1.6

Paint back sides of access panels, and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.

3.4.1.7

Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as exterior faces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4.1.8

Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.

3.4.1.9

Repaint first coat (primer) on metal surfaces which have been shop-primed and touch-up painted, unless otherwise indicated.

3.4.2 Scheduling Painting: Apply first-coat material to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 3.4.2.1

As recommended by coating manufacturer, allow sufficient time between successive coatings to permit proper drying. Do not recoat until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and application of another coat of paint does not cause lifting or loss of adhesion of the undercoat.

3.4.3 Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by coating manufacturer.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-81

Part 5

3.4.4 Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to those items exposed in mechanical equipment rooms and in occupied spaces. 3.4.5 Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: Grilles, registers, louvers, trim (to match adjacent surface), Sprinkler Piping, Piping, pipe hangers and supports, Heat exchangers, Tanks, Ductwork, insulation, Motor, mechanical equipment and supports, Accessory items. 3.4.6 Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: Light fixtures - see fixture schedule for types (including trim rings, pendants, and plates/boxes), Conduit and fittings, Switchgear. 3.4.7 Prime Coats: Apply prime coat of material which is required to be painted or finished, and which has not been prime coated by others. See 1.2.7.1 for additional information. 3.4.7.1

Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to assure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing.

3.4.8 Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover to produce an opaque, smooth surface of uniform finish, color, appearance and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. 3.4.9 Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. Provide satin finish for final coats, unless otherwise indicated. 3.4.10 Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage. Remove, refinish or repaint work not in compliance with specified requirements at a time suitable to the project schedule and at Contractor's expense and at no cost to the Owner. The requirements of this specification are to produce work of excellent quality in complete conformance with the best practice of the trade and these specifications. 3.5

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 3.5.1 The right is reserved by Owner to invoke the following material testing procedure at any time, and any number of times during period of field painting: 3.5.1.1 3.5.1.2

Engage services of an independent testing laboratory to sample paint being used. Samples of materials delivered to project site will be taken, identified and sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. Testing laboratory will perform appropriate tests for any or all of following characteristics: Abrasion resistance, apparent reflectivity, flexibility, washability, absorption, accelerated weathering, dry opacity, accelerated yellowness, recoating, skinning, color retention, alkali resistance and quantitative materials analysis.

3.5.2 If test results show that material being used does not comply with specified requirements, Contractor may be directed to stop painting work, and remove non-complying paint; pay for testing; repaint surfaces coated with rejected paint; remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, upon repainting with specified paint, the two coatings are non-compatible. 3.6

CLEAN UP AND PROTECTION: 3.6.1 day.

Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove from site discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans and rags at end of each work

3.6.2 Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting and finishing work. Immediately remove paint that falls on finished surfaces not scheduled to be painted, using materials and techniques that will not damage the affected surface. Correct any damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting as acceptable to Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

3.7

3.6.2.1

Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-painted finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of painting operations.

3.6.2.2

At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore all damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE: 3.7.1

General: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. 3.7.1.1

Galvanized/Aluminum Metal: Provide pretreatment of surface as required per Section 3.2. 3.7.1.1.1 High Performance Gloss Finish: This section covers metals which are subjected to frequent use/abuse, including all: Trellises, Exposed Structural Metal, Bollards, Handrails, Guardrails, Metal Screens or Grids, Fencing, Gates, Trash enclosure gates and hardware, etc. Epoxy Prime Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams:

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

Carboline Rustbond Ameron Amerlock 2 VOC Macropoxy 646 B58 Series

5-82

Part 5

Or approved equal

Second Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

Carbothane 134MC, Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Ameron Amershield VOC (gloss) High Solids Polyurethane Gloss B65 Series

Third Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

Carbothane 134MC, Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Ameron Amershield VOC (gloss) High Solids Polyurethane Gloss B65 Series

3.7.1.1.2 Acrylic Gloss Finish: This section covers metals which are not subjected to frequent use/abuse, including all: Parapet caps, Flashings, Covers, Reglet reveals, Gutters/Downspouts (when not prefinished) and miscellaneous metal. Pre-Treatment: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

ME01 Metal Clean & Etch PCI 02150 Metal Conditioner GLL Clean n Etch

Prime Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

GAPR00 Galv-Alum 561 Acrylic Metal Primer ProCryl Universal Primer B66-310

Second Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

EVSH 60 Evershield Gloss 143 Mirro Glide GL Solo Acrylic Gloss A77 Series

Third Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

EVSH 60 Enershield Gloss 143 Mirro Glide GL Solo Acrylic Gloss A77 Series

3.7.1.2 Ferrous Metal: Provide pretreatment of surface as required per Section 3.2. For shop primed material, provide certificate of primer specification and what compatibility for the following coats 3.7.1.2.1 High Performance Gloss Finish: This section covers metals which are subjected to frequent use/abuse, including all: Trellises, Exposed Structural Metal, Bollards, Handrails, Guardrails, Metal Screens or Grids, Fencing, Gates, Trash enclosure gates and hardware, etc. Epoxy Prime Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

Carboline Rustbond Ameron Amerlock 2 VOC Macropoxy 646 B58 Series

Second Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

Carbothane 134MC, Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Ameron Amershield VOC (gloss) High Solids Polyurethane Gloss B65 Series

Third Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

Carbothane 134MC, Aliphatic Acrylic Polyurethane Ameron Amershield VOC (gloss) High Solids Polyurethane Gloss B65 Series

3.7.1.2.2 Acrylic Gloss Finish: This section covers metals which are not subjected to frequent use/abuse, including all: Parapet caps, Flashings, Covers, Reglet reveals, Gutters/Downspouts (when not prefinished) and miscellaneous metal. Pre-Treatment:

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-83

Part 5

Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

3.7.1.3

Jasco Prep N’Prime PCI 02150 Metal Conditioner GLL Clean n Etch

Prime Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

WSPR00 Syn-Lustro Premium 561 Acrylic Metal Primer ProCryl Universal Primer B66-310

Second Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

EVSH 60 Evershield Gloss 143 Mirro Glide GL Solo Acrylic Gloss A77 Series

Third Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

EVSH 60 Enershield Gloss 143 Mirro Glide GL Solo Acrylic Gloss A77 Series

Painted Woodwork: 3.7.1.3 1 Gloss Finish: 3 coats. Prime Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

EZPRO E-Z Prime 168 Prime Plus PrepRite ProBlock Primer B518020

Second and Third Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

EVSH 60 Evershield 143 Mirro Glide Interior/Exterior 100% Acrylic Gloss Solo Acrylic Gloss A77 Series

3.7.1.3.2 Heavy Bodies Stain: 3 coats Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

Acrylic-Acri-Flat W704 Exterior Wood Stain 203 Duratec Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat Acrylux CK6800 100% Acrylic Flat

3.7.1.3.3 Semi-transparent Finish: 3 coats Dunn-Edwards: Okon Weatherpro WP3 Frazee: Monopole Aquaseal II Sherwin Williams: Woodscapes S/T Stain A15T5 Or approved equal 3.7.1.4

Exposed Glu-Lam Beams: (See Section 06 18 00 for sandblasting requirement) 3.7.1.4.1 Semi-Transparent Finish: 3 coats. Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

3.7.1.5

Okon Weatherpro (Acrylic) WP3 Monopole Aquaseal II Woodscapes S/T Stain A15T5

CMU: 3.7.1.5.1 Flat Finish: 3 Coats Block Filler: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal Primer: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

W315 Concrete Block Filler 262 Acrylic Block Filler PrepRite Block Filler B25W25

ESPR00 Eff-Stop 266 Epotilt Interior/Exterior Acrylic-Epoxy Concrete Sealer Epoxy Tilt Up Primer B42WW49

5-84

Part 5

Second and Third Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

EVSH 10 Flat Evershield 203 Duratec Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat A100 100% Acrylic Flat A6 Series

3.7.1.5.2 Clear Sealer: None. 3.7.1.6

Cement Plaster/Concrete: 3.7.1.6.1 Flat Finish Primer: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal Second and Third Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

3.7.1.7

Second and Third Coat:: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

Alkali Resistant Primer ESPR00 Eff Stop 266 Epotilt Interior/Exterior Acrylic-Epoxy Concrete Sealer Epoxy Tilt Up Primer B42WW49

EVSW 30 Evershield 215 Royal Supreme Exterior 100% Acrylic Low Luster A-100 Satin A82

Gypsum Soffit Board: 3.7.1.8.1 Low Lustre Prime Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal Second and Third Coat:: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

3.8

EVSH 10 Flat Evershield 203 Duratec Exterior 100% Acrylic Flat A100 100% Acrylic Flat A6 Series

Fiber Cement Siding: 3.7.1.7.1 Low Lustre Prime Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

3.7.1.8

ESPR00 Eff-Stop 266 Epotilt Interior/Exterior Acrylic-Epoxy Concrete Sealer Epoxy Tilt Up Primer B42WW49

ESPR00 Eff Stop 266 Epotilt Interior/Exterior Acrylic-Epoxy Concrete Sealer PrepRite ProBlock Primer B51W8020

EVSH 30 Evershield 215 Royal Supreme Exterior 100% Acrylic Low Luster A-100 Satin A82

INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE: 3.8.1

General: Provide the following premium Low-Odor/Zero VOC paint systems for the various substrates, as indicated. 3.8.1.1

Gypsum Drywall Systems: Below is 3-coat flat finish. 3.8.1.1.1 Flat Finish: Prime Coat: Interior vinyl acrylic base primer coat. Dunn-Edwards: enso00 Low Odor/Zero VOC Primer Frazee: 066 Envirokote Low Odor Zero VOC Primer Sherwin Williams: Harmony Low Odor Zero VOC Primer B11W900 Or approved equal Second and Third Coat: Interior flat latex base paint. Dunn-Edwards: enso10 Flat Low Odor/Zero VOC Frazee: 018 Envirokote Low Odor Zero VOC Flat Sherwin Williams: Harmony Low Odor Zero VOC Flat B5W751 Or approved equal

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-85

Part 5

3.8.1.1.2 Egg Shell Finish: Acrylic Enamel Finish; 3 coats with total dry film thickness less than 3.6 mils. Prime Coat: Interior latex base primer coat. Dunn-Edwards: enso00 Low Odor/Zero VOC Primer Frazee: 066 Envirokote Low Odor Zero VOC Primer Sherwin Williams: Harmony Low Odor Zero VOC Primer B11W900 Or approved equal Second and Third Coat: Interior Acrylic Egg Shell Enamel Dunn-Edwards: enso30 Low Odor/Zero VOC Frazee: 029 Envirokote Low Odor Zero VOC Eggshell Sherwin Williams: Harmony Low Odor Zero VOC Eg-shel B9W751 Or approved equal 3.8.1.1.3 Semi-Gloss Finish: Acrylic Finish, 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 4.0 mils. Prime Coat: Interior latex base primer coat. Dunn-Edwards: enso00 Low Odor/Zero VOC Primer Frazee: 066 Envirokote Low Odor Zero VOC Primer Sherwin Williams: Harmony Low Odor Zero VOC Primer B11W900 Or approved equal Second and Third Coat: Interior Acrylic Semi Gloss Enamel Dunn-Edwards: enso50 Low Odor/Zero VOC Frazee: 032 Envirokote Low Odor Zero VOC Semi-Gloss Sherwin Williams: Harmony Low Odor Zero VOC Semigloss B10 Series Or approved equal 3.8.1.1.4 Epoxy Gloss Finish: 3 coats with total dry film thickness not less than 4.0 mils. Prime Coat: Interior Epoxy base primer coat. Dunn-Edwards: Rustoleum Sierra Griptec S-30 Frazee: Rustoleum Sierra Griptec S-30 Sherwin Williams: Harmony Low Odor Zero VOC Primer B11W900 Or approved equal Second and Third Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal 3.8.1.2

Rustoleum Sierra Epoxy Acrylic Enamel S-50 gloss Zero VOC Rustoleum Sierra Epoxy Acrylic Enamel S-50 gloss Zero VOC ProIndustrial 0 VOC WB Catalyzed Epoxy B73-300

Ferrous Metal: Provide pretreatment of surface as required. 3.8.1.2.1 Non-blocking Semi-gloss acrylic finish: Prime Coat: Dunn-Edwards: BRPR-00 Block Rust in red or white as appropriate Frazee: 561 Acrylic Metal Primer Sherwin Williams: ProCryl Universal Primer B66-310 Or approved equal Second and Third Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

3.8.1.3

SPMA-50 Suprema 124 Mirro Glide SG Interior/Exterior 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Solo Acrylic Semi-gloss A76 Series

Painted Woodwork: 3.8.1.3.1 Non-blocking Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel Finish: 3 coats. Prime Coat: Interior undercoat Dunn-Edwards: IKPR-00 Inter-Kote Premium Frazee: 168 Prime Plus Sherwin Williams: PrepRite ProBlock Primer B51W20 Or approved equal Second and Third Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

SPMA50 Semi Suprema 124 Mirro Glide SG Interior/Exterior 100% Acrylic Semi-Gloss Solo Acrylic Semi-gloss A76 Series

5-86

Part 5

3.8.1.4

Stained Woodwork: 3.8.1.4.1 Stained, Lacquer Eggshell Finish: 3 finish coats over stain plus filler on open grain wood. Stain Coat: Waterborne Interior stain Dunn-Edwards: Stainseal V-QYB and V-QYR series Frazee: ZAR Ultra Max Wood Stain Sherwin Williams: Wood Classics A49 Series Or approved equal Second Coat: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

Contractor’s Edge Clear Sanding Sealer ZAR Ultra Max Interior Polyurethane Sherwood Lacquer Sanding Sealer T60FH27

Third and Fourth Coats: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

Contractor’s Edge Production Clear 20 sheen Satin ZAR Ultra Max Interior Polyurethane Sherwood Low VOC Lacquer Satin T75FH109

3.8.1.4.2 Exposed Glu-Lam, Semi-Transparent Finish: 3 coats (Note: For sandblasting see Section 06 18 00) Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal 3.8.1.5

Stainseal V-QYB and V-QYR Series ZAR Ultra Max Wood Stain Wood Classics A49 Series

CMU: 3.8.1.5.1 Eggshell Enamel Finish: 3 coats Block Filler: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

SBPR00 Smooth Blocfil 262 Acrylic Block Filler PrepRite Block Filler B25W25

Primer: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

ACRI-Loc W6232 Acrylic Masonry /Sealer 266 Epotilt Interior/Exterior Acrylic-Epoxy Concrete Sealer Epoxy Tilt Up Primer B42WW49

Second and Third Coat: Dunn Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

enso30 Low Odor/Zero VOC 029 Envirokote Low Odor Zero VOC Eggshell Harmony Low Odor Zero VOC Eg-shel B9W751

3.8.1.5.2 Clear Sealer: None. 3.8.1.6

Cement Plaster/Concrete: 3.8.1.6.1 Eggshell Enamel Finish: 3 coats Primer: Dunn-Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

ACRI-Loc W6232 Acrylic Masonry /Sealer 266 Epotilt Interior/Exterior Acrylic-Epoxy Concrete Sealer Epoxy Tilt Up Primer B42WW49

Second and Third Coat: Dunn Edwards: Frazee: Sherwin Williams: Or approved equal

enso30 Low Odor/Zero VOC 029 Envirokote Low Odor Zero VOC Eggshell Harmony Low Odor Zero VOC Eg-shel B9W751

3.8.1.6.2 Clear Sealer: None. END OF SECTION 09 91 00 Reviewed: Dunn-Edwards June 2010 Judi Lewis, Frazee June 2010 Michael Burke, Sherwin Williams July 2012 John Dumesnil

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-87

Part 5

SECTION 10 14 00 - SIGNAGE PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work specified herein includes labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to furnish and install the exterior address numbers on each building and interior door and wall signs as listed below. See drawings for sizes and location(s) of the exterior signs.

1.2

SUBSTITUTIONS: In accordance with Section 01 25 00.

1.3

SUBMITTALS: 1.3.1

Submit shop drawings showing each sign in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

1.3.2

Submit one 5x5 mock-up sign for approval prior to fabrication and purchasing of all the materials.

1.3.3

For exterior pin-set lettering, provide printed mock-up for field review and approval to assure lettering/spacing will fit in desired location(s).

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS FOR SIGNS: 2.1.1

Exterior Signage: 2.1.1.1

Cast metal lettering in brushed aluminum. Letter style shall be Optima as manufactured by Gemini Incorporated or approved equal. Mounting: Projected spacer, Offset: ½” Quantity (1)

2.1.1.2

(2) (1)

Type “ACCESSIBLE” with Braille and handicapped symbol, Size: 6x8 “ACCESSIBLE” with Braille, arrow and handicapped symbol, Size: 6x8

Stencil on main entrance storefront doors. Letter style shall be Optima as manufactured by Gemini Incorporated or approved equal. Quantity (1)

2.1.2

“440” Project Address Numbers, Size: 8” tall by ¾” deep

Plaques shall be solid cast Aluminum (tactile as noted) as manufactured by Pacific Bronze & ADA Signs or approved equal. Plaque background color shall be the natural metal finish sealed and the raised lettering and pictoral symbols shall be black. Quantity

2.1.1.3

Type

Type “SHERIFF'S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING, Size: 3” tall

Interior Signage (Tactile as noted): 2.1.2.1

Substrate: Black, 1/4” Matt Acrylic. All face edges to be eased and all corners to have 1/8" radius.

2.1.2.2

Face: Plastic Laminate. Match existing building signage.

2.1.2.3

Raised Lettering / Pictoral Symbols 1/32” Appliqué: Manufacturer: Rowmark or approved equal, Product: ADA Alternate, Color: Match existing building signage.

2.1.2.4

Raised Lettering Height: 5/8", Font: Sans Serif and Braille

2.1.2.5

Braille: Contracted (Grade II) Braille domed or rounded raised a minimum of 1/40”

2.1.2.6

Attach signs to wall with 3M VBH Heavy Duty (double sided) mounting tape.

2.1.2.7

Quantity and Size Schedule. *See plans for Type of sign Type* E H

Quantity (2) (1)

Wall/Door Signs “EXIT” Signs with Braille “DEFENSE TRAINING ROOM, MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY 196”

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION:

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-88

Part 5

3.1.1 Mount in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions (double stick tape and silicone). Provide Shop Drawings of all signs prior to manufacture and installation. Install all signage in locations approved by the local agency, code sections and reviewed/approved by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. END OF SECTION 10 14 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-89

Part 5

SECTION 10 44 13 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1.1 The work includes furnishing and installing portable fire extinguishers, cabinets and accessories as indicated on drawings and as specified. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.2.1 Coordination: indicated.

Verify that fire extinguisher cabinets are sized to accommodate fire extinguishers of type and capacity

1.2.2 UL-Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type, rating and classification of extinguisher indicated. 1.3

SUBMITTALS: 1.3.1

Submittal procedures and quantities are specified in Section 01 33 00.

1.3.2 Product Data: Submit product data for each type of product included in this section. For fire extinguisher cabinets include roughing-in dimensions and details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style and door construction and panel style and materials. For initial selection of colors and finishes, submit manufacturer's color cards showing full range of standard colors available. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: Potter-Roemer, Inc. or approved equal. 2.1.2

2.1.3

Fire Extinguishers: 2.1.2.1

General: Provide fire extinguishers for each extinguisher cabinet and other locations indicated, in colors and finishes selected by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's standard which comply with requirements of governing authorities. Abbreviations indicated below to identify extinguisher types relate to UL classification and rating system and not necessarily to type and amount of extinguishing material contained in extinguisher.

2.1.2.2

Multi-Purpose Dry Chemical Type: Provide one for each cabinet, UL-rated 5 lb. minimum nominal capacity in enameled steel container, for Class A, Class B and Class C fires per City Fire Department requirements.

Semi-recessed Fire Extinguisher Cabinets shall be 5 ¾ inch deep 70-42 (Alum.) -F-VR (Alta Series) as manufactured by Potter-Roemer, Inc. or approved equal. OR DVL - 4 (door with glass, break-rite handle, and lock)

2.1.4

2.1.3.1

General: Provide fire extinguisher cabinets where indicated, of suitable size for housing fire extinguishers of types and capacities indicated.

2.1.3.2

Construction: Manufacturer's standard enameled steel box, with trim, frame, door and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld all joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

2.1.3.3

Cabinet Type shall be cabinet box (tub) fully recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated.

2.1.3.4

Trim Style: Fabricate trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded and ground smooth. Exposed trim shall be one-piece square-edge combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return of 1/4" to 5/16" at outer edge (back-bend).

2.1.3.5

Door Material and Construction: Doors shall be aluminum panel silk screen "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red.

2.1.3.6

Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide concealed or continuous type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees.

Factory Finishing of Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: 2.1.4.1

General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for finish designations and application recommendations except as otherwise indicated. Apply finishes in factory after products are assembled. Protect cabinets with plastic or paper covering, prior to shipment.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-90

Part 5

2.1.4.2

Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, grease, and loose rust or mill scale.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION: 3.1.1 Install items included in this section in locations and at mounting heights indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.

3.2

3.1.1.1

Prepare recesses in walls for fire extinguisher cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions.

3.1.1.2

Securely fasten mounting brackets and fire extinguisher cabinets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions.

IDENTIFICATION: Identify existence of fire extinguisher in cabinet with lettering spelling "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door by silk screen. Provide lettering to comply with requirements indicated for letter style, color, size, spacing and location as selected by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer from manufacturer's standard arrangements.

END OF SECTION 10 44 13

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-91

Part 5

SECTION 11 66 23 – FLOOR MATS AND WALL PADS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.2

DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.2.1

This Section describes the requirements for furnishing and installing floor mats and wall pads.

1.2.2 Materials and fabrication procedures are subject to inspection and tests in shop. Promptly remove and replace materials or fabricated which do not comply. 1.2.3 Design of Members and layout: Details are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. Notify Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer whenever design and connections are in conflict with other materials. 1.2

SUBMITTALS: 1.2.1 Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings prepared under the supervision of a manufacturers representative, including complete details and schedules for layout and assembly of mats and pads, procedures and diagrams/connections. 1.2.1.1

Test Reports: Furnish copies of test reports conducted. Include data on types of tests conducted and test results.

1..2.1.2

Samples: Submit three (3) 12” x 12” sample of each type of mat and pad proposed for use on the project.

Provide the items identified under this section 1.2 for review/approval by the Owner prior to awarding the contract to a particular manufacturer/supplier. 1.3

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.3.1

1.4

1.5

Provide copy of manufacturers written warranty for each product.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING: 1.4.1

Deliver materials to site at intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of the work.

1.4.2

Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. 1.4.2.1

Keep materials off ground, using pallets, platforms, or other supports.

1.4.2.2

Protect packaged materials from deterioration.

1.4.2.3

Do not store materials in a manner to cause distortion or damage to members or supporting structures.

PRE-INSTALLATION MEETING: 1.5.1 Prior to commencing the work of this section, the contractor shall schedule and attend a meeting at the job site to discuss conformance with requirements of the Contractor Documents. Request attendance of representatives from Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, Contractor, subcontractors and other parties who are involved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.2

MATERIALS: 2.2.1 Floor Mats: Grappling Mats (40mm x 1m x 2m) as manufactured by Zebra Mats (1.800.939.8085), or approved equal, Sheriff's Standard. Color to be selected from manufacturers standard. 2.2.2 Wall Pads: (2" x 48" x 24") To be provided by same manufacturer or approved equal as the grappling mats. Pads to be covered with 18 oz. vinyl with ½” plywood backing, and 1” lip top and bottom for mounting. Provide aluminum channel accessory for mounting wall pads per manufactures recommendations. Color to be selected from manufacturers standard. 2.2.3 Column Pads (custom size and shape for building columns): To be provided by same manufacturer or approved equal as the wall pads. Pads to be custom shaped for metal building columns and install/mounted per manufacturers recommendations and to provide continuous padded surface with adjacent wall pads.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSTALLATION: 3.1.1

3.2

Install wall and column pads per manufacturers written recommendations.

CLEAN UP: 3.2.1

Remove any miscellaneous pieces and products from the job site and dispose of properly.

END OF SECTION 11 66 23

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-92

Part 5

SECTION 12 21 16 - VERTICAL BLINDS AND SHADES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS & DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes the furnishing, delivery and installing of horizontal blinds as indicated on drawings and as specified. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.2.1 Provide complete assemblies produced by one manufacturer including hardware, accessory items, mounting brackets and fastenings. 1.2.2 Installer shall be a firm experienced in the proper installation of venetian blind systems and approved by the manufacturer. Installer shall submit a list of three completed projects of similar magnitude and complexity.

1.3

SUBMITTALS: 1.3.1

Submittal procedures and quantities are as specified in Section 01 33 00.

1.3.2 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions and installation drawings not fully detailed in product data.

1.4

1.3.3

Samples: Furnish small size operating unit.

1.3.4

Colors: Submit manufacturer's color for selection by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

FIRE RESISTANCE: 1.4.1 Cellular shade assembly shall be rated as a NFPA Class A interior finish, having a flame spread of 0-25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84 test procedures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Accordia Cellular Shades, Standard Skylight: Color: Designer Textures Room Darkening, to be selected from manufacturers standard manufactured by Levolor Corp. or approved equal. Provide samples and product literature for approval. 2.1.2

2.2

Skylight Pole: Include pole for operation of skylight shade.

FABRICATION: Field verify dimensions before unit fabrication. Fabricate units to completely fill window wall openings as indicated, from head to sill and unit ends to occur only over mullions or other defined vertical separations, unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

INSPECTION: Prior to the start of installation, verify that all interior finish work that have an effect on vertical blind installation have been completed.

3.2

INSTALLATION: Install units to comply with manufacturer's instructions for type of mountings and operations required. Install units plumb and true, securely anchored in place with recommended hardware and accessories to provide smooth, easy operation. Replace any damaged vanes. Contractor shall install blinds only on square portion of window. Radius portion shall not have blinds.

3.3

CLEAN UP & PROTECTION: Clean up any debris generated from blinds installation. Protect blind from damage until acceptance of the building by the owners. Walk site and building with Architect prior to installing blinds to identify any damaged glazing prior to installing blinds.

END OF SECTION 12 21 16

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-93

Part 5

SECTION 13 34 19 – PREFABRICATED METAL BUILDINGS: STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 - GENERAL Manufacturer to provide a traditional pre-engineered framing system consisting of purlins, girts and rigid frames - double slope, without interior columns (Bay spacings up to 30 feet.) Pre-engineered Metal Building to be provided by Anthem Steel (1-800-840-2979), American Steel Buildings (1-800-511-3670), Butler Manufacturing Company (559-651-5300), or General Steel (1-800-406-5126) or approved equal. Manufacturer shall provide certification that all steel/components of the pre-engineered building is steel fabricated in the United States. 1.1

The design of the structural system shall be a clear or multi-span rigid frame with tapered or straight columns and roof beams, with a gable or single slope roof.

1.2

Actual building length shall be structural line to structural line and shall be the same as nominal–i.e., the number of bays times length of bays. Structural line is defined as the inside face of the wall sheets.

1.3

Actual building width shall be structural line to structural line and shall be the nominal building width.

1.4

The roof shall have a minimum slope of 1” in 12”.

1.5

All components and parts of the structural system shall be as indicated on the manufacturer shop drawings and/or specifications. 1.5.1 All components and parts shall be clearly marked and erection drawings shall be supplied for identification and assembly of the parts. 1.5.2

All drawings shall carry the stamp of a registered professional engineer.

1.6

Field modification of parts shall be in accordance with the best standard procedures, require the approval of the manufacturer, and be the responsibility of the building erector. No field modifications shall be made on the truss purlins unless specified on the erection drawings.

1.7

Foundations: 1.7.1 Foundations including anchor bolt embedment length shall be adequately designed by a competent engineer, retained by other than the building manufacturer, in accordance with the best recommended practices for the specific soil conditions of the building site. 1.7.1.1 1.7.2

1.8

All reactions for the proper design of foundations shall be supplied by the Building Manufacturer.

Anchor bolt diameter shall be as specified by the Building Manufacturer’s anchor bolt layout drawings. 1.7.2.1

Anchor bolts shall be supplied by the contractor, not the Building Manufacturer.

1.7.2.2

All anchor bolts on moment resisting column bases shall have nuts above and below the base plate.

1.7.2.3

Fixed column bases shall be grouted flush with floor line after structural steel erection is complete.

Building shall be produced in a manufacturing facility that is certified by the American Institute of Steel Construction - Category MB.

PART 2 - STRUCTURAL STEEL DESIGN 2.1

All structural mill sections or welded-up plate sections shall be designed in accordance with the 2005 edition of AISC "Specifications for Structural Steel Buildings”, and all cold-formed steel structural members shall be designed in accordance with the 2004 edition of AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members”.

2.2

The structural system shall be designed in accordance with the specified building code – CBC current Edition. (Refer to Design Loads and Building Codes).

PART 3 - PRIMARY FRAMING 3.1

RIGID FRAMES: 3.1.1 Frames shall consist of welded-up plate section columns and roof beams complete with necessary splice plates for bolted field assembly. 3.1.1.1 3.1.1.2

3.1.2 3.2

All base plates, cap plates, compression splice plates and stiffener plates shall be factory welded into place and have the connection holes shop fabricated. Columns and roof beams shall be fabricated complete with holes in webs and flanges for the attachment of secondary structural members and bracing except for fieldwork as noted on manufacturer's erection drawings.

All bolts for field assembly of frame members shall be ASTM A325 high strength bolts as indicated on erection drawings.

ENDWALL STRUCTURALS: 3.2.1 The endwall structurals shall be cold-formed channel members designed in accordance with the 2004 AISI Specification or welded-up plate sections designed in accordance with the 2005 AISC Specification.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-94

Part 5

3.2.2

Endwall frames shall consist of endwall corner posts, endwall roof beams and endwall posts as required by design criteria. 3.2.2.1

3.2.2.2

3.2.3

All splice plates and base clips shall be shop fabricated complete with bolt connection holes. All base plates, cap plates, compression splice plates and stiffener plates shall be factory welded into place and have the connection holes shop fabricated. Beams and posts shall be shop fabricated complete with holes for the attachment of secondary structural members except for field work as noted on manufacturer's erection drawings.

Intermediate frames shall be substituted for end-wall roof beams when specified. 3.2.3.1

Necessary endwall posts and holes for connection to the intermediate frame used in the endwall shall be shop fabricated.

PART 4 - SECONDARY STRUCTURAL MEMBERS 4.1

PURLINS: 4.1.1 Purlins shall be "Z" shaped, precision roll formed acrylic coated galvanized steel in different gauges to meet the specified loading conditions.

4.2

4.1.2

Purlins shall be 8" or 9-1/2 " deep "Z" sections.

4.1.3

Outer flange of purlins shall contain factory punched holes for panel connections.

EAVE MEMBERS: 4.2.1 Eave Struts shall be factory punched 8", 9-1/2", or 11" deep "C" sections precision roll formed acrylic coated galvanized steel in different gauges to meet the specified loading conditions.

4.3

GIRTS: 4.3.1 Girts shall be "Z" shaped, precision roll formed acrylic coated galvanized steel in different gauges to meet the specified loading conditions.

4.4

4.3.2

Girts shall be 8" or 9-1/2" deep "Z" sections.

4.3.3

Outer flange of all girts shall contain factory-punched holes for panel connections.

BRACING: 4.4.1

Bracing shall be located as indicated on drawings.

4.4.2 Diagonal bracing shall be hot-rolled rod of size indicated on drawings, and attached to columns and roof beams as shown on the drawings. 4.4.3

Optional fixed base wind posts or pinned base portal frames may be substituted for wall rod bracing on buildings as required.

4.4.4

Flange braces, purlin braces, etc., when required, shall be cold-formed and installed as indicated on drawings.

PART 5 - WELDING 5.1

Welding procedure, operator qualifications and welding quality standards shall be in accordance with the American Welding Society D1.1-2006 - Structural Welding Code – Steel and AWS D1.3-1998 - Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel. Inspection other than visual inspection as defined by AWS D1.1 paragraph 6.9, shall be identified and negotiated prior to bidding.

5.2

Certification of welder qualification shall be supplied when requested.

PART 6 - STRUCTURAL PAINTING 6.1

GENERAL: 6.1.1 All structural steel shall be prime painted as temporary protection against ordinary atmospheric conditions. Subsequent finish painting, if required, shall be performed in the field by others. 6.1.2 Prior to painting, all steel shall be cleaned of loose rust, loose mill scale, dirt and other foreign material. Unless otherwise specified the fabricator shall not be required to sand-blast, flame clean or pickle prior to painting.

6.2

PRIMARY FRAMES: 6.2.1

Clean all steel per SSPC-SP2.

6.2.2 Factory cover all steel with one coat of gray water reducible alkyd primer paint formulated to equal or exceed the performance requirements of Federal Specification TT-P-636D, TT-P-664C and SSPC Paint-25 to a minimum coating thickness of 1.0 mil.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-95

Part 5

6.3

SECONDARY STRUCTURALS - ROLL-FORMED: 6.3.1

Clean all steel per SSPC-SP8 or SSPC-SP6.

6.3.2 Material shall have a hot dipped zinc coating per ASTM A653 G-30 specification followed by one coat of clear acrylic finish. The acrylic coated galvanized steel will equal or exceed the performance requirements of Federal Specification TT-P-66-4D and SSPC Paint-25. END OF SECTION 13 34 29

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-96

Part 5

SECTION 13 34 20 PREENGINEERED METAL BUILDING: ROOF SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL Manufacturer to provide a field assembled composite standing seam roof system consisting of a 24” wide metal exterior weather panel, polyisocyanurate foam insulation board, vapor retarder and interior metal liner panel. Manufacturer shall provide certification that all steel/components of the pre-engineered building is steel fabricated in the United States. 1.1

The roof shall be covered with the composite standing seam roof system as furnished by the manufacturer and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.

1.2

All components and parts of the structural system shall be as indicated on the manufacturer shop drawings and/or specifications. 1.2.1 All components and parts shall be clearly marked and erection drawings shall be supplied for identification and assembly of the parts. 1.2.2

All drawings shall carry the stamp of a registered professional engineer.

1.3

Field modification of parts shall be in accordance with the best standard procedures, require the approval of the manufacturer, and be the responsibility of the building erector. No field modifications shall be made on the truss purlins unless specified on the erection drawings.

1.4

Building shall be produced in a manufacturing facility that is certified by the American Institute of Steel Construction - Category MB.

PART 2 COMPONENTS DESCRIPTION 2.1

ROOF PANELS: 2.1.1 Roof panels shall be factory roll-formed manufacturers standard Structural Standing Seam panels: 24" wide, with 2 major corrugations, 2" high (2-3/4" including seam) 24" on center. The flat of the panel shall contain cross flutes 6" on center perpendicular to the major corrugations the entire length of the panel to reduce wind noise and improve walkability. 2.1.2 Variable Width Panels: For roof lengths not evenly divisible by the 2’-0” panel width, factory manufactured variable width (9”, 12”, 15”, 18” and 21” wide) panels shall be used to insure a modular, weathertight roof installation. Variable with panels shall be at least 15’ long and supplied in maximum possible panel lengths 2.1.3 24 gage galvanized (G-90 coating), per ASTM specification A 653 (G90), and painted with a full strength, 70% Kynar® 500 or Hylar 5000® fluoropolymer coating. Manufacturer shall warrant that coating shall not peel, crack or chip for 25 years/manufacturers suggested warranty. For a period of 25 years chalking shall not exceed ASTM D4214 #8 rating and will not fade more than 5 color difference units per ASTM D2244. 2.1.4 Panels of maximum possible lengths shall be used to minimize end laps, eave panels shall extend beyond the structural line of the sidewall. 2.1.5 Panels shall be factory punched at panel end to match factory-punched holes in the eave structural member. Panel end splices shall be factory punched and factory notched. Panel end laps shall be located directly over, but not fastened to, a supporting secondary roof structural member and be staggered, so as to avoid a four panel lap splice condition. End laps shall be floating which allows the roof panels to expand and contract with roof panel temperature changes. 2.1.6 Ridge assembly shall be designed to allow roof panels to move lengthwise with expansion/contraction as the roof panel temperature changes. Parts shall be factory punched for correct field assembly. Panel closures and interior reinforcing straps shall be installed to seal the panel ends at the ridge. The attachment fasteners shall not be exposed on the weather side. A lock seam plug shall be used to seal the lock seam portion of the panel. A hi-tensile steel ridge cover shall span from panel closure to panel closure and flex as the roof system expands and contracts.

2.2

INSULATION BOARD: 2.2.1 Insulation board shall be rigid Thermax Metal Building Board glass fiber-reinforced polyisocyanurate foam plastic core, 4' wide, 3” thick R25 and covered with embossed aluminum facing both sides - Metal Building Board.

2.3

VAPOR RETARDER: 2.3.1 Vapor retarder shall be (WMP-50) a .0015" minimum thick UV stabilized white polypropylene laminated to 30# Kraft paper / metallized polyester and reinforced with fiberglass & polyester scrim (perm rating 0.02).

2.4

LINER PANEL: 2.4.1

Interior liner panel shall be formed from 0.015" (minimum thickness) coated steel with minimum yield strength of 80,000 psi.

2.4.2 Painted panels shall be G60 Galvanized steel conforming to ASTM Specification A 653 (G60) and 0.1 mil primer and 0.4 mil (minimum) white polyester paint on exposed side and 0.3 mil (minimum) non-color-controlled wash coat on unexposed side. 2.4.3 Panels shall be nominal 36" wide with corrugations 9/16" high, 2-9/16" on center. Panels shall be factory cut to lengths required.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-97

Part 5

PART 3 - SYSTEM DESIGN 3.1

All components of the Composite Standing Seam roof paneling system shall be designed in accordance with sound engineering methods and practices.

3.2

Standing Seam roof panels and liner panels shall be designed in accordance with the 2004 edition of the AISI “North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members”.

3.3

Paneling system shall be designed to support design live, snow and wind loads.

3.4

All endwall trim and roof transition flashings shall allow the roof panel to move relative to the wall panels and/or the parapets as the roof expands and contracts with temperature changes.

3.5

Neither the liner panel nor the Standing Seam roof panel shall be considered to be a safe work platform until completely secured to the structural system. Therefore, walkboards or other safety equipment as required by safety standards shall be provided by the erecting contractor to provide worker safety during panel installation.

PART 4 - SYSTEM INSTALLATION 4.1

Liner panels and insulation board shall be positioned and aligned by installing the starting panels against the endwall trim clips and the sidewall eave structural.

4.2

Liner panels shall be placed with edges up and corrugations perpendicular to secondary structurals and end laps shall always occur over secondary structurals.

4.3

Liner panels are attached to roof secondary structural members with self-drilling screws according to the manufacturer's drawings and design requirements.

4.4

Vapor retarder shall be installed over the liner panel with 6" minimum side laps and end laps.

4.5

All roof panel clips and bearing plates shall be positioned by matching the hole in the clip with the factory punched or field drilled holes in the secondary structural members.

4.6

All standing seam panels shall be positioned and properly aligned by matching the factory punched holes in the panel end with the factory punched holes in the eave structural member and by aligning the panel with the panel clip.

4.7

Roof panel side laps shall be field-seamed by a self-propelled and portable electrical lock-seaming machine. The machine field forms the final 180 degrees of a 360-degree Pittsburgh double-lock standing seam; all side laps sealant shall be factory applied.

4.8

Roof panel end laps, when required, shall be at least 6", sealed with Butyl sealants and fastened together by clamping plates. Sealants shall contain hard nylon beads, which prevent mastic from flowing out due to clamping actions. The panel laps shall be joined by means of a two-piece clamped connection consisting of a bottom reinforcing plate and a top panel strap. The panel end laps shall be located directly over, but not fastened to, a supporting secondary roof structural member and be staggered, so as to avoid a four panel lap splice condition.

PART 5 - FASTENERS 5.1

Insulation board, bearing plates, and panel clips shall be fastened to structural members with fasteners as per manufacturer's erection drawings, using factory punched or field drilled holes in structural members. Fasteners shall contain a metal backed rubber washer, which serves as a torque indicator.

5.2

All connections of the standing seam roof panels to structural members, except at eave, shall be made with clips with movable stainless steel tabs that are seamed into the standing seam side lap.

5.3

Fasteners penetrating the metal membrane at the following locations do not exceed the frequency listed: Basic Panel System Exterior Eave Gutter Gable Trim (no parapet) Ridge

5.4

manufacturers recommendations per S.F. manufacturers recommendations per L.F. manufacturers recommendations per L.F 1 per l.f.

High Eave (no parapet) Panel Splices Hi side Transition

2/ LF 2/ LF 1/ LF

In lieu of factory punched secondaries and panels, field drilling of the structural members is mandatory in order to maintain proper alignment of the roof system.

PART 6 - ACCESSORIES 6.1

Accessories (i.e., ventilators, skylights, gutter, fascia) shall be supplied by the Building Manufacturer, unless otherwise noted and furnished as specified.

6.2

The metal coating on all gutters, downspouts, gable trim and eave trim to be a full strength, 70% Kynar® 500 or Hylar 5000® fluoropolymer coating.

6.3

Location of standard accessories shall be as shown on erection drawings as furnished by the Building Manufacturer.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-98

Part 5

6.4

Material used in flashing and transition parts and furnished as standard by the Building Manufacturer may or may not match the roof panel material. Parts shall be compatible and shall not cause a corrosive condition. Copper and lead materials shall not be used with Galvalume® or optional aluminum coated panels.

PART 7 - PERFORMANCE TESTING 7.1

Underwriters Laboratories - U.L. Class 90 rating - The roof system shall carry a U.L. wind uplift classification Class 90 as determined according to UL 580 Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies to ensure structural integrity and possible reduction of insurance rates.

7.2

ASTM E 1592 – The roof system shall be tested according to ASTME 1592 Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Sheet Metal Roof and Siding Systems by Uniform Static Air pressure Difference.

7.3

U.S. Army Corps of Engineers – The roof system has been tested in accordance with the Unified Facilities Guide Specification Section 07 61 13.

7.4

FM Global (Factory Mutual) - The roof system has been tested according to FMRC Standard 4471 and approved as a Class 1 Panel Roof. The Building manufacturer shall provide specific assemblies to meet the required Wind Rating per FM Global. Installation modifications or substitutions can invalidate the FM Global approval.

PART 8 - PROVISION FOR EXPANSION/CONTRACTION 8.1

Provision for thermal expansion movement of the roof panels shall be accomplished by the use of clips with a movable tab. The stainless steel tabs shall be factory centered on the roof clip when installed to assure full movement in either direction. A force of no more than 8 pounds will be required to initiate tab movement. Each clip shall accommodate a minimum of 1.25" movement in either direction.

8.2

The roof shall provide for thermal expansion/contraction without detrimental effect on the roof panel when there is a ±100°F. temperature difference between the interior structural framework of the building and the temperature of the roof panels .

PART 9 - THERMAL PERFORMANCE 9.1

The "R" value through the composite section shall be 25 with 3" insulation board.

PART 10 - PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 10.1

For conditions conditions of high interior humidity UV stabilized white polypropylene-film (WMP-50) vapor retarder with a water vapor permeance (perm) rating of 0.02 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-96. Workability temperature 20° F. minimum.

10.2

Vapor retarder shall have a U.L. fire hazard classification (U.L. 723) with the following ratings:

Flame Spread Smoke Development

WMP-VR 10 10

WMP-50 5 30

10.3

Insulation board facing shall have a water vapor permeance (perm) rating of 0.03 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-96.

10.4

Insulation board shall carry a Class I Factory Mutual Approval and a U.L. Fire Hazard Classification (U.L. 723) with the following ratings: Flame Spread

25 or less

Smoke Development

Less than 90 for 3/4” insulation Less than 200 for 1 3/4” insulation

END OF SECTION 13 34 20

®

Galvalume is a registered trademark of BIEC International, Inc. ® Fluropon is a registered trademark of The Valspar Corporation. ® Kynar 500 is a registered trademark of Arkema. ® Hylar 5000 is a trademark of Solvay Solexis.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-99

Part 5

SECTION 13 34 21 PRE ENGINEERED METAL BUILDING – WALL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL Manufacturer shall provide certification that all steel/components of the pre-engineered building is steel fabricated in the United States. Manufacturer to provide 42” wide factory insulated with shallow architectural ribs wall panel system with concealed fasteners. 1.1.

Exterior wall panels shall be foam insulated sandwich panels as furnished by the manufacturer and installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1.2.

All components and parts of the structural system shall be as indicated on the manufacturer shop drawings and/or specifications 1.2.1 All components and parts shall be clearly marked and erection drawings shall be supplied for identification and assembly of the parts. 1.2.2

All drawings shall carry the stamp of a registered professional engineer.

1.3

Field modification of parts shall be in accordance with the best standard procedures, require the approval of the manufacturer, and be the responsibility of the building erector. No field modifications shall be made on the truss purlins unless specified on the erection drawings.

1.4

Building shall be produced in a manufacturing facility that is certified by the American Institute of Steel Construction - Category MB.

PART 2 - PANEL DESCRIPTION 2.1

The panels shall be steel faced, shop assembled, factory foamed, insulated panel units. The panels shall have tongue and groove, side joint design and fasteners concealed within the side joint.

2.2

The panels shall have a nominal covering width of 42” and a nominal thickness of 2".

2.3

The exterior face shall have shallow architectural ribs on nominal 8-1/2” centers and have a embossed finish. The interior face shall be roll-formed from galvanized steel with a non-directional embossed surface and 1/16” deep by 1-1/2” wide corrugations on 6” centers.

2.4

Panels shall be one piece from base to top of wall with a maximum panel length of 30 feet.

PART 3 - PANEL DESIGN 3.1

The panel design shall be in accordance with sound engineering methods and practices.

PART 4 - PANEL MATERIAL AND FINISH 4.1

Panel material for the exterior face shall be ASTM A 653, Grade 40, 24 gage or 22 gage steel with zinc coating Designation (G90).

4.2

Panel material for the interior face shall be ASTM A 653, Grade 40, 26 gage steel with zinc coating Designation (G90).

4.3

The core shall be poured-in-place polyurethane foam with a minimum 93% closed cell structure.

4.4

The panel finish shall be as follows: 4.4.1 Exterior finish shall be a full strength, 70% Kynar® 500 or Hylar 5000® fluoropolymer coating in Manufacturer’s standard colors. Manufacturer warrants that coating shall not peel, crack or chip for 25 years. For a period of 25 years chalking shall not exceed ASTM D4214 #8 rating and will not fade more than 5 color difference units per ASTM D2244. Color to be selected by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer from Manufacture’s standard color. 4.4.2

Interior finish shall be painted in a polyester or acrylic color coat suitable for field painting.

PART 5 - PHYSICAL PROPERTIES 5.1

The “R Value through the panel shall be no less than 17.

5.2

The insulated panels shall carry the following listings: 5.2.1

Factory Mutual's Class 1 Rating for wall and ceiling construction FM 4880.

5.2.2

Guide NYWR, Insulated Wall Construction Subject 1040.

5.5.3

Surface burning characteristics–The panel core (6" unfaced) was tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. Flame Spread 25 Smoke Developed 450

PART 6 - PANEL APPLICATION

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-100

Part 5

6.1

Structural system (girts) for wall panel application shall be plumb, level, and aligned as shown on the erection drawings. Any variation of intermediate girts, within tolerance, must be in an outward direction.

6.2

Panels shall be sealed with a concealed, factory applied butyl sealant at the side laps and between the building structurals and panel interior face at the ends of the panel.

6.3

All exterior trim shall be smooth finish and match the exterior color of the wall panel system except the following: 6.3.1 All gutters, downspouts, eave trim, gable trim, door side flashings and header flashings to be galvanized factory painted steel with a full strength, 70% Kynar® 500 or Hylar 5000® fluoropolymer coating. 6.3.2 The Base angle shall be galvanized steel, factory painted to match panel color. Base cap shall be extruded aluminum factory painted panel color. 6.3.3 Doors (6070 wide style) shall be of aluminum extrusions (dual glaze) with bronze anodized finish and (3070) hollow metal door and frame ready for priming and field painting. 6.3.4

Horizontal panel joint trim shall be extruded aluminum factory painted to match panel exterior face color.

6.3.5

All interior trim shall be painted.

6.3.6

All flashings, trims, closures and similar items shall be as defined on drawings as supplied by the manufacturer of the panel.

PART 7 - FASTENERS 7.1

All base, top and girt connections and panel joint clip attachments shall be made with #14 self-drilling screws.

7.2

No panel-to-panel fasteners are required. All connections are hidden eliminating exposed fasteners.

PART 8 - ACCESSORIES 8.1

Accessories as specified (i.e., doors, windows, etc.) shall be designed to fit the wall panel system or its framed openings and furnished as standard by the Building Manufacturer, unless otherwise noted.

8.2

Factory locations of standard accessories shall be as shown on erection drawings as furnished by the Building Manufacturer.

END OF SECTION 13 34 21

®

Fluropon is a registered trademark of The Valspar Corporation. ® Kynar 500 is a registered trademark of Arkema. ® Hylar 5000 is a trademark of Solvay Solexis.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-101

Part 5

SECTION 23 05 00 – GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SUMMARY: 1.1.1

1.1.2

Includes But Not Limited To: 1.1.1.1

General requirements and procedures for mechanical systems.

1.1.1.2

Responsibility for proper operation of electrically powered equipment furnished under this Division.

1.1.1.3

Interface with Testing And Balancing Agency.

1.1.1.4

Furnish and install sealants relating to installation of systems installed under this Division.

1.1.1.5

Furnish and install Firestop Penetration Systems for mechanical system penetrations as described in Contract Documents.

Products Supplied But Not Installed Under This Section: 1.1.2.1

1.1.3

1.2

Sleeves, inserts, supports and equipment for mechanical systems installed under other Sections.

Related Sections: 1.1.3.1

Section 07 92 00 - Quality of sealants used at building exterior

1.1.3.2

Section 07 92 00 - Quality of acoustical sealants

1.1.3.3

Sections Under 09 91 00 Heading - Painting of mechanical items requiring field painting

1.1.3.4

Division 16 - Raceway and conduit, unless specified otherwise, line voltage wiring, outlets, and disconnect switches

1.1.3.5

Slots and openings through floors, walls, ceilings and roofs provided under other Divisions in their respective materials.

SUBMITTALS: 1.2.1

Product Data: 1.2.1.1

Manufacturer's catalog data for each manufactured item. 1.2.1.1.1 Provide section in submittal for each type of item of equipment. Include Manufacturer's catalog data of each manufactured item and enough information to show compliance with Contract Document requirements. Literature shall show capacities and size of equipment used and be marked indicating each specific item with applicable data underlined. 1.2.1.1.2 Include name, address, and phone number of each supplier.

1.2.2

Shop Drawings: 1.2.2.1

Schematic control diagrams for each separate fan system, heating and air conditioning system, etc. Each diagram shall show locations of all control and operational components and devices. Mark correct operating settings for each control device on these diagrams. 1.2.2.2 Diagram for electrical control system showing wiring of related electrical control items such as firestats, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays. Include drawings showing electrical power requirements and connection locations.

1.2.3

Closeout: 1.2.3.1

Operation And Maintenance Manual Data 1.2.3.1.1 Modify and add to requirements of Section 017700 as follows 1)

At beginning of MECHANICAL section of Operations And Maintenance Manual, provide master index showing items included.

2)

Provide name, address, and phone number of Architect, Architect's Mechanical Engineer, General Contractor, and Mechanical Contractors.

3)

Provide operating instructions to include a)

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

General description of each plumbing and mechanical system.

5-102

Part 5

4)

1.3

1.3.2

c)

Provide diagrams for electrical control system showing wiring of items such as smoke detectors, fuses, interlocks, electrical switches, and relays.

Identify maintenance instructions by using same equipment identification used in Contract Drawings. Maintenance instructions shall include a)

List of mechanical equipment used indicating name, model, serial number, and name plate data of each item together with number and name associated with each system item.

b)

Manufacturer's maintenance instructions for each piece of mechanical equipment installed in Project. Instructions shall include name of vendor, installation instructions, parts numbers and lists, operation instructions of equipment, and maintenance and lubrication instructions.

c)

Summary list of mechanical equipment requiring lubrication showing name of equipment, location, and type and frequency of lubrication.

d)

Manual for thermostat published by its manufacturer.

e)

Include copies of manufacturer warranties.

Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: 1.3.1.1

Perform work in accordance with applicable provisions of local Mechanical Code, Plumbing Code, Gas Ordinances and adoptions thereof. Provide materials and labor necessary to comply with rules, regulations, and ordinances.

1.3.1.2

In case of differences between building codes, state laws, local ordinances, utility company regulations, and Contract Documents, the most stringent shall govern. Promptly notify Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer in writing of such differences.

Identification: 1.3.2.1

Motor and equipment name plates as well as applicable UL and AGA labels shall be in place when Project is turned over to Owner.

1.3.2.2

Materials shall bear Manufacturer's name and trade name. Equipment and materials of same general type shall be of same make throughout work to provide uniform appearance, operation, and maintenance.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 1.4.1

1.4.2 1.5

Step by step procedure to follow in putting each piece of mechanical equipment into operation.

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.3.1

1.4

b)

Storage: 1.4.1.1

In addition to requirements specified in Division 01, stored material shall be readily accessible for inspection by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer until installed.

1.4.1.2

Store items subject to moisture damage, such as controls, in dry, heated spaces.

Handling - Protect bearings during installation. Thoroughly grease steel shafts to prevent corrosion.

WARRANTY: 1.5.1 Guarantee heating and cooling systems to be free from noise in operation that may develop from failure to construct system in accordance with Contract Documents. 1.5.2 Provide certificates of warranty for each piece of equipment made out in favor of Owner. Clearly record 'start-up' date of each piece of equipment on certificate. 1.5.3 If mechanical sub-contractor with offices located more than 150 miles from Project site is used, provide service / warranty work agreement for warranty period with local mechanical sub-contractor approved by Architect. Include copy of service / warranty agreement in warranty section of Operation And Maintenance Manual.

1.6

SYSTEM START-UP: 1.6.1

Off-Season Start-up: 1.6.1.1

If Substantial Completion inspection occurs during heating season, schedule spring start-up of cooling systems. If inspection occurs during cooling season, schedule autumn start-up for heating systems.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-103

Part 5

1.6.2

1.6.1.2

Notify Owner seven days minimum before scheduled start-up.

1.6.1.3

Time will be allowed to completely service, test, check, and off-season start systems. During allowed time, train Owner's representatives in operation and maintenance of system.

1.6.1.4

At end of off-season start-up, furnish Owner with letter confirming that above work has been satisfactorily completed.

Preparations that are to be completed before start up and operation include, but are not limited to, following: 1.6.2.1

Dry out electric motors and other equipment to develop and properly maintain constant insulation resistance.

1.6.2.2

Make adjustments to insure that 1.6.2.2.1 Equipment alignments and clearances are adjusted to allowable tolerances. 1.6.2.2.2 Nuts and bolts and other types of anchors and fasteners are properly and securely fastened. 1.6.2.2.3 Packed, gasketed, and other types of joints are properly made up and are tight and free from leakage. 1.6.2.2.4 Miscellaneous alignings, tightenings, and adjustings are completed so systems are tight and free from leakage and equipment performs as intended.

1.6.2.3

Motors and accessories are completely operable.

1.6.2.4

Inspect and test electrical circuitry, connections, and voltages to be properly connected and free from shorts.

1.6.2.5

Adjust drives for proper alignment and tension.

1.6.2.6

Make certain filters in equipment for moving air are new and of specified type.

1.6.2.7

Properly lubricate and run-in bearings in accordance with Manufacturer's directions and recommendations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS : 2.1

The mechanical system shall consist of two split-system heat pumps, manufactured by Trane or approved equal. The heat pumps shall be 5-ton nominal capacity, with a minimum SEER rating of 14.0 and a minimum HSPF rating of 8.5. The system shall utilize R410A refrigerant. 2.1.1 Each heat pump outdoor unit shall be equipped with a 2-stage scroll compressor, an air-cooled coil constructed of aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes, and a direct drive propeller type condenser fan, discharging air upward. They shall also include back-seating service valves, high pressure and loss of charge switches, an internal pressure relief valve, an internal thermal overload, and a suction line accumulator. A seven-day programmable electronic thermostat, designed specifically for use with the heat pumps shall be provided. Control wiring shall be 24 volt. 2.1.2 There shall be a 10-year limited warranty on the compressor and a 5-year limited warranty on the remainder of the heat pump parts. The heat pumps shall operate with 208 volt, single or three phase power. The minimum circuit ampacity for three phase units shall not exceed 28 amps. 2.1.3 Each heat pump is to be mounted on a leveled concrete pad with a 3/4-inch rubber isolator pad under each corner. At two opposite corners, provide a 28 gage sheet metal seismic strap, screwed to the heat pump with two number 10 tec screws and anchor pinned to the pad. Maintain all clearances around the heat pump as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.1.4 The fan coil units shall be equipped with an electronically commutated motor (ECM) and be capable of delivering 2000 cubic feet per minute (CFM) of supply air at 0.4 inches of static pressure. They will also include a thermostatic expansion valve, designed for use with R-401A refrigerant. The fan coil units shall operate with 208 volt, single phase power, with a minimum circuit ampacity not to exceed 12 amps. Each fan coil shall be provided with a one-inch thick pleated media throwaway filter, with a MERV rating of 8 or higher. 2.1.5 The fan coil units are to be connected to their associated outdoor heat pump with copper refrigerant piping. The piping shall be sized per the equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. The refrigerant suction line shall be insulated with one-half inch thick closed cell insulation, such as Armaflex. Insulation outside the building envelope shall be coated with the insulation manufacturer’s flexible paint. 2.1.6 Connect to the fan coil condensate drain and overflow connections with 3/4-inch Type M hard copper. Provide a trapped connection per the fan coil manufacturer’s recommendations. Run the condensate drains to a seepage pit outside the building envelope. Maintain a minimum slope of one-eighth inch per foot. The condensate drain piping within the building envelope shall be insulated with one-half inch thick closed cell insulation, such as Armaflex. 2.1.7 The refrigerant and condensate drain piping shall be suspended from the structure with clevis hangers and threaded rods. Vertical piping drops are to be anchored to strut channel and not anchored directly to the structure. Provide a sheet metal sleeve on all insulated piping at hangers and anchors. Insulation is to be continuous.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-104

Part 5

2.1.8 Provide a 48 inch length of galvanized sheet metal ductwork at the inlet and discharge of each fan coil, open at the end. The size of the ductwork shall match the inlet and discharge connection sizes. The ducts shall be insulated with one-half inch acoustical duct liner. Duct construction shall be per the 2010 California Mechanical Code. 2.1.9 The fan coils are to be located at opposite corners, oriented such that the discharge from each fan coil runs parallel to a long side of the building. The fan coil units shall be suspended at all four corners with minimum 3/8-inch diameter rods, bolted securely to the structure. Each rod shall include a spring-type isolator in compression. Provide aircraft cable seismic restraints, splayed at 45 degree angles vertically and horizontally, at all four corners of the fan coil. Attach the cables to the structure with Mason or equal seismic connectors. 2.1.10 The thermostats are to be wall mounted, 48 inches above the finished floor, under the fan coil unit it serves. Control wiring shall be run in conduit. 2.1.11 2.2

New filters are to be installed in the fan coil units at the completion of the project.

Roof mounted, belt-driven centrifugal exhaust fan with roof curb, birdscreen and backdraft damper. Include a 4 ft. length of 18”x18” sheet metal exhaust duct with open ends. Fan shall be rated to provide 2400 cubic feet per minute at 0.25" total static pressure, maximum 8.0 sones. The fan motor shall be rated at 1/4 horsepower, 120 volt. Roof curb shall be designed to level the fan. Fan shall be controlled by a wall switch, to be provided by the Electrical Contractor. One fan shall be located at each end of the building, approximately 3 feet east of the roof peak. The duct shall be dropped through roof from curb, with the top of duct wrapped over the curb.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION: 3.2.1

3.2.2

Site Inspection: 3.2.1.1

Examine premises to understand conditions which may affect performance of work of this Division before submitting proposals for this work. Examine adjoining work on which mechanical work is dependent for efficiency and report work which requires correction.

3.2.1.2

No subsequent allowance for time or money will be considered for any consequence related to failure to examine site conditions.

Drawings: 3.2.2.1

Consider Architectural and Structural Drawings part of this work insofar as these drawings furnish information relating to design and construction of building. These drawings take precedence over Plumbing and Mechanical Drawings.

3.2.3 Ensure that items to be furnished fit space available. Make necessary field measurements to ascertain space requirements including those for connections and furnish and install equipment of size and shape so final installation shall suit true intent and meaning of Contract Documents. If approval is received to use other than originally specified items, be responsible for specified capacities and for ensuring that items to be furnished will fit space available. 3.3

PREPARATION: 3.3.1 Check that slots and openings provided under other Divisions through floors, walls, ceilings, and roofs are properly located. Perform cutting and patching caused by neglecting to coordinate with Divisions providing slots and openings at no additional cost to Owner.

3.4

INSTALLATION: 3.4.1

Interface With Other Work 3.4.1.1

Electrical - Furnish exact location of electrical connections and complete information on motor controls to installer of electrical system.

3.4.1.2

Testing And Balancing 3.4.1.2.1 Put mechanical systems into full operation and continue their operation during each working day of testing and balancing. 3.4.1.2.2 Make changes in pulleys, belts, fan speeds, and dampers or add dampers as required for correct balance as recommended by appropriate Sections of Division 13 and at no additional cost to Owner.

3.4.2 trusses.

Cut carefully to minimize necessity for repairs to previously installed or existing work. Do not cut beams, columns, or

3.4.3

Locating Equipment 3.4.3.1

Arrange pipes, ducts, and equipment to permit ready access to valves, cocks, unions, traps, filters, starters, motors, control components, and to clear openings of doors and access panels.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-105

Part 5

3.4.3.2

Adjust locations of pipes, ducts, switches, panels, equipment, and fixtures to accommodate work to interferences anticipated and encountered.

3.4.3.3

Install mechanical work to permit removal of equipment and parts of equipment requiring periodic replacement or maintenance without damage to or interference with other parts of equipment or structure.

3.4.3.4

Determine exact route and location of each pipe and duct prior to fabrication. 3.4.3.4.1 Right-Of-Way 1) Lines which pitch shall have right-of-way over those which do not pitch. For example, condensate drains shall normally have right-of-way. 2) Lines whose elevations cannot be changed shall have right-of-way over lines whose elevations can be changed. 3.4.3.4.2 Offsets, Transitions, and Changes in Direction 1) Make offsets, transitions, and changes in direction in pipes and ducts as required to maintain proper head room and pitch of sloping lines whether or not indicated on Drawings.

3.4.4 Penetration Firestops - Install Penetration Firestop System appropriate for penetration at mechanical system penetrations through walls, ceilings, roofs, and top plates of walls. 3.4.5

3.5

Sealants: 3.4.5.1

Seal openings through building exterior caused by penetrations of elements of mechanical systems.

3.4.5.2

Furnish and install acoustical sealant to seal penetrations through acoustically insulated walls and ceilings.

REPAIR / RESTORATION: 3.5.1 Each Section of this Division shall bear expense of cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing of work of other Sections required because of its fault, error, tardiness, or because of damage done by it. 3.5.1.1

Patch and repair walls, floors, ceilings, and roofs with materials of same quality and appearance as adjacent surfaces unless otherwise shown.

3.5.1.2

Surface finishes shall exactly match existing finishes of same materials.

3.5.2 Cutting, patching, repairing, and replacing pavements, sidewalks, roads, and curbs to permit installation of work of this Division is responsibility of Section installing work. 3.6

CLEANING: 3.6.1

Clean exposed piping, ductwork and equipment.

3.6.2 No more than one week before Final Inspection, flush out bearings and clean other lubricated surfaces with flushing oil. Provide best quality and grade of lubricant specified by Equipment Manufacturer. 3.6.3 3.7

Replace filters in equipment for moving air with new filters of specified type no more than one week before Final Inspection.

PROTECTION: 3.7.1

Do not operate pieces of equipment used for moving supply air without proper air filters installed properly in system.

3.7.2 After start-up, continue necessary lubrication and be responsible for damage to bearings while equipment is being operated up to Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 23 05 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-106

Part 5

SECTION 26 05 00 – ELECTRICAL GENERAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01

1.02

SUMMARY: A.

The General Conditions and applicable portions of other sections are a part of this section, the same as if here written.

B.

This section, together with the electrical and related drawings and documents is intended to specify complete and operable electrical and related systems and may apply to performance by other than electrical trades, just as other sections may apply to performance by the electrical trade.

C.

The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the extent of work to be performed under this section by the electrical and other trades. Where a specific trade is mentioned, it is a means of referring to a separation of work corresponding to the separation shown on the plans and to avoid duplication or omission of related work by two or more trades.

D.

The work under this section shall be so organized, planned and coordinated with others that the project will proceed expeditiously and on schedule and conflicts will be avoided. Refer to other applicable portions of the contract documents even though not specifically referenced.

E.

All electrical material and equipment of similar characteristics and use shall be of the same manufacturer and shall closely match in appearance. Material and equipment of identical characteristics and use shall be identical.

DESCRIPTION OF WORK: A.

B.

Work Included: This Specification and the Drawings cover furnishing and installing the complete, operable electrical system including, but not limited to, the following systems complete and operative: 1.

277Y/480 and 208Y/120 Volt, 3 phase, 4-wire lighting and power systems including panels, feeders, switchboard and associated equipment.

2.

Branch circuit wiring.

3.

Lighting fixtures, complete with lamps.

4.

Grounding system.

5.

Electrical work for mechanical systems except where specified under other sections.

6.

Conduit only system consisting of empty conduit (with pull wires), terminal backboards, terminal cabinets, boxes with plaster rings and blank covers where indicated for public telephone.

Work under this Section on Mechanical Systems: 1.

Power (line voltage) conduits, wiring, outlets and connections shall be furnished and installed under the Electrical Section of the Specifications.

2.

HVAC and plumbing control and interlock wiring regardless of voltage, and conduits for same, will be provided, wired and connected under Division 15 unless specifically noted otherwise on the plans.

3.

All magnetic and manual motor starters, contactors, relays, push button stations, control equipment, etc. shall be furnished under the Mechanical Section of the Specifications unless specifically noted on the Drawings. Refer to diagrams for installation and connections.

4.

Disconnect switches and miscellaneous devices shall be furnished, installed and connected under the Electrical Section of the Specifications, as indicated on the plans.

5.

If substitution of control equipment other than that specified requires any changes in the electrical work from that shown on the plans in order to accomplish the correct control sequence, any extra cost of the equipment or electrical work shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.

6.

Final connections of the electric power driven equipment shall be made under the Electrical Section of the Specifications.

7.

Equipment furnished and/or installed under the Electrical Specifications shall be installed in locations and in such a manner as required by the Mechanical and Plumbing Specifications and as directed by the Engineer. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to all other sections of these plans and

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-107

Part 5

Specifications and coordinate work to provide complete, operating Mechanical and Plumbing systems. C.

1.03

1.06

Terminals and wiring for public telephones.

2.

Electrical equipment or installations specified herein to be furnished as a part of Mechanical Section of Specifications.

3.

Temporary site construction power.

The Contract Drawings indicate the extent and the general locations and arrangement of equipment, conduit, and wiring. Lighting fixtures, equipment and outlets shall be located to avoid interference with mechanical or structural features; in addition, lighting fixtures shall be symmetrically located according to the room arrangement. All locations for electrical work shall be checked and coordinated with the Architectural Drawings. If any conflicts occur necessitating departures from the Contract Drawings, details of departures and reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practicable for written approval, and the equipment shall not be installed until approval is received.

CODES AND REGULATIONS A.

1.05

1.

DRAWINGS: A.

1.04

Related Work Specified elsewhere: The following work, although similar in nature or relevant to the work of the Section, is specified in other Sections or is to be furnished by others:

All work and materials shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of public authorities having jurisdiction and utilities furnishing services. Nothing in the plans or specifications shall be construed as permitting work that is not in conformance with applicable codes or regulations. Codes governing this work include but are not limited to the latest approved edition of the following: 1.

National Fire Protection Associations'

2.

National Electrical Code.

3.

California Administrative Codes.

4.

Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

5.

Local Ordinances and Regulations.

6.

Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) Published Standards.

B.

Requirements of codes and regulations shall be considered as minimum. Where contract documents exceed, without violating, code and regulation requirements, contract document shall take precedence. Where codes conflict, the more stringent shall apply.

C.

The Contractor shall furnish all materials and labor required for compliance with codes and regulations, even though not specifically mentioned or shown.

STANDARDS: A.

Electrical material and equipment shall have been tested and listed or labeled as conforming to approved published standards by Underwriters' Laboratories where such listing or labeling service is available for the class of material or equipment used. Where applicable, listing or labeling shall apply to the complete assembled equipment and not to the components alone. Where listing or labeling service is not available for an assembly, the components shall be listed or labeled and applied within their ratings.

B.

Electrical installations shall conform to the standards set forth in the National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) "Installation Standards Handbook".

LOCATIONS AND DIMENSIONS: A.

Install all material and equipment in such a manner as to avoid obstructions, preserve clearances, maintain code spacings and keep openings and passageways clear.

B.

The drawings are diagrammatic to the extent that many offsets, bends, fittings and exact locations are not shown. The Contractor shall determine the best methods, exact locations and routes for his installation and note any conflicts or obstructions. The locations shown for conduits, outlets, materials and equipment may be refined to meet the architectural, structural and mechanical conditions with the approval of the Owner. Where dimensions are shown, they shall be adhered to as closely as practicable.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-108

Part 5

1.07

C.

Where apparatus and equipment is shown to scale or dimensioned on the drawings, dimensions have been taken from typical equipment of the general class indicated. The Contractor shall carefully verify that the material and equipment he plans to install will fit into the spaces provided and proper clearances will be maintained. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the fitting of his materials and equipment to other equipment and structure.

D.

Mounting heights shown are from finished floor or pavement or grade to middle of wall mounted outlet boxes and from finished floor to bottom of suspended fixtures unless otherwise indicated.

E.

The exact locations of borings, trenches, excavations, ground rods and all new sub-surface work shall be adjusted to avoid damaging or disturbing any existing underground structure, pipe, or cable. The Contractor shall make every reasonable effort to determine their existing correct locations.

PERMITS AND INSPECTIONS: A.

1.08

1.09

Apply and pay for all permits required by any public authorities having jurisdiction and arrange and pay for inspections required. Deliver any certificates of such inspections to the Owner.

ELECTRICAL AND TELEPHONE SERVICES: A.

Contractor shall be responsible for and shall include in his work all service charges and costs and all equipment, material and labor required to provide power and telephone services shown.

B.

Contractor shall contact the serving utilities and make all arrangements for obtaining the correct services at the proper times.

C.

Electrical services shall conform to the requirements of the local electrical company. Telephone service shall conform to the requirements of the local telephone company. CATV service if applicable, shall conform to the requirements of the local cable company. Contractor shall verify service locations and requirements prior to bid.

MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT SUBMITTALS: A.

A materials list, shop drawings, data sheets and samples shall be submitted for review in conformance with Division 1. Submittals shall be made and favorable review secured before material and equipment is installed.

B.

The materials list shall include manufacturer, type, and such other descriptive data as may be required to determine the acceptability of each item. Submit lists of materials for the following:

C.

1.

Conduits and fittings

2.

Outlet boxes and fittings.

3.

Wiring devices.

4.

Coverplates, including engraving schedules.

5.

Conductors, 600 Volt.

6.

Lamps.

7.

Wire.

Provide shop drawings for equipment and systems where required by the specification for those items. Shop drawings shall include information on each component, wiring diagrams, layouts, dimensions, and sufficient other data to establish compliance with the specifications and acceptability of the equipment or system. Shop drawings may be catalog data sheets where indicated, providing sufficient detail is shown. Submit shop drawings for the following: 1.

Panelboards.

2.

Circuit breakers.

3.

Disconnect switches.

4.

Relays and contactors.

5.

Lighting fixtures with photometric data, and choice of standard finishes available for selection by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, and full data on special finishes specified.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-109

Part 5

1.10

1.11

6.

Terminal cabinets.

7.

Nameplate schedules.

8.

Time clocks.

9.

Transformers.

10.

Occupancy sensors.

11.

Main switchboards.

D.

Samples may be required at the discretion of the Owner.

E.

If equipment other than specified is submitted, submit scaled plans for all electrical equipment rooms and areas. Plans shall be at scale of 1/4-inch equals one foot, shall show actual dimensions of equipment proposed for use and required working clearances. Plans shall accompany shop drawings.

F.

Late, incorrect, improper or rejected submittals will not be acceptable reasons for delaying the work or substituting non-specified material or equipment. The Contractor is responsible for providing proper submittals and allowing adequate time for their processing.

G.

The Contractor shall assume any extra costs to other work or trades resulting from the use of substitutions. All substitutions shall be supplied as approved at no extra charge.

AS-BUILT DRAWINGS: A.

On a set of contract drawings, kept at the site during construction, the Contractor shall mark all work that is installed differently from that shown, including any revised circuitry, material or equipment, and sufficient dimensions to locate all materials installed beneath and outside the building such as underground conduits, cabling, ground rods and stub-outs.

B.

The marked drawings shall be kept current as the work progresses and shall be available for inspection upon request. At the close of construction these shall be transferred to a set of reproducibles and turned over to the owner.

C.

The correct and completed "as-built" drawings are a pre-requisite to final contract payment in conformance with Division 1.

GUARANTEE: A.

All work shall be guaranteed for a minimum period of one year from either the official date of completion or from the official date of acceptance by the Owner whichever is the later date.

B.

Certain items shall be guaranteed for a longer period, as stated in the specification for those items.

C.

Should any trouble develop during this time due to defective material, faulty workmanship, or non-compliance with plans, specifications, codes, or directions of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, Engineer or Inspector the Contractor shall furnish all necessary labor and materials to correct the trouble without additional charges.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01

SWITCHBOARDS - 600 VOLT: A.

Switchboards shall be factory assembled type by ITE or equal. Voltage, phase, wire, rating, location, arrangement and components shall be as shown on the drawings. All switchboards shall be by the same manufacturer.

B.

Switchboards shall be free standing units of angle iron or formed steel construction enclosed on the four sides and top. Top, front and back panels shall be die formed of code gauge steel with no raw metal edges on the front.

C.

Switchboards shall be shop finished in ANSI 61 gray enamel. All front plates shall be baked to obtain maximum finish hardness.

D.

Busing shall be tin plated aluminum. Dimensions of busbars shall be based upon the ampacity shown on the plans. Busing shall extend the full height of distribution sections. All busbar connections shall be flat and fitted accurately for close contact over the entire area of the joints and braces. Busbars shall be rigidly supported, braced for 56,000 amps, symmetrical, and spaced according to the UL and NEC standards for bare busbar.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-110

Part 5

E.

Exterior plates and blank spaces for future space not presently utilized shall be held in place by rigid supports aligned with screw holes and arranged to prevent screws and plates from falling against energized parts. Interiors shall be fastened to the enclosure by adjustable supports with means to provide for proper alignment. Provide for future bus extensions.

F.

Bolting of components, framework and bussing shall be aligned with bolt holes and/or slots so as not to introduce stress when tightened. All bolted connections shall be torque tightened in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

G.

Securely anchor switchboard to the floor in accordance with the paragraph "Earthquake Requirements". All openings shall be suitably designed to prevent the entry of weather, dust, animals and foreign matter.

H.

Provide a nameplate for each switchboard and each item on the face of the switchboard as specified in the Section "Nameplates".

I.

After installation the boards shall be carefully cleaned. Any damaged paint shall be retouched with paint provided by the manufacturer.

J.

When the equipment is energized, its interior shall be protected by faceplates or temporarily by non-combustible material. Faceplates shall not be removed or left unplaced without the immediate presence of the electrical contractor.

K.

Circuit breakers, switches, starters and other equipment to be included as an assembled part of a switchboard shall comply with the sub-section or paragraph where those items are specified. Submit detailed shop drawings of the switchboards, including breakers, contactors, starters, controls, switches, etc., as required under "Submittals".

L.

2.02

2.03

M.

Each distribution section shall be equipped with a ground bus secured directly to the interior of the enclosure. The bus shall be equal to the neutral bus and shall have a separate lug for each ground conductor. No more than one conductor shall be connected to a lug.

N.

Provisions shall be made for bus extension to tenant metering equipment, where indicated on single line.

PANELBOARDS: A.

Panelboards shall be factory assembled circuit breaker type by the same manufacturer as supplies the switchboards. The number of poles, type, voltage and ampere ratings shall be as indicated on the plans.

B.

Neutral wires shall be connected to a common neutral bus with binding screws or lugs. The neutral bus shall be insulated from the cabinet. Ground wires shall be connected to a common equipment ground bus with binding screws or lugs. The ground bus shall be bonded to the cabinet.

C.

All bolted connections shall be torque-tightened in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations.

D.

Cabinets for panelboards shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboards. Cabinets shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on the plans. Contractor shall coordinate depth of flush cabinets with depth of wall cavities. Cabinets shall be constructed of code gauge steel and shall be shop finished in ANSI 61 light gray enamel. Flush cabinets may be galvanized instead of painted.

E.

Fronts of cabinets shall be steel, fastened with screws in countersunk washers, or with approved concealed spring clamps. Cabinet fronts shall have hinged lockable doors with milled keys and circuit schedule holders with clear plastic windows. Doors shall be fastened to trim with substantial flush hinges. Circuit schedules shall be typewritten or printed in ink and shall clearly indicate the circuit and equipment served. Mark spares with pencil only. All panels shall be keyed alike. Fronts shall be shop finished in ANSI 61 light gray enamel.

F.

Provide handle blocking (lock-on) and padlock-off devices where shown on the panel schedules.

G.

Provide a panel identification nameplate as specified under "Nameplates". Each circuit breaker pole shall be identified with a stamped or otherwise permanent number designation. Circuits shall be arranged as shown on the panel schedules.

H.

Submit detailed shop drawings of the panelboards, including breakers and all components as required under "Submittals".

CIRCUIT BREAKERS: A.

Circuit breakers shall be by one of the manufacturers specified for switchboards.

B.

Breakers shall be bolt-on type in house panels. Clamp-on, push-on, or plug-in breakers are not acceptable.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-111

Part 5

Removable handle ties and dual, quad or tandem breakers are not acceptable. Mounting hardware, accessories, faceplates, and enclosures shall be provided as necessary for the intended use.

2.04

C.

Circuit breakers shall be quick-make and quick-break, and the handle mechanism shall be trip-free to prevent holding contacts closed against a short circuit or sustained overload. Contacts shall be of high pressure butttype and shall be made of a silver-alloy material. Arc chutes shall be provided. Automatic thermal and magnetic tripping devices shall be located in each pole of the breaker. The thermal device shall provide instantaneous tripping on short circuits.

D.

Short circuit interrupting capacity shall be as indicated on the plans and shall in no case be less than 10,000 amps symmetrical at the applied voltage.

E.

Enclosures for individually mounted circuit breakers shall be NEMA I for dry locations and NEMA 3R for damp or outside locations. Quality, manufacturer and finish shall be the same as panelboards. Provide a nameplate as specified under "Nameplates".

F.

Submit data on breakers with switchboard or panelboard shop drawings as required under "Submittals". Submittal shall include interrupting capacities in symmetrical amps at the applied voltage. Letter designations are not sufficient.

STARTERS AND CONTACTORS - 600 VOLT: A.

Provide type and rating shown on the plans and as required. Motor starters and contactors with separate enclosures shall be Allen-Bradley, General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse or equal. Enclosures shall be NEMA I for interior dry locations and NEMA 3R for exterior or damp locations with ANSI 61 finish.

B.

Starters and contactors furnished or installed under other sections shall comply with special requirements of those sections.

C.

Motor starters shall have thermal overload protection in all phases and shall have an H.O.A. switch on the cover. Each starter or contactor controlling equipment remote from the starter or contactor shall have a red pilot light to indicate equipment is energized.

D.

Refer to mechanical and electrical plans and control diagrams for accessories and equipment such as transformers and auxiliary contacts and provide as a part of the assembly. Verify all requirements for starters and contactors with the actual mechanical system to be installed.

E.

Where shown on the plans, fractional horsepower motors shall have toggle type manual starters with thermal overload protection in each phase. Provide a padlocking-off device on the handle and where the motor is out of sight of the switch provide a pilot light in the cover to indicate switch is closed.

F.

Starters and contactors may be combination type. Disconnects shall comply with section "Disconnect Switches" and circuit breakers shall comply with the section "Circuit Breakers". Provide nameplates for each starter and contactor identifying the item controlled as specified in section "Nameplates".

G.

H.

2.05

Submit data on starters and contactors with shop drawings of assemblies where they will be used as required under "Submittals".

DISCONNECT SWITCHES: A.

Switches shall be by one of the manufacturers specified for switchboards.

B.

Enclosures shall be Heavy Duty. They shall be externally operated, quick-make, quick-break, blade type, of number of poles and rating indicated or required. Switches in motor circuits shall be HP rated. Enclosures shall be NEMA I for dry, interior locations and NEMA 3R or 4 for damp, wet or exterior locations. Finish shall be ANSI 61. Covers shall have a defeatable interlock. Covers shall be padlockable.

C.

D.

Short circuit withstand ratings shall be RMS symmetrical 200,000 amps.

E.

Switches shall accept fuses of the rating and UL or NEMA class indicated. Plug fuses shall not be used. Provide fusetrons on circuits protecting motors unless otherwise indicated. Fuses shall be installed so that the rating is clearly visible from the front without removing the fuse.

F.

Where the switch is a part of a switchboard assembly, provide mounting hardware to match the switchboard.

G.

Provide a nameplate on each disconnect switch as specified in "Nameplates". Nameplate shall show item controlled, voltage, phase, and source of power.

H.

In case of a substitution of material or equipment protected, the disconnect and fuses shall be resized

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-112

Part 5

accordingly. I.

2.06

2.07

2.08

2.09

Submit data sheets of the disconnect switches as required under "Submittals". assembled part of a switchboard, submit with the switchboard shop drawings.

Where switches are an

SNAP SWITCHES: A.

AC general use snap switches shall be toggle handle, quiet operating, premium or heavy duty specification grade, UL listed and verified to meet Federal Specification W-S-896-d and NEMA heavy duty tests. All switches shall be rated 120/277 volts.

B.

Toggle handles shall be white.

C.

For pilot lighting, the toggle handle shall illuminate when the switch is in the "on" position. The light shall be white or amber.

D.

Switches shall be constructed with silver-cadmium alloy contacts, permanent lubrication, and binding head screws suitable for #10 AWG wire. Connection shall be made by wrapping the wire around the screw or tightening a screw clamp. Push-in type connections are not acceptable. Switches may have built-in pigtail connection in lieu of screw connection. Switches shall have means of grounding.

E.

Submit data sheets as required under "Submittals".

RECEPTACLE OUTLETS: A.

Receptacle outlets shall be standard NEMA configuration, grounding type, specification grade.

B.

General convenience outlets shall be 15 amp or 20 amp, 125 volt, 2 pole, 3 wire. The attachment screw shall have an automatic grounding clip. A green hex head grounding screw shall be connected to the bridge which shall run around a molded plastic body. The bridge shall be securely locked to the body. Outlets shall be UL listed and meet and NEMA heavy duty performance tests. Contacts shall be high performance double wipe type. Where indicated, outlets shall have isolated grounding. Outlets shall have binding head screws suitable for #10 AWG wire. Connection shall be made by wrapping the wire around the screw or tightening a wire clamp. Push-in type connections are not acceptable. Outlets may have built-in pigtail connection in lieu of screw connection. The outlet front shall be white.

C.

Special outlets, not listed above, shall be standard NEMA configuration for the application shown and shall be of equal grade and quality to those listed above. An approved cord cap or plug shall be furnished with each receptacle outlet except general convenience and clock type. Plug shall be of the same grade, quality and manufacturer as the outlet. Cord caps and plugs shall be of equal quality to the outlets listed above.

D.

Submit data sheets for outlets and plugs as required under "Submittals".

OUTLET AND JUNCTION BOXES: A.

The size of each outlet or junction box shall be determined by the number and size of wires and conduits entering the box, but shall be not less than 4-inch square and 2-1/8 inches deep unless otherwise indicated.

B.

Outlet and junction boxes for interior use shall be galvanized or sherardized, one-piece pressed or welded steel, knockout type, except where other types of boxes are indicated or specified. Plastic, fiber or composition boxes will not be permitted.

C.

Outlet and junction boxes for surface exterior use shall be Appleton or Crouse-Hinds FS type, or equal.

D.

Outlet boxes shall be equipped with plaster rings, extension rings, inserts and fixture studs as may be required. Knockout seals shall be provided where knockouts are not intact.

E.

Telephone outlet boxes shall be 4-11/16" square with single gang rings.

TRIM AND COVERPLATES: A.

Provide a trim or coverplate for each outlet, receptacle, switch, device and box. Ganged devices shall have gang plates exactly matching the arrangement and quantity of devices.

B.

Plates for flush interior boxes shall be white plastic.

C.

For surface interior outlet and junction boxes of the pressed steel knockout type, use ½" raised galvanized steel plates for devices and flat galvanized steel for blank plates. All plates for exterior use shall be gasketed and shall have weatherproof covers for devices.

D.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-113

Part 5

2.10

2.11

2.12

E.

All plates shall fit the box perfectly with no field modification necessary. Surface plates shall not overhang the box. All plates shall be manufactured specifically for the type of outlet, device and box to which they are applied.

F.

Plates for telephone outlets shall have one knockout and shall match device plates.

G.

Special plates or application shall be as indicated on the drawings or otherwise specified.

PULL, TERMINAL AND SPLICE BOXES: A.

Pullboxes for general above ground use shall be code gauge steel and shall be installed wherever indicated or required in order to facilitate the pulling of wires or cables in conduit. Boxes shall be provided with removable covers secured with machine screws. Where pullboxes are located in damp or wet locations, cover fastening screws or bolts shall be plated with zinc or cadmium and covers shall be gasketed.

B.

Pull, terminal and splice boxes for above ground use shall have a painted or galvanized finish. Paint finish shall be ANSI 61.

C.

Submit shop drawings or data sheets on boxes as required under "Submittals".

CONDUITS AND FITTINGS: A.

Rigid steel conduit, galvanized or sherardized, shall be used where exposed to the weather for stub-ups, in concrete or masonry construction in contact with the earth, where shown on the plans and may be used for underground work. Fittings shall be of the screw thread type. All joints shall be made liquid and gas-tight. Couplings, lock-nuts, bushings, etc., shall be hot dipped galvanized. Conduits shall be provided with grounding bushings at ends, unless fitted into hubs or similar terminations.

B.

Galvanized steel electrical metallic tubing (EMT) shall be used in above ground, interior, dry locations protected from the weather and physical damage and may be used in concrete or masonry construction not in contact with the earth. Fittings shall be compression type with gland sealing rings or set screw type. Indent, or drive-on fittings will not be permitted.

C.

Rigid aluminum conduit may be used in lieu of EMT for sizes over 1" in accessible, interior, dry locations. Fittings shall be suitable for aluminum and shall be of the threaded type. Provide bushings at ends unless fitted into hubs or similar terminations.

D.

Flexible conduit shall be galvanized steel or aluminum and shall be used where shown on the plans and to connect conduit systems to motors, direct wired and vibrating equipment and as a final connection to lighting fixtures in accessible ceilings. Where used in damp or wet locations it shall be of the liquid-tight type with outer neoprene jacket and suitable liquid-tight fittings. Flexible aluminum conduit shall have a grounding conductor and shall have approved grounding fittings.

E.

Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be used where specifically shown or specified and may be used for underground work. Rigid non-metallic conduit shall be polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Schedule 40 except that service conduits shall be of a type approved by the utility. All fittings, solvent cement, etc., shall be manufactured specifically for the type of material and system with which they are used. Joints shall be made liquid and gastight by a method recommended by the manufacturer. Non-metallic conduit shall not be used where exposed to public view or access. Stub-ups shall be rigid galvanized steel with grounding bushings.

F.

Steel conduits and fittings in underground work shall be thoroughly coated with a bitumastic compound to prevent corrosion except where encased in concrete.

G.

Service conduit installations are subject to approval by the serving utilities and shall be installed in strict conformance with their requirements.

WIRE AND CABLE - 600 VOLT: A.

Deliver all wire and cable to site in original unbroken packages, plainly marked or tagged with Underwriters' label, size and type of conductor, type of insulation, name of manufacturing company, trade name of wire and month and year when manufactured, which date shall not exceed 8 months from delivery to site.

B.

Wire and cable for use on systems of 50 volts to 600 volts shall be 600 volt rated type THW or THHN except where other insulation is specifically indicated. Conductors shall be copper.

C.

Wire and cable for use on systems of below 50 volts shall be 300 volt PVC insulated and suitable for the class of wiring except as otherwise indicated or specified. Conductors shall be copper.

D.

Wire and cable for use in lighting fixtures, heaters and other heat producing equipment shall have suitable heat resistant insulation.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-114

Part 5

E.

F. 2.13

2.14

2.15

2.16

Conductors of number 10 and smaller may be solid. Number 8 and larger shall be stranded. 1.

Stranded wire only shall be used where subject to movement, such as for connecting pilot lights on cabinet doors and similar applications. Bundle and support wire in such a way as to avoid tension or flexing at terminals.

2.

Where stranded wire is connected to binding screws, nylon, self-insulated, ring tongue, pressure type terminals equal to T & B Sta-kon shall be used on the wire.

All wire sizes are stated in America Wire Gauge (AWG).

LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS: A.

Fixture shall be complete with all required accessories and equipment, including lamps, necessary for a complete installation.

B.

Fixtures and trims shall be assembled and installed with care to avoid and eliminate light leaks. Where necessary, gasketing, patching, or other effective means shall be used. There shall be no entry for insects or dirt into any fixture.

C.

Fixtures and luminaries of one type shall be of one manufacturer and of identical finish and appearance.

D.

Contractor shall verify the ceiling or wall construction and the mounting requirements of each fixture and provide plaster frames, special flanges, concrete pour housings, boxes, brackets, adapters, hangers, stems, canopies and other materials necessary to properly mount the fixture.

E.

Fixture shall be supported in conformance with the paragraph "Earthquake Requirements".

F.

Submit shop drawings on all fixtures as required under "Submittals". "Shop Drawings" may be catalog data sheets if complete information including mounting hardware is shown and identified. Shop drawings shall include mounting details and show compatibility with the ceiling, pole, bracket or other equipment.

G.

Contractor shall verify the fire rating of the ceiling or wall construction and provide required fire rated assembly.

NAMEPLATES AND LABELS: A.

Nameplates shall be furnished for circuit breakers, switches, switchboards, and panelboards which are furnished or installed under this section.

B.

Nameplates, except as noted, shall be engraved laminated black and white plastic with characters cut through the black plastic.

C.

Attach nameplates with 2 cadmium plated steel bolts, or pan-head screws. Adhesive attachment material will not be acceptable.

D.

Any conductors left unconnected shall be identified by labeling with their intended use, circuit number, or other suitable information.

FLUORESCENT BALLASTS: A.

Electronic ballasts for fluorescent and T8 rapid start lamps shall be high power factor, sound rated A, with Class P auto-reset thermal protection. They shall operate all lamps for which they are designed at a frequency of not less than 20 KHZ without detectable flicker, deliver constant full light output and normal lamp life, be unaffected by lamp failure, be surge and transient protected to 6000 volts, operate at a core temperature not to exceed 60 degrees Centigrade, comply with FCC and NEMA limits for RFI and EMI, limit the input current third harmonic content to 10% maximum, and be physically interchangeable with core and coil type magnetic ballasts.

B.

Ballasts shall be certified by the California Energy Commission in all applicable categories as required by that agency.

EMERGENCY BALLASTS: A.

Emergency lighting shall be provided by using a standard fluorescent fixture equipped with an emergency ballast. This ballast shall consist of a field replaceable high-temperature, maintenance-free nickel cadmium battery, charger, and electronic circuitry contained in one compact case with a 2' length of flexible conduit. A solid state charging indicator light to monitor the charger and battery, double-pole test switch, and installation hardware shall be provided. The emergency ballast shall be capable of operating one or two FO32T8 lamp at 1400 lumens initial light output in the emergency mode for a minimum of 90 minutes. The emergency ballast

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-115

Part 5

shall be UL listed for installation on top of, or up to 50' remote from fixture, warranted for a full five years from date of purchase, and made in the U.S.A. Bodine #B50 or equal. B.

2.17

LAMPS: A.

2.18

The outdoor lighting photoelectric controls (OLC) shall be a U.L. approved unit of the cadmium sulfide cell type light sensor and shall have a time delay output. The OLC shall be designed to turn on at 1 footcandle (+/- 25%) with a turn off ratio of not more than 5. The OLC shall be field adjustable and shall be supplied with an adjustable metal shutter for this purpose. The OLC shall be designed to operate properly over the input voltage range of 105 to 135 volts. The OLC shall be designed such that the output control relay shall have a minimum of 30 seconds time delay too prevent false turn-off from momentary light flashes. The OLC shall be mounted in a totally sealed outdoor weatherproof die cast aluminum housing with standard 1/2" pipe thread mounting. The unit shall be U.L. approved for mounting in any position. The window shall be made of acrylic with the proper UV stabilizers. Manufacturer shall be Area Lighting Research #AT-15, or equal.

BYPASS TIMERS: A.

2.22

Transformers shall be dry ventilated type with a 220 degree Centigrade insulation system with 115 degree Centigrade temperature rise when operated at full load, hot spot temperature of 65 degrees Centigrade, with a maximum ambient temperature of 40 degrees Centigrade. Impedance and sound level shall be in accordance with applicable NEMA and ANSI standards. Each transformer shall be provided with taps, two 2.5% above normal primary voltage, and four 2.5% below normal primary voltage.

PHOTOCELLS: A.

2.21

Time switches for control of lighting shall be electronic programmable type, with a minimum of four separately controlled zones, Tork # Z400, or equal.

DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS: A.

2.20

Lamps shall be as indicated on the fixture schedule and shall be manufactured by General Electric, Phillips, Osram/Sylvania or equal. All fluorescent lamps to be 86CRI.

TIME SWITCHES: A.

2.19

Compact fluorescent fixtures designated as emergency types shall have integral, factory installed emergency ballasts.

Contractor shall furnish manually operated dial type timers to bypass lighting control system, one for every 5000 square feet maximum of conditioned floor area. Timer shall allow the lighting to remain on for no more than two hours when an override is initiated. Bypass timers located in areas where lights controlled by them cannot be seen shall include an annunciated pilot light adjacent. Bypass timers shall control lighting contactors.

OCCUPANCY SENSORS: A.

B.

Passive infrared detectors shall detect presence, in the control area, by detecting changes in the infrared energy. The sensors shall include the following standard features: 1.

A temperature compensated dual element sensor, and a multi element Fresnel lens.

2.

A daylight filter

3.

Sensitivity and time delay adjustability.

4.

Bypass capability.

5.

Wall switch sensors shall be Watt Stopper #W [120][277]-4 or equal.

6.

Private office sensors shall be Watt Stopper #WPIR.\ or equal.

7.

Open office sensors shall be Watt Stopper #CI-[100][200] or equal.

Ultrasonic occupancy sensors shall be capable of detecting presence, in the control area, by detecting Doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound. The detectors shall be capable of detecting in a 360 degree range (except for corridor applications), and shall include the following standard features: 1.

A shunt provision to bypass the sensor in the event of failure.

2.

Ceiling mounting capability.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-116

Part 5

C.

2.23

3.

Transmitter and receiver shall be temperature and humidity resistant.

4.

Sensors shall have parallel wiring capability to allow up to three sensors per relay power pack.

5.

Sensitivity and time delay adjustability.

6.

Corridor sensors shall be Watt Stopper #W-2000H or equal.

7.

Sensors shall be Watt Stopper or equal [#W-500A for areas below 500 square feet], [#W-1000A for areas below 1000 square feet], [and #W-2000A for areas below 2000 square feet].

Dual technology sensors shall incorporate features of both infrared and ultrasonic sensors, and shall require detection from both methods in order to activate lighting. After initial activation, detection by either method shall hold lighting on. Sensors shall be Watt Stopper #DT-100L or equal.

WALL BOX DIMMER SWITCHES: A.

Dimmers shall be of the type (incandescent or fluorescent), voltage and wattage that is required on the drawings.

B.

Dimmers shall be completely solid state with a voltage compensating circuit to minimize flicker due to line voltage variations.

C.

All devices shall mount individually in an outlet box and shall be gangable without removing side sections or derating capacity.

D.

Dimmers shall incorporate an air gap switch which shall be accessible without removing the face plate. The air gap switch shall be capable of meeting all applicable requirements of U.L. 20 for air gap switches in incandescent dimmers.

E. F.

Multi-gang face plate shall include mounting frame for proper device alignment and face plate attachment. All locations with multiple devices, one seamless, multi-gang face plate shall be provided. Coordinate proper outlet box size and face plate type.

G.

Manufactured by Lutron (Nova T Series) or Leviton (Monet or Renoir Series) or equal. Verify color of all dimmers with Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer prior to submittals.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01

3.02

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT: A.

Where indicated on the plans, equipment furnished by others shall be completely connected to the electrical system as required for correct operation.

B.

All outlets, devices, and equipment furnished under this section shall be fully installed and connected under this section.

C.

Furnish all necessary flexible conduit, boxes, fittings, receptacles, caps, cords, and other material that may be required for the proper installation of all equipment. Refer to manufacturer's directions where applicable.

D.

Coordinate the work carefully to ensure that all electrical requirements of equipment are met and all systems are made complete and operational.

WORK ON HVAC AND PLUMBING SYSTEMS: A.

Complete power circuits, including breakers, switches, disconnects, wire and conduit, outlets and connections to HVAC and plumbing equipment shall be provided under this section.

B.

Low voltage starters and controller shall be provided under this section except where part of a package unit or panel specified in Division 15. High voltage starters and controllers will be provided under Division 15.

C.

HVAC and plumbing control and interlock wiring regardless of voltage, and conduits for same, will be provided, wired and connected under Division 15 unless specifically noted otherwise on the plans.

D.

Equipment furnished and/or installed under the Electrical section shall be installed in locations and in such a manner as required by the HVAC and Plumbing Section or as directed. The Electrical Contractor shall refer to all other sections of these plans and specifications and coordinate the work to provide complete and correct wiring and conduit systems for HVAC and Plumbing work.

E.

If substitution of controls or mechanical equipment other than that specified requires any changes in the

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-117

Part 5

electrical work from that shown on the plans, any extra cost of the equipment or electrical work shall be the responsibility of the HVAC and/or Plumbing Contractor. 3.03

3.04

3.05

MISCELLANEOUS WORK: A.

Do all miscellaneous metal and concrete work required; all core drilling required; all cutting and patching required; all excavation and backfill required; and provide all hangers, anchors, chases, supports, etc. required for the installation of the electrical systems.

B.

Touch up or refinish damaged surfaces of panels, switchboards, and other equipment worked under this section, to the satisfaction of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

C.

Backboards required for equipment installed under this section shall be provided under this section and shall be finished with two coats of fire retardant paint.

D.

All work shall be in accordance with applicable portions of the specifications.

INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION OF WIRING: A.

All wiring shall be installed in conduit except where other raceway systems or methods are specifically shown on the drawings or required.

B.

Thoroughly clean out all conduit and wire-ways and see that all parts are perfectly dry before pulling any wires. Use no lubricant except as recommended by the wire or cable manufacturer.

C.

Make all connections and splices necessary to properly complete the electrical wiring. Connections and splices shall be made only in pull, junction or outlet boxes, or in switchboards, wireways or panels having sufficient code sized gutter space. Connections and splices in 600 volt wires smaller than No. 6 AWG shall be made with "Scotchlok" or "Ideal" or equal spring type connectors and in copper wires No. 6 AWG and larger shall be made with vise or split bolt type solderless connectors and shall be insulated and taped.

D.

Soldering will not be an acceptable method of connecting any power conductors assembled under this work.

INSTALLATION OF CONDUIT AND BOXES: A.

All conduit systems shall be mechanically and electrically continuous.

B.

The minimum sizes of conduit shall be code size for the number and size of conductors, unless a larger size is shown, in which case such larger size shall be used. Conduits shall be run concealed, except in certain approved and indicated locations. Where run exposed, conduit shall be grouped in neat parallel lines following the lines of the building structure as closely as possible.

C.

D.

A 1/8" polyethylene pullrope shall be installed in every run of conduit-only.

E.

Conduit installed on equipment shall not obstruct any removable panel, access door or device. Conduit and boxes shall be installed so as not to interfere with or touch any piping, fixtures, or equipment except where attached to it.

F.

Conduit to be installed in concrete or masonry work shall be carefully laid and rigidly supported in the forms in such a manner as to provide proper clearance and so that all boxes will be flush after forms have been removed.

G.

Threads shall be tapered type, running threads will not be permitted on conduit or nipples.

H.

Not more than four 90-degree or bends or the equivalent shall be used on any single run of conduit, except conduit for telephone cable shall not have more than two 90-degree bends or the equivalent. Where more bends are necessary, provide suitable pullboxes or fittings.

I.

The ends of all conduit shall be square, carefully reamed out to full size, shouldered in the fittings and bushed or capped wherever stubbed or terminated.

J.

Upon completion of any run of conduit, test the run and see that it is free of obstruction. Plug each end with conduit pennies and bushings and leave plugged until ready to pull wire.

K.

Conduit shall not run through footings or grade beams or other structural members except where specifically directed by the structural Engineer.

L.

Conduit shall not pierce roof except where specifically directed and in a manner that will be completely and permanently weather and watertight. Where pitch pans or equivalent are used, they shall be filled level with the top to avoid water accumulation. Where conduit pierces exterior walls, the installation shall be made

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-118

Part 5

M. N.

3.06

3.07

3.08

weatherproof and watertight. Outlet boxes shall be securely and independently fastened to the structure and in concealed work, shall be supported flush with finished surface of walls or ceilings. Conduit run on the surface of the structure shall be securely supported with pipe straps or strut type channel assemblies. Conduits suspended below the structure shall be supported with split ring and rod or trapeze assemblies.

O.

Fasteners shall be machine screws, nut and lockwashers in metal; wood screws in wood; or expansion shields or inserts in masonry or concrete. Wooden inserts will not be acceptable. Perforated strap iron shall not be used as a strap, support or hanger in any case.

P.

Conduit run underground and not required to be concrete encased shall be laid on a minimum 3" deep bed of sand so that no stress is induced in the duct and covered with at least 3" of sand before backfilling. Where shown as concrete encased a minimum 3" thick continuous envelope of concrete shall be poured around the conduit starting at one end. Concrete for duct encasement shall be at least 3000 psi concrete with 1 inch maximum aggregate. Concrete work shall conform to the requirements of the City of San Diego.

GROUNDING: A.

Make good mechanical and electrical contact at all panelboards, switchboards, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and wherever the conduit run is connected. Permanently and effectively ground all switchboards, panelboards, transformers, conduit, fixtures, motors and other equipment as required by all applicable codes, regulations and standards.

B.

Flush wall outlets and switches shall have a bonding wire or approved mounting screw from ground terminal to metal box.

C.

Provide grounding jumper straps across all dielectric unions, water meters and at similar points in the piping system where the ground path can become interrupted. All non-metallic power conduits shall contain a grounding wire which shall be connected to provide a continuous and adequate equipment grounding system. Conduits shall be properly code sized to accommodate the additional grounding wire. Where insulated, the grounding wire shall be green.

D.

Ground rods shall be copper coated steel of length and diameter shown on the plans. They shall be driven vertically leaving the top end not less than 6" below grade.

E.

System neutrals shall be grounded at the sources of power only. The service shall be grounded as required by code.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION: A.

At frequent intervals during the time he is on the site, the Contractor shall clean up after his work and remove his debris from the premises leaving the building and grounds clean.

B.

Provide adequate protection for all material and equipment worked, furnished or installed under this section. Material and equipment shall be stored in a clean dry place and shall be covered or protected from damage or contamination during storage and after installation.

C.

All material and equipment furnished under this section shall be thoroughly cleaned of cement, plaster, paint spatters, and other foreign materials. Oil and grease spots shall be removed with a non-flammable cleaning solvent. All surfaces shall be carefully wiped clean. Boxes, cabinets and enclosures shall be cleaned, inside and out.

CHECKING AND TESTING OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS: A.

Switchgear, panels, disconnects, starters, contactors and all other equipment installed under this section shall be inspected for defects, and tested for proper operation.

B.

Enclosures and cabinets shall be checked for cleanliness inside and out and for defective or damaged finish.

C.

Systems shall be tested for short circuits, open circuits, wrong connections and grounds, and shall be free from mechanical and electrical defects.

D.

Circuits shall be tested for proper neutral and ground connections.

E.

Where required or directed, systems shall be tested in the presence of the Owner to demonstrate that equipment furnished, installed or connected functions in the manner intended.

F.

The Contractor shall furnish all necessary instruments and equipment required for making his tests, and shall immediately correct any defective work at no additional cost.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-119

Part 5

3.09

G.

Additional testing shall be done as specified in the paragraphs for specific items.

H.

Electrical contractor to hire an independent test lab to provide switchgear ground fault system test as well as pick up current and time delay settings.

EARTHQUAKE REQUIREMENTS: A.

All electrical material and equipment shall be installed with bracing, cabling or anchoring necessary to comply with the requirements of the California Administration Code Title 21, table T21-23-J.

B.

Pendant, suspended, or stem mounted lighting fixtures shall have a steel stranded aircraft cable attached to the structure and to the fixture at each point of support in addition to the fixture hanger. Cables shall be installed slack and shall be capable of supporting four times the vertical load. The fixture shall be capable of swinging 45 degrees in any direction. Where a 45 degree swing would cause the fixture to strike a wall or other object, suitable cables or other means of bracing shall be added to prevent the fixture from swinging against the other object.

C.

Switchboards and similar equipment shall be anchored to the floor in such a manner as to resist a force of 20% of its operating weight in any direction.

END OF SECTION 26 05 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-120

Part 5

SECTION 28 31 00 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

DESCRIPTION: This specification outlines the requirements for an Addressable/Intelligent Fire Detection and Alarm System, County Standard "Notifier" or approved equal, as described herein and as shown on the plans. A new addressable/intelligent main Fire Alarm Control Panel and devices shall be installed where shown.

1.2

RELATED SECTIONS: Conduit and boxes

1.3

SUBMITTALS: 1.3.1

Shop Drawings: Submit complete electrical installation documentation which includes the following minimum information: 1.3.1.1

Floor plans showing layout and location of all alarm initiating and signaling devices, panels, electrical power supply circuits, annunciator equipment, etc. Drawings shall also show all conduit runs, wire counts and device wiring order.

1.3.1.2

Descriptive Data: Submit manufacturer's specification sheet for each individual item of the fire alarm system.

1.3.1.3

California State Fire Marshall listing sheet showing expiration date for all components.

1.3.1.4

Wiring Diagrams: Submit complete point-to-point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals used for all electrical connections in the system.

1.3.1.5

Riser Diagrams: Submit schematic riser diagram showing the configuration of the system panel arrangement and annunciators.

1.3.1.6

Battery Calculations: Provide complete battery calculations showing the electrical requirements of the entire system, including the current consumption of the individual devices, both in alarm and in supervisory modes.

1.3.1.7

Voltage drop calculations: Provide complete voltage drop calculations showing that under worst case conditions the voltage drop does not exceed 5 percent.

1.3.1.8

Accurate legend of symbols for all fire alarm devices shown on the drawings.

1.3.1.9

Elevation details of a typical device installation.

1.3.1.10 Location of all fire/smoke barrier walls on floor plans. 1.3.1.11 Identification of wiring type, gauge and quantities. 1.3.1.12 Identification of room names (function) and numbers on the floor plans. 1.3.1.13 Structural details for support and anchorage of any fire alarm equipment weighing over 20 pounds. 1.3.1.14 Sequence of operations/events when system is activated. 1.3.1.15 Data showing that the Contractor holds a valid State of California C10 Contractors License, is UL listed for fire alarm installations, is a factory trained authorized Engineered Systems Distributer of the equipment manufacturer, maintains a Factory Authorized Service Facility within 30 miles of the project and has successfully installed interior fire alarm systems of the same type and design as specified herein, or that he has a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor meeting the specified requirements. 1.3.2 Operating and Maintenance Manuals: At completion of the work, provide operating instructions including thorough testing procedures and recommended testing frequency for each item. Maintenance instructions shall include a complete trouble-shooting manual. 1.3.3 As-Built Drawings: At completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit complete as-built drawings showing installed conduit layout, as-built wiring diagrams including interconnections to existing equipment, and exact equipment and device locations. 1.4

CODE REQUIREMENTS: 1.4.1

This installation shall be made in accordance with the drawings, specification and the following: 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6

California Electrical Code California Building Code California Fire Code California State Fire Marshall National Fire Protection Association Standard 72 101 Life Safety Code

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-121

Part 5

1.4.7 1.4.8

CAC Title 19 and 24 Local Codes and Authorities Having Jurisdiction

1.4.2 All equipment shall be UL Listed and California State Fire Marshall Approved for the use intended and shall be the standard products of a single ISO 9002 certified manufacturer regularly engaged in production of specified systems. 1.5

SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS: 1.5.1 The contractor shall furnish and install complete and ready for operation an automatic fire detection and alarm system including control panels, power supplies, detectors, annunciators, manual stations, alarm devices, wiring, components, appurtences and accessories. 1.5.2 The System specified and catalog numbers shown are those of Notifier to be furnished and installed by a Notifier Engineered System Distributor or equal manufacturer.

1.6

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION AND FUNCTION: Furnish and install a complete independent Fire Alarm System as described herein and as shown on the plans; to be wired, connected and left in first class operating condition. The System shall use intelligent/analog initiating devices with individual supervision, notification appliance supervision, incoming and standby power supervision. Include all Fire Alarm control equipment, manual pull stations, automatic fire detectors, chimes, horns, strobes, annunciators, remote control devices, all wiring, connections to devices , outlet boxes, junction boxes and all other necessary material for a complete operating system.

1.7

SYSTEM FUNCTIONAL OPERATION: When a fire alarm condition is detected and reported by one of the system initiating devices, the following functions shall immediately occur: 1.7.1

The System Alarm LED shall flash.

1.7.2

A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound.

1.7.3 A backlit 80 character LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the Fire Alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and its location within the protected premises. 1.7.4 History storage equipment shall log the information associated with the new fire alarm control panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence. 1.7.5 All system output programs assigned via control by event equations to be activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated System Outputs (alarm Notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated. Programming information to be provided by owner/engineer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL: 2.1.1 The Fire Alarm Panel shall be coordinated to comply with County Standards, be compatible with existing systems in place, and shall contain a microprocessor based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The CPU shall communicate with and control the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intellegent detectors, addressable modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices. 2.1.2

2.2

System Capacity and General Operation 2.1.2.1

The control panel shall provide, or be capatable of expansion to 198 intelligent/addressable devices.

2.1.2.2

The system shall include Form-C alarm and trouble relays rated at a minimum of 2.0 amps @ 30 VDC. It shall also include four Class B (NFPA Style Y) programmable Notification Appliance Circuits.

2.1.2.3

The system shall support up to 99 programmable EIA-485 driven relay for an overall system capacity of 301 circuits.

2.1.2.4

The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display, individual, color coded system status LEDs, and an alphanumeric keypad for the field programming and control of the fire alarm system.

2.1.2.5

All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be achieved without equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the Fire Alarm Control Panel.

SYSTEM COMPONENTS: 2.2.1 Electronic Sounders: Electronic Sounders shall be field programmable without the use of special tools, to provide slow whoop, continuous, or interrupted tones with an output sound level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-122

Part 5

2.2.2

2.2.3

2.2.4

Strobe Lights: Shall meet the requirements of the ADA as defined in UL standard 1971 and shall meet the following criteria: The appliance shall be placed 80 in (2,030 mm) above the highest floor level within the space, or 6 in (152 mm) below the ceiling, which ever is the lower. Audible/Visual Combination Devices: 2.2.3.1

Shall meet the applicable requirements of Section A listed above for audibility.

2.2.3.2

Shall meet the requirements of Section B listed above for visibility.

Addressable Devices - General 2.2.4.1

Addressable Devices shall provide an address-setting means using rotary decimal switches. Devices which use a binary address setting method, such as a dip switch, are not an allowable substitute.

2.2.4.2

Detectors shall be Intelligent and Addressable, and shall connect with two wires to the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuits.

2.2.4.3

Addressable smoke and thermal detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs.

2.2.4.4

Smoke detector sensitivity shall be set through the Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. Sensitivity may be automatically adjusted by the panel on a time-ofday basis.

2.2.4.5

Using software in the FACP, detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72, Chapter 7.

2.2.4.6

The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated remotely on command from the control panel.

2.2.4.7 Detectors shall also store an internal identifying type code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of device (ION, PHOTO, THERMAL). 2.2.5 Addressable Manual Stations: Addressable Manual Stations shall, on command from the Control Panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch. 2.2.6 Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detector: The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. 2.2.7 Intelligent Ionization Smoke Detector: The detectors shall use the dual-chamber ionization principal to measure products of combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of products of combustion. 2.2.8

2.2.9

Intelligent Thermal Detectors 2.2.8.1

Thermal Detectors shall be intelligent addressable devices rated at 135 degrees fahrenheit (58 Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F. (9.4 C.) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit.

2.2.8.2

Detectors located in areas of excessive ambient temperatures shall be of the traditional type with addressable monitor modules per zone.

Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector 2.2.9.1

In-Duct Smoke Detector Housing shall accommodate either an ionization sensor or a photoelectric sensor, that provides continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification from the panel.

2.2.9.2

Duct Detectors shall be furnished and connected to the Fire Alarm System under this section and shall be installed, powered and wired to the HVAC Equipment by others.

2.2.10 Addressable Dry Contact Monitor Module: Addressable Monitor Modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of conventional Alarm Initiating Devices (any N.O. dry contact device) to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuits. 2.2.11 Addressable Control Module: Addressable Control Modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of one conventional Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) of compatible, 24 VDC powered, polarized Audio/Visual Notification Appliances. For fan shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control module may be set to operate as a dry contract relay. 2.2.12 Waterflow Switches: Flow switches shall be furnished and installed by sprinkler contractor and connected to the fire alarm system under this scope or work, 2.2.13 Sprinkler and Standpipe Valve Supervisory Switches: Valve supervisory switches shall be furnished and installed by mechanical contractor and connected to the fire alarm system under this scope of work.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-123

Part 5

2.2.14 Remote Alphanumeric Display Annunciator: The Alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, remotely located back-lit LCD display containing a minimum of eighty (80) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text. 2.3

BATTERIES: Batteries shall have sufficient capacity to power the system for not less than twenty-four hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

3.2

INSTALLATION: 3.1.1

Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.

3.1.2

Smoke detectors shall not be installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is ongoing during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from contamination and physical damage.

TEST: Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall be in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 7.

3.3

FINAL INSPECTION: At the final inspection a factory trained representative of the manufacturer shall demonstrate that the systems function properly in every respect.

3.4

INSTRUCTION: Provide instruction as required for operating the system. Hands-on demonstrations of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program changes and functions shall be provided.

END OF SECTION 28 31 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-124

Part 5

SECTION 31 10 00 - SITE CLEARING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

1.2

DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 1.1.1

Extent of site clearing is shown on drawings. Contractor shall not remove existing plant materials in areas to remain un-improved.

1.1.2

Site clearing includes, but is not limited to, removal of trees and stumps and other vegetation, clearing and grubbing, removing above-grade improvements, and removing below-grade improvements as required, including walls, concrete, paving, utilities and other materials.

JOB CONDITIONS: 1.2.1 Traffic: Conduct site clearing operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without permission from authorities having jurisdiction. 1.2.2 Protection of Adjoining Property: Protect improvements on adjoining properties from damage by the construction activities. Restore improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to parties having jurisdiction. 1.2.3 Complete the clearing and site preparation work before starting earthwork. Erect temporary barricades, enclosure, and protection of adjacent properties before starting site clearance work. 1.2.4 The drawings show general information only. Inspect and review site condition to determine existing conditions, character and extent of removals required which will effect construction operations. 1.2.5 Existing Utilities: Existing underground and overhead lines indicated are shown from best possible information available and must be verified by the contractor prior to starting work. It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to verify the locations of existing underground and overhead lines. 1.2.6 It shall be understood and agreed that additional underground utilities cannot be or may not have been located and that no indication is contained on the Drawings; therefore exercise extreme caution during clearing, grading, excavating, trenching, and like work. Should such lines be encountered, give notice, in writing, and do not proceed until adequate Investigation has been made, the line identified, and Instructions issued as to how to proceed. 1.2.7 Barricades and work areas: Provide barricades, warning (signed and lighting) and maintenance and supervision thereof, in accordance with applicable Federal, State and local Codes and their respective requirements, or as may be directed from time to time. Do not commence site clearing until barricades and warnings are in place. 1.2.8 Protection of Existing Trees and Vegetation: Protect existing trees and other vegetation indicated to remain in place, as noted in Section 31 13 00.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not applicable to work of this section. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

SITE CLEARING: 3.1.1 General: Remove trees, stumps, shrubs, grass and other vegetation, improvements, or obstructions interfering with installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and roots. Carefully and cleanly cut roots and branches of trees indicated to be left standing, where such roots and branches obstruct new construction. 3.1.2 Remove waste materials and unsuitable and excess topsoil from Owner’s property and dispose of off site to a legal disposal area. Burning off debris on site is not permitted. 3.1.3 Maintain topsoil to whatever depths encountered in a manner to allow intermingling with underlying subsoil or other material. Stockpile as required for future use in planting areas as directed by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. Cover storage piles to prevent erosion or windblown dust. Dispose of excess soil off site. 3.1.4 Remove sub-surface obstructions which interfere with the new sub-surface work. The drawings indicate the approximate location of known existing sub-surface utilities, piping, other sub-surface conditions. If existing sub-surface condition are discovered or encountered, which are not indicated on the drawings, stop the site work at such locations immediately, notify Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer and obtain instruction from Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer before proceeding. 3.1.5 Remove existing works and items which are required to be removed in such a manner that minimum damage and disturbance is caused to adjacent and connecting work. Repair or replace work which is damaged by these operations. 3.1.6 The drawings indicate the approximate location of known existing utility lines, either above ground or sub-surface, such as water, electric, sewer that are to be removed or relocated. Existing underground and overhead utility locations must be verified by the Contractor prior to starting work. If existing utilities are discovered or encountered, which are not shown on the drawings, the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer shall be immediately notified and instruction obtained from Sheriff, Project Manager, and

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-125

Part 5

Architect/Engineer before proceeding. Before their removal, complete required new rerouting as well as required temporary connections and make operative so that their functions to other existing structures served by them can be continuous and beyond this project site before excavation is started. 3.2

NOISE ABATEMENT AND DUST CONTROL: 3.2.1 Noise Abatement: Limit noise to a reasonable level as related to specific items of equipment used and their hours of use. This does not preclude the use of mechanical equipment, such s jack hammers, power-driven fasteners, and other approved equipment. 3.2.2 Dust Control: During demolition and site clearing, keep dust, and dirt from blowing or spreading by watering down at regular intervals. 3.2.3 Air Pollution Controls: Meet the requirements of Section 11017 of the Government Code and to the requirements of the San Diego County Air Pollution Control District.

END OF SECTION 31 10 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-126

Part 5

SECTION 31 13 00 - TREE PROTECTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

1.2

WORK INCLUDED: 1.1.1

Fencing existing trees and shrubs to protect branches, roots, and trunks from construction damage.

1.1.2

Protect root zones of existing plants from trenching and compaction construction.

1.1.3

Repair of minor construction damage to existing trees and shrubs.

1.1.4

Replacement of existing plants which are extensively damaged or die as a result of construction damage.

1.1.5

Maintenance of tree protection.

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.2.1

Retain the services of a qualified professional tree expert or nurseryman for all repair work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1

Protective tree wound paint of standard bituminous products.

2.1.2 Materials for fencing of trees and shrubs to be protected are at the contractor’s option subject to the approval of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. Minimum acceptable materials are standard 42” orange plastic barricade safety grid construction fencing wire farm fence supported by studded steel “T” posts, or temporary chain link fencing panels. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PROTECTION: 3.1.1 Install fencing around existing trees to remain. Install fencing at the drip line of the tree (outside limits of the branches), or at locations as shown on the plans.

3.1.2

3.2

3.4.1.1

Install tree protection prior to the start of any other construction activities, materials delivery or storage on site.

3.4.1.2

Maintain tree protection throughout project construction and until removal is approved by Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

Protect root zones of existing trees to remain from compaction during construction. 3.1.2.1

Construction vehicles and/or construction workers vehicle parking and storage of construction materials is not permitted inside the temporary fencing or drip line (spread of branches) of trees to remain.

3.4.1.1

Construction roads shall not pass beneath the drip line of trees to remain unless approved by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

TRENCHING: 3.2.1

Trenching near existing trees and shrubs to remain shall meet the following minimum distances from the base of the plant: 3.2.1.1

3.2.2

3.3

Less than 6” trunk diameter 6”-12” trunk diameter Greater than 12” trunk diameter

8’ min. 12’ min. 16’ min.

Trenching closer to trees and shrubs than shown above shall be approved by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer prior to trenching.

TREE AND SHRUB REPAIR: 3.3.1

Remove any branches which are damaged or die as a result of construction.

3.3.2

Make all cuts back to a bud, branch, or main trunk.

3.3.3

Make all cuts flush, leaving no stubs.

3.3.4

Trees bruised or scared during construction shall have the injured cambium layer traced back to living tissue and removed.

3.3.5

Smooth and shape all wounds so as not to retain water.

3.3.6

Treat all cuts over ¾ inch diameter with tree wound paint.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-127

Part 5

3.4

TREE AND SHRUB REPLACEMENT: 3.4.1 Replace any existing plants scheduled to remain which are extensively damaged such as to change the natural habit or shape of the plant; or whichever die as a result of construction damage. 3.4.1.1

Replace in size and kind any plants 4” and less in diameter measured 6” above the base.

3.4.1.2

Replace plants larger than 4” in diameter with plants of the same kind having a minimum diameter of 4” measured above the base.

END OF SECTION 31 13 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-128

Part 5

SECTION 31 22 00 - GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes labor and material necessary to complete site grading as indicated and specified. The Conditions of the Contract, Soils Report Job #10-11581G prepared by CT&E dated July 12, 2013 and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein. Comply with Soils Report if it is more stringent than herein specified.

1.2

1.3

1.4

RELATED WORK: 1.2.1

Site clearing is specified in Section 31 10 00.

1.2.2

Excavating and backfilling for structures is specified in Section 31 23 00.

1.2.3

Testing and inspection is specified in Section 01 45 00.

1.2.4

Termite control is specified in Section 31 31 16.

REFERENCES: 1.3.1

"California Building Code, current edition (CBC)”. Appendix A33, except as modified hereinafter.

1.3.2

County of San Diego Special Provisions for Improvement of Subdivision Streets.

1.3.3

County of San Diego Standard Specification.

1.3.4

County of San Diego Standard Drawings.

1.3.5

County of San Diego Grading Ordinance.

DEFINITIONS: 1.4.1

Fill: Fill materials placed to raise the natural grade of the site.

1.4.2

On-Site Material: Soil material which is imported from the required excavation on the site.

1.4.3

Imported Material: Soil material which is imported in from off-site areas.

1.4.4

Select Material: On-site or imported material which is approved for use as structural fill.

1.4.5 Structural Fill: Fill upon which the Owner's Soil Engineer has made sufficient tests and observations to enable him to issue a written statement that in his opinion the fill has been placed and compacted in accordance with the specification requirements. 1.4.6 Degree of Compaction: The ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the dry density of the fill material as compacted in the field to the maximum dry density of the same material as determined by ASTM D 1557-91, as applicable. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

FILL MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Select Fill Material: Materials for compacted fill shall consist of material imported or excavated from the project site cut areas that, in the opinion of the Owner's Soil Engineer, is suitable for use in constructing fills. The material shall contain no rocks or hard lumps greater than 6 inches in size and shall contain at least 40% of material smaller than 1/4 inch in size. No material of a perishable, spongy, or otherwise improper nature shall be used in filling. 2.1.2 Fine Grading Fill Material: Select fine material containing no rocks or clods over 2 inches in diameter which in the opinion of the Owner's Soil Engineer is suitable for fill material. Stockpile such material which may be encountered on site, or use, or supplement with approved borrow material for fine grading work. 2.1.3 Where select material is placed within 3 feet of rough grade, it shall contain no rocks or hard lumps greater than 6 inches in size and that swells less than 3% when compacted as herein specified for compacted fill and when subjected to an axial pressure of 160 PSF. 2.1.4 Representative samples of material to be used for fill will be tested in the laboratory by the Owner's Soil Engineer in order to determine the maximum density, optimum moisture content and classification of the soil. In addition, the Soil Engineer will determine the approximate bearing value of a recompacted, saturated sample by direct shear tests or other tests applicable to the particular soil. 2.1.5 During grading operations, soil types other than those analyzed in the report of the soil investigation may be encountered. Consult with the Soil Engineer to determine the suitability of these soils. 2.1.6 On-Site Topsoil: Topsoil shall be Class A as described in Section 308-2.1.1 of the Current Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction. Topsoil shall be on-site soil. Unless otherwise required in landscaping documents.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-129

Part 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION OF WORK: 3.1.1 Verify the location and existence of bench marks, survey corners and monuments. Take special care to protect bench marks, survey corners and monuments. Should any become displaced, covered or destroyed, employ a Civil Engineer or Surveyor registered in the State of California to reset those points. Permanently reset corners at grade or a maximum of 3 inches below grade. 3.1.2 Before beginning work, place grade stakes not more than 50'-0" apart along the tops and bottoms of slopes, and sufficient control in the area of work to establish grades to which the ground surfaces are to be brought. This work shall be done by a Civil Engineer or a Surveyor registered in the State of California, employed by the Contractor. 3.1.3

Remove from the site all rubble, debris, vegetation, roots, weeds, and perishable material.

3.1.4 The surface of areas to receive fill shall be free from ruts, hummocks or other uneven features which would tend to prevent uniform compaction by the equipment used. 3.1.5 Cut and fill quantities as/if shown on the Documents are estimates only. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to calculate and estimate their own quantities at the time of bid to insure a complete grading job. 3.1.6 Step or bench the original ground when the slope of the natural ground receiving fill exceed 20% (five horizontal units to one vertical unit). Cut benches to a firm compact soil condition. The lower bench shall be at least 10 feet wide and all other benches at least 6 feet wide. Compact the horizontal portion of each bench before receiving fill as specified herein for compacted natural ground. Bench ground slopes flatter than 20% when considered necessary by the Architect or Soils Engineer. 3.2

SOILS REPORT AND SOILS ENGINEER: 3.2.1 A Soils Investigation Report has been prepared for this project for the Owner and is on file at the Office of the Architect. The information is not intended as representations or warranties of the continuity of such conditions between soil borings. The Owner or Architect will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom. The data are made available for the convenience of the Contractor. 3.2.2

Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no cost to the Owner.

3.2.3

Recompact all loose soils as specified herein.

3.2.4 The existing soils, as specified herein, on the site may be reused for compacted fill as directed in the soils report and as approved and directed by the Owner's Soils Engineer. 3.3

EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: 3.3.1

Excavate to the elevations and the form indicated with finish grades and slopes cut true and straight.

3.3.2 Use care in making cuts so that backfill will not be required in cut areas. Fill excavation taken to greater depth than required with approved material placed to a minimum relative compaction of 90% in layers not more than 6 inches deep when completed. Do not use material of a perishable, spongy, or otherwise improper nature. 3.3.3 Repair work due to over or careless excavation, including additional depth of foundations if required to penetrate backfill due to excessive cuts. Provide pumping or draining necessary to keep excavated areas free from standing water. 3.3.4 Remove rock encountered in excavating. If blasting is necessary, it shall be done in accordance with the provisions of the state and local codes and ordinances, by skilled operators. The Contractor shall assume the sole responsibility of this operation and shall hold the Owner and the Architect free of damages resulting therefrom. 3.3.5

Maximum allowable rock and clod size in the upper 6 inches of earth fill or cut subgrade shall conform to the following: 3.3.5.1

3.3.5.2

3.3.5.3

Under Building Slabs:

MAXIMUM SIZE

(1) Subgrade with slab over:

2 inches

(2) Subgrade with sand or rock base course over:

6 inches

Under Concrete Flatwork (Walks, Drives, etc.) (1)

Subgrade with flatwork over:

2 inches

(2)

Subgrade with 4" sand base course:

6 inches

Under Asphaltic Paving: (1)

Subgrade with paving over:

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-130

2 inches

Part 5

(2)

3.3.5.4

Subgrade with 4 inches minimum aggregate base:

Under All Other Areas:

6 inches 6 inches

3.3.6 Rocks over maximum allowable size (up to 12 inch greatest dimension) may be used in fills 3 feet or deeper below the subgrade as directed by the Architect, except in building pad areas. 3.4

COMPACTED FILLS: 3.4.1

Construct fills under the supervision of the Soils Engineer.

3.4.2

Fill materials shall be "Select Fill Material" as specified herein, or imported fill if required.

3.4.3 Place and compact fill material and base fill under slabs as herein specified in the filled areas and as indicated. Place the fill material in layers which when compacted shall not exceed 6 inches in thickness. Compact each layer after it has been placed, mixed and spread evenly to a minimum relative compaction noted below as determined by the ASTM D 1557-78. 3.4.3.1

Compact as follows: Under buildings: Under asphaltic concrete pavement (top 6 inch subgrade) Trenches On top 3' under buildings & paved areas

3.4.4

90% 95% 90% 90%

Compact surface of fill slopes so that the slopes are stable and there is no excessive loose soil on the slopes.

3.4.5 Compact each layer to the specified density after it has been placed, mixed and spread evenly. Compaction shall be accomplished by sheepsfoot rollers, vibratory rollers, multiple-wheel pneumatic-tired rollers or other types of acceptable compacting equipment. Equipment shall be of such design that it will be able to compact the fill to the specified density. Compaction shall be continuous over the entire area and the equipment shall make sufficient trips to insure that the desired density has been obtained. 3.4.6 When the moisture content of the fill material is above that specified by the Soil Engineer, aerate the fill material by blading, mixing, or other satisfactory method until the moisture content is as specified. 3.5

FINISH GRADING: 3.5.1 Finish upper 6 inches of cut and fill areas with the specified fine grading fill material, including earth banks, and excluding areas scheduled to receive base course materials for subsequent concrete slabs and flatwork or asphaltic concrete paving (however, these areas shall be graded to the specified tolerances) and excluding lawn and turf areas. 3.5.2 Spread, moisten and compact the material to the required subgrade elevations, with a maximum deviation of 0.10 feet above or below a straight line forming a uniform slope between changes in grade. 3.5.3 Finish subgrades shall allow for thickness and slopes of subsequent construction. Grade to provide uniform slope between elevation points or lines, or between such elevations and existing grades. 3.5.4 Existing and proposed cut and fill banks shall be carefully cut and trimmed and left within 6 inches of slope indicated. For banks to be planted, drag rather than blade, to avoid too smooth a surface. Remove and dispose of loose rock over 1 inch.

3.6

SPREADING OF ON-SITE TOPSOIL: 3.6.1

Prior to ripping of subgrade, spread gypsum over the area at the rate of 160 pounds per 1,000 S.F.

3.6.2 Soil in all planting areas, except on slopes exceeding 4:1 gradient, shall be ripped and loosened to a depth of 12 inches below subgrade then spread 4 inches of topsoil disc, scarify and mix into existing soil. Remove debris, foreign matter and stones in excess of one inch in diameter. Drag smooth and water compact. Place remaining topsoil to finish grade. Drag smooth and water compact. 3.6.3 After incorporation of 4 inches of topsoil and water compaction, spread an additional 4 inches of on-site topsoil evenly in all areas to be planted, except on slopes exceeding 4:1. After spreading, water compact. 3.6.4 3.7

Measure on-site topsoil for thickness when it is fully water compacted and in a settled condition.

PROTECTION OF WORK: 3.7.1 During construction, properly grade excavated surfaces to provide positive drainage and prevent ponding of water. Control surface water to avoid damage to adjoining properties or to finished work on the site. Take remedial measures to prevent erosion of freshly graded areas and until such time as permanent drainage and erosion control features have been installed. 3.7.2 After completion of grading and the Soil Engineer has finished his observation of the work, no further excavation or filling shall be done except under the observation of the Soil Engineer.

3.8

JOB RECORD DRAWINGS:

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-131

Part 5

3.8.1 Maintain a set of prints and legibly record, in red ink, deviations from the contract drawings. In some cases, it may be necessary to use several prints of the same drawings in order to legibly record all "As-Built" data. The following data shall be recorded on the job record prints, and the accuracy of the data shall be certified by a Surveyor or Civil Engineer registered in the State of California as further described in Section 01 77 00 of these specifications. 3.8.1.1

Pad and height certifications is an anticipated requirement by the County. Contractor shall hire at their expense a licensed surveyor or civil engineer to certify field conditions per the County requirements.

3.8.1.2

Dimensions shall be given from face of permanent buildings or other permanent installation, rather than portables or other temporary locations, which are subject to change.

END OF SECTION 31 22 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-132

Part 5

SECTION 31 23 00 - EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS & DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes all labor and material necessary to complete all excavating, backfilling and compacting for structures as indicated and specified. The Conditions of the Contract, Soils Report Job #10-11581G prepared by CT&E July 12, 2013 and Division 1 apply to this section as if fully repeated herein. Comply with Soils Report if it is more stringent than specified herein.

1.2

1.3

RELATED WORK: 1.2.1

Testing and inspection is specified in Section 01 45 00.

1.2.2

Site grading is specified in Section 31 22 00.

REFERENCES: "California Building Code, current edition (CBC)”, except as modified hereinafter.

1.4

DEFINITIONS: 1.4.1

Fill: Fill materials placed to backfill excavations.

1.4.2

On-Site Material: Soil material which is imported in from the required excavation on the site.

1.4.3

Imported Material: Soil material which is imported in from off-site areas.

1.4.4 Degree of Compaction: The ratio, expressed as a percentage, of the dry density of the fill material as compacted in the field to the maximum dry density of the same material as determined by ASTM D 1557-91, as applicable. 1.5

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.5.1

Full time observations will be made by the Owner's Soil Engineer during the excavating, filling and compacting operations.

1.5.2 The Soil Engineer will make field density tests in accordance with ASTM D 1556-90 or D 2922-96. When these tests indicate that the density of any layer of fill or portion thereof is below the specified density or not near the optimum moisture content, the particular layer or portions shall be reworked until the specified density and/or moisture content has been obtained. 1.5.3 1.6

Required inspection and testing will be paid for by the Owner as specified in Section 01 45 00.

PRE-EXCAVATION MEETING: Prior to commencing the work of this section, the contractor shall schedule and attend a meeting at the job site to discuss conformance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Request attendance of representatives from Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer, Contractor, subcontractors, and other parties who are involved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SELECT MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Materials for Compacted Fill under Structures: Consist of material imported or excavated from the cut areas that, in the opinion of the Owner's Soil Engineer, is suitable for use in compacted fills. The material shall contain no rocks or hard lumps greater than 6 inches in size and shall contain at least 40% of material smaller than 1/4 inch in size. Do not use material of a perishable, spongy, or otherwise improper nature. 2.1.2 Select Backfill Material for Utility Trenches: Non expansive soil excavated from the utility trench or site cut areas which in the opinion of the Owner's soil engineer is suitable. A minimum of 40% of the material shall pass a No. 4 screen. Rock and clod size shall be limited to 3 inches maximum diameter for trenches 12 inches or less in width. 2.1.3

Sand for Use Under the Building: Fine sand aggregate meeting the requirements of ASTM C 33-82.

2.1.4 Sand for Use in Utility Trenching: Class A screened fill with a maximum particle size of one half inch, not exceeding 18% and free of expansive materials, debris and organic matter. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXCAVATING: 3.1.1 General: Excavation shall comply with section 300-1 and 300-2 of the standard specifications for Public Works construction and these specifications herein. Excavate to lines, grades and elevations required. Allow space for formwork, waterproofing application, and work of like nature requiring extra side excavation. Notify the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer two working days in advance of completion of excavation, ready for form work. Excavations shall comply with all state and local regulations as well as the requirements of CAL/OSHA.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-133

Part 5

3.1.2

3.1.3

Over Excavation: 3.1.2.1

If excavations for foundation work are made deeper than indicated, fill with same concrete as specified for foundation work. If excavations for foundation work are made wider than indicated, form footing work or fill with same concrete as specified for foundation work.

3.1.2.2

If excavations for slabs or flatwork are made deeper than indicated, fill with coarse, fresh-water sand to required levels. Compact near optimum moisture content to a minimum of 90% density, and 95% density at asphaltic paving areas.

3.1.2.3

If excavations to greater depths than shown are required by the Owner's Soil Engineer, in order to reach satisfactory soil bearing conditions, additional costs will be paid by the Owner, provided the costs are approved prior to the extra work being done.

Pumping and Draining: Keep excavations free of standing water; pump or drain as required.

3.1.4 Shoring: Provide and maintain such shoring or bracing as required to protect structures and excavations from caving or other earth movement and as required to conform with CAL-OSHA requirements. 3.2

BACKFILLING: 3.2.1 Requirement: Do no backfilling until approval is obtained for each specific location. Notify the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer and Soils Engineer one working day in advance of the work. 3.2.2 Placing: Place material in layers not exceeding 6 inches in compacted thickness. Move equipment over entire surface of each layer, so ruts or pockets are not formed. Obtain specified density before additional layers are placed. 3.2.2.1

Placing and compacting adjacent to walls that have been waterproofed shall be done with care to avoid damaging the waterproofing. Heavy machinery shall not be used closer than 2 feet from such walls. Use mechanical hand tampers for compacting backfill within 2 feet of waterproofed walls.

3.2.3 Backfill Compaction at Structures: Unless otherwise specified, compact fill material while at a moisture content near the optimum moisture content and to a density that is not less than 90% of the maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557-91 or other density methods that will obtain equivalent results. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. 3.3

FINISH GRADING: 3.3.1 General: Fine grade to bring areas to required lines and grades. The subgrade elevation within the building area for slabs on grade (without a base course) shall be within 0.50 inch along a 10 foot straight edge. 3.3.2 Slope finish grades to drain surface water away from buildings, walks, paving, and other structures a minimum of 1% unless otherwise indicated. Generally, grade with uniform slope between points where elevations are given, or between such points and existing grades.

3.4

3.5

COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS: 3.4.1

Clean Up: Leave entire graded portions of the site "rake clean".

3.4.2

Disposal: Pick-up and transport unsuitable, deleterious excess material, and debris to an off-site legal disposal area.

TRENCHING FOR UTILITIES: 3.5.1 Layout: Carefully layout the route of each underground utility prior to trenching. Review drawings and coordinate with underground work by other trades to avoid conflicts. 3.5.2 Clearances: Take special notice and maintain the required horizontal and vertical depth clearances from structural footings for utility trenches running parallel to footings. Do not violate the area of the footing bearing prism. In the event of conflict, (i.e., the utility cannot be relocated or its depth changed), proceed as directed by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. Lower structural footings to maintain proper clearances for underground utilities trenching without additional cost to the Owner. 3.5.3 Excavation for utilities shall comply with section 306-1.1 of the standard specifications for Public Works construction and these specifications herein. Excavate trenches for utilities (i.e., pipe, conduit, ducts, other utilities) to the required lines, grades and elevations indicated on the drawings and as specified. Hand trim changes in direction and bottoms of trenches. Provide shoring in trenches over 5 feet in depth and also in trenches where unstable soil conditions are encountered. Comply with CAL-OSHA requirements. 3.5.4 Pipe Trench Dimensions: The following requirements are considered minimal unless indicated otherwise in order to provide adequate pipe clearances and bedding. Provide trenches wider than the specified minimums where required to properly install the particular type of piping. In the event utility company regulations, code requirements, or the pipe manufacturer's recommendations differ from these provisions, the most restrictive requirements shall take precedence:

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-134

Part 5

3.5.4.1

Pipe Burial Depths:

Sewer & Drainage:

24" + pipe O.D. + 3" bed

Water (Domestic) PVC: All Other:

30" + pipe O.D. + 4" bed 24" (30" at planters) + pipe + 4" bed

Water (Irrigation Pressure Piping): 3" diameter or less: 4" diameter or more:

18" + pipe O.D. + 2" bed Same as domestic water

Notes: Finish grade to top of pipe, typical. O.D.: Outside dimension. 3.5.4.2

3.6

Trench Widths:

Sewer & Drainage:

12" + pipe O.D. for 4" to 18" diameter pipe

Water (Domestic):

8" + pipe O.D.

3.5.4.3

Do not run electrical power and communications conduit in a common trench with sewer, drainage, water or gas piping.

3.5.4.4

Additional Provisions for Underground Piping Within Building Areas: Refer to applicable specification sections under Division 15 as indicated.

3.5.4.5

Requirements for Underground Electrical and Communications Conduit, Ducts: Refer to applicable specification sections under Division 16 and details as indicated.

CLEAN UP: Pick up and transport unsuitable and deleterious material to an off site legal disposal area.

END OF SECTION 31 23 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-135

Part 5

SECTION 31 31 16 - TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK: This work includes soil treatment for termite control, as herein specified. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.2.1 In addition to requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work, including preparation of substrate and application. 1.2.2 Engage a professional pest control operator, licensed in accordance with regulations of governing authorities for application of soil treatment solution.

1.3

JOB CONDITIONS: 1.3.1 Restrictions: Do not apply soil treatment solution until excavating, filling and grading operations are completed, except as otherwise required in construction operations. 1.3.2 To insure penetration, do not apply soil treatment to frozen or excessively wet soils or during inclement weather. Comply with handling and application instructions of the soil toxicant manufacturer.

1.4

SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1

Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions.

1.4.2

Specific Product Warranty: 1.4.2.1

Furnish written warranty certifying that applied soil poisoning treatment will prevent infestation of subterranean termites and, that if subterranean termite activity is discovered during warranty period, Contractor will re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation.

1.4.2.2

Provide warranty for a period of 5 years from date of treatment, signed by Applicator or Contractor.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

SOIL TREATMENT SOLUTION: 2.1.1

Fuel oil will not be permitted as a dilutent. Provide a working solution of one of the following acceptable chemical elements:

Syngenta ‘Demon Max’, FMC ‘Talstar One’ or approved equal. 2.1.2 Other solutions may be used as recommended by Applicator and if acceptable to Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer and local governing authorities. Use only soil treatment solutions which are not injurious to planting. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

APPLICATION: 3.1.1 Surface Preparation: Remove foreign matter which could decrease effectiveness of treatment on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated, except previously compacted areas under slabs and foundations. Toxicants may be applied before placement of compacted fill under slabs, if recommended by toxicant manufacturer. 3.1.2

Application Rates: Apply soil treatment solution as follows: 3.1.2.1

Under new slab-on-grade structures, treat soil before concrete slabs are placed using either power sprayer or tank-type garden sprayer per manufacturers written recommendations and amounts.

3.1.2.2

Soil beneath raised wood framed structures, per manufacturer's written recommendations and amounts.

3.1.2.3

Allow not less than 12 hours for drying after application, before beginning concrete placement or other construction activities.

3.1.3 Post signs in areas of application warning workers that soil poisoning has been applied. Remove signs when areas are covered by other construction. 3.1.4 Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 31 31 16

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-136

Part 5

SECTION 32 12 00 - ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

This section covers the furnishing and installing of aggregate base, asphalt concrete surfacing and seal coat work complete in place, as shown and noted on the drawings. The Conditions of the Contract, Soils Report Job #10-11581G prepared by CT&E dated July 12, 2013 and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein. Comply with Soils Report if it is more stringent than specified herein. (Pavement recommendations are provided in the soils report herein.)

1.2

GOVERNING STANDARD: 1.2.1 All work included in this section shall conform to the applicable requirements of the current Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, including Regional Standard Special Provisions, and County of San Diego Standard Specifications Special Provisions for Improvement of Subdivision Streets, and Standard Drawings, hereinafter referred to as the Standard Specifications.

1.3

SUBMITTALS: 1.3.1

Submittal procedures and quantities are specified in Section 01 33 00.

1.3.2 Product Data: Submit job mix design for asphalt concrete mixture for review. Submit certificates from the asphaltic concrete producer indicating compliance with the mix design and these specifications. 1.4

PROTECTION: Concrete walks, curbs and bases, and other improvements adjacent to the operations shall be protected to ensure that no asphalt will appear on exposed surfaces. Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by his employees or equipment and shall make necessary repairs. Building, curb, walk, and other surfaces shall be covered with paper or other protection, where required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACING: 2.1.1 Asphalt concrete surfacing for the wearing surface shall be furnished from a commercial asphalt central mixing plant and shall be as specified on the recommendations of the Soils Report and/or Civil drawings whichever is more stringent and shall conform to the following minimum requirements:

2.2

2.1.1.1

Prime Coat: Liquid asphalt shall be medium curing (MC-70) in conformance with Section 203-2 of the "Standard Specifications".

2.1.1.2

Tack Coat: Diluted SS-1 or SS-1h emulsion or undiluted RS-1 emulsion, or RC-70 liquid asphalt. Tack coat shall conform to the "Standard Specifications" Section 203-2 for liquid asphalt and Section 203-3 for emulsion.

2.1.1.3

Paving Asphalt: Steam-refined, penetration grade PG-64-10, in accordance with Section 203-6 of the "Standard Specifications".

2.1.1.4

Aggregate: Coarse and fine aggregate shall be clean and free from decomposed materials, vegetable matter, and other deleterious substances. Aggregate shall be Class B as listed in Section 203-6, of the "Standard Specifications". ¾” maximum size for base course and ½” maximum size for surface course.

2.1.5.5

Cold Milling of Existing Pavement: Cold Milling of existing pavement shall be per section 302-1 of "Standard Specifications" and project plans. Minimum depth of cut shall be 2".

BASE COURSE MATERIAL: Base material shall be untreated crushed aggregate base as specified in Section 220-2 of the "Standard Specifications" and in the Soils Report.

2.3

2.4

SEAL COAT MATERIALS: 2.3.1

Asphaltic Emulsion shall be grade SS-1 or SS-1h in accordance with Section 203-5 of the "Standard Specifications".

2.3.2

Sand shall be clean and dry.

SOIL STERILANT: Chemical sterilant shall be a borate chlorate sterilant containing not less than 25% sodium chlorate and 75% disodium octaborate and shall be mixed thoroughly with water at the rate of 1 to 2 pounds of sterilant per gallon of water. Furnish a written guarantee against weed and plant growth through paving for a period of 2 years.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

STERILANT APPLICATION: 3.1.1 Sterilant-water mixture (1 to 2 pounds of sterilant per gallon of water) shall be applied so that the equivalent of 3 to 4 pounds of dry sterilant is applied per 100 square feet of paving.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-137

Part 5

3.1.2 Take precautions necessary to prevent contamination of adjacent soil areas with sterilant and for the protection of personnel. Keep soil sterilant out of drip area of shrub and trees. 3.1.3 Upon completion of the weed control treatment, and as a condition for final acceptance, furnish a written certificate stating the brand name of the sterilant and the manufacturer, and that the sterilant used had a least the minimum required concentration, and that the rate and method of application complied in every respect with the conditions and standards contained herein. 3.2

APPLICATION OF BASE COURSE: 3.2.1

Base course shall be minimum uniform thickness after compaction as indicated in the Soils Report.

3.2.2 Base course shall be applied over finished subgrade and compacted in conformity with Section 301-2 of the "Standard Specifications". Compacting equipment shall be suitable and adequate for the size of the installation and capable of achieving the compaction specified. 3.2.3 Relative compaction of each layer of compacted base material shall be not less than 95% of that determined in accordance with Section 301-1.3 of the Standard Specifications. 3.2.4 Thickness of finished base course shall not vary more than 0.05 foot from the planned thickness at any point. Base which does not conform to the above requirements shall be reshaped or reworked, watered, and thoroughly recompacted to conform to the specified requirements. 3.2.5 grade. 3.3

The surface of the finished aggregate base at any point shall not vary more than 0.05 foot above or below the theoretical

PLACING ASPHALT CONCRETE SURFACING: 3.3.1 Areas to be paved shall be covered with a layer of hot asphalt concrete surfacing not less than the thickness indicated in the Soils Report, after completion. 3.3.2 Paving material shall be delivered, laid, rolled, and finished in conformity with Section 302-5 of the "Standard Specifications". Spreading and compacting equipment shall be suitable and adequate size for the installation. 3.3.3 Finish paving shall conform to slopes, lines, and finish grades, shown and noted on the drawings, and shall drain properly with a 1/4" per foot slope minimum. Where adjacent surfaces are intended to be flush (as at public sidewalks and at existing paving), they shall conform smoothly at all points. 3.3.4 Finish paving shall conform to finish elevations within plus or minus 0.01 of a foot and shall be level to within plus or minus 1/8" in 10'-0" when measured with a 10'-0" straight edge in any direction. 3.3.5 After completion of paving work, paving shall be flooded with water, and resulting "ponds" shall be ringed with chalk. Such hollows shall be corrected with addition of asphalt concrete and re-rolling until paving is completely level and free from hollows and high spots.

3.4

SEAL COAT: Not less than two weeks after completion of paving, apply seal coat of surface emulsion over the entire area, in accordance with Section 302-4.3.2 of the Standard Specification.

3.5

PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT: The pavement shall not be used for vehicular traffic of any kind until pavement has cooled sufficiently after final rolling.

END OF SECTION 32 12 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-138

Part 5

SECTION 32 13 00 - CONCRETE WALKS, RAMPS, AND STEPS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

SCOPE 1.1.1

1.2

This section includes placing concrete for walks, ramps, and steps at location shown on the drawings.

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.2.1 All construction shall be in conformance with local and state codes. The contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all required permits. 1.2.2 Protect adjacent work and materials. Remove all rubbish and accumulated materials and leave work in a clean, orderly, and acceptable condition.

1.3

1.2.3

Obtain the pertinent engineering or architectural plans before commencing work.

1.2.4

Contractor shall provide safety barricades and flashers required by local codes.

MODIFICATIONS AND SAMPLES: 1.3.1 Design modifications by be made only as necessary to meet field conditions and to insure the correct alignment and relationship of the work, and only as directed by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. 1.3.2 All coloring materials shall be as manufactured by L.M. Scofield, Co., Los Angeles, CA; Davis Colors, Los Angeles, CA; or approved equal. 1.3.3 Sample concrete panels of not less than 6 (six) square feet are to be constructed on site at a location as directed by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. For each type of concrete pavement specified (except for natural gray broom finish), panels are to be poured, colored, and finished as detailed and specified. Panels may be used as part of the final construction, if approved.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Concrete and the equipment, workmanship, and materials, including all sampling and testing shall be in accordance with applicable requirements of section 303-5 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current edition). 2.1.2

All concrete for site flatwork shall be 3250 PSI minimum strength at 30 days with 3” slump range.

2.1.3 The forms shall conform to the applicable requirements of section 305-5.2 of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (current edition). 2.1.4 Use coarse aggregate conforming to the requirements for coarse aggregate as specified in the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction (Current edition). 2.1.5

Reinforcing bars shall be deformed steel bars, conforming with ASTM A 615, grade 40.

2.1.6 Welded wire mesh shall be plain cold drawn steel wire fabric, ASTM A 185. Furnish in flat sheets, not rolls, unless approved by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

PREPARATION: 3.1.1 The subgrade shall be constructed true to grade and to the cross section shown on the drawings. The subgrade shall be compacted to a density of 95 percent (minimum).

3.2

INSTALLATION: 3.2.1

Deposit concrete in forms on compacted subgrade.

3.2.2 Provide and install 3/8” wide preformed expansion joint material in concrete walks and cubs at intervals as specified on the plans, at intersections of concrete walks, and at intersections with other concrete surfaces, building foundations, and other fixed surfaces. Expansion joints are to be recessed ½” below the top of the finished pavement surface and shall have tear off plastic caps to allow for the installation of elastomeric sealant. 3.2.3 Provide and install ¼” wide preformed expansion joint material around all appurtenances such as manholes, inlets, utility poles, etc. that fall within the limits of portland cement concrete pavement sidewalk. 3.2.4

Level concrete off and tamp sufficiently to bring mortar to the surface. Finish off with a wood float afterward.

3.2.5

After floating walks and steps, round edges with an approved edger. Score concrete walks transversely at intervals not

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-139

Part 5

exceeding width of walk or as shown on the drawings. 3.2.6

Finish the final finishes of concrete for walks, ramps, and steps after floating. Finishes are as noted on the plans.

3.2.7 Protect and cure finished concrete paving, complying with applicable requirements of the Standard Specifications (Green Book). Use membrane forming curing compound or approved moist curing methods per manufacturer’s requirements. Follow manufacturer’s written instructions for colored concrete. 3.2.8 Furnish and install elastomeric expansion joint sealant in all ½” wide expansion joints. Color of sealant is to match finished concrete color. Spread clean silica sand on freshly filled joint sealant. 3.2.9

Repair or replace broken or defective concrete as directed by the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer.

3.2.10 Protect concrete surfaces from damage until acceptance of the work. Exclude traffic from pavements for at least 14 days after placement. 3.2.11

Sweep concrete pavement and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt or other foreign material prior to acceptance.

END OF SECTION 32 13 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-140

Part 5

SECTION 32 17 23 - PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes furnishing materials and painting traffic markings on pavement as indicated and specified herein. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Pavement Marking Paint: Vinyl acrylic type for use on asphaltic concrete and portland cement concrete, colors as indicated, specified herein. Approved products, or equal approved in accordance with Supplementary Conditions. 502 Vinyl Traffic Paint; Frazee Paint 160 Vinyl Traffic Paint; Sinclair Paint Traffic Paint W-801; Dunn-Edwards Corp. Or approved equal 2.1.2

Thinners: As recommended by the paint manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

APPLICATION: 3.1.1 Apply stripes and other markings on pavement, as indicated, with the use of cutout patterns and templates. Apply stripes and markings with sharp and accurate straight lines, with no fuzziness or waviness at edges of lines. 3.1.2

At completion, touch up stripes and markings which are not clear and distinct or which are not uniform in color.

END OF SECTION 32 17 23

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-141

Part 5

SECTION 32 31 13 - CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS: 1.1.1 Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY: 1.2.1

1.2.2

1.3

1.4

Section Includes: 1.2.1.1

Chain-link fences.

1.2.1.2

Swing gates

Related Sections: 1.2.2.1

Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete, for cast-in-place concrete post footings.

1.2.2.2

Section 08 71 02 - Door Hardware, for gate hardware.

REFERENCES: 1.3.1

CLFMI: Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute.

1.3.2

ACI: American Concrete Institute

1.3.3

ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials

SUBMITTALS: 1.4.1 Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions individual components and profiles, and finishes for chain-link fences and gates. 1.4.1.1

Fence and gate posts, rails, and fittings.

1.4.1.2

Chain-link fabric, reinforcements, and attachments.

1.4.1.3

Gates and hardware.

of

1.4.2 Shop Drawings: Show locations of fence, each gate, posts, rails, and tension wires and details of gate swing, or other operation, hardware, and accessories. Indicate materials, dimensions, sizes, weights, and finishes of components. Include plans, elevations, sections, gate swing and other required installation and operational clearances, and details of post anchorage and attachment and bracing. 1.4.3 Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of chain-link fences and gates certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1.4.4

1.4.5 1.5

Operation and Maintenance Data: For the following to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals: 1.4.4.1

Polymer finishes.

1.4.4.2

Gate hardware.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

QUALITY ASSURANCE: 1.5.1

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.5.2

Manufacturer: Provide a single manufacturer for all like products.

1.5.3 Emergency Access Requirements: required means of access.

Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for gates serving as a

1.5.4 Post and rail piping shall not be installed until the District Inspector verifies that the material meets the specified weight per lineal foot for each pipe size to be used. 1.5.5 1.6

Post footing excavations shall be approved by the District Inspector prior to setting any posts.

PROJECT CONDITIONS:

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-142

Part 5

1.6.1 Field Measurements: Verify layout information for chain-link fences and gates shown on Drawings in relation to property survey and existing structures. Verify dimensions by field measurements. 1.7

WARRANTY: 1.7.1 Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace components of chain-link fences and gates that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1.7.1.1

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

1.7.1.2

Failures include, but are not limited to: Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering; Fabric bowing, sagging, breakage or similar defects; Fence framework failure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

CHAIN-LINK FENCE FABRIC: 2.1.1 Carbon Steel Chain-Link Fence Fabric: Provide fabric fabricated in one-piece widths (measured between top and bottom of outer edge of selvage knuckle or twist) for fencing in height of 8 feet and less. Comply with CLFMI's "Product Manual" and with requirements indicated below: 2.1.2

Standard Fence Fabric with Vinyl Pre-inserted Slats: 2.1.2.1

Priva-Max, Mesh and Wire Size: 3 1/2 inch x 5 inch galvanized mesh, 0.148-inch diameter (9 gauge) with PVC slats creating a 95% privacy screen, or approved equal.

2.1.3 Zinc-Coated Fabric: ASTM A 392 Type II, hot-dipped galvanized after weaving. Class 2: Not less than 2.0 oz./sq. ft. of uncoated wire surface, when tested in accordance with ASTM A 90. 2.1.4 2.2

Selvage: Knuckled at both bottom and top selvages.

FENCE FRAMING: 2.2.1 Round Steel Pipe: Standard weight, Nominal Pipe Size (NPS), Schedule 40, galvanized steel pipe, hot-dipped after fabrication, complying with ASTM F 1083 and ASTM A53. Comply with ASTM F 1043, Material Design Group IA, Heavy Industrial Strength, external and internal coating Type A, consisting of not less than 2.0 oz./sq. ft. zinc coating per ASTM A 123; and the following strength and stiffness requirements: 2.2.1.1

Line, End, Corner, and Pull Posts and Top Rail and gate frames: Per ASTM A53 requirements, Schedule 40 steel pipe, galvanized.

2.2.1.2

Thread protectors shall not be used as couplings under any circumstances.

2.2.1.3

Post and Rails, and Horizontal Framework Members: Framing, including rails, braces, line, terminal, and corner posts, shall comply with ASTM F 1043.

2.2.2 Post Brace Rails: Provide brace rail with truss rod assembly for each gate, end, and pull post. Provide two brace rails extending in opposing directions, each with truss rod assembly, for each corner post and for pull posts. Provide rail ends and clamps for attaching rails to posts. 2.2.3 Top Rails: Provide at all chain-link fencing. Fabricate top rail from lengths 21 feet or longer, with wedged-end or fabricated for expansion-type coupling, forming a continuous rail along top of chain-link fabric. Provide expansion couplings 6 inches long at each joint in top rails. 2.2.4 Intermediate Rails: Provide at tennis court and multi-purpose court wall fencing, and where indicated. Match top rail for coating and strength and stiffness requirements. 2.2.5

Corner posts, gate posts, terminal posts, and pull posts shall be minimum 2-½ inches inside diameter by 5.79 lb/ft. 2.2.5.1

Flanging of terminal posts: 2.2.5.1.1 Terminal posts and gate posts shall only be flanged to assist in portable moves. 2.2.5.1.2 A larger pipe shall be dropped over a smaller post only when a short run of existing fencing is terminated and when digging a new hole to install a bigger terminal post is impractical. This shall be used as a temporary repair, not as a permanent repair. 2.2.5.1.3 If it is necessary to create a removable section of fence (to assist in portable moves), a smaller pipe shall be sleeved into a smaller line post. 2.2.5.1.4 Sleeve sizes shall conform to ASTM A53, Schedule 40 a. For a 2-inch Interior Diameter (ID) sleeve, insert 1 ½” ID pipe. b. For a 2 ½-inch ID sleeve, insert 2-inch ID pipe.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-143

Part 5

c. For a 3-inch ID sleeve, insert a 2 ½-inch ID pipe. 2.2.6 Corner posts, gate posts, terminal posts, and pull posts shall be minimum 2-½ inches inside diameter by 5.79 lb/ft.Line posts shall be minimum 2 inches inside diameter by 3.65 lb/ft. 2.2.7

Top rails, mid-rails, diagonal braces, and bottom rails shall be 1-¼ inches inside diameter by 2.27 lb/ft.

2.2.8 All pipe used in chain link fencing shall be stamped by the manufacturer, either with indelible ink or incused, indicating the pipe wall thickness, inside diameter, ASTM standard to which it conforms, and the manufacturer’s name. 2.2.9 Metallic Coating for Steel Framing: Type A, consisting of not less than minimum 2.0-oz./sq. ft. average zinc coating per ASTM A 123. 2.2.10

Schedule of Pipe Sizes: (See following TABLE 1) TABLE 1 ASTM A53 Threaded and Coupled Pipe Black and Galvanized ½” to 6"

Nominal Size

Wall Thickness

Inches

mm

1/2"

0.084

21.3

3/4"

1.050

26.7

1"

1.315

33.4

1 1/4"

1.660

42.2

1 1/2" 2" 2 1/2" 3" 3 1/2" 4" 6”

2.3

Outside Diameter

Inches

1.900

48.3

2.375

60.3

2.875 3.500

73.0 88.9

4.000

101.6

4.500

114.3

6.625

168.3

Weight

Inch

mm

. No

lb/ft

Kg/m

Kg/ft

0.109

2.77

40 (STD)

0.85

1.26

0.39

0.147

3.73

80 (XS)

1.09

1.62

0.49

0.113

2.87

40 (STD)

1.13

1.68

0.51

0.154

3.91

80 (XS)

1.48

2.20

0.67

0.133

3.38

40 (STD)

1.68

2.50

0.76

0.179

4.55

80 (XS)

2.18

3.24

0.99

0.140

3.56

40 (STD)

2.288

3.39

1.04

0.191

4.85

80 (XS)

3.02

4.49

1.37

0.145

3.68

40 (STD)

2.73

4.06

1.24

0.200

5.08

80 (XS)

3.66

5.45

1.66

0.154

3.91

40 (STD)

3.68

5.42

1.67

0.208

5.54

80 (XS)

5.07

7.55

2.30

0.203

5.16

40 (STD)

5.82

8.66

2.64

0.276

7.01

80 (XS)

7.73

11.50

3.51

0.216

5.49

40 (STD)

7.62

11.34

3.46 4.69

0.300

7.62

80 (XS)

10.33

15.37

0.226

5.74

40 (STD)

9.2

13.69

4.18

0.318

8.08

80 (XS)

12.63

18.80

5.73

0.237

6.02

40 (STD)

10.89

16.21

4.94

0.337

8.56

80 (XS)

15.17

22.58

6.89

0.280 0.312

7.11 7.92

40 (STD) 80 (XS)

18.97 21.04

28.23 31.31

8.60 9.54

SWING GATES: 2.3.1

General: Comply with ASTM F 900 for swing-type gates. See Table 2 for sizes.

2.3.2 Metal Pipe Tubing: Hot-dipped galvanized steel, Nominal Pips Size (NPS). Comply with ASTM A53, ASTM F 1043, and ASTM F 1083 for materials and protective coatings. 2.3.3 Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round hot-dipped galvanized tubular steel pipe with minimum inside dimension of 1-½ inches and weight (Nominal Pipe size for gate frame) @ 2.73 lb/l.f.. Provide diagonal cross-bracing, consisting of 3/8-inch diameter adjustable-length truss rods on welded gate frames, where necessary to obtain frame rigidity without sag or twist. 2.3.4

Frame Corner Construction: Welded, with 5/16-inch- diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5 feet wide or wider.

2.3.5 Gate Posts: Fabricate members from round hot-dipped galvanized steel pipe with inside dimension and weight according to Table 2 for the gate leaf widths required. 2.3.5.1

All gate posts shall be of sufficient strength so that the total deflection of the gate and the post at the end of the gate leaf shall not exceed the lesser of 2% of the gate leaf width or 4 inches.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-144

Part 5

2.3.5.2

When necessary to meet this requirement due to the total weight of the gate leaf, the next larger size posts required shall be used. Gates shall not be equipped with rollers or casters for support. TABLE 2 Swing gate member sizes Gate opening

Nominal size

lb/ft.

2 1/2"

5.79

3 1/2"

9.11

6"

18.97

Single leaf to 6 feet Double leaf to 12 feet opening Single leaf 6 to 13 feet Double leaf 12 to 26 feet opening Single leaf 13 to 18 feet Double leaf 26 to 36 feet opening

2.3.6 Hardware: See Section 08 71 02 “Door Hardware” for additional requirements. Provide heavy-duty offset hinges and center gate stops and, for each gate leaf more than 5 feet wide, keepers. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gate. 2.3.6.1

Provide means of padlocking gates in the open position where indicated that gate must be locked in open position during activity hours.

2.3.6.2

In addition to bolts, spotweld hinges and latches to posts.

2.3.6.3

All screws and bolts shall be tamper-proof.

2.3.6.4

Gates shall swing a minimum of 180 degrees.

2.3.6.5

Single latches shall be industrial gravity type gate latch with automatic stop.

2.3.6.6

Double latch shall be drop bar one-inch inside diameter by 1.68 lb/ft nominal pipe size securely bolted to gate frame and shall engage an Iron Gate stop. Drop bar shall engage 1-½” by 2.73 lb/ft. inside pipe diameter pipe sleeve set in concrete. Provide drop bar keeper on gate to secure it in lifted position.

2.3.6.7

Make provisions to receive exit device hardware where gate is part of the egress system. 2.3.6.7. Provide 16 gage galvanized steel plate for mounting of exit device on gate and exit device latch on post. Size plate to protect against unauthorized operation of the exit device from the exterior as shown.

2.3.6.8

2.4

Mount operating hardware at minimum 30 inches and maximum 44 inches above grade. Gate (in path of travel), hardware, maneuvering clearances, and operation shall comply with applicable portions of CBC accessibility requirements.

FITTINGS: 2.4.1

General: Provide fittings for a complete fence installation, including special fittings for corners. Comply with ASTM F 626.

2.4.2 Post and Line Caps: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel or hot-dip galvanized cast iron. Provide weathertight closure cap for each post. 2.4.1.1

Provide line post caps with loop to receive tension wire or top rail.

2.4.3 Rail and Brace Ends: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel or hot-dip galvanized cast iron. Provide rail ends or other means for attaching rails securely to each gate, corner, pull, and end post. 2.4.4

2.4.5

Rail Fittings: Provide the following: 2.4.4.1

Top Rail Sleeves: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel or round steel tubing. Not less than 6 inches long.

2.4.4.2

Rail Clamps: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel. Provide line and corner boulevard clamps for connecting intermediate and bottom rails in the fence line to line posts.

Tension and Brace Bands: Hot-dip galvanized pressed steel. Provide bands with projecting edges chamfered or eased.

2.4.6 Tension Bars: Hot-dip galvanized steel, length not less than 2 inches shorter than full height of chain-link fabric. Provide one bar for each gate and end post, and two for each corner and pull post, unless fabric is integrally woven into post.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-145

Part 5

2.4.7

Truss Rod Assemblies: Steel, hot-dip galvanized after threading, rod and turnbuckle or other means of adjustment.

2.4.8

Tie Wires, Clips, and Fasteners: Provide the following types according to ASTM F 626: 2.4.8.1

Standard Round Wire Ties: For attaching chain-link fabric to posts, rails, and frames, complying with the following: 2.4.8.1.1 Hot-Dip Galvanized Steel: 0.148-inch diameter (9-gauge) wire; galvanized coating thickness matching coating thickness of chain-link fence fabric.

2.4.9 Pipe Sleeves: For posts set into concrete walls, provide preset hot-dip galvanized steel pipe sleeves complying with ASTM A 53, not less than 6 inches long with inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch more than outside dimension of post, and flat steel plate forming bottom closure.

2.5

2.4.10

Post Sleeves: For existing fixed posts in need of repair/replacement, no sleeving shall be allowed.

2.4.11

Metallic Finish Coating for Pressed Steel or Cast Iron: Not less than 1.2 oz. /sq. ft. zinc.

GROUT AND ANCHORING CEMENT: 2.5.1 Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout, recommended in writing by manufacturer, for exterior applications. 2.5.2 Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, non-staining, hydraulic-controlled expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at Project site to create pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound. Provide formulation that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating and that is recommended in writing by manufacturer for exterior applications. 2.5.3 Existing anchors, which are exposed to the environment and in need of repair (as determined by District), shall be removed from the ground and replaced prior to placement of the new fence post. If anchors are not in need of repair, but are exposed to the environment, they shall be properly covered.

2.6

OTHER MATERIALS: 2.6.1

Galvanizing Repair Material: Cold-applied, zinc-rich coating conforming to ASTM A 780.

2.6.2 Provide miscellaneous hot-dip galvanized hardware as required. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required for complete and proper installation of this work, as selected by the Contractor and subject to the approval of the Sheriff, Project Manager, and Architect/Engineer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

EXAMINATION: 3.1.1 Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for other metal or concrete work, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 3.1.2

3.2

INSTALLATION, GENERAL: 3.2.1

3.3

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Install chain-link fencing to comply with ASTM F 567 and more stringent requirements indicated.

CHAIN-LINK FENCE INSTALLATION: 3.3.1 Post Excavation: Drill or hand-excavate holes for posts to diameters and spacing indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. 3.3.1.1

When solid rock is encountered near the surface, drill into the rock at least 12 inches for line posts and at least 18 inches for end, pull, corner, and gate posts. Drill holes at least 1 inch greater in diameter than the largest dimension of the placed post.

3.3.2 Post Setting: Hand-excavate holes for post foundations in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Set posts in concrete footing. Protect portion of posts aboveground from concrete splatter. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Using mechanical devices to set line posts per ASTM F 567 is not permitted. Verify that posts are set plumb, aligned, and at correct height and spacing, and hold in position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured. Keep exposed concrete moist for at least 7 calendar days after placement, or cured with an approved membrane curing material. 3.3.2.1

Dimensions and Profile: As indicated on Drawings. Install concrete footings at all fence and gate posts.

3.3.2.2

Exposed Concrete Footings: Extend concrete 2 inches above grade, smooth, and shape to shed water.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-146

Part 5

3.3.2.3

Concealed Concrete Footings: Stop footings 4 inches below grade or as indicated on Drawings to allow covering with surface material.

3.3.2.4

Posts Set into Concrete in Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to drain water away from post.

3.3.2.5

Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core drill holes not less than 5 inches deep and 3/4 inch larger than OD of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, and finished sloped to drain water away from post.

3.3.3 Terminal Posts: Locate terminal end, corner, and gate posts per ASTM F 567 and terminal pull posts at changes in horizontal or vertical alignment of 15 degrees or more. 3.3.4 Post Bracing Assemblies: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Install braces at end and gate posts and at both sides of corner and pull posts. Locate horizontal braces at mid-height of fabric on fences with top rail and at two-thirds fabric height on fences without top rail. Install so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. 3.3.5 Top Rail: Install according to ASTM F 567, maintaining plumb position and alignment of fencing. Run rail continuously through line post caps, bending to radius for curved runs and terminating into rail end attached to posts or post caps fabricated to receive rail at terminal posts. Provide expansion couplings as recommended in writing by fencing manufacturer. 3.3.6 Intermediate Rails: At tennis court fencing and where otherwise indicated, install in one piece at post-height center span, spanning between posts, using fittings, special offset fittings, and accessories. 3.3.7

Bottom Rail: Where indicated, install and secure to posts with fittings.

3.3.8 Chain-Link Fabric (at fence repairs): Apply fabric to outside of enclosing framework. Leave 2 inches between finish grade or surface and bottom selvage and 1 inch at tennis and handball courts, unless otherwise indicated. Pull fabric taut and tie to posts, rails, and tension wires. Anchor to framework so fabric remains under tension after pulling force is released. Do not allow fabric to be in contact with finish grade. 3.3.9 Tension or Stretcher Bars: Thread through fabric and secure to end, corner, pull, and gate posts with tension bands spaced not more than 15 inches o.c. 3.3.10 Tie Wires: Use wire of proper length to firmly secure fabric to line posts and rails. Attach wire at one end to chain-link fabric, wrap wire around post a minimum of 180 degrees, and attach other end to chain-link fabric per ASTM F 626. Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to individuals and clothing. 3.3.10.1 Maximum Spacing: Tie fabric to line posts at 12 inches o.c. and to braces at 24 inches o.c. 3.3.11 3.4

Fasteners: Install nuts for tension bands and carriage bolts on the side of the fence opposite the fabric side.

GATE INSTALLATION: 3.4.1 Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage. Adjust hardware for smooth operation without binding, and lubricate where necessary.

3.5

3.6

TOLERANCES: 3.5.1

Maximum Offset From True Position: 1 inch.

3.5.2

Maximum Variation From Plumb: ¼ inch. Vertical post tolerance of ¼ inch shall be after the fabric has been stretched.

ADJUSTING 3.6.1 Gates: Adjust gates to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding. 3.6.2

3.7

Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

GALVANIZING REPAIR 3.7.1 Clean and repair galvanized surfaces damaged by welding or abrasion, cut ends of fabric, and other cut sections with specified galvanizing repair material applied in conformance with manufacturer’s printed instructions.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-147

Part 5

3.8

DEMONSTRATION 3.8.1 Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain chain-link gates and hardware.

END OF SECTION 32 31 13

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-148

Part 5

SECTION 33 40 00 - SITE DRAINAGE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS AND DESCRIPTION OF WORK: The work includes furnishing and installing underground site drainage and sewer manhole adjustments as shown and/or specified, including the construction of cleanouts, catch basins, inlets, manholes, piping, retaining wall perforated foundation drains, as indicated and/or specified and/or connection of the roof drain lines furnished under the Plumbing section to catch basins and drain lines as shown. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if repeated herein.

1.2

GOVERNING DOCUMENTS: 1.2.1

Local Municipality/County Regional Standard Drawings, latest edition.

1.2.2

Standard Drawings and Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, latest edition.

1.2.3 Occupational Safety and Health Regulations for Construction and the Safety Orders of the State Industrial and Accidental Commission of California. 1.3

REFERENCES: The latest editions of the specifications and standard referenced herein, published by the following organizations, apply to the work only to the extent specified by the reference: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) American Society for Testing Materials (ATM)

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

MATERIALS: 2.1.1 Pre-cast Concrete Units: Catch basins and inlets shall conform to ASTM C 913 and manhole sections shall conform to ASTM C478 except that Portland cement shall be Type II, low alkali. 2.1.2 Castings: Manufacture castings true to pattern free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots, shrinkage distortion or other defects. Castings shall be of grey iron, ductile iron or steel as indicated or as required to withstand loadings. 2.1.1.1

Grey iron castings shall conform to ASTM A48, Class 35.

2.1.2.2

Ductile iron castings shall conform to ASTM A530, Grade 60-40-18.

2.1.2.3

Steel castings shall conform to ASTM A27 for mild to medium strength castings and ASTM A148 for high strength castings.

2.1.3 Fabricated steel gratings and frames shall be fabricated from steel conforming to ASTM A36 or ASTM A576, Grades 1021, 1022, 1026, 1029 or 1030. Welding shall conform to AWS D1.1. Burrs, rough and sharp edges and other flaws shall be removed. Warped pieces shall be straightened after all fabrication. 2.1.4

Painting: Castings and steel fabrications shall be given hot dipped zinc coating conforming to ASTM A123.

2.1.5 Concrete Appurtenances: Concrete for catch basins and manholes shall be 3250 psi at 28 days and conform to Section 03 30 00. Reinforcing steel is specified in Section 03 20 00. 2.1.6

Subsurface Drain Pipe: Pipe shall be one of the following subject to the limitations specified: 2.1.6.1

Perforated polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe conforming to ASTM D3033, SDR 35 minimum schedule 40, for maximum fill height of 35 feet.

2.1.7 Filter Fabric: Fabric shall be one of the following non-woven polyester fabrics or equal approved in accordance with Section 01 25 00. Cellanese Fibers: "Mirafi 140S" 2.1.8

Filter Material: Gravel or crushed stone 3/4" maximum and shall be free draining.

2.1.9

Storm drain lines 12" in diameter and smaller shall be one of the following unless otherwise indicated: 2.1.9.1

PVC plastic pipe conforming to ASTM D 3033 or D 3034, SDR 35 with elastomeric gaskets conforming to ASTM 477.

2.1.10 Storm Drain Lines 18" in Diameter and Larger: Pre-cast reinforced concrete pipe (R.C.P.) having a minimum D-Load rating of 1350-D.

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-149

Part 5

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

TRENCHING: 3.1.1

Trenching is specified in Section 31 23 00.

3.1.2 Trench bottom shall be accurately graded to provide uniform bearing and support to pipe and a uniform slope of not less than 1 percent unless otherwise shown. Excavate for pipe hubs. Unsuitable soils or rock shall be removed to a depth deemed necessary. 3.2

CONNECTIONS TO APPURTENANCES: Where pipe connects into catch basin inlet or manhole walls, sleeves may be installed in the forms; after the forms are removed, the pipe shall be dry packed in place.

3.3

INSTALLATION OF SUBSURFACE DRAINS: 3.3.1 Bedding: Line the trench with filter fabric with joints in fabric lapped not less than 4 inches. Cover the bottom of the trench, full width, with 4 inches of filter material. 3.3.2 Pipe Laying: Lay pipe with perforations at the bottom and with sections joined with couplings that will hold pipe firmly in place without the use of sealing compounds or gaskets. Cutting and matching of asbestos pipe shall be done in accordance with CAL/OSHA and local Air Pollution Control regulations. 3.3.3 Backfilling: Place filter material over the pipe to the height indicated and wrap filter fabric over the top of the material. Backfill and compact remainder of the trench in accordance with Section 31 23 00. 3.3.4 Drains for retaining walls shall be connected to site system unless otherwise approved.

3.4

INSTALLATION OF STORM DRAINS: 3.4.1

Bedding: Bedding for storm drain pipe is specified in Section 31 23 00.

3.4.2 Pipe Laying: Keep trenches dry and free of rocks, clods and other unsuitable material during laying and bedding operations. Open ends of pipe shall be closed temporarily at the end of each days work using blocks or bulkheads. 3.4.2.1

Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe: Install pipe in accordance with manufacturer's directions using elastomeric joints.

3.4.2.2

Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Install pipe in accordance with manufacturer’s directions using mortar filled ball joints.

3.4.3 Backfilling: Do not backfill until elevations and dimensions of pipe are recorded on the Record Drawings as specified in Section 01 77 00. Backfilling and compaction are specified in Section 31 23 00. 3.4.4

Drains for retaining walls shall be connected to site system unless otherwise approved.

END OF SECTION 33 40 00

SHERIFF’S DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

5-150

Part 5

PART VIII

PROJECT PLANS

SHERIFF DEFENSIVE TACTICS BUILDING

8-1

Part 8

EXISTING BUILDING TO REMAIN

San Diego, California

Sheet Index ARCHITECTURAL

CIVIL EXISTING PARKING

ELECTRICAL EXISTING BUILDING TO REMAIN

Project Team EXISTING PARKING

OWNER

COUNTY OF SAN DIEGO

SAN DIEGO COUNTY SHERIFFS DEPT.

TENANT

San Diego County Sheriffs Department

ARCHITECT

domusstudio architecture, LLP

CIVIL ENGINEER

Snipes-Dye Associates

MECHANICAL ENGINEER

Engineered Systems

ELECTRICAL ENGINEER

Kruse & Associates

EXISTING PARKING

Fire PROPOSED BUILDING

3

Demolition Plan

1

Site Plan Site Plan Keyed Notes

GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER CTE, Inc.

Project Data PROJECT NAME: PROJECT DESCRIPTION: PROJECT ADDRESS: ASSESSOR'S PARCEL #: LEGAL DESCRIPTION:

Scope of Work

BUILDING AREA:

DI NG

OCCUPANCY:

Title Sheet and Site Plan

LIM

IT O

FG

RA

OCCUPANT LOAD:

CONSTRUCTION TYPE: APPLICABLE CODES:

Site Plan Notes

Vicinity Map

PROPOSED DEFENSIVE TACTICS TRAINING ROOM F.F. 82.00'

440 ALTA ROAD SAN DIEGO, CA 92154

Symbols

Project:

c COPYRIGHT August 08, 2013 at 12:18PM

90% Submittal

2

Enlarged Site Plan

U.S.A. MEXICO

0838 Aug. 8, 2013

T 0.1

San Diego, CA

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

EXISTING BUILDING TO REMAIN

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

Proprietary design: These drawings and design are protected by common law copyright. All patentable material contained herein and originating with Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP shall be the property of Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP

General Notes

c COPYRIGHT August 08, 2013 at 12:23PM

A

8

9 Occupant load / Exit plan signs

Site Accessibility Sign

2

5

3

6

7 Building Entrance Accessibility Sign

4 Typical Wall Section Floor Plan

Floor Plan Keyed Notes Floor Plan Notes

Truncated Domes

Floor Plans, Elevations, and Sections

Proprietary design: These drawings and design are protected by common law copyright. All patentable material contained herein and originating with Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP shall be the property of Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP

1 Elevation Elevation and Section Keyed Notes

UTILITY ROOM

ELEC. ROOM

Section General Accessibility Notes

5 1/2"

DEFENSE TRAINING ROOM

11"

Typical Curb Ramp

Project:

90% Submittal Aug. 8, 2013

0838

SYMBOLS

A 1.0

San Diego, CA

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

Elevation

c COPYRIGHT August 07, 2013 at 7:20AM

TITLE SHEET AND NOTES

Proprietary design: These drawings and design are protected by common law copyright. All patentable material contained herein and originating with Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP shall be the property of Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP

San Diego, California

Project:

Date August 8, 2013

0838

90% Submittal

C 1.0

San Diego, CA

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

c COPYRIGHT August 07, 2013 at 7:20AM

DETAILS

Proprietary design: These drawings and design are protected by common law copyright. All patentable material contained herein and originating with Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP shall be the property of Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP

San Diego, California

Project:

Date August 8, 2013

0838

90% Submittal

C 2.0

San Diego, CA

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

c COPYRIGHT August 07, 2013 at 7:20AM

DEMOLITION PLAN

Proprietary design: These drawings and design are protected by common law copyright. All patentable material contained herein and originating with Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP shall be the property of Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP

San Diego, California

Project:

Date August 8, 2013

0838

90% Submittal

C 3.0

San Diego, CA

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

GRADING PLAN

SD

c COPYRIGHT August 07, 2013 at 7:20AM

Proprietary design: These drawings and design are protected by common law copyright. All patentable material contained herein and originating with Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP shall be the property of Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP

San Diego, California

Project:

Date

SD

August 8, 2013

0838

90% Submittal

C 4.0

San Diego, CA

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

EROSION CONTROL PLAN

SD

c COPYRIGHT August 07, 2013 at 7:20AM

Proprietary design: These drawings and design are protected by common law copyright. All patentable material contained herein and originating with Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP shall be the property of Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP

San Diego, California

Project:

Date

SD

August 8, 2013

0838

90% Submittal

C 5.0

San Diego, CA

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

J

JUNCTION BOX

J

WALL MOUNTED JUNCTION BOX.

LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL, SEE CONTROL DETAIL AND SCHEDULES FOR MORE INFORMATION. PUSH BUTTON LOW VOLTAGE OVERRIDE CONTROL SWITCH

DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MTD 18" AFF TO CENTER COVERPLATE COLOR: WHITE DEVICE TYPE DEVICE COLOR STANDARD WHITE IG ISOLATED GROUND ORANGE D DEDICATED 20A RATED GRAY UPS 15A OR 20A UPS GRAY EM EMERGENCY RED

ZONE CONTROLLED (UPPER CASE LETTER DENOTES ZONE CONTROLLED) S Aa SWITCH LEG CONTROLLED (LOWER CASE LETTER DENOTES SWITCH LEG CONTROLLED)

GFI DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MTD 18" AFF TO CENTER COVERPLATE COLOR: WHITE

SWITCH, SINGLE POLE 20A, MTD. 48" AFF TO TOP. DESIGNATION TO CONTROL LIGHTING IN CIRCUIT LEGS. DEVICE: WHITE COVERPLATE: WHITE 2- DOUBLE POLE K - KEYED SWITCH 3- THREE WAY T - MANUAL MOTOR STARTER WITH THERMAL OVERLOADS 4- FOUR WAY D - LOAD RATED DIMMER PL - PILOT LIGHT PB - PUSHBUTTON

SaSb

DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MTD 18" AFF TO CENTER, SCHEDULE AS NOTED ABOVE. SPLIT WIRED 15A 1/2 HOT, 1/2 SWITCHED OUTLET COLOR: WHITE

M

WALL MOUNTED MOTION CONTROLLED LIGHTING SWITCH WITH INTEGRAL BI-LEVEL SWITCHING. DEVICE - WHITE MTD. 48" AFF TO TOP.

M

CEILING MOUNTED ULTRASONIC MOTION SENSOR. DEVICE: WHITE

FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE.

M

WALL MOUNTED DUAL-TECHNOLOGY MOTION SENSOR. DEVICE: WHITE

FLOOR BOX WITH DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AND SINGLE GANG TEL/DATA RECEPTACLE.

1-100-A

FIXTURE CALLOUT: TYPE (SEE LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE) WATTAGE QUANTITY

R

RELAY

TC

TIME CLOCK

P

PHOTOCELL

EPO

FLOOR BOX WITH DUPLEX RECEPTACLE AND SINGLE GANG TEL/DATA RECEPTACLE. SPECIALTY FLOOR BOX PER PLANS MULTIPLE GANG BOX, SEE SPECS.

J

EMERGENCY POWER OFF PUSHBUTTON, MOUNTED AT +48" UON.

P

PEDESTAL MOUNTED DOUBLE DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MANUF: HUBBELL SA6688 W/STAINLESS STEEL COVERPLATES

P

PEDESTAL MOUNTED DUPLEX RECEPTACLE MANUF: HUBBELL#SA6686 W/STAINLESS STEEL COVERPLATES

WP

ROOF MOUNTED WEATHERPROOF GFI WORK OUTLET. PROVIDE CAST BOX W/STAINLESS STEEL WP COVER. EXTERNALLY OPERATED FUSED DISCONNECT SWITCH. PROVDE PER NEMA RATING REQUIRED.

TEL/DATA SYMBOLS

S

DATA OUTLET BOX WITH 1/2"C WITH PULLSTRING TO TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. +18" A.F.F. TO CENTER. COORDINATE DEVICE AND WIRE WITH OWNER

FVNR MAGNETIC STARTER WITH OVERLOAD PER HORSEPOWER REQUIREMENTS, CPT, H.O.A. WITH PILOT LIGHTS, PROVIDE WITH (1) EACH N.O. AND N.C. AUX CONTACTS.

TELEPHONE OUTLET BOX WITH 1/2"C WITH PULLSTRING TO TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. +18" A.F.F. TO CENTER. COORDINATE DEVICE AND WIRE WITH OWNER

MOTOR PROVIDED BY OTHERS.

IC

FLUSH MOUNTED PANELBOARD

TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOX 3/4"C WITH PULLSTRING TO TELEPHONE BACKBOARD. +18" A.F.F. TO CENTER. COORDINATE DEVICE AND WIRE WITH OWNER

SURFACE MOUNTED PANELBOARD

TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLET FLUSH FLOOR MOUNTED ON FIRE RATED POKE-THRU.

FLUSH MOUNTED LIGHTING DIMMING PANEL, U.O.N.

SURFACE MOUNTED LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL, U.O.N.

FIRE RATED DOULBLE DUPLEX POKE THROUGH, SEE DETAILS FOR MORE INFORMATION.

SPEAKER BACK BOX LOCATION INTERCOM J-BOX LOCATION

DH

COMBINATION FVNR MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTER AND DISCONNECT RATING AND POLES AS INDICATED. PROVIDE WITH OVERLOAD PER HORSEPOWER REQUIREMENTS, CPT, H.O.A. WITH PILOT LIGHTS, PROVIDE WITH (1) EACH N.O. AND N.C. AUX CONTACTS.

J

ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDER

CLOCK HANGER OUTLET ONLY, MOUNTED AT +__" U.O.N.

INTERCOM LOCATION TV

CR DS

CARD READER

FIRE RATED SYSTEMS FURNITURE FEED POKE THROUGH, SEE DETAILS FOR MORE INFORMATION.

TELEVISION SYSTEM OUTLET WITH JACK, WALL MOUNTED AT +12" U.O.N. MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLY, LENGTH AS INDICATED ON PLANS.

ELECTRIC DOOR STRIKE

FLEXIBLE CONDUIT

3/4" FIRE RATED PLYWOOD BACKBOARD WITH #6AWG GROUND TO BUILDING SYSTEM GROUND.

WIRING OR CONDUIT CONCEALED IN WALL OR CEILING

CABLE TRAY PER PLANS. COORDINATE ROUTING WITH OTHER DISIPLINES.

WIRING OR CONDUIT EXPOSED WIRING OR CONDUIT CONCEALED UNDERGROUND OR IN FLOOR

GENERAL NOTES

RACEWAY OR WIREWAY ASSEMBLY DOWN RACEWAY OR WIREWAY ASSEMBLY UP

1.

2.

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM SHALL BE EQUIPPED WITH AUTOMATIC TIMING DEVICE AND CONTROL SHUT-OFF BETWEEN 11PM & 6AM UNLESS USING LPS LAMP TYPE LUMINAIRES LIGHTING LUMINAIRES WITH LUMENS 4050 AND ABOVE ARE LIMITED TO LPS AND HPS AND EQUIPPED WITH CUT-OFF OPTICS AND LESS THAN 2.5% UP-LIGHT

HOMERUN TO PANEL, CIRCUITS AS INDICATED. UNDERGROUND HOMERUN TO PANEL, CIRCUITS AS INDICATED. CONCEALED EMT CONDUIT WITH THHN WIRE 2#12 AWG 3/4" C. MINIMUM CONCEALED EMT CONDUIT WITH THHN WIRE 3#12 AWG 3/4" MINIMUM. CHEVRONS INDICATE #10 CONDUCTORS FUSED SWITCH, SEE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR MORE INFORMATION. CIRCUIT BREAKER, SEE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR MORE INFORMATION.

c COPYRIGHT August 08, 2013 at 11:14AM Plot by Kruse. File Location: C:\Users\Kruse\Desktop\Drawings\Tatical Training\TacticalTrainingCntr - E0.1 Symbols List Fixt Schedule.dwg

TRANSFORMER, SEE SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR MORE INFORMATION.

CURRENT TRANSFORMER

AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH

GROUNDING ELECTRODE

LIGHT FIXTURE SCHEDULE

ABBREVIATIONS FIXTURE

A AC AIC AFF AFG AF AL ARCH AS AT ATS AUX AWG BKBD C CATV CCTV CB CLF C.O. CONTR CU CT CW D DC DF DIA DISC DIST DWGS EA EB EC EG EF ELECT ELEV EMT EXIST FA FC FIXT FLUOR FT. GC GD GEN GFI GFR GRD H HID HP HPS HR HT HZ IG IMC INCAND J-BOX KVA KW KWH LF LTG LV MANUF MAX MC MCC MECH MIN MH MLO MTG MV N NEC NIC NL NTS OC OFCI OFOI P PB PC PCTC PH PIV PL PVC PWR PP QR QTY RECEPT REF RGS SD SPEC SQ FT SW SWBD TEMP TV TEL, TELE TC TRANSF TYP UGPS UL UNO UPS V VA WH WP XFMR

AMPERES ALTERNATING CURRENT AMPERES INTERRUPTING CAPACITY ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR ABOVE FINISHED GRADE AMP FRAME/AMP FUSE ALUMINUM ARCHITECT OR ARCHITECTURAL AMP SWITCH AMP TRIP AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH AUXILIARY AMERICAN WIRE GAUGE BACKBOARD CONDUIT WITH WIRE CABLE TELEVISION CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION CIRCUIT BREAKER CURRENT LIMITING FUSE CONDUIT ONLY WITH NYLON PULL CORD CONTRACTOR COPPER CURRENT TRANSFORMER COLD WATER DEDICATED OUTLET DIRECT CURRENT DRINKING FOUNTAIN DIAMETER DISCONNECT DISTRIBUTION DRAWINGS EACH 90-MINUTE BATTERY CONNECTED TO UNIT ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR EMERGENCY GENERATOR CONNECTION EXHAUST FAN ELECTRICAL ELEVATION/ELEVATOR ELECTRO-METALLIC TUBING EXISTING FIRE ALARM FOOT CANDLE FIXTURE FLUORESCENT FEET OR FOOT GENERAL CONTRACTOR GARBAGE DISPOSAL GENERATOR GROUND FAULT INTERRUPTER GROUND FAULT RELAY GROUND HORIZONTAL HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HORSEPOWER HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM HOUR HEIGHT HERTZ ISOLATED GROUND BUS OR WIRE INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT INCANDESCENT JUNCTION BOX KILO-VOLTAMPERE KILO-WATT KILOWATT-HOUR LINEAL FEET LIGHTING LOW VOLTAGE MANUFACTURER MAXIMUM MECHANICAL CONTRACTOR MOTOR CONTROL CENTER MECHANICAL MINIMUM METAL HALIDE MAIN LUGS ONLY MOUNTING MERCURY VAPOR NEUTRAL NATIONAL ELECTRIC CODE NOT IN CONTRACT NIGHT LIGHT NOT TO SCALE ON CENTER OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED OWNER FURNISHED OWNER INSTALLED PEDESTAL MOUNT PULL BOX PHOTOCELL CONTROL PHOTOCELL/TIMECLOCK CONTROL PHASE POST INDICATING VALVE PILOT LIGHT POLYVINYL CHLORIDE POWER POWER POLE FIXTURE WITH QUARTZ RESTRIKE QUANTITY RECEPTACLE REFRIGERATOR RIGID GALVANIZED STEEL SMOKE DETECTOR SPECIFICATION SQUARE FEET OR SQUARE FOOT SWITCH SWITCHBOARD TEMPERATURE OR TEMPORARY TELEVISION TELEPHONE TIME CLOCK TRANSFORMER TYPICAL UNDERGROUND PULL SECTION UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY VOLTS VOLT-AMPERE WATER HEATER WEATHER PROOF TRANSFORMER

MANUFACTURER TYPE

CATALOG NUMBER

WATTS VOLTS

MTG

LAMP TYPE

INDUCTION FLUOR. MATCH EXISTING

5

SYMBOL

A

MATCH EXISTING

FIELD VERIFY

465

480

P

B

POWERLUX

PWC-S-55-120-BZ

85

277

WS

1-55W INDUCTION FLUORESCENT

6

C

COLUMBIA

LHC-164-432AFA-A12-M4R-EP277-LHHB

114

277

CS

4-32W T8/35K FLUORESCENT

8

D

COLUMBIA

SAME AS "C" WITH BATTERY PACK "EL141"

114

277

CS

4-32W T8/35K FLUORESCENT

8

3

E

DUAL LITE

SESGBNE

5

277

U

FURNISHED WITH FIXTURE

1

6

F

POWERLUX MATCH EXISTING

FIELD VERIFY

40

277

WS

INDUCTION FLUORESCENT

MOUNTING TYPES: WS-WALL SURFACE, WR-WALL RECESSED, CS-CEILING SURFACE, CR-CEILING RECESSED, CH-CHAIN, PN-PENDANT, U-UNIVERSAL, G-GROUND, P-POLE, UC-UNDER CABINET, T-TRACK, CB-CABLE, TR-TRELLIS, C-COVE

NOTES: 1

EXIT SIGN PROVIDED WITH EMERGENCY BATTERY PACK.

2

BATTERIES FOR USE IN EMERGENCY FIXTURES TO BE BODINE OR EQUAL

3

BODINE BATTERIES USED IN FLUORESCENT FIXTURES TO BE CAPABLE OF PROVIDING A MINIMUM OF 1100 LUMENS & MUST BE WIRED FOR 2-LAMP PARALLEL OPERATION.

4

ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO PROVIDE PHOTOMETRIC STUDY FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING. MINIMUM ONE FOOT CADLE IS TO BE PROVIDED. BATTERIES ARE TO BE ADDED AS REQUIRED

5

PROVIDE ATTACHMENT ARM TO MATCH EXISTING SITE FIXTURE.

6

STANDARD FINISH SELECTED BY OWNER.

7

PROVIDE BRACING IN WALL TO MOUNT EXTERIOR FIXTURE.

8

PROVIDE BRACING IN CEILING TO MOUNT FIXTURES.

GENERAL NOTES PLANS ARE FOR BIDDING PURPOSES. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR IS TO REVIEW SCOPE AND EXISTING CONDITION AND COMPLETE PLANS AS REQUIRED FOR SUBMISSION TO BUILDING DEPARTMENT FOR PERMIT AND CONSTRUCTION

Project:

0838

Date

June 20, 2013

90% Submittal

Aug. 08, 2013

E 0.1

San Diego, CA

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

POWER SYMBOLS

Symbols List & Fixture Schedule

Proprietary design: These drawings and design are protected by common law copyright. All patentable material contained herein and originating with Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP shall be the property of Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP

LIGHTING/SWITCHING SYMBOLS

-340

---

3876

1000 --

1000

--

--

--

----

-5120

--

---

---

--

---

8423 --

--

---

--

1000 5120

---

1000

---

--

-5002

--

8523 --

3935

5342 --

= ROUTE THRU LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL "LCP".

7811

= AFTER INSTALLING NEW PANEL, RECONNECT EXISTING CIRCUITS.

(E) MAIN SWITCHBOARD "MSB"

800A. BUS BRACED FOR 65000 AIC MIN. 3228

1260 3228

360 3228

EXISTING 200AS 3P 200AF JJS-R

540

3228

EXIST 800A 3P 65K AIC

1400 707

-707

--

707

3

NEW 200AS 3P 200AF JJS-R

-707

---

EXISTING

--

--

---

EXISTING --

--

--

--

EXISTING

---

EXIST --

--

EXISTING 2" C. PROVIDE 4#3/0 THHN, CU. 1#4 GND.

---

1 EXIST PANEL "4A"

---

5000 AIC LET-THRU

2

--

--

NEW PANEL "2R4"

--

--

---

---

7163

(E) S.D.G.& E. TRANSFORMER

4642

3935

9823

100/3 2"C, 4#1 THHN, CU 1#8 GND

--

2660

360

5002

540 4475

19300

53.6

9823

81.9

04/08/09

100A3P

45 KVA XFMR NEW PANEL "P"

NEW PANEL "L"

150A3P

70A3P 2"C, 4#1/0 THHN, CU 1#6 GND 1-1/4" C., 3#4 THHN, CU 1#8 GND 3003 9280

1860 9280

7285

1556

POWER SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM

1160 7285

1128 7285

2909

--

NO SCALE

-2909

c COPYRIGHT August 08, 2013 at 11:14AM Plot by Kruse. File Location: C:\Users\Kruse\Desktop\Drawings\Tatical Training\TacticalTrainingCntr - E0.2 Panel Schedule & SLD.dwg

Panel Schedule & Single Line Diagram

9280

1/2"C, 1#6 CU GND

-2909

2909

--

LOAD SUMMARY "MSB"

2325 2909

2325 2909

--

2325

1

REMOVE EXISTING 100 AMP PANEL AND PROVIDE NEW AS INDICATED. ALL REMOVED PARTS TO BE GIVEN TO THE OWNER.

2325 --

---

--

---

--

---

--

---

--

---

--

(E) PANEL "4A" (WITH NEW PARKING LOT LIGHTING LOAD)

85,156 VA

2

REMOVE EXISTING #6 WIRE FEEDING PANEL "2R4" AND PROVIDE NEW AS INDICATED.

(E) PANEL "4B"

46,807 VA

3

DISCONNECT EXISTING 50A,3P CIRCUIT BREAKER FEEDING PANEL "2R4" AND LABEL AS "SPARE". PROVIDE NEW CIRCUIT BREAKER AS INDICATED.

(E) 150 KVA TRANSFORMER

98,000 VA

NEW PANEL "2R4"

35,916 VA

(E) PANEL "LP1"

4,890 VA

(E) PANEL "2S"

8,016 VA

(E) PANEL "LPZ"

9,780 VA

(E) PANEL "2D"

8,016 VA

(E) PANEL "LP3"

9,780 VA

(E) PANEL "2F"

8,016 VA

(E) PANEL "LP4"

11,410 VA

(E) PANEL "2C"

8,016 VA

TOTAL LOAD

333,803 VA = 402 A

Project:

0838

Date

June 20, 2013

90% Submittal

Aug. 08, 2013

E 0.2

San Diego, CA

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

Proprietary design: These drawings and design are protected by common law copyright. All patentable material contained herein and originating with Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP shall be the property of Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP

100

1

PROVIDE NEW LIGHT FIXTURE ON EXISTING POLE.

2

EXISTING TELEPHONE/COMM VAULT WITH (1) EXISTING 4"CONDUIT AND (1) EXISTING EMPTY 3" CONDUIT TO MAIN TELEPHONE ROOM.

3

NEW 4" C.O. UNDERGROUND FOR TELE/COMM. COORDINATE CONNECTION INTO EXISTING VAULT. COORDINATE TELE/DATA WIRE WITH OWNER.

4

CUT AND PATCH EXISTING SURFACES. PROVIDE NEW SURFACE TO MATCH EXISTING.

5

EXISTING PANEL "2R4" TO BE REMOVED AND REPLACED. REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM.

6

SURFACE MOUNT CONDUIT ON WALL FOR ROUTING TO NEW PANEL "L". CORE AND SEAL ALL PENETRATIONS THROUGH CONCRETE WALLS OF EXISTING SHEDS.

7

DROP CONDUIT INTO GROUND AND CONTINUE ROUTE UNDERGROUND.

8

REFER TO ENLARGEMENT FOR CONTINUATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT.

9

PROVIDE NEW 2"C.O. UNDERGROUND STUBBED INTO EXISTING MAN ELECTRIC ROOM. FIELD VERIFY AND COORDINATE ROUTING OF CONDUIT WITH EXISTING CONDITIONS.

X X

10

1" C.O. TO PANEL "P" FOR FUTURE GATE

EXISTING MAIN ELECT ROOM X

X

X

4A-24,26 9

2 1 3

5 EXISTING CONCRETE SHEDS

8

6 7 TYP.

Site Plan - Electrical

c COPYRIGHT August 08, 2013 at 11:14AM Plot by Kruse. File Location: C:\Users\Kruse\Desktop\Drawings\Tatical Training\TacticalTrainingCntr - E1.1 Site Plan Elec.dwg

4

10 4A-24,26 SEE

1 E2.1

1

Project:

0838

Date

June 20, 2013

90% Submittal

Aug. 08, 2013

SITE PLAN - ELECTRICAL

E 1.1

San Diego, CA

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

Proprietary design: These drawings and design are protected by common law copyright. All patentable material contained herein and originating with Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP shall be the property of Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP

NOTES

1 PER MANUFACTURER.

9

2

PANEL "L".

3

REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM.

4

PANEL "P".

5

3/4" C, 3#8, 1#10 GND, THWN, CU.

6

TELEPHONE TERMINAL BACKBOARD "TTB". PROVIDE 4' X 8' X 3/4" PLYWOOD COATED WITH FIRE RESISTANT PAINT. PROVIDE 1/2" C., 1#6, AWG COPPER WIRE GROUND FROM AN APPROVED GROUND TO BACKBOARD.

7

PROVIDE CONSTANT "HOT" CHARGE CIRCUIT TO BATTERY PACK.

8

LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL "LCP".

9

REFER TO SITE PLAN FOR CONTINUATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT.

10

REFER TO SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.

11

WALL MOUNTED 2HR TURN DIAL TIMER FOR EXHAUST FAN CONTROL.

12

COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION WITH ARCHITECT.

13

STUB, CAP AND MARK CONDUIT LOCATION.

14

PROVIDE 1" C.O. UNDERGROUND TO PANEL "P" FOR FUTURE ENTRY GATE AND CONTAINER LIGHTS.

15

PROVIDE 1" C.O. UNDERGROUND WITH (2) PULL LINES STUBBED ONTO "TTB" BACKBOARD FOR FUTURE TELE/DATA.

16

PROVIDE W.P. J-BOX AND 3/4" C.O. STUBBED INTO ELECT ROOM FOR FUTURE CARD READER. CONDUIT ROUTED IN WALL AND UNDERGROUND TO ELECTRIC ROOM. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF EACH END WITH OWNER.

17

PROVIDE 3/4" C.O. WITH PULL LINE MOUNTED AT 24" A.F.F.. ROUTE UNDERGROUND AND STUB INTO ELECTRIC ROOM. COORDINATE EXACT LOCATION OF EACH END WITH OWNER.

18

COORDINATE POWER FOR CARD READERS WITH DOOR HARDWARE COMPANY

19

4" PVC. C., 12 PAIR FIBER OPTIC CABLES. VERIFY SPEC AND TERMINATION REQUIREMENT WITH COUNTY

10 19

3

1

3 L-3

2 T

L-1

1a

1e,f

1e,f

P-4 P-6

Sa

8

L-5

4

1e,f

1e,f

P-2

SeSf

IMPORTANT GENERAL NOTES:

6 L-3

18

P-2

1.

TTB 1" C.O. 2-85-B

1c,d

1c,d 11

12 L-3

1c,d P-8

1c,d

18

3. ALL EXPOSED CONDUITS TO BE GROUPED AND ROUTED NEAT AND ORDERLY, COORDINATE MOUNTING WITH ARCHITECT AND STRUCTURAL ENGINEER. PROVIDE AN EXPOSED CONDUIT ROUTING PLAN TO THE ARCHITECT FOR APPROVAL PRIOR TO ANY WORK BEING PERFORMED. PAINT ALL EXPOSED CONDUIT AND ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS, COLORS TO BE SELECTED BY ARCHITECT.

1c,d

25-114-C 9-114-D 7

1c,d

4. ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY ALL EXISTING CIRCUITS. MAINTAIN POWER AND LIGHTING TO ALL AREAS OUTSIDE SCOPE OF PROJECT.

P-1,3,5

EF 1

1a,b 16

2. REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL REFLECTED CEILING PLAN FOR LOCATION OF INTERIOR FIXTURES.

1c,d

P-9,11

S

TIMER

1c,d

FC 1

WP

T

S

1a,b

REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL ELEVATIONS FOR MOUNTING HEIGHT AND LOCATION OF ALL EXTERIOR FIXTURES.

WP 5

7

3-5-D

1c,d

1c,d

1c,d

60 3

1c,d

HP 1

TTB HP 2

WP

1" C.O. 1c,d

1c,d

1c,d

1c,d

60 3

P-17, 19,21 5 SKYLIGHT TYPICAL (REFER TO ARCH)

TTB 1c,d

1c,d

P-13,15

1c,d

1c,d

1c,d

1c,d

1" C.O. 6-40-F 12

1c,d

1c,d EF 1

FC 2

17 T

S

L-3 1c,d

1c,d

1c,d

1c,d

14 12" 15

12"

TYP OF 2

Floor Plan - Electrical

c COPYRIGHT August 08, 2013 at 11:14AM Plot by Kruse. File Location: C:\Users\Kruse\Desktop\Drawings\Tatical Training\TacticalTrainingCntr - E2.1 Floor Plan Elect.dwg

13

Project:

0838

Date

June 20, 2013

90% Submittal

Aug. 08, 2013

FLOOR PLAN - ELECTRICAL

E 2.1

San Diego, CA

Defensive Tactics Training Room at the San Diego Regional Firearms Training Center

Proprietary design: These drawings and design are protected by common law copyright. All patentable material contained herein and originating with Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP shall be the property of Dominy + Associates Architects @ domusstudio LLP

NOTES